JP7740112B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold lotteries to determine whether a player wins or not when certain start conditions are met, and when a player wins, certain gaming media is paid out to the player in accordance with the fulfillment of certain winning conditions.

This gaming machine is configured to be able to generate at least a predetermined first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and some are configured to be able to win a winning game in the second gaming state and then continuously generate the second gaming state again (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295672

For gaming machines such as those listed above, there is a need to increase attention to the game in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 is a gaming machine comprising: launching means capable of launching gaming balls; a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down; judgment means for making a predetermined judgment based on the gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area; display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area; variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the gaming ball to enter the area and a first state in which the gaming ball can enter from the second state when a specific judgment result is made by the judgment means; and update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, and in this gaming machine, in a specific gaming state in which the specific information can be updated by the update means, the specific information is displayed. and a notification control means for executing a predetermined notification mode display in a first notification mode display or a second notification mode display different from the first notification mode display as a notification mode display, and the gaming machine is configured to generate a specific benefit when a gaming ball launched by the launching means enters the variable ball entry means in the first state and a predetermined gaming condition is established, and is configured such that when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means in a predetermined gaming state before the occurrence of the predetermined benefit state, it may be more disadvantageous to the player to subsequently execute a first predetermined gaming operation than to execute a second predetermined gaming operation, and the notification control means The means is configured to be able to execute notification switching to switch the notification mode display so that, when the specific determination result is reached by the determination means, the first notification mode display is executed at a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and the second notification mode display is executed at a specific timing after the predetermined timing and before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and the notification switching is configured to be executable when the gaming state reaches the predetermined gaming state, and this gaming machine is configured to be able to execute the predetermined notification mode display with the second notification mode display for the specific determination result when the specific determination result is reached in the predetermined gaming state, and to prompt the player to execute the second predetermined gaming operation, and this gaming machine is configured to When executing notification switching, the device is configured to be able to execute a predetermined game operation notification display, which is different from the first notification mode display and the second notification mode display, between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, and which notifies the player that a predetermined game operation can be executed based on the player's judgment rather than a game operation instruction display from the gaming machine to the player; it is configured to be able to set predetermined numerical information in a predetermined memory area based on at least a game ball entering the starting ball entry area; it is configured so that the period from the initial state until the specific information reaches the specific timing can change based on the predetermined numerical information; and it is configured so that the period from the initial state until the specific information reaches the specific timing is longer than the period from the specific timing until the specific information reaches the predetermined update state.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the gaming machine is provided with: launching means capable of launching gaming balls; a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming balls can flow down; judgment means for making a predetermined judgment based on the gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area; display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area; variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area, which, when a specific judgment result is made by the judgment means, can switch between a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the gaming ball to enter the area and a first state in which the gaming ball can enter from the second state; and update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display; and a notification control means for executing a predetermined notification mode display in a first notification mode display or a second notification mode display different from the first notification mode display as a notification mode display, and the gaming machine is configured to generate a specific benefit when a gaming ball launched by the launching means enters the variable ball entry means in the first state and a predetermined gaming condition is established, and is configured such that when the specific judgment result is obtained by the judgment means in a predetermined gaming state before the occurrence of the predetermined benefit state, it is more disadvantageous to the player to subsequently execute a first predetermined gaming operation than to execute a second predetermined gaming operation, and the notification control means When the specific determination result is reached by the determination means, a notification switch can be executed to switch the notification mode display so that the first notification mode display is executed at a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and the second notification mode display is executed at a specific timing after the predetermined timing and before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and the notification switch is executable when the gaming state reaches the predetermined gaming state, and this gaming machine is configured to, when the specific determination result is reached in the predetermined gaming state, execute the predetermined notification mode display with the second notification mode display for the specific determination result, and prompt the player to execute the second predetermined gaming operation, and this gaming machine is configured to at least The gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a predetermined game operation notification display, which is different from the first notification mode display and the second notification mode display and which notifies the player that a predetermined game operation may be executed based on the player's judgment rather than a game operation instruction display from the gaming machine to the player, between the predetermined timing and the specific timing when a change is to be made, and to set predetermined numerical information in a predetermined memory area based on at least a game ball entering the start ball entry area, and to change the period from the initial state until the specific information reaches the specific timing based on the predetermined numerical information, and to configure the period from the initial state until the specific information reaches the specific timing to be longer than the period from the specific timing until the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state. This has the effect of suitably increasing attention to the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings on a display screen, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. 1 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine, and is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the main control device. This is a diagram showing the configuration of various counters, each reserved ball storage area, and reserved ball execution area. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic example of a special chart 1 jackpot random number table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a schematic example of a special chart 2 jackpot random number table. This is a diagram showing a schematic example of a special chart 2 jackpot type table. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic example of a special chart 1 small prize type table, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic example of a special chart 2 small prize type table. This is a list that explains the trigger for transitioning to each game state, the probability of winning a jackpot with a special symbol, the probability of winning with a normal symbol, the recommended ball launch mode, the main winning destinations, the time it takes for the first special symbol to change, the time it takes for the second special symbol to change, and whether or not it is possible to hit to the right. This is a diagram showing the firing pattern in each game state and the transition destination of the game state based on the type of jackpot won, etc. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic example of a reservation number table for special drawing 1, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a schematic example of a reservation number table for special drawing 2. 1A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of table A of the stop pattern table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of table B of the stop pattern table. 1A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a C table of the stop pattern table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a D table of the stop pattern table. 1A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an E table of the stop pattern table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an F table of the stop pattern table. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of an example of a fluctuation pattern table for a special chart 1 miss, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of an example of a fluctuation pattern table for a special chart 1 small win. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of an example of a special chart 2 miss fluctuation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of an example of a special chart 2 big win/small win fluctuation pattern table. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a jackpot opening table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a small prize opening table. This shows the drive pattern of the large prize opening solenoid and the specific area solenoid when the small prize type "Time Reduction B (Small Prize A)" or "Time Reduction C (Small Prize A)" is won in the dynamic display of the first special pattern, the detection mode of the large prize opening switch and the specific area switch, and the setting mode of the large prize flag, and is a timing chart when a ball passes through the specific area. This shows the drive patterns of the large prize opening solenoid and the specific area solenoid when the small prize type "Time Reduction B (Small Prize A)" or "Time Reduction C (Small Prize A)" is won in the dynamic display of the first special pattern, the detection modes of the large prize opening switch and the specific area switch, and the setting mode of the large prize flag, and is a timing chart when the ball does not pass through the specific area. This shows the drive pattern of the large prize opening solenoid and the specific area solenoid when the small prize type ``Time Reduction D (Small Prize B)'' is won in the dynamic display of the second special pattern, the detection mode of the large prize opening switch and the specific area switch, and the setting mode of the large prize flag, and is a timing chart when a ball passes through the specific area. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic example of a normal winning random number table, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic example of a normal winning time table, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic example of a normal electric role opening table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a time-saving termination condition table. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device. FIG. A diagram showing the configuration of a first pending information storage area, a second pending information storage area, and an execution information storage area. This table summarizes the difference in the average number of balls acquired between the two game states when a small jackpot type "Time-saving B (small jackpot A)" or "Time-saving C (small jackpot A)" is won in "normal game state A," and when a right-hand play is performed when the small jackpot is won to generate a jackpot, and when a right-hand play is not performed when the small jackpot is won, and the player returns to "normal game state A" to execute the dynamic display of the special symbol again, and when the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached and the player transitions to "normal symbol low probability time-saving state." FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a break-even number table. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the display control device. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image displayed when the power is turned on. 1A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a variable display data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an additional data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list. 10 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. This is a flowchart showing the start-up winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a gate passage process executed by an MPU in the main control device. This is a flowchart showing the special chart change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a time-saving counting process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a relief arrival counting process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. This is a flowchart showing the small win opening/closing control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a specific area device open/close control process executed by an MPU in the main control device. This is a flowchart showing the processing performed by the MPU in the main control unit when the large prize opening is open during a small win. This is a flowchart showing the small win end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening/closing control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. This is a flowchart showing the processing performed by the MPU in the main control unit during opening of the large prize opening. This is a flowchart showing the jackpot termination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a general change process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal electric utility control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a base value process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice and lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. This is a flowchart showing the special diagram 1 command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. This is a flowchart showing the special diagram 2 command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a rescue-related command receiving process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the variable performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. This is a flowchart showing the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. This is a flowchart showing the display special diagram 1 stop type command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. This is a flowchart showing the right-hit notification display processing when a small win is won, which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the pending ball number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the demo command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing variable performance command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the confirmation command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a hit-related command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a character-based command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10A is a flowchart showing the rear image command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the pending image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10A is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing detailed image transfer processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 1 shows the progression of the presentation on the third symbol display device when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal game state A", (a) is a diagram showing the state in which a small win on special symbol 1 is won when the rescue counter in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period), the variable presentation has ended and the third symbol has stopped, (b) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a), (c) is a diagram showing the state in which a small win on special symbol 1 is won when the rescue counter in "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., the big win priority notification period), the variable presentation has ended and the third symbol has stopped, and (d) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (c). A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a break-even number table according to the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the display special diagram 1 stop type command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the right-hit notification display process when a small win is won, which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a hit-related command process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the second embodiment. 10 shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when a small win on special chart 1 is won in the "normal game state A" of the second embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the state in which the special chart 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r is "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period) in the "normal game state A", the variable presentation has ended and the third pattern has stopped, (b) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a), (c) is a diagram showing the state in which the small win on special chart 1 is won when the rescue counter 203r is "637" (i.e., the big win priority notification period) in the "normal game state A", the variable presentation has ended and the third pattern has stopped, and (d) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (c). The diagram shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when a small win on special chart 1 is won in the "normal game state A" of the second embodiment, where (a) is a diagram showing the state in which a small win on special chart 1 is won when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is "551" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period), the variable presentation ends, and the third pattern stops, and (b) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a). It shows the transition of the presentation on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A" of the third embodiment, (a) is a figure showing the state in which the value of the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is the period of "524 to 563 spins" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period) when a special symbol 1 small win is won and the opening of the small win game is being executed, (b) is a figure showing the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed continuously from the state of (a), and in the state of (a) (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is still being executed from the state of (b), and the content of the right-hit notification effect has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state of (b); (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is still being executed from the state of (c), and the content of the right-hit notification effect has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state of (c). A flowchart showing the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 10 shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when a small win on special pattern 1 is won in the "normal game state A" of the fourth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the state in which a small win on special pattern 1 is won when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), the variable presentation ends and the third pattern stops, (b) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a), and (c) is a diagram showing the state in which the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d from the state of (b), the small win state ends without transitioning to the jackpot state, returning to the "normal game state A", and the variable display of the first special pattern is being executed. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device according to a fifth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth embodiment. 10 shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when a small win on special chart 1 is won in the "normal game state A" of the fifth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the state in which the variable display of the first special pattern is being executed when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is "551" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period), (b) is a diagram showing the state from the state of (a) in which the variable display of the special pattern that was being executed has won a small win on special chart 1, the variable presentation has ended and the third pattern has stopped, and (c) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (b). 10 shows the transition of the presentation on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A" of the sixth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing a state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period), the variable presentation ends and the third symbol stops, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a), (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d from the state of (b), the small win state ends without transitioning to the big win state, and the state returns to the "normal game state A", and the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is "550" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), the special symbol 1 small win is won, the variable presentation ends and the third symbol stops, and (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (c). 106(d) shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when a special chart 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A" of the sixth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the state in which, from the state of FIG. 106(d), the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win state ends without transitioning to a big win state, and the state returns to "normal game state A", and when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), the special chart 1 small win is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third pattern stops, and (b) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a). FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a main control device in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table of the number of times a relief condition is satisfied in the seventh embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. This is a table summarizing the difference in the average number of balls acquired for two different game states when a small jackpot on special symbol 1 is won in the "normal game state A" of the seventh embodiment, and the average number of balls acquired when a right-hand play is performed when the small jackpot is won to generate a jackpot, and when a right-hand play is not performed when the small jackpot is won, and the game returns to "normal game state A" to execute the dynamic display of the special symbol again, and the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached, causing a transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state." This is a table summarizing the difference in the average number of balls acquired for two different game states when a small jackpot on special symbol 1 is won in the "normal game state A" of the seventh embodiment, and the average number of balls acquired when a right-hand play is performed when the small jackpot is won to generate a jackpot, and when a right-hand play is not performed when the small jackpot is won, and the game returns to "normal game state A" to execute the dynamic display of the special symbol again, and the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached, causing a transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state." FIG. 23 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a break-even number table in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery process for determining the number of times a rescue condition is met, which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a base value process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a rescue-related command receiving process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the display special diagram 1 stop type command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the right-hit notification display processing when a small win is won, which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when a small win on special pattern 1 is won in the "normal game state A" of the eighth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the state in which a small win on special pattern 1 is won when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is at "550" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period), the variable presentation ends, and the third pattern stops, (b) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state in (a), (c) is a diagram showing the state in which the ball has passed through a specific area 65d due to the player's right-hand play from the state in (b), and (d) is a diagram showing the transition to a big win state from the state in (c). 13 shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when a small win on special chart 1 is won in the "normal game state A" of the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the state in which the special chart 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period), the variable presentation has ended and the third pattern has stopped, (b) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a), (c) is a diagram showing the state in which the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), the special chart 1 small win is won, the variable presentation has ended and the third pattern has stopped, and (d) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (c). This is a flowchart showing the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a sub-relief counter display process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. 10 shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when the variable display of a special pattern is executed in the "normal gaming state A" of the tenth embodiment, where (a) is a diagram showing the state in which the variable display of the first special pattern has ended and the third pattern has stopped when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal gaming state A" is at "541" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), (b) is a diagram showing the state in which the variable display of the next first special pattern has started from the state in (a), (c) is a diagram showing the state in which the variable display of the first special pattern has ended and the third pattern has stopped from the state in (b), and (d) is a diagram showing the state in which the variable display of the next first special pattern has started from the state in (c). This shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when the variable display of the special pattern is executed in the "normal game state A" of the 10th embodiment, where (a) is a diagram showing the state from the state of Figure 128 (d) where the variable display of the first special pattern has ended and the third pattern has stopped, and (b) is a diagram showing the state where the variable display of the first special pattern has started to be executed when the rescue counter 203r is "791" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period). FIG. 23 is a front view of the game board in the eleventh embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 89. Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Figure 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 3 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that transition to a predetermined game state advantageous to the player after a predetermined period of time has passed, thereby awarding the player a profit. In this advantageous game state, if a predetermined condition is met through the player's play, the player can obtain prize balls.

In such gaming machines, the suggestions given to players regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period are not sufficiently satisfactory, and further improvements in the content of the suggestions are required.

Specifically, for example, if the hints regarding the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state remain uniform over a given period of time, it will be difficult or impossible for the player to understand the magnitude of the profit that the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming state occurs. Furthermore, it will be difficult or impossible for the player to obtain the interest that arises from changing the hints depending on the magnitude of the profit.

The present invention was invented in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide optimal suggestions regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit they will obtain if an advantageous gaming condition occurs, and increase their interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win that can result in a big win (i.e., a small win that can pass through the specific area 65d) is won in "normal gaming state A," the player is given the option of whether or not to allow the small win to result in a big win. This aims to provide a gaming machine that enriches the variety of games and can notify the player of how to play in a way that will increase the expected value of the balls that can be won.

To achieve this objective, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for variably displaying a predetermined symbol when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations, and also includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, and a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode. The system comprises a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode, a judgment means for making a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area, and a benefit generating means for generating a specific benefit when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means and a predetermined gaming condition is met based on a predetermined gaming operation by the player. When a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, the notification control means issues a notification of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, switches the notification mode to the second notification mode.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine comprises an "ejection device" as "launching means," a "start detection area" as "starting ball entry area," a "result notification device" as "display means," a "movable device" as "variable ball entry means," "game conditions" as "update conditions," "game information" as "specific information," an "update process" as "update means," an "update state" as "specific game state," an "update end state" as "predetermined update state," an "awarded benefit" as "predetermined benefit state," a "notification mode" as "alert mode," a "display control" as "alert control means," a "discrimination control" as "determination means," a "control judgment result" as "specific judgment result," an "benefit awarding condition" as "predetermined game condition," an "award value" as "specific benefit," a "benefit awarding control" as "benefit generating means," a "predetermined time" as "predetermined timing," and a "specific time" as "specific timing."

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that it can land in the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

Furthermore, the specified benefit state may be anything that can confer some kind of benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state", the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, the light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update status of the specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable entry device (large entry port), small entry port, regular electric entry port, non-electric entry port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specified gaming condition, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state" as a specific gaming state, the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, the light emission control of a specific emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the specific information is information that is updated to new content when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and is capable of identifying a predetermined period based on the update status, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be the value of a counter stored in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern began, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern stopped, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, etc. These include the remaining number of times the display will be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening, the time after which the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening stops, the number of wins when one of the openings such as the big prize opening opens, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern on the display means, the time from the start of the startup process of the gaming machine, the setting values of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall staff that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the updating means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or may be a hardware circuit update.

The determination means may be any means that performs a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area, such as starting winning processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state that indicates that the result of updating specific information by the update means has resulted in a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time period passing, a specified period passing, the use of all of a predetermined series of data, the detection of a ball entering a specified area, or the detection of a frame button input by the player.

The starting ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to change and be displayed when a gaming ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 starting area, a special ball 2 starting area, or a regular ball starting area.

Furthermore, the display means may be any device capable of announcing the lottery results for a specified symbol, such as a third symbol display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying information on each display device.

Furthermore, a specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means and becomes a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, or game states in which the update means does not operate. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated through so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state," a "time-shortened state," the state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined jackpot occurs, the state from when the power is turned on until the predetermined jackpot ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, the state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that results in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, the state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of a special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry slot which will start the jackpot game, a state where the dynamic display of a special symbol is not being executed and the ball is waiting to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to press a frame button while the dynamic display of a special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a losing prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, a dynamic display of a special pattern corresponding to a drop lottery, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern is executed reaches a specific number of times, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a prize, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a losing prize, a transition to a specific game state, etc.

Furthermore, the predetermined game conditions may be conditions that are met when a player performs a predetermined game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a predetermined area, a predetermined number of fired game balls entering a predetermined area, a fired game ball not entering a predetermined area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a predetermined area and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, a player operating an effect button, a lottery being held when a player operates an effect button and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being less than a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the dynamic display of the next special pattern can be started to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes passing, an instruction to execute various processes being issued, and a command to execute various processes being issued.

Furthermore, the "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update status of specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value exceeds a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events; for example, by varying the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their color, their display area, their display density, their display time, and the number of times they are displayed, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the firing mode, indications of whether firing is possible, indications of whether play is possible, indications of the timing of operation execution on the operating means, indications of the game status, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, distinctions between probability variable and normal patterns, distinctions between time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and distinctions between probability variable and time-saving patterns.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed with roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be able to open and close relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be able to open and close towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided acting as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see Figure 3), which has numerous nails and winning slots (ball entry slots) 63, 64, 71, etc., is removably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. Attached to the inner frame 12 are a ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 5), which launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown), which guides balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to Figure 3.

The front side of the inner frame 12 is provided with a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. To support the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1). The front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are installed serving as the opening and closing axis. The inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed as a roughly oval opening in its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls that juts out forward and is roughly box-shaped with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are dispensed into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is sloped downward to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 5). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see Figure 3), which will be described later. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button that allows the player to select the effect content in the preview display that is executed in the variable display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the third symbol will be referred to as the "variable effect").

Furthermore, the variable effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see Figure 3) described below, and as described below, is executed when a ball fired into the front area of the gaming board 13 enters a specific winning hole (for example, the first starting hole 64 or the second starting hole 71 (see Figure 3) described below). After the symbol (the third symbol described below) fluctuates for a predetermined period of time, the result of the lottery held for that winning hole (whether it is a jackpot or not) is presented to the player based on the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, a stage refers to a presentation mode that provides consistency to the various presentations displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see Figure 3), which will be described later, and this pachinko machine 10 has three stages: "Town Stage," "Sky Stage," and "Island Stage." The various presentations, such as the above-mentioned variable presentations and the "reach display" that is executed during the variable presentations, are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme assigned to each stage.

The "reach display" refers to the display just before the "jackpot display" indicating that a jackpot will occur in the variable presentation executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see Figure 3), which will be described later. Specifically, this refers to a state in which the third symbols in the left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 (see Figure 4), which will be described later, stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see Figure 4) has not yet stopped and is continuing to vary.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the "reach displays" are broadly divided into a single element that constitutes the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, a single element that constitutes the effect is referred to as a "variable element"), a "super reach" variable element that is developed from the "normal reach" variable element and has a higher chance of winning a jackpot than the "normal reach" variable element, and a "special reach" variable element that is developed from the "normal reach" variable element and has a higher chance of winning a jackpot than the "super reach" variable element.

The stage changes when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period when no change effect is being performed (i.e., during a demo display) or during a "high-speed change" change element in which the third symbol changes so quickly that it is invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the stage changes repeatedly in the following order: "City Stage" → "Empty Stage" → "Island Stage" → "City Stage" → ... Also, immediately after powering on, the "City Stage" is set as the initial stage.

In addition, when a "normal reach" variable element is initiated in the variable presentation performed by the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 3) described below, if the "normal reach" variable element develops into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element, a selection screen for the "super reach" variable element or the "special reach" variable element may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the "normal reach" variable element.

Specifically, the selection screen displays multiple candidates that can be selected as the variable elements of "Super Reach" or "Special Reach", and if the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the selected candidate is changed. The variable elements of "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" are then determined based on the performance candidate selected when the variable elements of "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" develop, and the variable elements of "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" are executed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with that determination.

In the first embodiment, the frame buttons 22 are configured as buttons to be pressed, but instead of the frame buttons 22, they may be configured as an operating lever that can be tilted by the player in a predetermined direction relative to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward, backward, right, or left relative to the pachinko machine 10). Then, based on the direction in which the operating lever is tilted, the performance stage may be selected or changed, or the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach" may be determined.

Furthermore, although the frame button 22 is configured to be positioned on the front side of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the side, the frame button 22 may be positioned in any position as long as it is a position where the player can press it. For example, it may be positioned on the top side of the upper tray 17, or it may be positioned near (on the top or side of) the lower tray 50 described below.

The front frame 14 is provided with various lamps and other light-emitting devices around its periphery (e.g., corners). These light-emitting devices change their light emission mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified "reach" display is activated, enhancing the dramatic effects during play. The periphery of the window 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating light-emitting devices such as light-emitting diodes (light-emitting diodes, hereafter abbreviated as "LEDs").

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot or "reach display" occurs, the built-in LEDs of each illumination unit 29-33 light up or flash, indicating that a jackpot has been reached or that the "reach display" is in effect, meaning that a jackpot is just around the corner. In addition, an indicator lamp 34, which incorporates a light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred, is located in the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

A small window 35 is formed on the underside of the right-side illumination unit 32 by attaching transparent resin to the backside so that the backside of the front frame 14 can be seen, and certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 3) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. To create a more dazzling effect, the pachinko machine 10 also has a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") resin attached to the area around the illumination units 29-33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is located below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is equipped with a power display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are loaned out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the power display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information on the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance numerically as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated to request the return of a card, etc. inserted into the card unit.

In pachinko machines where balls are dispensed directly from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary. In such cases, a decorative sticker or the like can be added to the installation area of the ball dispensing operation unit 40, making the components common. This allows for commonality between pachinko machines that use card units and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in its center, which is roughly box-shaped and open at the top, for storing balls that do not fit in the upper tray 17. On the right side of the lower tray 50 is an operating handle 51 that is operated by the player to shoot balls into the front of the game board 13. Inside this operating handle 51 are a touch sensor 51a that allows the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 5) to be activated, a push-button-type shooting stop switch 51b that stops the launch of balls while it is pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation. The ball is then launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. This causes the ball to be shot into the front of the game board 13 at a distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the shot stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front portion of the lower tray 50, which is operated to eject balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are ejected. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly referred to as a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is located on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

Next, as shown in Figure 2, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is a unit equipped with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is a unit equipped with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. Each control board is also equipped with a micro-processing unit (MPU) as a single-chip microcomputer that controls each function, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, and a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, as needed.

The main control device 110, audio and lamp control device 113, display control device 114, payout control device 111, launch control device 112, power supply device 115, and card unit connection board 116 are each housed in board boxes 100-104. Board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to house the various control devices and boards.

In addition, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if an attempt is made to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100, 102 or to forcibly open the substrate box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

A base display device 401 is disposed on the main board that constitutes the main control device 110, and is assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen when looking at the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. Under normal circumstances, the base display device 401 displays the base value (the number (proportion) of balls paid out (winning balls) per 100 balls fired in normal play), while in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, it displays the probability setting value. The base display device 401 is also configured to be able to display error history.

In addition, the main board that makes up the main control device 110 is provided with a setting key 501 that is used to change or check the set probability setting value, and an error display button 502 that is used to display the error history on the base display device 401. The setting key 501 and error display button 502 protrude from the main board through holes provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by hall personnel, etc. without opening the board box 100.

The payout unit 93 comprises a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward; a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping downstream; a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131; and a payout device 133 located at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls using the specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 5). The tank 130 is continuously replenished with balls supplied from the arcade's island facilities, and the payout device 133 appropriately dispenses the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to apply vibrations to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 503. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as when balls get stuck in the payout motor 216 (see Figure 5). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 503 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the specific configuration of the game board 13 will be explained with reference to Figure 3. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a wooden base plate 60 machined into a generally square shape when viewed from the front, a number of ball guide nails, windmills, and rails 61, 62, a general prize opening 63 through which a predetermined number of prize balls can be awarded as a bonus when a ball enters the opening, a variable prize opening 65 that opens when a jackpot with the third symbol occurs, a first start opening 64 as a start detection area that triggers the drawing of a first special symbol, which is one of the third symbols (so-called special symbols), a second start opening 71 that triggers the drawing of a second special symbol, which is one of the third symbols (so-called special symbols), a through gate 67 that triggers the drawing of a second symbol (so-called normal symbol), a normal electric device 72 that opens to allow a ball to enter the second start opening 71, and a variable display unit 80 that includes a third symbol display device 81 and a second symbol display device 83, and the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 80 is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12.

The general winning slot 63, first start slot 64, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, second start slot 71, normal electric slot 72, and variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed to the front side of the gaming board 13 with wood screws or the like. Furthermore, the central front portion of the gaming board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see Figure 1). The configuration of the gaming board 13 will be explained below, mainly with reference to Figure 3.

An outer rail 62, formed by bending a strip of metal plate into a roughly arcuate shape, is installed on the front of the gaming board 13, and an inner rail 61, also made of a strip of metal plate like the outer rail 62, is installed inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the front periphery of the gaming board 13, and the gaming board 13 and glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a gaming area on the front of the gaming board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The gaming area is a roughly circular area on the front of the gaming board 13, partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the arc member 70 (an area where prize slots and the like are located and where shot balls flow down).

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 5) to the top of the game board 13. A ball return prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 3), preventing a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight point of the ball. A ball launched with more than a predetermined force hits the return rubber 69, reducing its momentum and bouncing back toward the center (hereinafter, the act of launching a ball with such force that it hits the return rubber 69 and passes the right side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front is referred to as a "right-hand hit," while the act of launching a ball that passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front is referred to as a "left-hand hit"). In the first embodiment, in left-handed play, the system is configured so that a ball can or will easily enter the first starting hole 64, while it is difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the second starting hole 71, the variable winning device 65, and the through gate 67. Also, in right-handed play, the system is configured so that a ball can or will easily enter the second starting hole 71, the variable winning device 65, and the through gate 67, while it is difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the first starting hole 64.

In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 is formed on the inner surface to connect the rails and is hammered into the base plate 60 and fixed thereto.

At the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of Figure 3), a special symbol display device 37 is located, which is equipped with a status LED group 37a, a special LED group 37b, and a right-hit notification lamp 37c, each composed of multiple LEDs that serve as light-emitting means. The special symbol display device 37 displays the fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in response to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Figure 5), which will be described later (hereinafter, the fluctuations of both special symbols will be referred to as "dynamic display"), and also displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10.

The status LED group 37a indicates, by its lighting state, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not yet been displayed as a variable display, among the balls that have entered (entered) the first starting slot 64 or the second starting slot 71 (described below). The number of jackpot rounds (hereinafter, rounds may be simply referred to as "R") and error displays are also indicated by the lighting state of the status LED group 37a corresponding to the relevant state. The status LED group 37a is configured so that each LED has a different light color (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 using a small number of LEDs.

Note that a "round" in the case of a jackpot refers to the period from when the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a, which opens and closes the variable winning device 65 (a movable device described below) to separate the number of winning balls in a jackpot, is opened until it is closed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, one "round" is executed when "30 seconds" have passed since the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a began to open, or when 10 balls win while the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a is open.

The special LED group 37b is made up of a total of 12 LEDs: an upper LED group 37b1 made up of six LEDs, and a lower LED group 37b2 also made up of six LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 dynamically displays a first special symbol that indicates the result of the first lottery game that is executed based on the ball entering the first start hole 64, which serves as the start detection area. The lower LED group 37b2 dynamically displays a second special symbol that indicates the result of the second lottery game that is executed based on the ball entering the second start hole 71.

Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 displays a dynamic display (in the first embodiment, the LEDs in the upper LED group 37b1 light up one by one in sequence, starting with the topmost LED and continuing down, and this lighting pattern is displayed repeatedly) until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on a win at the first starting hole 64 located in the center of the gaming board 13 has elapsed, and then a static display of a symbol indicating the result of the determination (in the first embodiment, one of a total of 64 different stop symbols, depending on the combination of the lighting patterns of the six LEDs) is displayed.

In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 displays a dynamic display (in the first embodiment, the LEDs in the lower LED group 37b2 light up one by one in sequence, starting from the top LED and continuing down, and this lighting pattern is displayed repeatedly) until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on a win at the second starting hole 71 located on the right side of the gaming board 13 has elapsed, and then displays a stopped symbol indicating the result of the determination (in the first embodiment, one of a total of 64 different stop symbols, depending on the combination of the lighting patterns of the six LEDs).

For either LED group 37b1 or 37b2, if the result is a miss, only the leftmost LED will be lit; if the result is a big win, each LED group will be lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (category) of the big win; and if the result is a small win, each LED group will be lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (category) of the small win. Details of the stop patterns for each LED group will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, a ball entering the second starting slot 71 is judged to be a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if the judgment results in a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined based on the winning slot 71 that entered, and the variable winning device 65, which serves as a movable device, is opened or closed depending on the type of jackpot. Furthermore, if the judgment results in a small jackpot based on the dynamic display of the first or second special symbol, the variable winning device 65 and the specific area solenoid 65f (see Figure 5), described below, are opened or closed, respectively. When the specific area solenoid 65f provided within the variable winning device 65 is opened and a ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g (see Figure 5), described below, the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed to trigger a jackpot game based on the type of small jackpot in the dynamic display of the first or second special symbol.

In the first embodiment, the type of jackpot determined is a "10-round time-saving jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "time-saving A")," in which the variable winning device 65 opens 10 times based on winning at the second starting port 71 (see Figure 8).

Furthermore, the types of small prizes determined in the first embodiment include a "1-round, no time-saving small prize (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "small prize A")" in which the variable prize-winning device 65 opens once based on a win in the first start port 64 serving as the start detection area, a "5-round, time-saving big prize (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "time-saving B")" in which the variable prize-winning device 65 opens five times as a movable device, and a "7-round, time-saving big prize (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "time-saving C")" in which the variable prize-winning device 65 opens seven times (see FIG. 9(a)). Furthermore, based on a win in the second start port 71, there are also available a "1-round, no time-saving small prize (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "small prize B")" in which the variable prize-winning device 65 opens once, and a "10-round, time-saving big prize (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "time-saving D")" in which the variable prize-winning device 65 opens ten times (see FIG. 9(b)).

Here, "normal gaming state" refers to a gaming state that is not in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" (hereinafter, the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" and the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" may be collectively referred to as the "time shortened state"), in which the probability of a jackpot and a small win for each special symbol are fixed, the probability of a win for a normal symbol is lower than in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" (equivalent to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state"), and the opening time of the normal electric symbol 72 is short. In other words, the "normal gaming state" is a state in which the probability of a jackpot and a small win are the same as in the "time shortened state," but the probability of a win for a normal symbol is lower than in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," and the opening time of the normal electric symbol 72 is also short.

As will be explained in more detail below, in the "normal gaming state," if a player performs a so-called right-hand play, the game state will be the most unfavorable state for the player, rather than a gaming state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second starting hole 71 (hereinafter, the state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second starting hole 71 will be referred to as the "winning support state"). Furthermore, if a ball fired using a right-hand play is detected in the "normal gaming state" (for example, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is detected), a predetermined alarm (for example, an audio output of "Please return to left-hand play" or a display of "Please return to left-hand play" on the third symbol display device 81) is output to notify the player and hall staff that a non-recommended game is being played. This configuration prevents the continued execution of non-recommended right-hand play in the "normal gaming state," making it possible to achieve gameplay consistent with the game specifications.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to generate two "normal gaming states": "normal gaming state A," in which right-hand play is prohibited and left-hand play is encouraged, and in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is primarily executed; and "normal gaming state B," in which right-hand play is not prohibited and there are still balls reserved for the dynamic display of the second special symbol after the "normal symbol high probability time shortening state" and "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" have ended (see Figure 10).

"Normal gaming state A" is the gaming state entered after initialization by clearing the RAM, when there are no reserved balls of the second special pattern remaining at the end of the "time-shortened state," or after the end of "normal gaming state B" (i.e., after all remaining reserved balls of the dynamic display of the second special pattern have been executed). As mentioned above, right-hand play is prohibited, and left-hand play is permitted to allow the ball to enter the first starting hole 64 (see Figure 10).

"Normal gaming state B" (hereinafter, "normal gaming state A" and "normal gaming state B" may be collectively referred to as the "normal gaming state") is a gaming state in which the jackpot probability for special symbols and the winning probability for normal symbols are the same as in "normal gaming state A," but after the termination conditions for the "time-reduced state" are met, reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol remain. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol (so-called special symbol 2 priority variation), so in "normal gaming state B," "normal gaming state B" continues until the lottery results for the dynamic display of the second special symbol stored in the "time-reduced state" are displayed for all reserved balls. Furthermore, as described above, in this "normal gaming state B," the probability of a normal symbol winning is low, and the opening time (projection time, drive time) of the normal electric role 72 is short, so that a ball cannot enter the second start gate 71. However, right-hand play is not prohibited, and even if a ball is detected by the through gate 67, which serves as the start detection area, during right-hand play, the above-mentioned alarm sound and alarm display are not executed. Furthermore, in this "normal gaming state B," if none of the reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol win a big or small prize, the game is configured to transition to "normal gaming state A."

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability of winning a special symbol is in a low probability state and a jackpot state (including a jackpot based on a small jackpot win) does not occur in the dynamic display a predetermined number of times in a row (800 times in the first embodiment), as a rescue measure for the player, a function (so-called ceiling function) is installed that generates a "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are in a low probability state, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time (projection time, drive time) of the normal electric role 72 is lengthened. (Hereinafter, when the probability of winning a special symbol is in a low probability state, entering a "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" without a jackpot state occurring in the dynamic display a predetermined number of times in a row will be referred to as "rescue condition fulfillment," and the number of times the dynamic display of a special symbol is executed that results in the "rescue condition fulfillment" when the probability of winning a special symbol is in a low probability state will sometimes be referred to as the "number of rescue condition fulfillment times.")

Next, the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability for each special symbol is low, similar to the "normal game state" and the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" described below, but the hit probability for the normal symbol increases, the variable display time of the normal symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the normal symbol is referred to as "variable display") is shortened, and the open time of the normal electric symbol 72 is lengthened (hereinafter, the increase in the hit probability for the normal symbol, the shortened variable display time of the normal symbol, and the lengthening of the open time of the normal electric symbol 72 may be referred to as the "high probability time shortened function"). In this "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," the normal electric symbol 72 located on the right side of the second starting hole 71 when viewed from the front is more likely to be open, making it easier for a ball fired with a right-hand hit to enter the second starting hole 71.

In other words, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," the probability of winning a jackpot with a special symbol is the same as in the "normal game state," but a win with a normal symbol is more likely to occur in a shorter time than in the "normal game state," and the normal electric role 72 is kept open for a longer period of time. Therefore, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," it is easier for a ball fired by right-hand play to enter the second starting hole 71, so it is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, 1 ball per entry) based on the ball entering the second starting hole 71, and play while minimizing the reduction in the number of balls in your possession.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal high probability time shortened state" is configured to be able to enter multiple states (in the first embodiment, "normal high probability time shortened state A" and "normal high probability time shortened state B") with different termination conditions for the "normal high probability time shortened state" (described below in the time shortened termination condition table 202m in Figure 24). Until one of the time shortened termination conditions is met, the probability of winning with a normal symbol remains high. Furthermore, if the time shortened termination condition is met, the reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol remain, and the machine is configured to transition from the "normal high probability time shortened state" to the above-mentioned "normal game state B."

"Normal High Probability Time Reduction State A" is a game state that occurs after a jackpot ends when a jackpot type or small jackpot type that is granted the "High Probability Time Reduction Function" is won, and the "High Probability Time Reduction Function" is granted primarily until the second special symbol is dynamically displayed once. It then transitions to "Normal Game State B" primarily on the condition that the second special symbol is dynamically displayed once. Additionally, "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State A" is deemed to have met its termination condition when the first special symbol is dynamically displayed seven times, or when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are dynamically displayed a total of eight times, and it transitions to "Normal Game State B."

Therefore, when the game transitions to "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A," the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed "once" during "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A," and in "Normal Game State B," which is entered after the end of "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A," the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed "four times" of the remaining reserved number, so in total, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed "five times."

Here, as will be explained in more detail later, the probability of a big win for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 0.02/100 to 0.04/100, and the probability of a small win is 15.5/100 (see Figure 7(b)). On average, a big win (a big win based on a small win) can occur approximately once every six spins.

Therefore, when a transition occurs to "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A," the probability of winning a jackpot in "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A" or "Normal Game State B" (i.e., the probability of winning consecutive jackpots) is configured to be approximately 57%.

"Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B" (hereinafter, "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A" and "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B" may be collectively referred to as the "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State") is a game state that occurs after a jackpot or small jackpot that grants the "High Probability Time-Shortened Function." The "High Probability Time-Shortened Function" is granted primarily until the second special symbol is dynamically displayed five times. The game then transitions to "Normal Game State B" primarily on the condition that the second special symbol is dynamically displayed five times. Additionally, "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B" is deemed to have met its termination conditions when the first special symbol is dynamically displayed seven times, or when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are dynamically displayed a total of 12 times, and the game transitions to "Normal Game State B."

As a result, when the game transitions to "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B," the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed "five times" during the "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B," and in the "Normal Game State B" that is transitioned to after the "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B" ends, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed "four times" of the remaining reserved number, so in total, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed "nine times."

As mentioned above, the probability of a big win for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 0.02/100 to 0.04/100, and the probability of a small win is 15.5/100 (see Figure 7(b)). On average, a big win (a big win based on a small win) can occur approximately once every six spins.

Therefore, when a transition occurs to "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B," the probability of winning a jackpot in "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B" or "Normal Game State B" (i.e., the so-called "consecutive win" probability) is configured to be approximately 78%.

In other words, when comparing "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A" and "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B," transitioning to "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B" makes it easier to win a jackpot (a jackpot based on a small jackpot), allows for "consecutive wins," and allows for more balls to be won.

Furthermore, if a ball is detected to have been fired by a left-handed play in the "normal high-probability time-shortened state" or "normal low-probability time-shortened state" (for example, detecting that the ball has entered the first starting hole 64), a predetermined alarm (for example, an audio output of "Please hit to the right" or a display of "Please hit to the right") is output to inform the player and hall staff that a non-recommended play is being played. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the continued execution of non-recommended left-handed play in the "normal high-probability time-shortened state" or "normal low-probability time-shortened state", and to achieve playability in accordance with the game specifications.

Next, the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot for each special symbol is as low as in the "normal game state" and the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," and the probability of winning a normal symbol is as low as in the "normal game state." However, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the normal electric symbol 72 is long, as in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state." (Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning a normal symbol is low, while the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the normal electric symbol 72 is long may be referred to as the "low probability time shortened function." Furthermore, the "high probability time shortened function" and the "low probability time shortened function" may be collectively referred to as the "time shortened function.") This makes it easier for a ball fired during right-hand play to enter the second starting hole 71.

In other words, in the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," the jackpot probability for special symbols and the hit probability for normal symbols are the same as in the "normal game state," but a hit due to the variable display of normal symbols is more likely to occur in a shorter time than in the "normal game state," and the normal electric role 72 is kept open for a longer period of time. Therefore, in the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," it is easier for a ball fired by right-hand play to enter the second starting hole 71, so it is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, 1 ball per winning) based on the ball entering the second starting hole 71, and play while minimizing the reduction in the number of balls in hand.

This "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" is configured to transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" if, after a jackpot, no jackpot occurs a predetermined number of times in succession (800 times in the first embodiment) in the low probability state of the special symbol; in other words, if misses continue to be extracted while the dynamic display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times in the low probability state, or if no ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g when a small jackpot is won and a jackpot state does not occur.

In addition, the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" shortens the variable display time of the normal symbol and lengthens the opening time of the normal electric role 72 from the start of the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment). After the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed the specified number of times, the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" is configured to transition to the above-mentioned "normal game state B".

As mentioned above, the probability of a jackpot for the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which can be executed when playing right-hand in the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," is 0.02/100 to 0.04/100, and the probability of a small jackpot is 15.5/100 (see Figure 7(b)). On average, a jackpot (a jackpot based on a small jackpot win) can occur approximately once every six spins. Furthermore, when a small jackpot is won, a jackpot can be triggered by passing the ball through specific area 65d during small jackpot play.

Therefore, if you play with a right-hand hit while in the "normal low-probability time-reduced state," there is a high probability that a jackpot will occur before the dynamic display of the second special symbol, a gaming condition, is executed 100 times. In other words, if you transition to the "normal low-probability time-reduced state," the next jackpot is essentially guaranteed.

Then, if a jackpot (a jackpot based on a small win) occurs with the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal low probability time shortened state," the game will transition to the "normal high probability time shortened state B," which is a so-called "consecutive win" state, making it easier to win large amounts of balls.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if a miss continues to be detected while the special symbol is dynamically displayed a predetermined number of times in a low probability state, or if the specific area switch 65g does not detect a ball entering the special symbol when a small win is won and a jackpot state does not occur, the machine is configured to transition to a "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" and then to a "consecutive win" state in which a large number of balls can be won.

Furthermore, if a transition is made from the "normal low probability time shortening state" to the "normal game state", it is not possible to transition back to the "normal low probability time shortening state". On the other hand, if the "normal low probability time shortening state" occurs based on the satisfaction of a rescue condition, and the time shortening end condition based on the number of times the dynamic display of a special symbol is executed is met in the "normal low probability time shortening state", and a transition is made to the "normal game state", it may be possible to transition back to the "normal low probability time shortening state" if the number of times the dynamic display of a special symbol is executed again reaches the number of times the rescue condition is met.

Here, we will explain each jackpot type. The jackpot type "Time Reduction A" is a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65, which acts as a movable device, is open from the first round to the tenth round. In the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "Time Reduction A" can be selected, and after the jackpot ends, the system is configured to transition to "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State B."

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the random number that results in a jackpot is not set in the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol, and the machine is configured so that a jackpot cannot be won when the first special symbol is dynamically displayed. This is because in "normal gaming state A," where the dynamic display of the first special symbol is primarily executed, i.e., in a gaming state where a rescue condition can be met, only a jackpot based on a small jackpot can occur.

As will be described in more detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win type "Time Reduction B (Small Win A)" or "Time Reduction C (Small Win A)" described below is won in "Normal Game State A" (hereinafter, the small win type "Time Reduction B (Small Win A)" or "Time Reduction C (Small Win A)" may be referred to as "Special Chart 1 Small Win"), depending on the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met at that time, rather than executing a right-hand hit game when a Special Chart 1 small win is won as a control judgment result, causing the ball to pass through the specific area 65d as a profit-granting condition, and generating a jackpot game as a grant value, the machine returns to "Normal Game State A" without generating a jackpot game by not executing a right-hand hit game when the Special Chart 1 small win is won and not allowing the ball to pass through the specific area 65d, and borrowing a game ball or using a game ball on hand to play again. The expected value of balls that can be won may be higher if the first special symbol and the first special symbol are dynamically displayed until the number of times the rescue condition is met, which will result in the update ending state, and the state is transitioned to a "normal symbol low-probability time-shortened state" as a granted benefit (hereinafter, when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A", performing right-hand play to pass the ball through specific area 65d to generate a jackpot will be referred to as the "right-hand play method when a small win is won". Also, when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A", not performing right-hand play to generate a jackpot, returning to "normal gaming state A" and continuing left-hand play, dynamically displaying the first special symbol until the number of times the rescue condition is met, and transitioning to a "normal symbol low-probability time-shortened state" will be referred to as the "left-hand play method when a small win is won").

Here, if a random number value that results in a jackpot is set in the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol, and if a jackpot type can be won when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed in "normal gaming state A," there is a possibility that the dynamic display of the first special symbol will win the jackpot type while trying to fulfill the rescue condition by executing the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won. Then, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol wins the jackpot type, unlike when a small jackpot type is won, the jackpot game will begin unconditionally regardless of the play method.

When configured this way, even if a player avoids the occurrence of a jackpot based on a small win by playing left-handed when a small win is won in accordance with the right-handed notification when a special chart 1 small win is won, and uses up their balls to hit left-handed in order to achieve the rescue condition, there is a risk that a jackpot will occur before the rescue condition is met the number of times, and the consumed balls will be wasted.

Therefore, in order to prevent such an event from occurring, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the random number value that results in a jackpot is not set in the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol does not result in a jackpot.

Next, we will explain the small prize type. The small prize type "Time Reduction B" that can be selected in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is a small prize and a jackpot with a maximum total number of rounds of five. During the first round of small prize play, the variable prize device 65, which serves as a movable device, is opened. Furthermore, as the variable prize device 65 for the first round is opened, the specific area solenoid 65f (see FIG. 5), described below, is activated to open the specific area 65d. Then, during the small prize play, a right-hand hit is performed to cause a ball to enter the variable prize device 65. When the ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g (see FIG. 5) provided in the specific area 65d, marking the end of the update state, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65 is opened from the second round to the fifth round as a jackpot play. After the small win or big win of this small win type "Time Reduction B" ends, if the small win type "Time Reduction B" is won in the "normal gaming state", the game will transition to "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State A", and if the small win type "Time Reduction B" is won in a state other than the "normal gaming state" (i.e., the "time reduction state"), the game will transition to "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State B".

Next, the small prize type "Time Reduction C" refers to a small prize and a jackpot with a maximum total number of rounds of seven. During the first round of small prize play, the variable prize device 65, which serves as a movable device, is opened. Furthermore, as the variable prize device 65 for the first round is opened, the specific area solenoid 65f (see Figure 5), described below, is activated, opening the specific area 65d. Then, during the small prize play, a right-hand hit is performed to cause a ball to enter the variable prize device 65. If the ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g (see Figure 5) located in the specific area 65d, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65 is opened from the second round to the seventh round as a jackpot play. After the small win or big win of this small win type "Time Reduction C" ends, if the small win type "Time Reduction C" is won in the "normal gaming state", the game will transition to "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State A", and if the small win type "Time Reduction C" is won in a state other than the "normal gaming state" (i.e., the "time reduction state"), the game will transition to "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State B".

On the other hand, even if the small win type "Time Reduction B" is won, if a right-hand hit is not performed during the first round of small win play and a ball is not detected by the specific area switch 65g, the variable winning device 65 for rounds two through five will not be opened and a jackpot will not be awarded. Similarly, even if the small win type "Time Reduction C" is won, if a right-hand hit is not performed during the first round of small win play and a ball is not detected by the specific area switch 65g, the variable winning device 65 for rounds two through seven will not be opened and a jackpot will not be awarded. (Hereinafter, this phenomenon may be referred to as the small win type "Small Win A"). Then, after the small win type "Small Win A" ends, because a jackpot play is not being played, the game returns to the game state at the time of the small win type "Small Win A," and the dynamic display of the next special symbol becomes possible as a game condition.

By configuring it in this way, when the control judgment result is a small win type "Time Reduction B" or a small win type "Time Reduction C" (i.e., a special chart 1 small win), a right-hand hit is performed during the first round of small win play, and the profit award condition is whether or not the ball passes through specific area 65d, which controls whether or not a big win game will occur as an award value.

So, for example, if you win a small prize on Special Chart 1 in "normal gaming state A," you can transition to a big prize by playing right during the first round of small prize play and passing the ball through the specific area 65d, but if you do not play right during the first round of small prize play and do not pass the ball through the specific area 65d, you will not transition to a big prize game and will return to "normal gaming state A" again.

Here, details will be provided later, but in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special 1 small jackpot is won as a control judgment result in "normal game state A," a right-hand hit is performed during the first round of small jackpot play, causing the ball to pass through specific area 65d as a profit-granting condition, generating a jackpot game as a bonus, and transitioning to "normal game high-probability time-shortened state A." Comparing this with the case where the number of rescue conditions is met, which is the end-of-update state, and transitioning to "normal game low-probability time-shortened state" as a bonus, the expected value of balls that the player can win is higher in the latter case, where the number of rescue conditions is met and transitioning to "normal game low-probability time-shortened state" (details will be provided later in Figure 27).

Therefore, if, in "normal gaming state A," a player wins a special symbol 1 small jackpot with the dynamic display of the special symbol one spin before the number of times the rescue condition is met, the player can expect to win a higher number of balls if the player does not play right during the small jackpot, causing the ball to pass through specific area 65d and trigger a jackpot, and transitions to "normal symbol high-probability time-shortened state A," and does not trigger a jackpot, but returns to "normal gaming state A," where the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed for just one spin, triggering the number of times the rescue condition is met and transitioning to "normal symbol low-probability time-shortened state."

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won as a result of the control judgment in "normal gaming state A," depending on the number of spins remaining until the number of times the rescue condition is met as the update end state at that time, it is possible to return to "normal gaming state A" without generating a jackpot game by not executing right-hand play when the special symbol 1 small win is won and not allowing the ball to pass through the specific area 65d, and then borrow a gaming ball or use a gaming ball in hand to again dynamically display the first special symbol until the number of times the rescue condition is met as the update end state, and transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" as a conferred benefit, so that the expected value of the balls that can be won may be higher. (Hereinafter, the period during which the expected value of balls that can be obtained when a jackpot game is generated when a small jackpot on special chart 1 is won in "normal gaming state A" without executing right-hand play when the small jackpot on special chart 1 is won, and the player returns to "normal gaming state A" without continuing left-hand play until the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached, causing the game to transition to the "normal chart low probability time shortened state" is sometimes referred to as the "rescue priority notification period." Also, the right-hand hit notification effect when a small jackpot on special chart 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period is sometimes referred to as the "rescue priority notification effect." Furthermore, the period during which the expected value of balls that can be obtained when a jackpot game is generated when a small jackpot on special chart 1 is won in "normal gaming state A" without executing right-hand play, and the player returns to "normal gaming state A" without continuing left-hand play until the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached, causing the game to transition to the "normal chart low probability time shortened state" is sometimes referred to as the "rescue priority notification period." The period during which the expected value of balls that can be won if a jackpot game is triggered when a small jackpot on a special symbol is won is sometimes referred to as the "jackpot priority notification period." The right-hand notification effect when a small jackpot on a special symbol is won during the jackpot priority notification period is sometimes referred to as the "jackpot priority notification effect." Furthermore, the number of rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol that switches between the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period is sometimes referred to as the "break-even number." The break-even number is uniquely determined when the gaming machine is manufactured, so the number of break-even points can be preset in the gaming machine (audio lamp control device 113).

When a special chart 1 small jackpot is won with a specific number of spins in "normal gaming state A," which of the right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won or the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won will result in a higher expected value of balls won? This is determined by the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 regarding balls to be released (i.e., the probability of a big jackpot, the probability of a small jackpot, the number of winning balls, etc.), the status of the game pins (i.e., the base value, described below), the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met, etc.

For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the content of the right-hit notification effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the small jackpot opening time when a special symbol 1 small jackpot is won in "normal game state A" is configured to differ depending on the number of times the special symbol is executed (the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met).

Specifically, when a special chart 1 small win is won as a result of control judgment in "normal gaming state A," if the expected value of balls that can be won is higher by playing with a right-hand hit when a small win is won, the right-hand hit notification effect when the small win is won is configured to perform a first notification mode that strongly suggests right-hand play and emphasizes the occurrence of a jackpot (i.e., a jackpot priority notification effect) (see Figure 89 (b)).

On the other hand, if the control judgment result in "normal gaming state A" is that a special chart 1 small jackpot is won, and the expected value of balls that can be won is higher when playing with a left-hand hit when a small jackpot is won, the right-hand hit notification effect when the small jackpot is won is configured to display a second notification mode that does not strongly suggest right-hand play compared to the jackpot priority notification effect and does not emphasize the occurrence of a jackpot (i.e., a rescue priority notification effect) (see Figure 89 (d)).

Here, if the right-hit notification effect that is performed when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1 in "Normal Game State A" were configured to consist of only one effect, and only the suggestion to play right and generate a jackpot were uniformly executed, there is a high possibility that the player would blindly accept the right-hit notification effect that is performed when a small jackpot is won, play right, and generate a jackpot.

However, depending on the number of spins required to achieve the rescue condition when a small win is won, the expected value of balls that can be won when playing left-handed when a small win is won may be higher, so there is a risk that the expected value of balls that can be won by triggering a big win when that small win is won may be lower.

Therefore, by configuring the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won during "normal game state A," the player can determine the content of the right-hit notification effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 and decide whether or not to perform a right-hit play during the small win to generate a big win. This allows the player to predict which hitting method will increase the expected value of the balls that can be won, creating new gameplay features and increasing the enjoyment of the game. Details of this right-hit notification effect will be described later in Figures 28, 70, and 89.

In addition, when a small jackpot other than the special chart 1 small jackpot is won in "normal gaming state A," or when a jackpot is won, right-hand play is executed for both small jackpots and jackpots, and the player who wins the jackpot is configured so that the expected number of balls won is higher. Therefore, the right-hand play notification effects in "normal gaming state A" other than when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won are configured with the same effects.

Next, the small win type in "Time Reduction D" refers to a small win and a jackpot with a maximum total number of rounds of 10. During the first round of small win play, the variable winning device 65 is opened, and as the variable winning device 65 is opened in the first round, the specific area solenoid 65f (see Figure 5), described below, is activated to open the specific area 65d. When a ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g (see Figure 5) provided in the specific area 65d, the large winning opening plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened from the second round to the tenth round as a jackpot play. After the small win and jackpot in "Time Reduction D" end, the game is configured to transition to the "normal, high-probability, time-shortened state."

On the other hand, even if a "Time-Reduction D" small prize is won, if the specific area switch 65g does not detect a ball during the first round of small prize play, the variable prize-winning device 65 will not be opened for the second to fifth rounds, and a big prize will not be awarded (hereinafter, this phenomenon may be referred to as "small prize B"). Then, after the end of "small prize B," since no big prize play is being executed, the game state is returned to the state it was in when the small prize type "small prize B" was won.

While the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to constantly detect ball passage using the specific area switch 65g, it may also be configured to set the effective and ineffective timings of the specific area switch 65g. Specifically, for example, the specific area switch 65g may be configured to enable ball passage detection only during small win games, or only while the specific area solenoid 65f is turned on, or until a predetermined period has elapsed since the large prize opening solenoid 65b was turned on. The specific area switch 65g may be configured to disable ball passage detection at times other than those exemplified above, thereby preventing the occurrence of a jackpot game state based on a ball passing through the specific area 65d at times other than those exemplified above. In this case, if a ball passes through the specific area switch 65g at times other than those exemplified above, i.e., when the specific area switch 65g is in an inactive state, it may be configured to indicate that some abnormality (e.g., fraudulent activity) has occurred and the ball has passed through the specific area 65d, and an abnormality detection process, such as an error notification, may be executed.

Here, we will explain the display modes of the special LED group 37b for each big win type and each small win type. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is one display pattern corresponding to a miss, 31 display patterns corresponding to the small win type "time reduction B," and 32 display patterns corresponding to the small win type "time reduction C," for a total of 64 display patterns.

In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol has a total of 64 display patterns for the stop indication (lighting up indication): one display pattern corresponding to a miss, one display pattern corresponding to the small win type "Time Reduction D", and 62 display patterns corresponding to the big win type "Time Reduction A".

The right-hit notification lamp 37c on the special symbol display device 37 is a lamp that indicates a gaming state in which right-hit play is encouraged. This right-hit notification lamp 37c is unlit in the "normal gaming state" in which left-hit play is encouraged and right-hit play is not encouraged, but is lit in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" in which right-hit play is encouraged, or during small win play or big win play. The player can recognize whether or not they are in a state in which they should play right-hit play by checking this right-hit notification lamp 37c or the right-hit play suggestion display on the third symbol display device 81.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small jackpot is won in "normal game state A," the content of the right-hit notification effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the opening time when the special symbol 1 small jackpot is won is configured to be different, but the right-hit notification lamp 37c is configured to always be lit during the opening time. With this configuration, the player can recognize that they can win one of the prize balls by performing a right-hit game when the small jackpot is won.

The game area of the game board 13 is provided with multiple general winning holes 63, from which 3 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

A variable display device unit 80 is also provided in the center of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81, which is comprised of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as the "display device") that, when triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole 64 or the second starting hole 71 (hereinafter, a ball entering the first starting hole 64 or the second starting hole 71 may be referred to as a "starting winning"), performs a variable presentation of a third symbol according to the gaming status while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the first or second special symbol on the special symbol display device 37, which serves as a result notification device; and a second symbol display device 83, which is comprised of an LED that can perform a variable display of a normal symbol when triggered by a ball passing through the through gate 67 (hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the second symbol display device 83 may be referred to as the "normal symbol display device 83"). The variable display device unit 80 also includes a center frame 86 that surrounds the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch LCD display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see Figure 5), which will be described later, to display, for example, three symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 4), on the left, center, and right.

Each symbol column Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 4) is composed of multiple symbols, and these symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol column Z1 to Z3, allowing the third symbol to be variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is used in common for the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol. While the game status displayed in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is displayed by the special symbol display device 37, which serves as a result notification device, the third symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is used to display decoratively in accordance with the display of the special symbol display device 37. Note that instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels, LEDs, etc.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that when the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are both on hold, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed preferentially (so-called special symbol 2 priority variation). In other words, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed based on a winning start at the first starting hole 64, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is on hold based on a winning start at the first starting hole 64, and then a winning start at the second starting hole 71 occurs, the dynamic display of the second special symbol that won later can be executed before the dynamic display of the first special symbol that won earlier.

Here, we will explain the display content of the third pattern display device 81 with reference to Figure 4. Figure 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, with Figure 4(a) being a diagram that schematically shows the area division settings and active line settings of the display screen, and Figure 4(b) being a diagram that illustrates an example of the actual display screen.

The third design is composed of 11 main designs, including 10 main designs numbered "0" through "9" and one main design with the words "Challenge Design" (see Figure 89(c)). Each main design is composed of a rear design consisting of a wooden box with the numbers "0" through "9" placed above it. Of these, the main designs with odd numbers ("1," "3," "5," "7," and "9") have large numbers added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. In contrast, the main designs with even numbers ("0," "2," "4," "6," and "8") have additional designs imitating characters such as planes, furoshiki cloths, and helmets added to almost the entire front of the wooden box, with even numbers added in small green to the lower right of the additional designs, displayed in front of the additional designs. Furthermore, the main pattern, which has the words "Challenge Pattern" written on it, is designed to appear only in pattern row Z2, and the words "Challenge Pattern" are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box (see Figure 89 (c)).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the result of the lottery for any of the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see Figure 5), which will be described later, is a big win or a small win, a variable effect is performed in which the same main symbols line up, and a big win or small win occurs after the variable effect has ended. For example, if the small win type "Time Reduction B (Small Win A)" is won during the big win priority notification period (see Figure 28) in "Normal Game State A," a variable effect is performed in which main symbols with the numbers "0," "2," "4," "6," and "8" line up. Furthermore, if the player wins the small win type "Time Reduction B (Small Win A)" during the rescue priority notification period (see Figure 28) in "Normal Game State A", a variable effect will occur in which main symbols with the numbers "0", "2", "4", "6", and "8" will stop in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3, and a main symbol with the word "Challenge Symbol" will stop in the middle symbol column Z2.

Furthermore, during the jackpot priority notification period of "normal gaming state A" (see FIG. 28), if the player wins the small jackpot type "Time Reduction C (small jackpot A)," which has more jackpot rounds than the small jackpot type "Time Reduction B (small jackpot A)," a variable effect will be performed in which main symbols numbered "1," "3," "5," "7," and "9" line up. Also, during the rescue priority notification period of "normal gaming state A" (see FIG. 28), if the player wins the small jackpot type "Time Reduction C (small jackpot A)," a variable effect will be performed in which main symbols numbered "1," "3," "5," "7," and "9" stop in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3, and a main symbol with the word "challenge symbol" may stop in the center symbol column Z2.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A," depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won (the number of times remaining until the rescue condition is met), the left-handed play method when a small win is won is configured to result in a higher average number of balls won by the player.

Therefore, during the period when the average number of balls that can be acquired by using the left-handed play method when a small jackpot is won (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), if a small jackpot is won on the special chart 1, rather than displaying the same main pattern with the numbers "1" through "9" that the player can recognize as a jackpot in each pattern row, the system is configured to stop a main pattern with the words "challenge pattern" in middle pattern row Z2.

By configuring it in this way, if a special chart 1 small win is won during the rescue priority notification period, it is not necessarily better to play right during the small win to generate a big win, but rather it is possible to suggest the option of continuing in "normal game state A" without playing right during the small win.

In addition, as mentioned above, the right-hit notification effect that is executed when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A" is configured to execute different right-hit notification effects depending on the period during which the small win is won. Therefore, by determining the main symbol displayed in each symbol row and the content of the right-hit notification effect, the player can determine whether or not to execute right-hit play during the small win game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, all main symbols are configured to appear when the "reach display" variation effect is executed in the "normal game state A" when a small win type "time reduction C" that can result in a 7R jackpot by generating a jackpot state is won. Specifically, for example, even when a small win type "time reduction C" is won, the "reach display" variation effect may be executed with the same main symbol with the number "2" or "8" attached. By configuring it in this way, for example, the content of the game value that can be awarded cannot be determined at the time the variable presentation is executed; in other words, the player cannot tell whether they have won the small prize type "Time Reduction B (Small Prize A)" with a maximum number of rounds of 5R, or the small prize type "Time Reduction C (Small Prize A)" with a maximum number of rounds of 7R; after announcing that a small prize has been won in the variable presentation of the "reach display," an upgrade presentation is performed to notify that the small prize type "Time Reduction C (Small Prize A)" has been won, thereby increasing the variety of games and making them more enjoyable.

As shown in Figure 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into three parts vertically, with the lower two-thirds consisting of a main display area Dm that displays the changing third pattern and a cockpit display area Db that displays the number of reserved balls, etc., and the remaining upper one-third being a secondary display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, center, and right. The left symbol row Z1 is displayed in display area Dm1, the center symbol row Z2 is displayed in display area Dm2, and the right symbol row Z3 is displayed in display area Dm3.

In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a specified order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order, and a variable effect is performed by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Note that the arrangement of the numbers may be different for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. For example, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged in descending order in the left symbol column Z1, while the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged in ascending order in the center symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3.

In addition, the main display area Dm displays third symbols in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle section of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and during the variable presentation corresponding to the special symbols set (displayed) for each game state, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the order of left symbol column Z1 → right symbol column Z3 → middle symbol column Z2. If the third symbols line up on the active line L1 as a jackpot symbol combination (a combination of the same main symbols) when they stop, a jackpot video or small jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot or small jackpot for the special symbols set (displayed) for each game state.

The sub-display area Ds is horizontally elongated and positioned above the main display area Dm, and is further divided horizontally into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3. Each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 displays a character or preview image as a notification mode. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a sense of anticipation that a big or small win will result from the variable display in the main display area Dm.

The cockpit display area Db is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have entered the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 corresponding to the special pattern set for each game state and for which the variable display (variable effect) has not yet been executed.

The small area Ds3 to the right of the secondary display area Ds is configured to display a fourth pattern display area 87 for special pattern 1 as a notification mode that can change in synchronization with the dynamic display of the first special pattern and the number of reserved balls, a fourth pattern display area 88 for special pattern 2 as a notification mode that can change in synchronization with the dynamic display of the second special pattern and the number of reserved balls, and a right-hit instruction 89 for the main display.

The fourth symbol display area 87 for special symbol 1 is composed of a special symbol 1 reserve number display 87a, which displays the number of reserved symbols for the dynamic display of the first special symbol in numbers, and a special symbol 1 variable area 87b, which can change in synchronization with the execution of the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol.

The reserve number display 87a for special symbol 1 is configured to display the number of reserved dynamic displays of the first special symbol as a numeric symbol ranging from "0" to "4." Specifically, when the reserve number display 87a for special symbol 1 displays "0," this indicates that there are zero reserved dynamic displays of the first special symbol; when the reserve number display 87a for special symbol 1 displays "1," this indicates that there is one reserved dynamic display of the first special symbol; when the reserve number display 87a for special symbol 1 displays "2," this indicates that there are two reserved dynamic displays of the first special symbol; when the reserve number display 87a for special symbol 1 displays "3," this indicates that there are three reserved dynamic displays of the first special symbol; and when the reserve number display 87a for special symbol 1 displays "4," this indicates that there are four reserved dynamic displays of the first special symbol.

In other words, the reserved number display 87a for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 87 for special symbol 1 is displayed to match the reserved ball count displayed in the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the status LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and is also displayed to match the reserved ball count displayed in the reserved symbol display area Db1 described below in "normal game state A" in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm.

The special symbol 1 variable area 87b is a display area for showing the execution and results of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and is configured so that the display color of the square symbol can change. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed, the display color of the square symbol in the special symbol 1 variable area 87b changes rapidly in the order of white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple, and after purple, it changes again from white → red → ..., repeating this change while the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed. Then, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol stops, the square symbol in the special symbol 1 variable area 87b is displayed in the color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square symbol in the special symbol 1 variable area 87b stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the first special symbol was a miss, and when the square symbol in the special symbol 1 variable area 87b stops in blue, it indicates that the dynamic display of the first special symbol was a small win. In other words, the square symbol in the special symbol 1 variable area 87b is displayed to correspond to the display content of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and is configured to synchronize with the display content of the main display area Dm in "normal game state A" in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm.

The fourth symbol display area 88 for special symbol 2 is composed of a special symbol 2 reserve number display 88a, which displays the number of reserved symbols for the dynamic display of the second special symbol in numbers, and a special symbol 2 variable area 88b, which can change in synchronization with the execution of the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special symbol.

The reserve number display 88a for special symbol 2 is configured to be able to display a numerical symbol ranging from "0" to "4" to indicate the number of reserved dynamic displays of the second special symbol. Specifically, when the reserve number display 88a for special symbol 2 displays "0," this indicates that there are zero reserved dynamic displays of the second special symbol; when the reserve number display 88a for special symbol 2 displays "1," this indicates that there is one reserved dynamic display of the second special symbol; when the reserve number display 88a for special symbol 2 displays "2," this indicates that there are two reserved dynamic displays of the second special symbol; when the reserve number display 88a for special symbol 2 displays "3," this indicates that there are three reserved dynamic displays of the second special symbol; and when the reserve number display 88a for special symbol 2 displays "4," this indicates that there are four reserved dynamic displays of the second special symbol.

In other words, the reserved number display 88a for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 88 for special symbol 2 is displayed to match the reserved ball count displayed in the dynamic display of the second special symbol on the status LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and is also displayed to match the reserved ball count displayed in the reserved symbol display area Db2 described below in all game states in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm.

The special symbol 2 variable area 88b is a display area for showing the execution and results of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and like the special symbol 1 variable area 87b, is configured so that the display color of the square symbol can change. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed, the display color of the square symbol in the special symbol 2 variable area 88b changes rapidly in the order of white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple, and after purple, it is configured to repeat the change again from white → red → ... while the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed. Then, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol stops, the square symbol in the special symbol 2 variable area 88b is displayed in the color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square symbol in the special symbol 2 variable area 88b stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special symbol was a miss; when the square symbol in the special symbol 2 variable area 88b stops in red, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special symbol was a big win; and when the square symbol in the special symbol 2 variable area 88b stops in blue, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special symbol was a small win. In other words, the square symbol in the special symbol 2 variable area 88b is displayed to correspond to the display content of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and is configured to be synchronized with the display content of the main display area Dm in all game states in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm.

The main display right-hit instruction 89 is always displayed in synchronization with the right-hit notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37, and is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when right-hit play is encouraged in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," or during small win play or big win play.

In addition, because the main display right hit instruction 89 is important display information that suggests to the player how to hit, it is given priority over other display content executed during play on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, the third pattern of each pattern row displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, super reach effects, etc.), and is configured to be displayed in the foreground (foreground layer).

As shown in Figure 4(b), on the actual display screen of the third symbol display device 81, for example, in "normal game state A," a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, videos are displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, indicating that the game is in a state where it is easier than usual to transition to a jackpot, and suggesting to the player the type of launch that is encouraged depending on the game state. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes, as a limited effect, a special action other than the predetermined action is performed, or the boy's hair, which is usually black, or the color of his headband, which is usually white, changes, or another character appears, creating a preview effect.

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, if a ball enters the first starting hole 64 while the third pattern display device 81 (special pattern display device 37 as a result notification device) is displaying a changing effect (dynamic display) of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, or if a ball enters the second starting hole 71 while the third pattern display device 81 (special pattern display device 37) is displaying a changing effect (dynamic display) of the third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, the number of times the ball enters (number of reserved balls) will be reserved up to a maximum of four times in each case. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the special symbol display device 37, and is also displayed on the reserved number display 87a for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol display area 87 for special symbol 1 or the reserved number display 88a for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 88 for special symbol 2. Furthermore, the variable presentation of the corresponding special symbol according to the game status is also displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the reserved symbol display area Db1 in the cockpit display area Db.

The first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d each display one reserved symbol (a "○" symbol (white circle symbol) in the normal display mode) for each reserved ball (one reserved ball count) of the first or second special symbol, which is set to be displayed according to the game status, and the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first or second special symbol, which is set to be displayed (priority display) according to the game status, is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d.

In other words, in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, if one reserved symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is set to be displayed according to the game status, is one. If two reserved symbols, one each in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is set to be displayed according to the game status, is two. When three reserved symbols are displayed, one in each of the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the game status is three. When four reserved symbols are displayed, one in each of the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the game status is four. Furthermore, when no reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the game status is zero, and no variable effects are reserved.

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, only one of the first lottery game for the first special symbol and the second lottery game for the second special symbol can be executed, with the lottery game for the second special symbol being executed preferentially. However, the machine may also be configured to execute the lottery game for the special symbols according to the order of winning (so-called winning order variation), or to allow the first lottery game for the first special symbol and the lottery game for the second special symbol to be executed simultaneously. Furthermore, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display the variable effects of the first special symbol and the variable effects of the second special symbol simultaneously.

In the center of the cockpit display area Db, there is an execution pattern display area Db0, which displays an execution pattern indicating that a variable effect is being performed in the main display area Dm. This execution pattern display area Db0 is located in the center of the cockpit display area Db, i.e., to the right of the first reserved pattern display area Db1a, and is configured to display an execution pattern that is larger than the reserved patterns displayed in the reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1d. In addition, in this execution pattern display area Db0, the reserved pattern displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1a is shifted and displayed as the execution pattern.

The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased when the variable effect being executed in the main display area Dm ends, and as the execution symbol is erased, the displayed reserved symbol is shifted and displayed as a lower-rank reserved symbol. Specifically, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the first special symbol in "normal gaming state A," if the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased as the variable effect of the first special symbol ends, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a is shifted and displayed as the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. Furthermore, the reserved symbol displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db1b is shifted and displayed as the reserved symbol in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a. Furthermore, the reserved symbol displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db1c is shifted and displayed as the reserved symbol in the second reserved symbol display area Db1b. In addition, the reserved symbol displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d is shifted and displayed as a reserved symbol in the third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable effects based on balls entering the first starting hole 64 or the second starting hole 71 was configured to be reserved up to four times each. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight). Also, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls may be displayed numerically in part of the third pattern display device 81, or in four partitioned areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special pattern display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, one for each of the maximum reserved numbers of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of lit reserved lamps.

Returning to Figure 3, the explanation will continue. A through gate 67 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. This through gate 67 has a through hole (not shown) formed in the vertical direction for the ball to pass through. When a ball passes through this through gate 67, a normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole turns on, and when this is turned on, the main control device 110 conducts a lottery for a winning normal symbol. Note that this through gate 67 only triggers the lottery for the variable display of normal symbols, and is configured not to pay out prize balls or the like even if a ball passes through. Note that a normal winning port that can trigger the lottery for a normal symbol may be provided, and the lottery for a normal symbol may be triggered and predetermined prize balls may be paid out.

A normal electric component 72 is disposed on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. This normal electric component 72 is primarily composed of a retractable plate 72a and a normal electric solenoid (not shown) that drives the retractable plate 72a.

In the first embodiment, the main control device 110 (see Figure 5) normally maintains the appearance and disappearance plate 72a of the normal electric device 72 submerged within the surface of the game board 13, and a ball flowing down from the upper side of the second start port 71 when viewed from the front (the through gate 67 side) passes through the appearance and disappearance plate 72a, which is submerged within the surface of the game board 13, and flows down to the bottom of the board (the variable winning device 65 side) without being detected by the second start port switch 71a, which serves as the start detection area. When a winning combination is achieved with the variable display of a normal symbol, the normal electric solenoid (not shown) is activated for a predetermined time, causing the inlet/outlet plate 72a of the normal electric combination 72 to protrude from the surface of the game board 13 for the predetermined time. A ball flowing down from the upper side of the second start opening 71 (the through gate 67 side) as viewed from the front rolls from right to left across the upper surface of the inlet/outlet plate 72a, which protrudes from the surface of the game board 13, and is detected as a winning combination by the second start opening switch 71a. This allows balls to flow into the second start opening 71, making it easier for balls played from the right side and flowing down the right side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front to enter the second start opening 71, i.e., creating a winning-assisted state.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the normal electric device 72 is open and the inlet/outlet plate 72a is protruding from the surface of the game board 13, it takes approximately one second for a ball flowing down from the upper side (through gate 67 side) of the second start opening 71 as viewed from the front, to roll from the right end to the left end on the top surface of the inlet/outlet plate 72a and be detected as a winning ball by the second start opening switch 71a.

On the other hand, as will be described in more detail below, in the "normal gaming state ("normal gaming state A" and "normal gaming state B")," the normal electric role 72, which is set when a normal symbol is won, is opened once, and the opening time is regulated by the normal electric role opening table 202k to be "0.1 seconds" (see Figure 23 (c)).

In other words, when right-hand play is performed in "normal game mode," even if the variable display of the normal symbol wins and the normal electric feature 72 is opened, causing the in/out board 72a to protrude from the surface of the game board 13, the normal electric feature 72 will close before the ball flowing down from the upper side (through gate 67 side) of the second start opening 71 as viewed from the front, rolls from the right end to the left end on the top surface of the in/out board 72a and is detected as a winning entry by the second start opening switch 71a. Therefore, the ball rolling on the top surface of the in/out board 72a will flow down below the normal electric feature 72 as the in/out board 72a becomes submerged, and will not be detected as a winning entry by the second start opening switch 71a.

Here, if the opening mode of the normal electric symbol 72 in the "normal gaming state" is configured so that a ball can enter the normal electric symbol 72 by playing right when the normal electric symbol 72 opens (for example, the opening time is "1.0 second"), then playing right in the "normal gaming state A" will result in a winning normal symbol, and when the normal electric symbol 72 opens, the second start switch 71a will detect a winning entry, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol will be executed.

As mentioned above, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured so that a small or big win can occur on average approximately once every six spins. Therefore, even in "normal gaming state A," the dynamic display of the second special symbol can make it easier to win a small or big win, resulting in gaming results that differ from the payout rate based on the initially set gaming specifications, which could cause unexpected disadvantages to the gaming hall.

Therefore, by configuring the normal electric role 72 as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, it is possible to configure it so that right-hand play in the "normal gaming state" is more difficult to win than the normal electric role 72 in conventional pachinko machines. Furthermore, if a ball fired in right-hand play is detected in "normal gaming state A" (for example, detection of the ball passing through the through gate 67), a predetermined alarm (for example, an audio output of "Please return to left-hand play" or a display of "Please return to left-hand play" on the third symbol display device 81) is output to notify the player and hall staff that a non-recommended game is being played. This prevents the continued execution of non-recommended right-hand play in "normal gaming state A," making it possible to achieve gameplay consistent with the gaming specifications.

Furthermore, by locating the second start port switch 71a in a position close to the left end of the retractable plate 72a, when the maximum number of winnings (e.g., 10) in a single opening of the normal electric device 72 is reached at a specific time, the retractable plate 72a can be immediately placed in a retracted state, making it less likely that more winnings will occur than the maximum number.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a normal symbol variable display changes depending on the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state" and "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to a low probability state (e.g., 70/100), making it more difficult to win a normal symbol variable display than in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state." This makes it more difficult to put the appearance and disappearance plate 72a of the normal electric role 72 into a protruding state (open state), making it more difficult to win in the second starting hole 71 than in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state." On the other hand, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state", the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to a high probability state (for example, 99/100), and by making it easier to win in the variable display of normal symbols than in the "normal game state" and the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state", it is easier to put the appearance and disappearance plate 72a of the normal electric role 72 into a protruding state (open state), and it is configured to be easier to win at the second starting hole 71.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the high probability state for normal symbols, the variable display leads to a win with a high probability (i.e., 99%). Therefore, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" in which the normal symbol is in a high probability state, most balls fired in right-hand play are configured to enter the second starting hole 71. On the other hand, in the "normal play state" among the low probability states for normal symbols, the variable display can lead to a win with a low probability (i.e., 70%), but the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is short, making it difficult for balls fired in right-hand play to enter the second starting hole 71. Also, in the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" among the low probability states for normal symbols, the variable display can lead to a win with a low probability (i.e., 70%), and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is long, similar to the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," making it possible for balls fired in right-hand play to enter the second starting hole 71.

As a result, in the "normal high probability time shortened state" and "normal low probability time shortened state," it is possible to play while having balls fired with right-hand play enter the second starting port 71, and by paying out prize balls based on winning balls entering the second starting port 71, the player can play while minimizing the loss of their own balls compared to the "normal game state."

In addition, instead of changing the probability of winning a normal symbol from the "normal game state," as in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," the time that the appearance/disappearance plate 72a of the normal electric symbol 72, which serves as a movable device, is sunk (released) or the number of times that the appearance/disappearance plate 72a of the normal electric symbol 72 is sunk (released) per hit may be changed depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," the time that the appearance/disappearance plate 72a of the normal electric symbol 72 is sunk may be made longer than in the "normal game state," or the number of times that the appearance/disappearance plate 72a of the normal electric symbol 72 is sunk per hit may be made more than in the "normal game state." Furthermore, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," at least two of the following may be simultaneously achieved: increasing the probability of winning a normal symbol; lengthening the sunk time of the appearance/disappearance plate 72a of the normal electric symbol 72; and increasing the number of times that the appearance/disappearance plate 72a of the normal electric symbol 72 is sunk.

The normal symbol display device 83 provides a variable display that alternates between a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (normal symbols) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops on a predetermined symbol (a "circle" symbol in the first embodiment), the normal electric device 72 located on the right side of the second starting hole 71 as viewed from the front is activated for a predetermined period of time, and when it stops on a symbol other than the predetermined symbol (a "x" symbol in the first embodiment), the normal electric device 72 is deactivated (remains closed).

The number of reserved balls in the through gate 67 can be reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is also displayed by lighting up the second symbol reservation lamp 84 described above (hereinafter, for ease of explanation, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be referred to as the "normal symbol reservation lamp 84"). There are four normal symbol reservation lamps 84, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the number of lit normal symbol reservation lamps 84.

In addition, the variable display of normal symbols can be performed by switching multiple lamps on and off in the normal symbol display device 83, as in the first embodiment, or it can be performed using a part of the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the normal symbol reserve lamp 84 can be lit by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of reserved balls passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but can be set to three or fewer times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). Furthermore, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol reserve lamp 84 need not be lit.

A first starting hole 64, through which balls can enter, is located below the variable display unit 80. Game pegs and other devices are planted around the first starting hole 64 to allow approximately six balls (so-called S1 = 6) to enter the hole per minute during left-handed play. When a ball enters the first starting hole 64, which serves as a start detection area, a first starting hole switch (not shown) located on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. This activation of the first starting hole switch triggers a lottery for a first special symbol by the main control device 110 (see Figure 5). A dynamic display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, which serves as a result notification device. Additionally, a variable effect based on the first special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81, which serves as a movable device, depending on the game status. The first starting hole 64 also serves as one of the prize holes from which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it.

A second start hole 71 is located on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. Balls can enter the second start hole 71 only when the normal electric feature 72 is open. Game pins are planted around the periphery of this second start hole 71 so that approximately 90 balls fired during right-hand play will enter the hole per minute when the normal electric feature 72 is open. As described above, the second start hole switch 71a is configured to easily detect a winning entry when the normal electric feature 72 is open. When the second start hole switch 71a is turned on, a lottery is held by the main control unit 110 (see Figure 5) for a second special symbol jackpot. The result of the lottery is displayed by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, which serves as a result notification device. A variable effect based on the second special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81 depending on the game status. The second starting hole 71 also serves as one of the winning holes, from which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when it enters the hole.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the right side of the gaming board 13 when viewed from the front. This variable winning device 65 is equipped with a large prize opening plate 65a that can be raised and lowered from the surface of the gaming board 13, a large prize opening solenoid 65b (see Figure 5) that can open and close the large prize opening plate 65a, a large prize opening switch 65c provided within the variable winning device 65, a specific area 65d, and an outlet 65h for discharging balls that have entered the variable winning device 65. The specific area 65d is further composed of a specific area opening plate 65e that can be raised and lowered from the surface of the gaming board 13, a specific area solenoid 65f (see Figure 5) that can open and close the specific area opening plate 65e, and a specific area switch 65g that can detect balls passing through the specific area 65d.

The large prize opening opening plate 65a is formed in a horizontally elongated plate shape and is configured to be able to change between a protruding state and a recessed state, thereby changing the direction in which balls flow. In other words, in its normal state, the large prize opening opening plate 65a remains protruding from the surface of the game board 13 (i.e., closed). Balls flowing down from the upstream side of the variable prize device 65 (the right side when viewed from the front of the variable prize device 65) roll along the top surface of the large prize opening opening plate 65a, causing them to flow downstream of the variable prize device 65 (the left side when viewed from the front of the variable prize device 65), preventing balls from entering the variable prize device 65. When a small prize or a large prize is won with the first or second special symbol, the large prize opening opening plate 65a is retracted into the surface of the game board 13 by the large prize opening solenoid 65b (see Figure 5) for a predetermined time, allowing balls to flow into the variable prize device 65.

Balls that flow into the variable prize winning device 65 are detected by a large prize winning switch 65c, which serves as a start detection area provided within the variable prize winning device 65, and then flow down to a specific area 65d, also provided within the variable prize winning device 65. When the balls are detected by the large prize winning switch 65c, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the opening mode of the variable winning device 65 as a movable device is configured to differ depending on the type of special symbol that wins the small prize. Specifically, if the small prize type "Time Reduction B (Small Prize A)" or "Time Reduction C (Small Prize A)" is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the number of times the variable winning device 65 opens in one round is set to six, the opening time is set to 0.1 seconds, and the interval time until the next opening after the variable winning device 65 is closed (i.e., the closing time) is set to 1.2 seconds (see Figure 19). In other words, the total opening time of the variable winning device 65 due to a small prize of the first special symbol is set to 0.6 seconds. On the other hand, if the small win type "Time Reduction D (Small Win B)" is won in the dynamic display of the second special pattern, the number of times the variable winning device 65 opens in one round is set to 10, the opening time is set to "0.1 seconds" as in the small win of the first special pattern, and the interval time until the next opening after the variable winning device 65 is closed is set to "1.2 seconds" (see Figure 19). In other words, the total opening time of the variable winning device 65 due to a small win of the second special pattern is set to "1.0 second."

Therefore, the total opening time of the variable winning device 65 is configured to be shorter when the small win type "Time Reduction B (Small Win A)" or "Time Reduction C (Small Win A)" is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol than when the small win type "Time Reduction D (Small Win B)" is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. This is because, as mentioned above, during the rescue priority notification period in "normal gaming state A," if the special symbol 1 small win is won, right-hand play will not be performed and the game may return to "normal gaming state A" without generating a jackpot.

More specifically, if a player returns to "Normal Game State A" without playing right when a special 1 small jackpot is won in "Normal Game State A," the player will suspend ball firing during the execution of the small jackpot game as a condition for the profit to be awarded, and will have to wait for the small jackpot game to end. Therefore, if the release time when a special 1 small jackpot is won is set to a long time, the period for suspending ball firing will also be correspondingly long, which may cause stress to the player and may also lead to a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won, a period is set in which the ball can pass through the specific area 65d by performing a right-hand hit, and the period during which the ball is interrupted is not too long even if a right-hand hit is not performed when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won.

On the other hand, because the total opening time of the variable winning device 65 when a small win on Special Symbol 1 is won is configured to be short, some players may have difficulty executing a right-hand hit while the variable winning device 65 is open, which could prevent the ball from passing through the specific area 65d and prevent the big win from being generated against their will. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to set the opening time when a small win on Special Symbol 1 is won in "normal game state A" to a longer time (i.e., 10 seconds), and by providing sufficient notification of a right-hand hit during this opening time, such failure is less likely to occur. In addition, for both a small win on the first special symbol and a small win on the second special symbol, the maximum number of winnings that can be won by the variable winning device 65 in one round is set to "10" (see Figure 19).

The specific area opening/closing plate 65e, located within the variable winning device 65 downstream of the large winning port switch 65c, is shaped like a horizontally long plate and is configured to be able to change between a protruding state and a recessed state, thereby changing the direction in which balls flow. In other words, the specific area opening/closing plate 65e normally remains protruding from the surface of the game board 13 (i.e., closed). Balls flowing down from the upstream side of the specific area 65d (the left side of the specific area opening/closing plate 65e when viewed from the front) roll along the top surface of the specific area opening/closing plate 65e, causing them to flow down toward the outlet 65h side of the variable winning device 65 (the right side of the specific area opening/closing plate 65e when viewed from the front), thereby preventing balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 65 from entering the specific area 65d. Then, when a predetermined condition is met (in the first embodiment, after the initial opening of the large prize opening/closing plate 65a based on a small win with the first or second special symbol), the specific area opening/closing plate 65e is driven to sink into the surface of the game board 13 by the specific area solenoid 65f (see Figure 5), allowing balls to flow into the specific area 65d (specific area switch 65g side).

In other words, if a small win is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the specific area opening/closing plate 65e opens at the same time as the large prize opening/closing plate 65a begins to open, and the specific area 65d becomes open, allowing balls to flow into the variable prize device 65. Therefore, if a small win is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, playing with the right hand will allow balls to flow into the specific area 65d.

A ball that flows into the specific area 65d is detected by a specific area switch 65g located within the specific area 65d, and then flows down toward an outlet (not shown) located downstream. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g, a jackpot game is initiated in the same way as when a jackpot occurs with the second special symbol (a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed machine). The type of jackpot that occurs when a ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g is determined according to the value of the small jackpot type counter CK (see Figure 6), which will be described later. Note that the specific area switch 65g is not configured to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if a small win occurs during the dynamic display of the first or second special symbol, right-hand play is not executed, and if the ball is not detected by the specific area switch 65g, the big win game is not initiated and the game state returns to the state when the small win was won.

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, if the drawing of the second special symbol on the main control device 110 (see Figure 5) results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit to display the jackpot stopping symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stopping symbol corresponding to the jackpot (for example, three identical symbols (such as "777")), thereby indicating that a jackpot game has occurred. Furthermore, if a small jackpot is won in the drawing of the first or second special symbol, and the ball passes through a specific area 65d within the variable winning device 65, which serves as a movable device based on the small jackpot, while the variable winning device 65 is open, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, which serves as a result notification device, is lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display a message indicating that the ball has passed through the specific area 65d (for example, "V acquired"), thereby indicating that a jackpot game has occurred. After that, depending on the type of jackpot (or the type of small jackpot in the case of a jackpot based on a small jackpot), the large prize opening/closing plate 65a provided on the variable prize winning device 65 is opened (driven to sink into the surface of the game board 13), and the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot game) in which the ball is more likely to enter the large prize opening. In this special game state, the large prize opening/closing plate 65a, which is normally closed (protruding from the surface of the game board 13), remains open until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls have entered).

When opened, the large prize opening plate 65a closes after a predetermined time has elapsed or when a predetermined number of wins are detected. After closing, the large prize opening plate 65a opens again. The opening and closing operation of the large prize opening plate 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 10 times (10 rounds). This state in which the opening and closing operation is taking place represents a special game state (jackpot state) advantageous to the player. By landing a ball in the variable prize device 65, the player is awarded a larger number of prize balls than usual as a reward for their gameplay value. Furthermore, if a player does not perform a right-hand play while the large prize opening plate 65a is open and does not land a ball in the variable prize device 65 during a jackpot game, the jackpot round ends 30 seconds after the large prize opening plate 65a opens, and the large prize opening plate 65a closes. Therefore, if no balls enter the variable winning device 65 over 10 rounds, no winning balls are generated, the jackpot ends, and the dynamic display of each special symbol begins.

Attachment spaces K1 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13. Certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment spaces K1 can be seen through the small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning holes (ball entry holes) 63, 64, 65, and 71 are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is fitted with numerous nails to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and is also equipped with various components (gimmicks) such as windmills. Note that balls that enter each winning hole 63, 64, 65, and 71 are also guided to the ball discharge path and discharged outside the pachinko machine 10, just like balls that pass through the outlet 66.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figure 5. Figure 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, a one-chip microcomputer that serves as a calculation unit. The MPU 201 contains a read-only memory (ROM) 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a random access memory (RAM) 203 that temporarily stores various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit.

In addition, to instruct sub-controllers such as the dispensing control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers via the data transmission/reception circuit, but these commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control unit 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display and variable effects of each special symbol on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery for the display results of the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

In addition, ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a small jackpot type table 202c, a reserve number table 202d, a stop pattern table 202e, a fluctuation pattern table 202f, a jackpot release table 202g, a small jackpot release table 202h, a normal jackpot random number table 202i, a normal fluctuation table 202j, a normal electric role release table 202k, and a time-saving termination condition table 202m. The main control unit 110 executes the above-mentioned main controls using various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202.

Now, with reference to Figure 6, we will explain the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery draws, setting the dynamic display of the special pattern display device 37 as a result notification device, setting the variable effects of the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results of the variable display on the normal pattern display device 83. In addition, in explaining the various counters, we will also explain the various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, various control timings, and game state transitions, with reference to Figures 7 to 24.

The jackpot lottery, the dynamic display settings of the special symbol display device 37, and the variable presentation settings of the third symbol display device 81 use the following counters: a jackpot random number counter C1 used to draw the jackpot or small jackpot lottery; a jackpot type counter C2 used to select the type of stop for the jackpot symbol; a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select the presentation mode for the variable presentation; a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1; a variable type counter CS1 used to select the variable pattern; and a small jackpot type counter CK used to select the type of stop for the small jackpot symbol.

In addition, the normal symbol winning counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the normal symbol winning counter C4.

Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching a maximum value at a specific time.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40).In addition, some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 39), and the updated values are appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a specified area of RAM 203. Details will be provided later, but RAM 203 is provided with a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) related to the first special pattern, and a second reserved ball storage area 203e consisting of four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) related to the second special pattern. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, stop pattern selection counter C3, variable type counter CS1, and small win type counter CK in accordance with the timing of the ball entering first start port 64, which serves as a start detection area. The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variable type counter CS1, and small win type counter CK in accordance with the timing of the ball entering second start port 71.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 9999), and after reaching its maximum value (e.g., 9999 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 9999), it returns to 0 at a predetermined time. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 has completed one cycle of updating, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from that initial value.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take on values from 0 to 9999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 9999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 39).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see Figure 40)). Then, when the ball enters the first start port 64 (start entry), which serves as the start detection area, the value is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of one of the first reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first start port 64 (first special symbol). Also, when the ball enters the second start port 71 (start entry), the value is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of one of the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second start port 71 (second special symbol).

The random number value that the jackpot random number counter C1 uses to determine a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. In other words, a jackpot is determined when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the reserved area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the second special symbol.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the random number value that results in a jackpot is not set in the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol. This is because in the "normal gaming state A" where the dynamic display of the first special symbol is primarily executed, i.e., in a gaming state where a rescue condition can be met, only a jackpot based on a small jackpot win can occur.

Now, with reference to Figure 7, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol will be explained. Figure 7(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in ROM 202 (hereinafter referred to as the "special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1"), and Figure 7(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol stored in ROM 202 (hereinafter referred to as the "special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2").

As described above, in the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment, the random number value that results in a jackpot is not set regardless of the setting value. On the other hand, in the special chart 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, the number of jackpot random numbers is set differently for each setting value. Furthermore, the table is configured so that the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers required to change for each setting is compensated for from the number of miss random numbers corresponding to misses. In other words, when increasing the number of jackpot random numbers to change for each setting, the number of miss random numbers is reduced, and the reduced amount is assigned as the number of jackpot random numbers. In this way, by varying the number of jackpot random numbers depending on the game state, the probability of a jackpot is changed for each setting.

On the other hand, for each special symbol, the number of small win random number values is set to be the same for each setting value. In other words, the number of small win random number values for the first special symbol is configured to be the same for each setting value. Similarly, the number of small win random number values for the second special symbol is configured to be the same for each setting value. In this way, by making the number of small win random number values the same for each special symbol for each setting value, the award rate of game value, taking into account only small win games for all setting values for each special symbol, will be the same.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the increase in the number of jackpot random number values for each setting of the second special symbol is compensated for by the number of miss random number values for all settings. Furthermore, the number of small win random number values for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is configured so that it does not change for each setting. In other words, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values due to a setting change is compensated for by reducing the number of miss random number values and allocating that decrease to the jackpot random number value, and the number of small win random number values for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same for each setting of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. This configuration makes it possible to calculate the payout rate for each setting by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random number values, thereby minimizing the increase in labor required when designing game specifications.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the increase in the number of jackpot random number values resulting from a setting change is compensated for by the most frequent random number other than the jackpot random number value (i.e., a losing random number value) obtained when the player is most likely to stay in play, from the jackpot random number counter C1 serving as game information. This configuration makes it difficult to determine the setting from, for example, the number of times a losing role, which is the most common role in the variable presentation of the second special symbol, appears. Therefore, by limiting the setting determination factor to the player's only factor, the occurrence rate of jackpots, which have a lower probability of appearing than losing roles, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to be discovered. As a result, even with a low setting (i.e., setting value 1, etc.), the player can continue playing without being able to detect the setting, thereby promoting the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the increase in the number of jackpot random number values resulting from a setting change is compensated for by using the number of losing random number values in the jackpot random number counter C1 that correspond to losing combinations that do not award game value to the player.

Unlike jackpot and small jackpot roles, losing roles do not confer game value. Therefore, they are provided for each pachinko machine 10 and are not clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamps (not shown) that display the game results of that pachinko machine 10. If the number of jackpot random number values corresponding to jackpot games, which tend to be clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamps, and the number of small jackpot random number values corresponding to small jackpot games were both changed for each setting, a player could easily guess the setting of the pachinko machine 10 by glancing at the data lamps to see the occurrence rates of the two elements of jackpot games and small jackpot games. As a result, for example, if a player were to discover that a pachinko machine 10 is set to a low setting (e.g., setting value "1"), the player may not play the pachinko machine 10, which could result in a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, by configuring the system so that the increase in the number of jackpot random number values resulting from a change in the probability setting value is compensated for by the number of losing random number values in the jackpot random number counter C1 that correspond to losing combinations that do not provide the player with any game value and are not clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is difficult to discern from the occurrence rate of small wins, as the setting discrimination factor for the player is limited to the occurrence rate of a combination based on a single random number value. Therefore, by limiting the discrimination factor for the probability setting value to the occurrence rate of a combination based on a single random number value, for example, even with a low setting with a low payout rate (i.e., a setting value of "1", etc.), the player can continue playing without being able to discern the setting, thereby promoting the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 7(a), in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment, the random number value that results in a jackpot is not set regardless of the set value. In other words, regardless of the set value, a jackpot (a jackpot based on the jackpot type) cannot occur in the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

Explaining in more detail, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A," depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won (the number of times remaining until the rescue condition is met), the left-hand play method when a small win is won is configured to result in a higher average number of balls won by the player. Furthermore, when the left-hand play method is executed when a small win is won, right-hand play is not executed when a small win is won in normal mode, and by not allowing the ball to pass through the specific area 65d, a jackpot is not generated, and the machine returns to "normal gaming state A" and continues left-hand play, and the first special symbol is dynamically displayed until the rescue condition is met, which is the update end state, and the machine transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" as the awarded benefit.

Here, if a random number value that results in a jackpot is set in the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol, and if the jackpot type can be won in "normal gaming state A," there is a possibility that the dynamic display of the first special symbol will result in the jackpot type being won while playing using the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won and aiming to fulfill the rescue conditions.

Furthermore, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol results in a jackpot type, unlike a win for a small jackpot type, the jackpot game will begin regardless of the player's playing method. Therefore, there is a risk that the balls used to play left-handed when a small jackpot is won will be wasted in order to avoid the jackpot and achieve the rescue conditions.

Furthermore, if a player continues playing with a left-handed hit in accordance with the suggestion to hit right when a small jackpot is won during normal play (in this case, the rescue priority notification effect (see Figure 89 (d))), and aims to fulfill the rescue conditions, but then a jackpot occurs midway through, the player may become skeptical of the pachinko machine 10 and stop playing with the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, to prevent such an event from occurring, the random number value that results in a jackpot is not set in the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol.

Also, when the setting value is "1," the number of random number values (small win random number values) that result in small wins in the special 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 33, and the values "0 to 32" are specified (set) in the special 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the probability of a small win for the first special pattern with a setting value of "1" is set to 33/10,000 = 0.33/100 (i.e., 0.33%).

Therefore, when the setting value is "1," the number of losing random number values (losing random number values) in the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining 9,967 values excluding the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value, and these values "33 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the losing probability of the first special pattern for the first special pattern with a setting value of "1" is set to 9,967/10,000 = 99.67/100 (i.e., 99.67%).

Next, when the setting value is "2," just like when the setting value is "1," the random number value that results in a jackpot is not set.

Furthermore, when the setting value is "2," the number of random number values (small win random number values) that result in small wins in the special jackpot 1 random number table 202a1 is 33, just like when the setting value is "1," and the values "0 to 32" are specified (set) in the special jackpot 1 random number table 202a1. In other words, the probability of a small win for the first special symbol with a setting value of "2" is set to 33/10,000 = 0.33/100 (i.e., 0.33%).

Therefore, when the setting value is "2," the number of random number values (missing random number values) in the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 that result in a loss are the remaining 9,967 values excluding the small win random number values, and these values "33 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the loss probability of the first special pattern in the first special pattern with a setting value of "2" is set to 9,967/10,000 = 99.67/100 (i.e., 99.67%).

Next, when the setting value is "3", just like when the setting value is "1" or "2", the random number value that will result in a jackpot is not set.

Furthermore, when the setting value is "3," the number of random number values (small win random number values) that result in a small win in the special 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 33, just like when the setting value is "1" and "2," and the values "0 to 32" are specified (set) in the special 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the probability of a small win for the first special pattern with a setting value of "3" is set to 33/10,000 = 0.33/100 (i.e., 0.33%).

Therefore, when the setting value is "3," the number of losing random number values (losing random number values) in the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining 9,967 values excluding the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value, and these values "33 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the losing probability of the first special pattern for the first special pattern with a setting value of "3" is set to 9,967/10,000 = 99.67/100 (i.e., 99.67%).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the first special symbol is dynamically displayed, a jackpot based on the jackpot type cannot occur, and only a jackpot based on the small jackpot type can occur.

By configuring it in this way, in "normal gaming state A," where the dynamic display of the first special symbol is primarily executed, i.e., in a gaming state where the rescue conditions can be met, it is possible for only a jackpot to occur based on a small win.

Then, in the "normal gaming state A," if a special symbol 1 small win is won as a result of the control judgment, right-hand play is not executed, and by not allowing the ball to pass through the specific area 65d, a jackpot as a bonus value is not generated, and the game returns to "normal gaming state A" and left-hand play continues, and the first special symbol is dynamically displayed until the number of times the rescue condition is met, which is the update end state, and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" as a bonus value.

As a result, if a player wins a small win on Special Chart 1 during "Normal Game State A," the player can determine the content of the right-hit notification effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 and decide whether or not to play right during the small win to generate a big win. This allows the player to guess which way of playing will increase the expected number of balls that can be won, creating new gameplay features and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Next, as shown in Figure 7(b), in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the first embodiment, when the set value is "1," the number of values (jackpot random value values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is two, and the values "0, 1" are specified (set) in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol for the second special symbol with a set value of "1" is set to 2/10,000 = 0.02/100 (i.e., 0.02%), the same as for the first special symbol.

Here, when the setting value is "1," the number of random number values (small win random number values) that result in small wins in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 1,550, and the values "2 to 1,551" are specified (set) in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the probability of a small win for the second special symbol with a setting value of "1" is set to 1,550/10,000 = 15.50/100 (i.e., 15.50%).

Therefore, when the setting value is "1," the number of random number values (missing random number values) in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 that result in a loss are the remaining 8,448 values excluding the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value, and these values "1,552 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the loss probability of the second special pattern with a setting value of "1" is set to 8,448/10,000 = 84.48/100 (i.e., 84.48%).

In other words, when the setting value is "1," the increase in the number of jackpot random number values in Special Chart 2 is compensated for by reducing the number of losing random number values, which have the highest probability of appearing during play.

In this way, the probability of a small win for the second special symbol is set to a number that is much easier to select than the probability of a big win. In other words, in lottery games using the second special symbol, the order of likelihood of selection is miss → small win → big win. If a big win occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which can be executed in the "time-shortened state" and "normal game state B," the proportion of big wins based on winning the small win game is configured to be higher.

Next, when the set value is "2," the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is three, and the values "0 to 2" are specified (set) in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol for the second special symbol with a set value of "2" is set to 3/10,000 = 0.03/100 (i.e., 0.03%), the same as for the first special symbol.

Here, when the setting value is "2," the number of random number values (small win random number values) that result in a small win in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 1,550, just like when the setting value is "1," and the values "3 to 1,552" are specified (set) in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the probability of a small win for the second special pattern with a setting value of "2" is set to 1,550/10,000 = 15.50/100 (i.e., 15.50%).

Therefore, when the set value is "2," the number of losing random number values (losing random number values) in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining 8,447 values excluding the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value, and these values "1,553 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the losing probability of the second special pattern with a set value of "2" is set to 8,447/10,000 = 84.47/100 (i.e., 84.47%).

In other words, at setting value "2," the increase in the number of jackpot random number values in Special Chart 2 is compensated for by reducing the number of losing random number values, which have the highest probability of appearing during play.

Thus, the setting value "2" in the Special Chart 2 Jackpot Random Number Table 202a2 has the same probability of a small win as the setting value "1" (both 15.50%), but the probability of a jackpot is slightly improved (0.02% → 0.03%), making it easier to get a jackpot than the setting value "1".

Next, when the set value is "3," the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is four, and the values "0 to 3" are specified (set) in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol for the second special symbol with a set value of "3" is set to 4/10000 = 0.04/100 (i.e., 0.04%), the same as for the first special symbol.

Here, when the setting value is "3," the number of random number values (small win random number values) that result in a small win in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 1,550, just like when the setting values are "1" and "2," and the values "4 to 1,553" are specified (set) in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the probability of a small win for the second special pattern with a setting value of "3" is set to 1,550/10,000 = 15.50/100 (i.e., 15.50%).

Therefore, when the setting value is "3," the number of random number values (missing random number values) in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 that result in a loss are the remaining 8,446 values excluding the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value, and these values "1,554 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the loss probability of the second special pattern with a setting value of "3" is set to 8,446/10,000 = 84.46/100 (i.e., 84.46%).

In other words, at setting value "3," the increase in the number of jackpot random number values in Special Chart 2 is compensated for by reducing the number of losing random number values, which have the highest probability of appearing during play.

Thus, the setting value "3" in the Special Chart 2 Jackpot Random Number Table 202a2 has the same probability of a small win as the setting value "2" (both 15.50%), but the probability of a jackpot is slightly improved (0.03% → 0.04%), making it easier to get a jackpot than the setting value "2".

In the first embodiment, the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 does not set the random number value that results in a jackpot regardless of the setting value, but it may be configured to set a random number value that results in a jackpot for each setting value, similar to the special chart 2 jackpot random number table 202a2.

Returning to Figure 6, we will continue the explanation. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the type of jackpot in the event of a jackpot. It is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 99") and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value (e.g., "99" for a counter that can take values from "0 to 99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see Figure 40)).

Then, when the ball enters the second starting hole 71, it is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reserved area 1 to 4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting hole 71, which is the same second reserved area as the second reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the random number that results in a jackpot is not set in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 regardless of the set value, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol cannot result in a jackpot (see Figure 7). Therefore, no storage area for the jackpot type counter C2 is provided in the first reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area within the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is not a random number that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value) or a random number that results in a small jackpot (small jackpot random number value), in other words, if the control judgment result is a random number that results in a loss (loss random number value), the variation pattern in the variable presentation and the type of stopped symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "stop type") will be those for a loss. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area within the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number that results in a small jackpot (small jackpot random number value), the variation pattern in the variable presentation and the type of stopped symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "stop type") will be those for a small jackpot. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area 1 in the second holding ball storage area 203e is a random number that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), the variation pattern and stop type in the variation presentation will be those for a jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type for that jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, which serves as game information in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, is configured as a loop counter with a range of "0 to 99," and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in ROM 202.

Now, we will explain the jackpot type table 202b with reference to Figure 8. Figure 8 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 jackpot type table 202b corresponding to the second special symbol stored in ROM 202.

As shown in Figure 8, the jackpot type table 202b is a table that associates game play states with the values of the jackpot type counter C2.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the jackpot type is a "time-saving A" jackpot type with a maximum of 10 rounds, in which the player transitions to a "normal symbol high probability time-saving state" in which the probability of winning a normal symbol is higher than in the "normal game state" until the special symbol is displayed a specified number of times (mainly five dynamic display of the second special symbol in the first embodiment).

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the jackpot type counter C2, which determines that jackpot type.

In the example of the jackpot type table 202b shown in Figure 8, when a jackpot occurs in any game state, the jackpot type "Time Reduction A" is associated with a value of "0 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2.

In other words, in the lottery for determining whether the second special symbol will be won or lost in all game states, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the second holding areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e is a value that results in a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second holding area can be selected from the jackpot type table 202b, and the jackpot type "Time Reduction A" can be selected regardless of the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

Therefore, if a jackpot is won with the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the jackpot type "Time Reduction A" will be won with a 99/99 chance. In other words, if a jackpot is won with the dynamic display of the second special symbol, only the jackpot type "Time Reduction A" can be selected.

Returning to Figure 6, the explanation continues. The small prize type counter CK determines the type of small prize (large prize content) awarded when a small prize is won and the ball passes through a specific area 65d during the small prize game. It is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") and return to "0" at a specific time after reaching a maximum value (for example, "99" for a counter that can take values from "0 to 99") at a specific time. The value of the small prize type counter CK is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see Figure 40)).

Then, when the ball enters the first start port 64, it is stored in the small win type counter storage area 203d5 of the first reserved area, which is the same as the first reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided in correspondence with the first start port 64 as the start detection area. Also, when the ball enters the second start port 71, it is stored in the small win type counter storage area 203e5 of the second reserved area, which is the same as the second reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the second reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided in correspondence with the second start port 71.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area within the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is not a random number that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value) or a random number that results in a small jackpot (small jackpot random number value), in other words, if it is a random number that results in a loss (loss random number value), the variation pattern in the variable presentation and the type of stopping symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "stop type") will be those for a loss. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area within the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), the variation pattern in the variable presentation and the type of stopping symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "stop type") will be those for a jackpot. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area within the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is a random number that results in a small win (small win random number value), the variation pattern and stop type in the variation presentation will be those for a small win. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type for that small win are determined according to the small win type indicated by the value of the small win type counter CK stored in the same holding area.

As described above, the value of the small win type counter CK, which serves as game information in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, is configured as a loop counter with a range of "0 to 99," and the type of small win is determined based on the small win type counter CK and the small win type table 202c stored in ROM 202. This small win type table 202c includes a special symbol 1 small win type table 202c1 that is referenced in the first lottery game for the first special symbol, and a special symbol 2 small win type table 202c2 that is referenced in the second lottery game for the second special symbol.

Now, with reference to Figure 9, we will explain the special symbol 1 small win type table 202c1 and the special symbol 2 small win type table 202c2. Figure 9(a) is a diagram that schematically shows an example of the special symbol 1 small win type table 202c1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in ROM 202, and Figure 9(b) is a diagram that schematically shows an example of the special symbol 2 small win type table 202c2 corresponding to the second special symbol also stored in ROM 202.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that, when a small jackpot is won in the lottery game for each special symbol, the variable winning device 65 (see Figure 3) serving as a movable device is driven to open, and a specific area 65d within the variable winning device 65 is opened at a timing corresponding to the type of special symbol. Furthermore, when a ball passes through the specific area 65d during a small jackpot game, a jackpot game corresponding to the value of the small jackpot type counter CK is initiated.

As shown in Figures 9(a) and 9(b), the small win type table 202c is divided into a first special symbol and a second special symbol, which are further divided by game status. The small win type corresponding to the type of special symbol is associated with the value of the small win type counter CK depending on whether or not the specific area 65d was passed through during the small win.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the small prize types "Small Prize A" and "Small Prize B," each with a maximum number of rounds of 1, are provided when the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, while "Time Reduction B," with a maximum number of rounds of 1+4, "Time Reduction C," with a maximum number of rounds of 1+6, and "Time Reduction D," with a maximum number of rounds of 1+9, are provided when the ball passes through the specific area 65d.

Specifically, in lottery play for the first special symbol, if a small prize is won in the "normal play state (mainly, "normal play state A")" where the "time-saving function" is not activated, the small prize type will be "small prize A" for small prize play only if the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, while the small prize type will be "time-saving B" or "time-saving C" if the ball passes through the specific area 65d, and after the big prize play resulting from passing through the specific area 65d, the "high-probability time-saving function" will be granted, mainly for the period until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed "once." Furthermore, when a small win is won in the "normal symbol high probability time shortening state" or the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state", if the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win type will be "small win A", which only allows small win play, while if the ball passes through the specific area 65d, the small win type will be "time shortening B" or "time shortening C", and after the big win play associated with passing through the specific area 65d, the "high probability time shortening function" will be granted, mainly until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed "five times".

In this embodiment, right-hand play is recommended in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" and "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," and while it is possible to win the second starting slot 71 and dynamically display the second special symbol, it is difficult to win the first starting slot 64, making it difficult to dynamically display the first special symbol.

Next, in the lottery game for the second special symbol, if a small win is won in all game states, if the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win type will be "Small Win B," which only applies to small win games, but if the ball passes through the specific area 65d, the small win type will be "Time-saving D," and after the big win game resulting from passing through the specific area 65d, the "time-saving function" is granted, mainly until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed "five times."

Furthermore, as will be described in more detail below, when the number of times a rescue condition is met in the "normal game state" (800 times in the first embodiment), the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" is entered, and the "low probability time reduction function" is applied, mainly for the period until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed "100 times" (see Figure 24).

Therefore, after a jackpot game in which a small win on Special Symbol 1 is won in "Normal Game State A" and the ball passes through specific area 65d, the "High-Probability Time-Shortening Function" is granted, mainly until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed "1 time." On the other hand, if the number of times the rescue condition is met in "Normal Game State," the "Low-Probability Time-Shortening Function" is granted, mainly until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed "100 times."

In other words, in the "normal gaming state (mainly, "normal gaming state A")," the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" to which the player enters when the rescue condition is met the number of times is configured to increase the probability of winning a jackpot (including a jackpot based on winning a small jackpot) through the dynamic display of the second special symbol, compared to the "normal symbol high probability time shortening state" to which the player enters after winning a jackpot when a special symbol 1 small jackpot is won and the ball passes through specific area 65d.

For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the expected value of balls that a player can win is higher in the "normal game state" where the "normal game state" is entered when the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached, than in the "normal game state" where the "normal game state" is entered after a jackpot game in which a small jackpot on special game 1 is won and the ball passes through the specific area 65d, and the "normal game state" where the "normal game state" is entered after a jackpot game in which the ball passes through the specific area 65d. Details of the expected value of balls in each case will be described later in Figure 27.

In the special chart 1 small win type table 202c1 and the special chart 2 small win type table 202c2, each small win type is associated with a possible value of the small win type counter CK that determines that small win type.

In the example of the special symbol 1 small win type table 202c1 shown in Figure 9(a), when a small win occurs with the first special symbol in all game states, the value of the small win type counter CK, "0 to 99," is associated with "small win A," "time reduction B," or "time reduction C," depending on whether or not the specific area 65d has been passed through.

In other words, in the lottery to determine whether the first special symbol will win or lose, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of one of the first holding areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d is a value that results in a small win, the small win type associated with the value of the small win type counter CK stored in the small win type counter storage area 203d5 of the same first holding area is determined from the special symbol 1 small win type table 202c1. For example, depending on whether or not a specific area has been passed, if the value of the small win type counter CK is "7", "time reduction B" is determined as the small win type, and if the value of the small win type counter CK is "95", "time reduction C" is determined as the small win type.

Therefore, if a small prize is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the player does not pass through specific area 65d, the small prize type "small prize A" will be won with a 100% probability. Furthermore, if the player passes through specific area 65d, the small prize type "time-saving B" and the small prize type "time-saving C" will be won with a 50.0% probability.

Next, in the example of the special symbol 1 small win type table 202c1 shown in Figure 9(b), when a small win with the second special symbol occurs in all game states, the value of the small win type counter CK, "0 to 99," is associated with "small win B" or "time reduction D," depending on whether or not the specific area 65d has been passed through.

In other words, in the lottery to determine whether the second special symbol will be won or lost, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of one of the second holding areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e is a value that results in a small win, the small win type associated with the value of the small win type counter CK stored in the small win type counter storage area 203e5 of the same second holding area is determined from the special symbol 2 small win type table 202c2. For example, regardless of the value of the small win type counter CK, the small win type is determined to be "small win B" or "time reduction D" depending on whether or not the specific area 65d has been passed through.

Therefore, if a small win is won with the dynamic display of the second special pattern, there is a 100% chance that the small win type of "Small Win B" or "Time Reduction D" will be won, depending on whether or not the specific area 65d is passed through.

Here, referring to Figures 10 and 11, we will explain the game modes in each game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as well as the game state transition conditions and transition destinations for each game state. Figure 10 is a list explaining, for each game state, the trigger for transition to that game state, the jackpot probability for special symbols, the hit probability for normal symbols, the recommended ball launch mode, the main prize destinations, the variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol, and whether or not right-hand hitting is possible. Figure 11 also shows the launch mode in each game state and the game state transition destinations based on the type of jackpot won. Note that Figure 11 also shows the game state transitions when playing in a non-recommended launch mode, but for convenience of explanation, we will omit this explanation here. The number of electric support times listed in Figures 10 and 11 is the number of times the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which can mainly be executed by right-hand hitting, is executed. The time-saving termination conditions will be described in detail later in Figure 24.

As shown in Figure 10, the trigger for transitioning to "normal gaming state A" is when the game is in the factory default state, when the RAM is cleared, when the small win type "small win A" is won with the dynamic display of the first special symbol in "normal gaming state A" (i.e., when the ball does not pass through specific area 65d during small win play), or when all dynamic displays of the second special symbols that were reserved in "normal gaming state B" are executed.

Also, as shown in Figure 10, in "normal gaming state A," as described above, the probability of a jackpot for special symbols is low, and the probability of a hit for normal symbols is also low. Furthermore, in "normal gaming state A," left-handed play is encouraged, and balls fired during left-handed play primarily enter the first starting hole 64. The dynamic display of the first special symbol 1 varies over a period of 5 to 210 seconds, while the dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 varies over a period of 5 to 190 seconds (see Figures 12 to 17, described below). Note that in this "normal gaming state A," when a right-handed play is performed, the firing mode is detected by the through gate 67, etc., and a right-handed play prohibition notification is issued by the audio output device 226 (see Figure 5), etc., based on the detection, to suppress firing during right-handed play.

Next, the trigger for transitioning to "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A" occurs when the first special symbol is dynamically displayed in "Normal Game State A" and the small win type "Time-Shortened B" or "Time-Shortened C" is won (i.e., when the ball passes through specific area 65d during small win play) (see Figure 11).

As mentioned above, in this "Normal High-Probability Time-Shortened State A," the probability of winning with special symbols is low, while the probability of winning with normal symbols is high. Furthermore, in "Normal High-Probability Time-Shortened State A," right-hand play is encouraged, and a ball fired during right-hand play may enter the second starting slot 71, where the high-probability time-shortening function is activated. The dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 fluctuates over a period of 70 seconds or 80 seconds, while the dynamic display of the first special symbol 1 fluctuates over a period of 2 to 190 seconds (see Figures 12 to 17, described below). Because right-hand play is encouraged in this "Normal High-Probability Time-Shortened State A," the right-hand-hit prohibition notification is not executed.

Next, the trigger for transitioning to "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B" is when either the jackpot type "Time-Shortened A" or the small jackpot type "Time-Shortened D" is won in any game state, or when the small jackpot type "Time-Shortened B" or "Time-Shortened C" is won in a "time-shortened state" (i.e., "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A," "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B," or "Normal Low Probability Time-Shortened State") (see Figure 11).

In this "Normal Symbol High-Probability Time-Shortened State B," as described above, the probability of winning with special symbols is low, while the probability of winning with normal symbols is high. Furthermore, in "Normal Symbol High-Probability Time-Shortened State B," right-hand play is encouraged, and a ball fired during right-hand play may enter the second starting slot 71, where the high-probability time-shortening function is activated. The dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 fluctuates over a period of 15 to 190 seconds, while the dynamic display of the first special symbol 1 fluctuates over a period of 2 to 190 seconds (see Figures 12 to 17, described below). Because right-hand play is encouraged in this "Normal Symbol High-Probability Time-Shortened State B," the right-hand play prohibition notification is not executed.

Next, the transition to "Normal Game State B" is triggered when the time-saving end conditions are met in "Normal High-Probability Time-Shortened State A" (i.e., when the first special symbol is dynamically displayed 7 times, the second special symbol is dynamically displayed 1 time, or the first and second special symbols are dynamically displayed a total of 8 times), or when the time-saving end conditions are met in "Normal High-Probability Time-Shortened State B" (i.e., when the first special symbol is dynamically displayed 7 times, the second special symbol is dynamically displayed 5 times, or the first and second special symbols are dynamically displayed a total of 12 times), and there are still balls with the second special symbol remaining (see Figure 11).

It should be noted that if the time-saving termination condition is met in the "normal low-probability time-reduced state" (i.e., if the first special symbol is dynamically displayed 100 times, the second special symbol is dynamically displayed 100 times, or the first and second special symbols are dynamically displayed 100 times in total), the game can also transition to "normal game state B." However, as mentioned above, when right-hand play is performed in the "normal low-probability time-reduced state," the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to result in a jackpot on average approximately once every six spins. Therefore, in the "normal low-probability time-reduced state," there is a high probability that a jackpot will occur before the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed 100 times, and the next jackpot is essentially guaranteed. This makes it a game state in which transition to "normal game state B" is unlikely. Therefore, the relevant transition triggers are not shown in Figures 10 and 11.

In this "normal gaming state B," as described above, the probability of a jackpot for special symbols is low, and the probability of a hit for normal symbols is also low. Furthermore, in "normal gaming state B," the game is waiting for the outcome of the dynamic display of the second special symbol remaining as a reserved ball. Therefore, the right-hit notification lamp 37c (see Figure 3) is not lit, encouraging left-hit play, but the third symbol display device 81 and other devices are not encouraging any firing mode. Furthermore, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, the game transitions to "normal gaming state A," so the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed, and the time for the dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 changes between 15 and 190 seconds (see Figures 12 to 17, described below).

Next, the trigger for transitioning to the "normal low probability time shortened state" is when a jackpot state does not occur a predetermined number of times (800 times in the first embodiment) in a low probability state for special symbols after a jackpot has ended; in other words, when misses continue to be extracted while a predetermined number of dynamic displays are performed in a low probability state for special symbols, or when the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d when a small jackpot is won (see Figure 11).

In addition, in the "normal symbol low-probability time-shortened state," as described above, the probability of a jackpot for special symbols is low, and the probability of a hit for normal symbols is also low, but the normal electric role 72 is open for a long time (see Figure 23). Furthermore, in the "normal symbol low-probability time-shortened state," right-hand play is encouraged, and a ball fired during right-hand play may enter the second starting slot 71, where the low-probability time-shortening function is activated. The dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 fluctuates over a period of "15 to 190 seconds," while the dynamic display of the first special symbol 1 fluctuates over a period of "2 to 190 seconds" (see Figures 12 to 17, described below). Note that, because right-hand play is encouraged in this "normal symbol low-probability time-shortened state," the right-hand play prohibition notification is not executed even if the ball passes through the through gate 67.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small jackpot is won as a result of control judgment in "normal gaming state A," a right-hand hit is performed during the first round of small jackpot play, causing the ball to pass through specific area 65d as a profit-granting condition, generating a jackpot play and transitioning to "normal symbol high-probability time-shortened state A." Comparing the two cases where the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed in "normal gaming state A" reaches the number of times the rescue condition is met, which is the update end state, and the state transitions to the "normal symbol low-probability time-shortened state" as a profit-granting state, the latter case where the state transitions to the "normal symbol low-probability time-shortened state" is configured to have a higher expected value of balls won by the player (see Figure 27).

Therefore, if a small special symbol 1 win is won in "normal game state A," depending on the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met at that time, it may be better to return to "normal game state A" without triggering a jackpot game when the small special symbol 1 win is won, and then execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol again until the rescue condition is met, and transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," thereby increasing the expected value of the balls that can be won.

For this reason, in conventional pachinko machines, when a small jackpot type that can result in a jackpot is won (i.e., when a small jackpot type that allows the ball to pass through a specific area is won), the ball is fired during the small jackpot game to enter the variable prize-winning device, and the ball is fired toward the variable prize-winning device so that the ball passes through the specific area and triggers a jackpot game. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the content of the right-hit notification effect executed by the third pattern display device 81 during the small jackpot opening time is configured to differ depending on the number of times the special pattern is executed (the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met) when a special symbol 1 small jackpot is won in "normal game state A."

Specifically, when a small jackpot is won using the right-hand play method, the expected number of balls that can be won is higher (i.e., when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1 during the jackpot priority notification period), the right-hand play notification effect is configured to strongly suggest right-hand play and emphasize the occurrence of a jackpot (see Figure 89 (b)).

On the other hand, when the expected value of balls that can be won is higher when playing left-handed when a small jackpot is won (i.e., when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period), the right-hit notification effect is configured to display a second notification mode that does not strongly suggest right-hit play compared to the jackpot priority notification effect and does not emphasize the occurrence of a jackpot (i.e., a rescue priority notification effect) (see Figure 89 (d)). Details of the right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won in "normal gaming state A" will be described later in Figures 28, 70, and 89.

Returning to Figure 6, we will continue to explain the various counters. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to increment by "1" in sequence within the range of "0 to 99," for example, and after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "99"), return to "0" at a predetermined time.

In the first embodiment, the general presentation pattern of the variable presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of a jackpot or loss is selected based on the number of pending variable presentations and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment provides a long pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "long") in which a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected for each presentation pattern, a middle pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "middle") in which a shorter variation time than the long pattern is likely to be selected, and a short pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "short") in which a shorter variation time than the middle pattern is likely to be selected.

Specifically, one of ten presentation modes can be selected: a "non-reach (long)" presentation mode in which no "reach display" occurs; a "non-reach (middle)" or "non-reach (short)" presentation mode; a "normal reach" presentation mode in which only the variable elements of a "normal reach" are executed as a "reach display"; a "super reach" presentation mode in which the variable elements of the "normal reach" are developed to execute variable elements of a "super reach"; a "special reach" presentation mode in which the variable elements of the "normal reach" are developed to execute variable elements of a "special reach"; a "normal reach (promotion)" presentation mode in which a promotion effect is executed after the variable elements of the "normal reach" are executed; a "super reach (promotion)" presentation mode in which a promotion effect is executed after the variable elements of a "super reach" are executed; a "special reach (promotion)" presentation mode in which a promotion effect is executed after the variable elements of a "special reach" are executed; and a "special variable" presentation mode in which a fixed effect is executed in a specified game state.

Here, each presentation mode will be explained in detail. Among the presentation modes, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode (hereinafter, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode may be collectively referred to as "non-reach" presentation modes) are presentation modes in which, after a "high-speed change" variable element that shuffles each of the three pattern columns Z1 to Z3 at high speed is performed on the third pattern display device 81, which changes the three pattern columns Z1 to Z3 as a special pattern change effect, the same third pattern does not stop in the two pattern columns Z1 and Z3 that stop first, and a "reach display" does not occur.

Note that the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" refers to, for example, a variable element in which the third symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 4) are scrolled vertically downward on the display screen at high speed during the third symbol fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. In this "high-speed fluctuation," the third symbol is fluctuated so that the player cannot clearly recognize the displayed content of the third symbol, and an effect is executed in which the stop results of the previously stopped and displayed fluctuation effect are randomly mixed (shuffled).

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that after a "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, a "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, except for certain presentation modes ("non-reach (middle)" presentation mode and "non-reach (short)" presentation mode).

The "slow-speed variable" variable element refers to a variable element that, in the third symbol variable presentation performed by the third symbol display device 81, scrolls the third symbol slowly at a speed visible to the player after the "fast-speed variable" variable element described above. This "slow-speed variable" variable element displays each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in order while allowing the player to recognize the displayed content of the third symbol. If the same third symbol stops in the two symbol sequences that are displayed first (for example, the left symbol sequence Z1 and the right symbol sequence Z3 (see Figure 4)), a "reach display" occurs, and the variable element develops into a "normal reach" variable element. However, if different third symbols stop in the two symbol sequences that are displayed first, Z1 and Z3, the remaining symbol sequence Z2 is displayed in a stopped state, and the variable presentation ends. Details of the "fast-speed variable" variable element and each variable element, including the "slow-speed variable" variable element, will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed first, followed by the "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element, with each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stopping in order, with different third symbols stopping on the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 that stop first, and the remaining symbol row Z2 stopping, and the first variable effect ending. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, the "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element is not performed after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, and after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stops simultaneously, with different third symbols stopping on the second symbol row Z1 and Z3 (for example, the second symbol row that stops first in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode), and the other symbol rows Z2 also stopping, and the first variable effect ending.

Among the presentation modes, the "normal reach" presentation mode is a "reach display" presentation mode in which, during the third pattern variation presentation on the third pattern display device 81, immediately after the same third pattern stops in the two pattern rows Z1 and Z3 that are displayed first, the variable elements of the "normal reach" are executed, and the display does not develop into other "reach displays," i.e., variable elements of the "super reach" or "special reach."

Among the presentation modes, the "Super Reach" presentation mode is one of the "Reach Display" presentation modes in which the variable elements of a "Normal Reach" are developed and the variable elements of a "Super Reach" are executed.

Among the presentation modes, the "Special Reach" presentation mode is one of the "Reach Display" presentation modes in which the variable elements of a "Normal Reach" are developed and the variable elements of a "Special Reach" are executed.

Among the presentation modes, the "Normal Reach (Promotion Effect)" presentation mode is one of the "Reach Display" presentation modes in which, after announcing a small win in the "Normal Reach" variable element (i.e., any of the same third symbols from "0", "2", "4", "6", or "8" stop in symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or the same third symbol stops in symbol columns Z1 and Z3 and a third symbol with the words "Challenge Symbol" stops in middle symbol column Z2), an "Promotion Effect" variable element is executed in which any of the same third symbols from "1", "3", "5", "7", or "9" stop in each of symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Among the presentation modes, the "Super Reach (Promotion Effect)" presentation mode is one of the "Reach Display" presentation modes in which the variable element of the "Promotion Effect" is executed after announcing that a small win has been won in the variable element of the "Super Reach."

Among the presentation modes, the "Special Reach (Promotion Effect)" presentation mode is one of the "Reach Display" presentation modes in which the variable element of the "Promotion Effect" is executed after announcing that a small win has been won in the variable element of the "Special Reach."

Among the presentation modes, the "special variation" presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be selected when the final dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state." As a limited presentation, a right-hand hit is executed to execute a notification presentation on the third symbol display device 81 so as to store reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and then the result of the variation presentation is announced.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see Figure 40)). Then, when a ball enters the first start port 64, it is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first start port 64 as the start detection area. Also, when a ball enters the second start port 71, it is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserved area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second start port 71.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202e that references the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to differ depending on whether the variable effect is successful, the current game state, and the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) for both special symbols currently on hold. In other words, multiple types of stop pattern tables 202e are provided, and one is selected depending on the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) for both special symbols currently on hold, etc.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variable effect, first, one of the stop pattern tables 202e corresponding to the success or failure of the variable effect, the current game status, and the current number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) is selected based on the reserved number table 202d stored in ROM 202. Then, a presentation mode, which is a rough outline of the variable effect, is selected based on the selected stop pattern table 202e and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. After that, the detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variable effect is determined based on the selected presentation mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

These multiple stop pattern tables 202e are set so that the range of random number values of the stop pattern selection counter C3, which selects the presentation mode, differs for each stop pattern table 202e. The reason multiple stop pattern tables 202e are provided is to change the selection ratio of the presentation mode for the variable presentation depending on whether the variable presentation is a hit or miss, the game status, and the number of reserved balls. That is, the selection ratio of the presentation mode changes depending on (1) whether a jackpot occurs in the variable presentation of the acquired third symbol, (2) whether the current game status of the pachinko machine 10 is "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," or "normal game status," and (3) how many reserved balls there are for the variable presentation.

The first reason for this is to change the likelihood of winning a jackpot for each presentation mode. In other words, by configuring the stop patterns, i.e., the proportion of "non-reach" presentation modes, "normal reach" presentation modes, "super reach" presentation modes, and "special reach" presentation modes, to differ between winning and losing the jackpot lottery, the likelihood of winning a jackpot is changed for each presentation mode. Specifically, for example, if you win the jackpot lottery, the "super reach" presentation mode or "special reach" presentation mode is more likely to be selected, and if you do not win the jackpot lottery, the "non-reach" presentation mode or "normal reach" presentation mode is more likely to be selected.

By configuring it in this way, the "Super Reach" and "Special Reach" presentation modes can be made to be more likely to result in a jackpot, while the "Normal Reach" and "Non-Reach" presentation modes can be made to be less likely to result in a jackpot or no jackpot at all, making it possible to differentiate the likelihood of a jackpot for each presentation mode. Therefore, when a presentation that is likely to result in a jackpot appears in a variable presentation, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of a jackpot occurring while that presentation is occurring, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the obtained lottery result is a jackpot, the device is configured to select a presentation mode (stop pattern) that is the general content of the variable presentation based on a stop pattern table 202e that makes it easy to select a presentation that is likely to result in a jackpot and difficult to select a presentation that is unlikely to result in a jackpot. On the other hand, if the obtained lottery result is a loss, the device is configured to select a presentation mode (stop pattern) for the variable presentation based on a stop pattern table 202e that makes it difficult to select a presentation that is likely to result in a jackpot and difficult to select a presentation that is unlikely to result in a jackpot. As a result, when the lottery result for the third symbol is notified to the player in the variable presentation, if a presentation that is likely to result in a jackpot is being executed, the variable presentation will be more likely to result in a jackpot, and if a presentation that is unlikely to result in a jackpot is being executed, the variable presentation will be less likely to result in a jackpot. By providing a difference in the expected value of a jackpot for each presentation mode (stop pattern), it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game while the variable presentation is being executed.

The second reason is to minimize the number of wasted balls (so-called overflow winnings resulting in no special symbol being drawn) that result from a ball entering the first starting hole 64 when the number of waiting times for the first special symbol variable effect has reached its upper limit, or a ball entering the second starting hole 71 when the number of waiting times for the second special symbol variable effect has reached its upper limit.

Specifically, the number of waiting times for the first special symbol and second special symbol variable effects is limited to a maximum of four, and the variable effects are executed for at least a certain period of time. Therefore, in game states where balls are likely to land in the second starting slot 71 in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" and "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is likely to be reached. In these game states, if a variable effect with a long variable time is selected, balls will frequently land in the second starting slot 71 when the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol has been reached, and even if a ball lands in the second starting slot 71 as a condition for a profit award, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol will not be obtained. Furthermore, even in the "normal game state," if a variable effect with a long variable time is selected when the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special symbol has been reached, the reserved balls for the first special symbol will not be consumed during the variable effect, and therefore, even if a ball lands in the first starting slot 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol will not be obtained. When this happens, the player will determine that they will not gain any gaming value by putting the ball into the first starting hole 64, and will stop firing balls and discontinue play until the variable effect is exhausted and they are able to acquire reserved balls again. If play is discontinued, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will decrease, which will have an impact on the business of the gaming parlor.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is therefore configured to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation based on the stop pattern table 202e, which tends to select a short variation time, in a game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls for the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is likely to be reached, or in a number of reserved balls that is close to (or equals) the maximum number of reserved balls. This makes it possible to prevent balls from entering the first start hole 64 or the second start hole 71 when the maximum number of reserved balls for the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached.

Furthermore, the third reason is that by setting a long execution time and delaying the end of the variable effect, the variable effect can be maintained for a long period of time. Specifically, when there are few (or no) reserved balls for the variable effect, the next variable effect cannot be started unless a new ball is placed into either the first start slot 64 or the second start slot 71 within the variable time of the currently executing variable effect, and a demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If a variable effect is not being performed on the third symbol display device 81 even though the player is playing by firing a ball, the player will not be able to experience the excitement of the jackpot lottery that the player is looking for, and will lose interest in the game. Furthermore, if a variable effect is not being performed on the third symbol display device 81, the player may perceive the pachinko machine 10 as one in which it is difficult for balls to be placed into the first start slot 64 or the second start slot 71, conclude that it is a machine in which it is difficult to obtain gameplay value, and stop playing with that pachinko machine 10.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is therefore configured to select the presentation mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202e, which is likely to select a long variable effect time when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is small. This makes it less likely that a situation will occur in which the variable effect is not being performed on the third pattern display device 81, and allows the variable effect execution state on the third pattern display device 81 to be maintained for a long period of time.

The fourth reason is that by shortening the execution time of the variable display of the first special symbol in a gaming state where right-hand play is performed, the execution period of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the gaming state where right-hand play is performed is shortened. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, right-hand play is recommended in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" and the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state." When the normal electric role 72 is in an open state due to right-hand play, it becomes possible for the ball to enter the second starting hole 71, making it easier to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured so that a jackpot (small jackpot) can occur on average approximately once every six spins.

On the other hand, during right-hand play, it is difficult to win the first starting hole 64, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is difficult to execute. The dynamic display of the first special symbol is configured so that a big win (small win) can only occur approximately once every 300 spins, on average. Therefore, during right-hand play, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is more difficult to execute than the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and is a dynamic display that is less likely to result in a big win (small win). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which results in a miss in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" and the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," is executed, the variation effect presentation mode is selected based on the stop pattern table 202e, which is likely to select a short variation time.

As a result, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" and "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," the execution period of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which is a losing symbol, is shortened, allowing the player to focus only on the changing effects of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a big or small win, and preventing the game from dragging on.

Here, details of the reserved number table 202d will be explained with reference to Figure 12. Figure 12(a) is a diagram that schematically illustrates the reserved number table 202d1 for special symbol 1, which corresponds to the first special symbol, and Figure 12(b) is a diagram that schematically illustrates the reserved number table 202d2 for special symbol 2, which corresponds to the second special symbol.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a first special symbol variation effect is performed based on a ball entering the first start hole 64, the machine references the special symbol 1 reserved number table 202d1 and selects one of the stop pattern tables 202e1-202e5 based on whether the variation effect was successful, the game status at that time, and the total number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol variation effect at that time. Furthermore, when a second special symbol variation effect is performed based on a ball entering the second start hole 71, the machine references the special symbol 2 reserved number table 202d2 and selects one of the stop pattern tables 202e1-202e6 based on whether the variation effect was successful, the game status at that time, and the total number of reserved symbols for the second special symbol variation effect at that time. The general presentation style of the variation effect is then determined based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202e1-202e6 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in reserved number table 202d1 for special symbol 1 in Figure 12(a), when a miss is extracted in the "normal gaming state" and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is "1 to 3," table A 202e1 (see Figure 13(a)) of stop pattern table 202e is selected. Also, when a miss is extracted in the "normal gaming state" and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is "4," table B 202e2 (see Figure 13(b)) of stop pattern table 202e is selected. On the other hand, when the small win type "Time Reduction C" is extracted in the "normal gaming state," table C 202e3 (see Figure 14(a)) of stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, when the small win type "Time Reduction B" is extracted in the "normal gaming state," table D 202e4 (see Figure 14(b)) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Next, when a miss is extracted in the "normal high probability time shortened state" or "normal low probability time shortened state", table E 202e5 (see Figure 15(a)) of stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, when a small win is extracted in the "normal high probability time shortened state" or "normal low probability time shortened state", table D 202e4 (see Figure 14(b)) of stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Next, as shown in reserved number table 202d2 for special symbol 2 in FIG. 12(b), when a miss is detected in "normal gaming state A" and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is "1 to 3," table A 202e1 (see FIG. 13(a)) of stop pattern table 202e is selected. Also, when a miss is detected in "normal gaming state A" and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is "4," table B 202e2 (see FIG. 13(b)) of stop pattern table 202e is selected. On the other hand, when a big win or small win is detected in "normal gaming state A," table C 202e3 (see FIG. 14(a)) of stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Next, on the fifth spin of the second special symbol in "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A" or "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B," regardless of the lottery result and the number of reserved balls, F table 202e6 (see FIG. 15(b)) of stop pattern table 202e is selected. Also, on the first to fourth spins of "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B," or when a miss is extracted in "Normal Low Probability Time-Shortened State" or "Normal Play State B," A table 202e1 (see FIG. 13(a)) of stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, on the first to fourth spins of "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B," or when a jackpot or small jackpot is extracted in "Normal Low Probability Time-Shortened State" or "Normal Play State B," D table 202e4 (see FIG. 14(b)) of stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

In addition, the stop pattern table 202e may be configured to differ depending on the number of reserved balls even when a losing first special symbol is extracted in the "normal gaming state" or when a losing second special symbol is extracted in the "normal gaming state A." For example, when a jackpot is won and there are a large number of reserved balls, the stop pattern table 202e may be configured to select a stop pattern that is more likely to select a relatively short variation pattern.

In this case, for example, in each presentation mode in which a "reach display" is executed, a presentation mode is selected in which only the duration of the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is changed from 10 seconds to only 5 seconds. By configuring it in this way, for example, if a variable effect is started when the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is four, even if the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed for 5 seconds, a "reach display" may occur in that variable effect when the 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends (when it is recognized as a 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element). Therefore, even if a 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed, by configuring it so that a presentation mode in which a "reach display" other than the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is executed, it is possible to make it unclear at the time the 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed whether the variable effect will result in a jackpot or a miss.

Next, each stop pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 13. FIG. 13(a) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an A table 202e1 of the stop pattern table 202e, FIG. 13(b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a B table 202e2 of the stop pattern table 202e, and FIG. 14(a) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a C table 202e3 of the stop pattern table 202e. Furthermore, FIG. 14(b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a D table 202e4 of the stop pattern table 202e, FIG. 15(a) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an E table 202e5 of the stop pattern table 202e, and FIG. 15(b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an F table 202e6 of the stop pattern table 202e.

As shown in Figure 13(a), in table A 202e1 of stop pattern table 202e, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is set to "0" to "74", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "75" to "94", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "98" and "99".

In addition, in Table A 202e1, no values are assigned to the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, promotion presentation mode, or "special variation" presentation mode in the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the settings are such that none of the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, promotion presentation mode, or "special variation" presentation mode are selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13(b), in table B 202e2 of stop pattern table 202e, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode is set to "0" to "74", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "75" to "94", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "98, 99".

In addition, in table B 202e2, no values are assigned to the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, promotion presentation mode, or "special variation" presentation mode in the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the setting is such that none of the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, promotion presentation mode, or "special variation" presentation mode are selected.

In other words, table A 202e1 is set so that the selection rates are 75% for the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, 20% for the "normal reach" presentation mode, 3% for the "super reach" presentation mode, and 2% for the "special reach" presentation mode. Furthermore, table B 202e2 is set so that the selection rates are 75% for the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, 20% for the "normal reach" presentation mode, 3% for the "super reach" presentation mode, and 2% for the "special reach" presentation mode.

In other words, table A 202e1 is configured to select the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, while table B 202e2 is configured to select the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode instead of the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode. On the other hand, table A 202e1 and table B 202e2 are configured to select each "reach display" at the same rate.

Therefore, because A table 202e1 and B table 202e2 are selected so that only the "non-reach" presentation mode differs in whether they are a long presentation mode or a middle presentation mode, it can be said that A table 202e1 is more likely to have a relatively long fluctuation time for the selected variable presentation compared to B table 202e2. In other words, B table 202e2 is more likely to have a shorter fluctuation time for the selected variable presentation compared to A table 202e1.

In this way, in "normal gaming state A," where left-handed play is encouraged, if a losing lottery result is extracted, the variable effect presentation mode is selected based on the number of balls reserved for the pending variable effect. For example, if there are many balls reserved for the variable effect, a "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, which has a relatively short variable effect time, is selected. This shortens the execution time of the variable effect when there are many reserved balls for the variable effect, and increases the number of times the variable effect is executed, thereby improving the execution efficiency of the variable effect.

Also, for example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is small, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, which has a longer variable effect time than the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, is selected to ensure time for the balls to enter the first start port 64 (second start port 71). This allows the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, which has a longer variable effect time than when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected, making it easier to ensure time for the balls to enter the first start port 64, and by increasing the possibility of a new start winning occurring while the variable effect is being executed on the third pattern display device 81, the situation in which the variable effect is being executed can be maintained.

In the first embodiment, when selecting the presentation mode for a losing variable presentation, the stop pattern table 202e selected based on the number of balls reserved for the variable presentation is configured to differ. However, the same presentation mode is selected when determining the variable presentation based on when a ball enters the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 and when determining the variable presentation based on when the ball enters the variable presentation.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a losing variable effect, either table A 202e1 or table B 202e2 is selected based on the number of balls reserved for the variable effect, but the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode or the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, or the "special reach" effect mode are set to be the same on table A 202e1 and table B 202e2.

In other words, the only difference is whether the "Non-Reach (Long)" or "Non-Reach (Middle)" presentation mode is selected in the "Non-Reach" presentation mode based on the number of reserved balls in the variable presentation. The only difference is the duration of the "high-speed variable" variable element, but essentially the same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, even if the game state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases), the presentation mode selected at the time of the initial winning and the presentation mode selected at the start of the variable presentation are essentially the same (same type) presentation modes. As a result, even if a pre-reading notice such as a "reserved change notice" is made based on the presentation mode selected at the time of the initial winning, the content of the variable presentation executed will be essentially the same (same type), and the variable presentation that is the subject of the pre-reading notice can be executed without any discrepancy with the content of the pre-reading notice.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14(a), in C table 202e3 of stop pattern table 202e, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "0" to "2", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "3" to "20", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "21" to "50", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach (promotion effect)" presentation mode is set to "51, 52", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach (promotion effect)" presentation mode is set to "53" to "69", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach (promotion effect)" presentation mode is set to "70" to "99".

Table C 202e3 is the stop pattern table 202e selected when a small win occurs with the dynamic display of the first special symbol in "normal gaming state A," and since a "reach display" always occurs, it is set so that the "non-reach" presentation mode and the "special variable" presentation mode are not selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 14(b), in D table 202e4 of stop pattern table 202e, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "0" to "4", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "40" to "99".

Note that D table 202e4 is the stop pattern table 202e that is selected when a small win occurs with the dynamic display of the first special symbol in "normal gaming state A" and when a big win occurs with the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Since a "reach display" always occurs, it is set so that "non-reach" presentation modes, promotion presentation modes, and "special variation" presentation modes are not selected.

Here, as shown in Figures 14(a) and 14(b), the stop pattern table 202e that can be selected is configured to be different even when a small win or a large win that can trigger a large win state is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. That is, when a large win state is reached, up to 10 rounds of balls can be won and when the large win type "Time Reduction A" that transitions to "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State B" after the large win is won, C table 202e3 of the stop pattern table 202e is referenced, and when a small win type "Time Reduction C" that transitions to "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State A" that can up to 5 rounds of balls can be won when the large win state is reached, D table 202e4 of the stop pattern table 202e is referenced.

Therefore, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which is mainly executed in "normal game state A," results in a small win, more balls can be won through jackpot play, and the game state to which the player transitions after the jackpot is "normal symbol high probability time shortened state B," which is prone to "consecutive wins," is configured so that the "normal reach (promotion effect)" presentation mode, "super reach (promotion effect)" presentation mode, and "special reach (promotion effect)" presentation mode can be selected only if the player wins a jackpot that transitions to "normal symbol high probability time shortened state B," which is prone to "consecutive wins."

This configuration creates a sense of gameplay whereby after a small win is announced in the "Normal Reach," "Super Reach," or "Special Reach" variable element (i.e., any of the same third symbols from "0," "2," "4," "6," or "8" stops in symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or the same third symbol stops in symbol columns Z1 and Z3 and a third symbol with the word "Challenge Symbol" stops in middle symbol column Z2), a "Promotion Effect" variable element is subsequently executed to announce a big win (i.e., any of the same third symbols from "1," "3," "5," "7," or "9" stops in symbol columns Z1 to Z3), and the excitement of the game is enhanced.

Next, as shown in Figure 15(a), in Table E 202e5 of stop pattern table 202e, the stop pattern selection counter C3 value is allocated only to the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode (from "0" to "99"), and the stop pattern selection counter C3 value is not allocated to the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, the "reach display" presentation mode, and the "special variation" presentation mode. Therefore, when a miss is extracted for the first special symbol in the "normal symbol high probability time shortening state" or the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state", the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is always set.

As mentioned above, in the "normal high probability time shortening state" and "normal low probability time shortening state," the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is executed in priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol, is executed earlier to prevent the game from dragging on, so the E table 202e5 is configured to select a fixed, small number of seconds for the fluctuation time of 1 in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and to select a "non-reach (short)" presentation mode without exception when a miss is detected.

Next, as shown in Figure 15(b), in F table 202e6 of stop pattern table 202e, the value of stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "special variation" presentation mode (from "0" to "99"), and no value of stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned to the "non-reach" presentation mode or the "reach display" presentation mode. Therefore, the fifth spin of the second special symbol in "normal symbol high probability time shortened state A" and "normal symbol high probability time shortened state B" is always set to result in the "special variation" presentation mode.

In addition, on the first spin of the second special symbol in "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A" and the fifth spin of the second special symbol in "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B," i.e., the final execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A" and "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B," a right-hand play is executed to execute a notification effect on the third symbol display device 81 so as to store reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and then, in order to notify the success or failure of the variable effect, F table 202e6 is selected, which selects all "special variable" effect modes so that the variable time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is fixed and selected.

Therefore, as shown in Table C 202e3 and Table D 202e4, in the variable presentation when a jackpot is won, the selection rate is highest in the order of "Special Reach" presentation mode > "Super Reach" presentation mode > "Normal Reach" presentation mode ("Special Reach (Promotion Presentation)" presentation mode > "Super Reach (Promotion Presentation)" presentation mode > "Normal Reach (Promotion Presentation)" presentation mode), and as shown in Table A 202e1 and Table B 202e2, in the variable presentation when a loss occurs, the selection rate is highest in the order of "Normal Reach" presentation mode > "Super Reach" presentation mode > "Special Reach" presentation mode. Therefore, the jackpot expectation rate when each "reach display" appears is configured so that the likelihood of a jackpot display result appearing increases in the order of "Special Reach" presentation mode > "Super Reach" presentation mode > "Normal Reach" presentation mode. This allows the player to see the degree of expectation of a jackpot through the presentation style of the variable presentation, allowing the player to experience the excitement of a jackpot depending on the presentation style of the variable presentation that is executed.

As described above, by determining the presentation mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the type of special symbol, whether the variable effect is successful, the game status at that time, and the number of balls reserved for the variable effect at that time, it is possible to select a presentation mode that increases the execution efficiency of the variable effect by shortening the execution time of the variable effect and increasing the number of times the variable effect is executed based on the status of the game.

When the number of reserved balls for a variable effect is large (for example, "4") and a "reach display" is selected, a stop pattern table 202e may be provided in which the "high-speed change" display element for each "reach display" is shortened. The display mode may also be selected based on the total number of reserved first and second special symbols. Furthermore, when the number of reserved balls for a variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 202e may be provided in which the "slow change" display element is omitted from each display mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202e may be provided in which the selection rate for each display mode is completely different depending on the number of reserved balls for the variable effect. However, if the selection rate for each display mode differs depending on the number of reserved balls for the variable effect, when a pre-reading notice such as a "reserve change notice" is made, the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding to execute the pre-reading notice may differ from the number of reserved balls at the time the variable effect that was the target of the pre-reading notice is executed. In such cases, processing is required to maintain consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, which can be cumbersome.

Returning to Figure 6, we continue the explanation. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by "1" sequentially within the range of "0 to 9," for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "9"). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40), described below, is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see Figure 39). Then, when a ball enters the first start hole 64, the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserve area, in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the first reserve areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserve ball storage area 203d of RAM 203, which is provided corresponding to the first start hole 64 as the start detection area. Furthermore, when the ball enters the second starting hole 71, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved area, which is one of the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting hole 71 and in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed variation time (rough variation pattern) of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 determines the detailed variation time based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202f stored in ROM 202, in the presentation mode selected by the stop pattern table 202e and stop pattern selection counter C3. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the audio lamp control unit 113 and display control unit 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and also determine whether or not to execute a preview effect and the execution mode of the preview effect.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern for the fluctuation presentation and determines only the fluctuation time. By configuring it in this way, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 does not need to perform detailed control such as advance lottery required to execute the fluctuation presentation, thereby reducing the MPU 201's processing load related to the fluctuation presentation. In addition, the main control unit 110 does not need to prepare commands for all fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation presentation, which reduces the ROM capacity of the main control unit 110.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 and display control device 114 determine the detailed variation pattern for the variation presentation based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in selecting the variation presentation. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 where the gaming state changes from moment to moment, it becomes possible to select or change the content of the variation presentation at any time in response to these changes, allowing appropriate presentations to be executed according to the gaming state.

Here, details of the variation pattern table 202f will be explained with reference to Figures 16 and 17. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with the following variation pattern tables 202f: a special symbol 1 miss variation pattern table 202f1 used when the first special symbol misses; a special symbol 1 small win variation pattern table 202f2 used when the first special symbol hits a small win; a special symbol 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3 used when the second special symbol misses; and a special symbol 2 big win/small win variation pattern table 202f4 used when the second special symbol hits a big win or small win.

Figure 16(a) is a diagram that schematically shows an example of a variation pattern table 202f1 for special chart 1 losses stored in ROM 202, and Figure 16(b) is a diagram that schematically shows an example of a variation pattern table 202f2 for special chart 1 small wins stored in ROM 202. Also, Figure 17(a) is a diagram that schematically shows an example of a variation pattern table 202f3 for special chart 2 losses stored in ROM 202, and Figure 17(b) is a diagram that schematically shows an example of a variation pattern table 202f4 for special chart 2 big wins and small wins stored in ROM 202. As shown in Figures 16 and 17, the variation pattern tables 202f1 to 202f4 are grouped based on the selected presentation mode.

Specifically, the presentation modes when a miss occurs are categorized as follows: "E0: Non-reach Long", which is referenced when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is determined; "E1: Non-reach Middle", which is referenced when the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode is determined; "E2: Non-reach Short", which is referenced when the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is determined; "E3: Normal Reach", which is referenced when the "normal reach" presentation mode is determined; "E4: Super Reach", which is referenced when the "super reach" presentation mode is determined; "E5: Special Reach", which is referenced when the "special reach" presentation mode is determined; and "E9: Special Fluctuation", which is referenced when the "special fluctuation" presentation mode is determined.

In addition, the presentation modes for big wins and small wins are categorized into "E3: Normal Reach", which is referenced when the "Normal Reach" presentation mode is determined, "E4: Super Reach", which is referenced when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is determined, "E5: Special Reach", which is referenced when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is determined, "E6: Normal Reach (Promotion Presentation)", which is referenced when the "Normal Reach (Promotion Presentation)" presentation mode is determined, "E7: Super Reach (Promotion Presentation)", which is referenced when the "Super Reach (Promotion Presentation)" presentation mode is determined, "E8: Special Reach (Promotion Presentation)", which is referenced when the "Special Reach (Promotion Presentation)" presentation mode is determined, and "E9: Special Fluctuation", which is referenced when the "Special Fluctuation" presentation mode is determined.

The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then associated with each of these divided groups.

In the first embodiment, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserve area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a value that results in a small win (small win random number value), i.e., if it is a value that results in a loss, the reserve number table for special symbol 1 202d1 is referenced to select a stop pattern table 202e based on the game status and the number of reserved balls at that time, and a presentation mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area and the stop pattern table 202e. Then, based on the selected presentation mode, a group (group) to be referenced in the fluctuation pattern table for special symbol 1 loss 202f1 is determined. In that group (group) in the fluctuation pattern table for special symbol 1 loss 202f1, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserve area is determined as the fluctuation pattern for the fluctuation presentation reserved in that reserve area.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202f1 for special symbol 1 misses, which is referenced when the first special symbol misses, one fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time; hereinafter, "fluctuation pattern" can of course be replaced with "fluctuation time") is prepared for "E0: Non-reach/Long": "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation'" with a total fluctuation time of '15 seconds'.

In the example shown in Figure 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern for "E0: Non-reach long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation'", and only "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation'" is set to be selectable.

In other words, when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 1 miss variation pattern table 202f1, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation performance is executed, all possible values ("0-9") of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with "variation elements of 'high-speed variation (long)' + "variation elements of 'slow-speed variation'". In other words, when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is used in the first special symbol variation performance, "variation elements of 'high-speed variation (long)' + "variation elements of 'slow-speed variation'" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Here, we will explain each variable element that makes up a variable pattern. A variable element makes up part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is made up by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable elements provided are a "high-speed variable" variable element, a "low-speed variable" variable element, a "normal reach" variable element, a "super reach" variable element, a "special reach" variable element, a "re-variation" variable element, a "promotion effect" variable element, and a "special variation" variable element.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at such a high speed that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. This "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed for "10 seconds" at the beginning of the fluctuation effect when a "non-reach (long)" presentation mode or the like is selected (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (long)"); when a "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode or the like is selected, it is performed for "5 seconds" at the beginning of the fluctuation effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (middle)"); and when a "non-reach (short)" presentation mode or the like is selected, it is performed for "2 seconds" at the beginning of the fluctuation effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (short)"). Note that when this "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element described below will either start (begin) or the fluctuation effect will end as is.

The "slow fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that begins after the "10-second" "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed, and scrolls the third symbol visibly to show whether or not a "reach display" will occur. This "slow fluctuation" variable element is not executed when the "non-reach (middle)" or "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is selected, but is executed "5 seconds" after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, "normal reach" presentation mode, "super reach" presentation mode, or "special reach" presentation mode is selected.

In other words, in the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode or "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, each symbol row on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to stop abruptly (so-called "perfect stop") without going through the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element. Note that when this "low-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the variable presentation may end as is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is configured with a fluctuation pattern including a "10-second" "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element and a "5-second" "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element. Furthermore, the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode is configured with a fluctuation pattern consisting only of a "5-second" "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element. Furthermore, the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is configured with a fluctuation pattern consisting only of a "2-second" "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element.

The "normal reach" variable element is a variable element that indicates whether or not a jackpot will occur depending on the results of the fluctuations in the remaining symbol rows when the same symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "reach forming symbol") is displayed stopped and displayed in the two symbol rows that stop first in the "slow fluctuation" variable element. This "normal reach" variable element is performed "5 seconds" after the "slow fluctuation" variable element when the "normal reach" presentation mode, etc. is selected.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of a "normal reach" variable element, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which a "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which a "jackpot display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the variable element evolves into a "super reach", a pattern in which the variable element evolves into a "special reach", a pattern in which a temporary "miss display" is displayed first and then a "re-variation" variable element is executed, and a pattern in which the variable element evolves into a "promotion effect" variable element after the "jackpot display" is displayed.

The "Super Reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "miss display" in the "Normal Reach" variable element does not stop and the remaining symbol rows continue to change, and a predetermined effect (for example, a "battle effect") is performed on the third symbol display device 81 to show whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Super Reach" variable element is executed "40 seconds" after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the "Super Reach" variable element is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which a "Missing Display" is directly displayed; a pattern in which a "Jack Win Display" is directly displayed; a pattern in which a temporary "Missing Display" is first displayed and then a "Re-Variation" variable element is executed; and a pattern in which the "Jack Win Display" is displayed and then the "Promotion Effect" variable element is displayed.

The "Special Reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "Miss Display" does not stop in the "Normal Reach" variable element and the remaining symbol rows continue to change, and the third symbol display device 81 performs a special effect (for example, a "Competition Effect") different from the above-mentioned predetermined effect to show whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Special Reach" variable element is executed for "160 seconds" after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the "special reach" variable element, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which a "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which a "jackpot display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which a temporary "miss display" is displayed and then "re-varies," and a pattern in which the "jackpot display" is displayed and then develops into a "promotion effect" variable element.

Note that, although the system is configured so that the variable elements of a "normal reach" develop into those of a "super reach" or a "special reach", after the variable elements of a "normal reach" are executed, it may alternatively be configured so that when the reach-forming symbol stops after "slow fluctuation", it develops directly into the variable elements of a "super reach" or a "special reach" without going through the variable elements of a "normal reach". It may also be configured so that the variable elements of a "special reach" are executed after the variable elements of a "super reach" are executed.

The "re-change" variable element is a variable element that develops and executes after a "miss display" appears in one of the "reach displays," causing a "jackpot display" to appear. This "re-change" variable element occurs "10 seconds" after one of the "reach displays."

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, two patterns are available: one in which a "jackpot display" appears after the "re-variation" variable element is executed, and another in which the "jackpot display" appears and then develops into a "promotion effect" variable element.

In addition, this "re-variation" variable element is configured to occur only when a jackpot or small jackpot game is won. In other words, in the case of a "miss display," the "re-variation" variable element is configured not to be executed. This is because the "re-variation" variable element is a variable element that changes a temporarily stopped "miss display" to one of the "jackpot displays." If it were executed in the case of a "miss display" that has not won a jackpot, inconsistencies in the presentation would occur. Therefore, this "re-variation" variable element is configured to be selected only in the special chart 1 small jackpot variable pattern table 202f2 and the special chart 2 jackpot/small jackpot variable pattern table 202f4 (see Figures 16(b) and 17(b)), and not in the miss variable pattern tables 202f1 and 202f3 (see Figures 16(a) and 17(a)).

By configuring it in this way, when a variation pattern in which the "re-variation" variable element is executed is selected and a jackpot occurs (a jackpot based on a small jackpot), the third pattern display device 81 executes the same variation effect as when a variation pattern resulting in a "miss display" is selected until just before the "re-variation" variable element is executed, and then the "re-variation" variable element is executed, thereby informing the player that they have won a jackpot (a jackpot based on a small jackpot).

As a result, even when a variable effect that shows a "miss" is being executed, there is a chance that a big win (a big win based on a small win) has been won, allowing players to maintain a sense of anticipation until the variable effect currently being executed ends, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The "promotion effect" variable element is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "jackpot display" appears in any of the "reach displays." This "promotion effect" variable element is executed "10 seconds" after any of the "reach displays" or "re-change" variable elements.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern is provided in which a "jackpot display" appears after the variable element of the "promotion effect" is executed.

In addition, the variable elements of this "promotion effect" are configured to occur only when the dynamic display of the first special pattern in "normal gaming state A" wins the small win type "time-saving C." In other words, if the dynamic display of the first special pattern in "normal gaming state A" is a "miss display" or a "small win display," the variable elements of the "promotion effect" are not executed. This is because the variable element of the "promotion effect" is a variable element that changes a temporarily displayed "small win display" (any of the same third symbols among "0," "2," "4," "6," or "8" stopped in symbol columns Z1-Z3, or the same third symbol stopped in symbol columns Z1 and Z3 and a third symbol with the word "challenge symbol" stopped in middle symbol column Z2) to one of the "jackpot displays" (any of the same third symbols among "1," "3," "5," "7," or "9" stopped in symbol columns Z1-Z3). For this reason, if this is performed in the case of a "miss display" or "small win display" where a jackpot has not been won, a discrepancy in the display will occur.

In addition, the variable element of this "promotion effect" is a variable element that changes the maximum 5-round jackpot (jackpot based on a small jackpot win) in the dynamic display of the first special pattern to a maximum 7-round jackpot (jackpot based on a small jackpot win). Therefore, even if a small jackpot or jackpot occurs at the same time as a small jackpot or jackpot win in the dynamic display of the second special pattern, which both allow for a maximum of 10 rounds of balls to be won, a discrepancy in the effect will occur.

Therefore, the variable elements of this "promotion effect" are configured to be selected only in the special chart 1 small win variable pattern table 202f2 (see Figure 16(b)), and not in the loss variable pattern tables 202f1, 202f3 or the special chart 2 big win/small win variable pattern table f4 (see Figures 16(a), 17(a), and 17(b)).

The variable element of the "special variation" is the variable element selected when the final dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal high probability time shortened state" is executed, and is performed "70 seconds (when all lottery results are obtained)" or "80 seconds (when a big win or small win is obtained)" from the start of the variable presentation of all lottery results for the final dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal high probability time shortened state".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "special variable" is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which a "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which a successful pattern of the "big win/small win display" is directly displayed, and a pattern in which a temporary "miss display" is first displayed and then the variable element of the "re-variable" is executed.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f1 for Special Chart 1 misses, one fluctuation pattern is prepared for "E1: Non-Reach/Middle", with a total fluctuation time of "5 seconds" and "only fluctuation elements of 'High-Speed Fluctuation (Medium)'".

In the example shown in Figure 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for "E1: Non-reach/Middle" is "0 to 9" for "Fast fluctuation (medium)" fluctuation elements only," and it is set so that only "Fast fluctuation (medium)" fluctuation elements only" can be selected.

In other words, when the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 1 miss variation pattern table 202f1, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed, "only the 'high-speed variation (middle)' variation elements" are associated with all possible values ('0-9') of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, when the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode is used in the first special symbol variation presentation, "only the 'high-speed variation (middle)' variation elements" are always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f1 for Special Chart 1 misses, one fluctuation pattern is prepared for "E2: Non-reach/Short", with a total fluctuation time of "2 seconds" and "only the fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)'".

In the example shown in Figure 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern for "E2: Non-reach/Short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "only fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)'", and it is set so that only "only fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)'" can be selected.

In other words, when the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 1 miss variation pattern table 202f1, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed, "only the 'high-speed variation (short)' variation elements" are associated with all possible values ('0-9') of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, when the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is used in the first special symbol variation presentation, "only the 'high-speed variation (short)' variation elements" are always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f1 for Special Chart 1 misses, one fluctuation pattern is prepared for "E3: Normal Reach": "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach'" with a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds".

In the example shown in Figure 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Normal Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach'", and it is set so that only "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach'" can be selected.

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 1 miss variation pattern table 202f1, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed, all possible values (0-9) of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with "variation elements of 'high-speed variation (long)' + "low-speed variation" + "normal reach"." In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" presentation mode in the first special symbol variation presentation, the variation pattern always selected is "variation elements of 'high-speed variation (long)' + "slow-speed variation" + "normal reach"."

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f1 for Special Chart 1 misses, one fluctuation pattern is prepared for "E4: Super Reach": "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Super Reach'" with a total fluctuation time of "60 seconds".

In the example shown in Figure 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Super Reach'", and it is set so that only "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Super Reach'" can be selected.

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 1 miss variation pattern table 202f1, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation performance is executed, all possible values (0-9) of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with "variable elements of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variable elements of 'slow-speed variation' + variable elements of 'normal reach' + variable elements of 'super reach'." In other words, in the case of the "Super Reach" presentation mode in the first special symbol variation performance, the variation pattern always selected is "variable elements of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variable elements of 'slow-speed variation' + variable elements of 'normal reach' + variable elements of 'super reach'."

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f1 for Special Chart 1 misses, one fluctuation pattern is prepared for "E5: Special Reach": "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Special Reach'" with a total fluctuation time of "180 seconds".

In the example shown in Figure 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Special Reach'", and it is set so that only "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Special Reach'" can be selected.

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected in the Special Reach 1 Miss Variation Pattern Table 202f1, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed, all possible values (0-9) of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with "variation elements for 'High-speed variation (long)' + variable elements for 'Slow-speed variation' + variable elements for 'Normal Reach' + variable elements for 'Special Reach'." In other words, in the case of the "Special Reach" presentation mode in the first special symbol variation presentation, the variation pattern selected is always "variation elements for 'High-speed variation (long)' + variable elements for 'Slow-speed variation' + variable elements for 'Normal Reach' + variable elements for 'Special Reach'."

The variation pattern when the first special symbol is a miss is determined by the presentation mode itself, so the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. Also, while selection is made using only the variation type counter CS1, multiple variation type counters may also be used in combination for selection (selecting whether or not to display a preview, etc.).

Next, referring to FIG. 16(b), the special symbol 1 small win variation pattern table 202f2, which is referenced when a small win occurs with the first special symbol, will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserve area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that results in a small win, the special symbol 1 reserve number table 202d1 is referenced to select a stop pattern table 202e based on the game status and the number of reserved balls at that time, and a presentation mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area and the stop pattern table 202e. Then, based on the selected presentation mode, a group (group) to be referenced in the special symbol 1 small win variation pattern table 202f2 is determined. In that group (group) in the special symbol 1 small win variation pattern table 202f2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserve area is determined as the variation pattern for the variation presentation reserved in that reserve area.

In the Special Chart 1 Small Win Fluctuation Pattern Table 202f2, for "E3: Normal Reach", two selectable fluctuation patterns are available: "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach'" with a total fluctuation time of '20 seconds', and "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuation element of 'Re-fluctuation'" with a total fluctuation time of '30 seconds', and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Normal Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 2" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach'", and "3 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuation element of 'Re-fluctuation'".

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 1 small win variation pattern table 202f2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation elements + 'Slow-speed variation' variation elements + 'Normal reach' variation elements" is selected 30%, and the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation elements + 'Slow-speed variation' variation elements + 'Normal reach' variation elements + 'Re-variation' variation elements" is selected 70% of the time.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" presentation mode selected when a small win occurs on Special Chart 1, the variation pattern of "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'Slow-speed fluctuation' variable element + 'Normal reach' variable element + 'Re-fluctuating' variable element" is likely to be selected (70% of the time). Furthermore, by configuring the variation pattern of "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'Slow-speed fluctuation' variable element + 'Normal reach' variable element" to also be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay in which a small win can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the Special Chart 1 Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f2, for "E4: Super Reach", two selectable variation patterns are available: "Variation elements of 'High-speed variation (long)' + "Slow-speed variation" + "Normal reach" + "Super reach" variation elements" with a total variation time of "60 seconds" and "Variation elements of 'High-speed variation (long)' + "Slow-speed variation" + "Normal reach" + "Super reach" + "Re-variation" variation elements" with a total variation time of "70 seconds", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for "E4: Super Reach" is "0 to 3" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuation element of 'Super Reach'", and "4 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuation element of 'Super Reach' + fluctuation element of 'Re-fluctuation'".

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 1 small win variation pattern table 202f2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation elements + 'Slow-speed variation' variation elements + 'Normal Reach' variation elements + 'Super Reach' variation elements" is selected 40%, and the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation elements + 'Slow-speed variation' variation elements + 'Normal Reach' variation elements + 'Super Reach' variation elements + 'Re-variation' variation elements" is selected 60% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode selected when a small win occurs on Special Chart 1, the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable elements + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable elements + "Normal Reach" variable elements + "Super Reach" variable elements + "Re-fluctuating" variable elements is likely to be selected (60% of the time). Furthermore, by configuring the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable elements + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable elements + "Normal Reach" variable elements + "Super Reach" variable elements" to also be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay that allows for the expectation of a small win from any variation pattern.

Next, in the Special Chart 1 Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f2, for "E5: Special Reach", two selectable variation patterns are available: "Variation elements of 'High-speed variation (long)' + "Slow-speed variation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach"," with a total variation time of 180 seconds; and "Variation elements of 'High-speed variation (long)' + "Slow-speed variation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" + "Re-variation"," with a total variation time of 190 seconds, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for "E5: Special Reach" is "0 to 4" for "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Special Reach'", and "5 to 9" for "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Special Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Re-fluctuation'".

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected in the Special Symbol 1 Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern is set to be selected 50% of the time with "variation elements of 'High-speed variation (long)' + variable elements of 'Slow-speed variation' + variable elements of 'Normal Reach' + variable elements of 'Special Reach'", and 50% with "variation elements of 'High-speed variation (long)' + variable elements of 'Slow-speed variation' + variable elements of 'Normal Reach' + variable elements of 'Special Reach' + variable elements of 'Re-variation'".

Therefore, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode selected when a small win occurs with the first special symbol, the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable elements + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable elements + "Normal Reach" variable elements + "Special Reach" variable elements" and the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable elements + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable elements + "Normal Reach" variable elements + "Super Reach" variable elements + "Re-fluctuating" variable elements" are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide gameplay in which small wins can be expected equally with either variation pattern.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f2 for special chart 1 small wins, two selectable fluctuation patterns are available for "E6: Normal reach (promotion effect)": "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Promotion effect" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of '40 seconds; and "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Re-fluctuation" + "Promotion effect" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of '50 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E6: Normal reach (promotion effect)" is "0 to 2" for "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating elements of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating elements of 'Normal reach' + fluctuating elements of 'Promotion effect'", and "3 to 9" for "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating elements of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating elements of 'Normal reach' + fluctuating elements of 'Re-fluctuation' + fluctuating elements of 'Promotion effect'".

In other words, when the "Normal reach (promotion effect)" effect mode is selected in the special symbol 1 small win fluctuation pattern table 202f2, which is referenced when the first special symbol fluctuation effect is executed, the fluctuation pattern of "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating elements of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating elements of 'Normal reach' + fluctuating elements of 'Promotion effect'" is selected 30%, and the fluctuation pattern of "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating elements of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating elements of 'Normal reach' + fluctuating elements of 'Re-fluctuating' + fluctuating elements of 'Promotion effect'" is selected 70% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Normal Reach (Promotion Effect)" presentation mode that can be selected when the first special symbol wins the small win type "Time Reduction C," the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable elements + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable elements + "Normal Reach" variable elements + "Re-fluctuating" variable elements + "Promotion Effect" variable elements is likely to be selected (70% of the time). Also, by configuring the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable elements + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable elements + "Normal Reach" variable elements + "Promotion Effect" variable elements" to also be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay that allows players to expect to win the small win type "Time Reduction C" from any of the variation patterns.

Next, in the Special Chart 1 Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f2, for "E7: Super Reach (Promotion Effect)", two selectable variation patterns are available: "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach" + "Promotion Effect"," with a total variation time of "80 seconds"; and "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach" + "Re-variation" + "Promotion Effect"," with a total variation time of "90 seconds", and a value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E7: Super Reach (Promotion Effect)" is "0 to 3" for "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating elements of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating elements of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating elements of 'Super Reach' + fluctuating elements of 'Promotion Effect'", and "4 to 9" for "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating elements of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating elements of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating elements of 'Super Reach' + fluctuating elements of 'Re-fluctuation' + fluctuating elements of 'Promotion Effect'".

In other words, when the "Super Reach (Promotion Effect)" effect mode is selected in the Special Symbol 1 Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation effect is executed, the variation pattern of "variation elements of 'High-speed variation (long)' + variable elements of 'Slow-speed variation' + variable elements of 'Normal Reach' + variable elements of 'Super Reach' + variable elements of 'Promotion Effect'" is selected 40%, and the variation pattern of "variation elements of 'High-speed variation (long)' + variable elements of 'Slow-speed variation' + variable elements of 'Normal Reach' + variable elements of 'Super Reach' + variable elements of 'Re-variation' + variable elements of 'Promotion Effect'" is selected 60% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach (Promotion Effect)" presentation mode that can be selected when the first special symbol wins the small win type "Time Reduction C," the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable elements + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable elements + "Normal Reach" variable elements + "Super Reach" variable elements + "Re-fluctuating" variable elements + "Promotion Effect" variable elements" is likely to be selected (60% of the time). Also, by configuring the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable elements + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable elements + "Normal Reach" variable elements + "Super Reach" variable elements + "Promotion Effect" variable elements" to be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay that allows players to expect to win the small win type "Time Reduction C" from any of the variation patterns.

Next, in the Special Chart 1 Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f2, for "E8: Special Reach (Promotion Effect)", two selectable variation patterns are available: "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" + "Special Reach" + "Promotion Effect"," with a total variation time of 200 seconds; and "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" + "Special Reach" + "Re-variation" + "Promotion Effect"," with a total variation time of 210 seconds, and a value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E8: Special Reach (Promotion Effect)" is "0 to 4" for "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating elements of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating elements of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating elements of 'Special Reach' + fluctuating elements of 'Promotion Effect'", and "5 to 9" for "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating elements of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating elements of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating elements of 'Special Reach' + fluctuating elements of 'Re-fluctuation' + fluctuating elements of 'Promotion Effect'".

In other words, when the "Special Reach (Promotion Effect)" effect mode is selected in the Special Symbol 1 Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation effect is executed, the variation pattern is set to be selected 50% of the time, with the variation pattern being "variation elements of 'High-speed variation (long)' + variable elements of 'Slow-speed variation' + variable elements of 'Normal Reach' + variable elements of 'Special Reach' + variable elements of 'Promotion Effect'" and the variation pattern being selected 50% of the time, with the variation pattern being "variation elements of 'High-speed variation (long)' + variable elements of 'Slow-speed variation' + variable elements of 'Normal Reach' + variable elements of 'Special Reach' + variable elements of 'Re-variation' + variable elements of 'Promotion Effect'".

Therefore, in the "Special Reach (Promotion Effect)" presentation mode selected when the first special symbol wins the small jackpot type "Time Reduction C," the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" + "Special Reach" + "Promotion Effect" variation elements" and the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach" + "Re-fluctuating" + "Promotion Effect" variation elements" are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide gameplay in which the small jackpot type "Time Reduction C" can be equally likely to be won with either variation pattern.

Next, referring to Figure 17(a), we will explain the special symbol 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3 that is referenced when the second special symbol is a miss. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value) or a value that results in a small win (small win random number value), i.e., if it is a value that results in a miss, the special symbol 2 reserve number table 202d2 is referenced to select a stop pattern table 202e based on the game status and the number of reserved balls at that time, and a presentation mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area and the stop pattern table 202e. Then, based on the selected presentation mode, a group (group) to be referenced in the special symbol 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3 is determined. In the group (group) of the special chart 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is determined as the variation pattern for the variation effect held in that holding area.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202f3 for special symbol 2 losses, which is referenced when the second special symbol fails, one fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time; hereinafter, "fluctuation pattern" can of course be replaced with "fluctuation time") is provided for "E0: Non-reach/Long": "Fluctuation element for 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element for 'Slow-speed fluctuation'" with a total fluctuation time of '15 seconds'.

In the example shown in Figure 17(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern for "E0: Non-reach long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation'", and only "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation'" is set to be selectable.

In other words, when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3, which is referenced when the second special symbol variation performance is executed, all possible values ("0-9") of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with "variation elements of 'high-speed variation (long)' + "variation elements of 'slow-speed variation'". In other words, when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is used in the second special symbol variation performance, "variation elements of 'high-speed variation (long)' + "variation elements of 'slow-speed variation'" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f3 for Special Chart 2 misses, one fluctuation pattern is prepared for "E1: Non-Reach/Middle", with a total fluctuation time of "5 seconds" and "only fluctuation elements of 'High-Speed Fluctuation (Medium)'".

In the example shown in Figure 17(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern for "E1: Non-reach/Middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fast fluctuation (medium)" fluctuation elements only," and it is set so that only "Fast fluctuation (medium)" fluctuation elements only" can be selected.

In other words, when the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3, which is referenced when the second special symbol variation presentation is executed, "only the 'high-speed variation (middle)' variation elements" are associated with all possible values ('0-9') of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, when the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode is used in the second special symbol variation presentation, "only the 'high-speed variation (middle)' variation elements" are always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f3 for Special Chart 2 misses, one fluctuation pattern is prepared for "E3: Normal Reach": "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach'" with a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds".

In the example shown in Figure 17(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Normal Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach'", and it is set so that only "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach'" can be selected.

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3, which is referenced when the second special symbol variation presentation is executed, all possible values ("0-9") of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with "variation elements of 'high-speed variation (long)' + "low-speed variation" + "normal reach"." In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" presentation mode in the second special symbol variation presentation, the variation pattern always selected is "variation elements of 'high-speed variation (long)' + "low-speed variation" + "normal reach"."

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f3 for Special Chart 2 misses, one fluctuation pattern is prepared for "E4: Super Reach": "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Super Reach'" with a total fluctuation time of "60 seconds".

In the example shown in Figure 17(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Super Reach'", and it is set so that only "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Super Reach'" can be selected.

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3, which is referenced when the second special symbol variation performance is executed, all possible values ("0-9") of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with "variable elements of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variable elements of 'slow variation' + variable elements of 'normal reach' + variable elements of 'super reach'." In other words, in the case of the "Super Reach" presentation mode in the second special symbol variation performance, the variation pattern always selected is "variable elements of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variable elements of 'slow variation' + variable elements of 'normal reach' + variable elements of 'super reach'."

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f3 for Special Chart 2 misses, one fluctuation pattern is prepared for "E5: Special Reach": "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Special Reach'" with a total fluctuation time of "180 seconds".

In the example shown in Figure 17(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Special Reach'", and it is set so that only "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Special Reach'" can be selected.

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected in the Special Reach 2 Miss Variation Pattern Table 202f3, which is referenced when the second special symbol variation presentation is executed, all possible values (0-9) of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with "variation elements for 'High-Speed Variation (Long)' + variable elements for 'Slow-Speed Variation' + variable elements for 'Normal Reach' + variable elements for 'Special Reach'." In other words, in the case of the "Special Reach (Middle)" presentation mode in the second special symbol variation presentation, the variation pattern always selected is "variation elements for 'High-Speed Variation (Long)' + variable elements for 'Slow-Speed Variation' + variable elements for 'Normal Reach' + variable elements for 'Special Reach'."

Next, in the variation pattern table 202f3 for Special Chart 2 misses, "E9: Special Variation" has one variation pattern prepared: "Only the variation elements of 'Special Variation'" with a total variation time of "70 seconds."

In the example shown in Figure 17(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern for "E9: Special Fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "only the fluctuation elements of 'Special Fluctuation'", and it is set so that only "only the fluctuation elements of 'Special Fluctuation'" can be selected.

In other words, when the "special variation" presentation mode is selected in the special pattern 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3, which is referenced when the second special pattern variation presentation is executed, "only the variation elements of 'special variation'" are associated with all possible values ('0' to '9') of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, when the "special variation" presentation mode is selected in the second special pattern variation presentation, "only the variation elements of 'special variation'" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, referring to Figure 17(b), we will explain the special symbol 2 jackpot/small jackpot variation pattern table 202f4 that is referenced when a jackpot or small jackpot occurs for a second special symbol. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that results in a jackpot or small jackpot, the special symbol 2 reserved number table 202d2 is referenced to select a stop pattern table 202e based on the game status and the number of reserved balls at that time, and a presentation mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area and the stop pattern table 202e. Then, based on the selected presentation mode, a group (group) to be referenced in the special symbol 2 jackpot/small jackpot variation pattern table 202f4 is determined. In the group (group) of the special chart 2 big win/small win fluctuation pattern table 202f4, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern for the fluctuation performance held in that holding area.

In the Special Chart 2 big win/small win fluctuation pattern table 202f4, for "E3: Normal Reach", two selectable fluctuation patterns are available: "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + "Normal Reach'" fluctuation element" with a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds", and "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + "Normal Reach'" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation element" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 17(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for "E3: Normal reach" is "0 to 2" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal reach'", and "3 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal reach' + fluctuation element of 'Re-fluctuation'".

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 2 big win/small win variation pattern table 202f4, which is referenced when the second special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation elements + 'Slow-speed variation' variation elements + 'Normal reach' variation elements" is selected 30%, and the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation elements + 'Slow-speed variation' variation elements + 'Normal reach' variation elements + 'Re-variation' variation elements" is selected 70% of the time.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" presentation mode selected when the second special symbol hits a jackpot or small win, the variation pattern of "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable elements + 'Slow-speed fluctuation' variable elements + 'Normal reach' variable elements + 'Re-fluctuating' variable elements" is likely to be selected (70% of the time). Furthermore, by configuring the variation pattern of "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable elements + 'Slow-speed fluctuation' variable elements + 'Normal reach' variable elements" to also be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay that allows players to expect a jackpot or small win from either variation pattern.

Next, in the Special Chart 2 Big Win/Small Win Fluctuation Pattern Table 202f4, for "E4: Super Reach", two selectable fluctuation patterns are provided: "Fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "60 seconds" and "Fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach" + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "70 seconds", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 17(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for "E4: Super Reach" is "0 to 3" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuation element of 'Super Reach'", and "4 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuation element of 'Super Reach' + fluctuation element of 'Re-fluctuation'".

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected in the Special Symbol 2 Big Win/Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f4, which is referenced when the second special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variable elements + 'Slow-speed variation' variable elements + 'Normal Reach' variable elements + 'Super Reach' variable elements" is selected 40%, and the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variable elements + 'Slow-speed variation' variable elements + 'Normal Reach' variable elements + 'Super Reach' variable elements + 'Re-variation' variable elements" is selected 60% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode selected when the second special symbol hits a big or small jackpot, the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable elements + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable elements + "Normal Reach" variable elements + "Super Reach" variable elements + "Re-fluctuating" variable elements is likely to be selected (60% of the time). Furthermore, by configuring the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable elements + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable elements + "Normal Reach" variable elements + "Super Reach" variable elements" to also be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay that allows players to expect a big or small jackpot from any variation pattern.

Next, in the Special Chart 2 Big Win/Small Win Fluctuation Pattern Table 202f4, for "E5: Special Reach", two selectable fluctuation patterns are provided: "Fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of 180 seconds, and "Fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of 190 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 17(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for "E5: Special Reach" is "0 to 4" for "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Special Reach'", and "5 to 9" for "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Special Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Re-fluctuation'".

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected in the Special Symbol 2 Big Win/Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f4, which is referenced when the second special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern is set to be selected 50% of the time with "variation elements of 'High-speed variation (long)' + variable elements of 'Slow-speed variation' + variable elements of 'Normal Reach' + variable elements of 'Special Reach'", and 50% with "variation elements of 'High-speed variation (long)' + variable elements of 'Slow-speed variation' + variable elements of 'Normal Reach' + variable elements of 'Special Reach' + variable elements of 'Re-variation'".

Therefore, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode selected when the second special symbol hits a big or small jackpot, the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable elements + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable elements + "Normal Reach" variable elements + "Special Reach" variable elements" and the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable elements + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable elements + "Normal Reach" variable elements + "Super Reach" variable elements + "Re-fluctuating" variable elements" are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide gameplay in which a big or small jackpot can be expected equally with either variation pattern.

Next, in the Special Chart 2 Big Win/Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f4, two selectable variation patterns are provided for "E9: Special Variation": "Special Variation" variation elements only" with a total variation time of "70 seconds" and "Special Variation" variation elements + "Re-variation" variation elements" with a total variation time of "80 seconds", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 17(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern for "E9: Special Fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 4" for "only the fluctuation element of 'Special Fluctuation'" and "5 to 9" for "the fluctuation element of 'Special Fluctuation' + the fluctuation element of 'Re-fluctuation'."

In other words, when the "special variation" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 2 big win/small win variation pattern table 202f4, which is referenced when the second special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "only the variation elements of 'special variation'" is selected 50% of the time, and the variation pattern of "variable elements of 'special variation' and 're-variation'" is selected 50% of the time.

Therefore, in the "special variation" presentation mode selected when the second special symbol hits a jackpot or a small jackpot, the variation pattern of "special variation elements only" and the variation pattern of "special variation elements + re-variation elements" are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide gameplay in which either variation pattern can be expected to result in an equal jackpot or small jackpot.

Returning to Figure 6, we will continue the explanation. The regular map hit counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of "0 to 99", for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "99"). Furthermore, when the regular map hit counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the regular map hit counter C4.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal counter C4 (value = "0 to 99"), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 40), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 39).

The value of the regular map hit counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see Figure 40)), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is stored in one of the regular map reserve areas 1 to 4 provided in the regular map reserve ball storage area 203h of RAM 203. The data is then shifted sequentially to the regular map reserve ball execution area 203i in the order in which it was stored in the regular map reserve ball storage area 203h, and a hit determination is made against the value of the regular map hit counter C4 stored in that regular map reserve ball execution area 203i.

The random number value that results in a winning normal symbol is set for each game state by the normal symbol winning random number table 202i stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 (e.g., 70/100 in a low probability state, 99/100 in a high probability state, etc.), and a win is determined when the value of the normal symbol winning counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203i of RAM 203 matches the random number value that results in a winning normal symbol set by the normal symbol winning random number table 202i. Then, the normal symbol variable table 202j is referenced depending on the game state, and the variable display time for the normal symbol is set (e.g., 15 seconds when the time-saving function is not activated, 0.1 seconds when the time-saving function is activated, etc.), and after the variable display time has elapsed, a "○" symbol is displayed lit as the stopping symbol (normal symbol) on the normal symbol display device 83. Thereafter, the normal electric role release table 202k is referenced depending on the game status, and the release time of the normal electric role 72 is set (for example, 0.1 seconds x 1 time when the time-saving function is not activated, 5.8 seconds x 1 time when the time-saving function is activated, etc.), and during this release time, the appearance and disappearance plate 72a of the normal electric role 72 operates to open, during which time the ball can enter the second starting hole 71.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol winning counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding area does not match the value of the random number that results in a win set by the normal symbol winning random number table 202i, it is determined to be a loss. Then, the normal symbol fluctuation table 202j is referenced depending on the game status to set a variable display time, and after the variable display time has elapsed on the normal symbol display device 83, an "X" symbol is displayed lit as the stopping symbol (normal symbol). The normal symbol winning random number table 202i, normal symbol fluctuation table 202j, and normal electric symbol release table 202k will be described later in Figure 23.

Returning to Figure 5, we will continue our explanation. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in Figure 6, RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the MPU 201's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, input/output (Input/Output, hereafter abbreviated as "I/O") values are stored. RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including when a power outage occurs; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when power is turned on at a predetermined time (including when power is turned on after a power outage has been resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was cut off based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see Figure 39) when power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during the startup processing (see Figure 37) when power is turned on as a gaming condition. When power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal of MPU 201 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. When this power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see Figure 59) is immediately executed as power outage processing.

The RAM 203 further includes at least a first reserved ball count counter 203a, a second reserved ball count counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a reserved ball execution area 203f, a regular reserved ball count counter 203g, a regular reserved ball storage area 203h, a regular reserved ball execution area 203i, a low probability of time reduction flag 203j, a high probability of time reduction flag 203k, a special 1 time reduction counter 203m, a special 2 time reduction counter 203n, a total time reduction counter 203o, a jackpot flag 203p, a rescue counter 203r, and a rescue set flag 203s.

The first reserved ball counter 203a is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the dynamic display of the first special pattern (the variable display of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81) performed by the special pattern display device 37 as a result notification device, up to a maximum of four times, based on the ball entering the first starting hole 64 detected during the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) which is executed periodically every 2 milliseconds.

This first reserved ball counter 203a is initially set to "0" by the initial setting process of RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, each time a start winning entry into the first start hole 64 is detected and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special pattern increases, one is added up to the maximum value of "4" (see S305 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the first reserved ball counter 203a is decremented by one each time the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special pattern is executed (see S508 in FIG. 43).

The second reserved ball counter 203b, like the first reserved ball counter 203a, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the dynamic display of the second special pattern (the variable display of the third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81) performed by the special pattern display device 37 based on a start winning entry into the second start port 71 detected during a timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) that is executed periodically every 2 milliseconds.

Like the first reserved ball counter 203a, this second reserved ball counter 203b is initially set to "0" by the initial setting process of RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, each time a start winning entry into the second start port 71 is detected and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special pattern increases, one is added to the counter up to the maximum value of "4" (see S309 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the second reserved ball counter 203b is decremented by one each time the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special pattern is executed (see S505 in FIG. 43).

The value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern) or the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the first reserved ball command or the second reserved ball command as a game condition (see S312 in Figure 41). The first reserved ball command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a start winning entry into the first start port 64 is detected and the first reserved ball counter 203a is incremented by 1, and the second reserved ball command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the second reserved ball counter 203b into the second start port 71 is incremented by 1.

The audio lamp control device 113 can obtain the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first or second special pattern reserved in the main control device 110 using the first reserved ball count command or the second reserved ball count command. This allows the audio lamp control device 113 to manage the number of reserved balls for each special pattern dynamic display (variable effect) without accessing the main control device 110. Furthermore, by sending the first reserved ball count command or the second reserved ball count command from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 each time a start winning entry is detected in the first start port 64 or the second start port 71, even if the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable effect) of each special pattern managed by the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable effect) reserved in the main control device 110 due to noise or other factors, the deviation can be corrected by the next received first reserved ball count command or second reserved ball count command.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the main control unit 110 sends the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command to the audio lamp control unit 113, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command includes not only the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b that has been incremented by 1, but also the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, small jackpot type counter CK, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c (see Figure 6) in response to the start winning that triggered the increment of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b.

In other words, when a start win occurs, the main control unit 110 transmits the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, small jackpot type counter CK, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c to the audio lamp control unit 113 via the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command.

The audio lamp control device 113 reads ahead the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, small jackpot type counter CK, stop pattern selection counter C3, and change type counter CS1 transmitted by the first reserved ball count command or the second reserved ball count command before a change effect based on those values is executed, and determines what that change effect will be (whether it will be a jackpot, what the change time will be, etc.) before the change effect is executed. Then, based on the results of this read-ahead judgment, it can decide whether to execute various effects, and determine the effect content and execution time (timing) of the "reserve change notice."

It is also possible to configure the system to send separately the first reserved ball count command or second reserved ball count command indicating the number of reserved balls for the variable effect and a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc., separate from the first reserved ball count command or second reserved ball count command, the first reserved ball count command or second reserved ball count command may be generated when a ball enters the first start port 64 or the second start port 71, and commands similar to the variable pattern command and stop type command based on the ball entering (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) may be generated and sent to the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, the program for generating the variable pattern command and pre-stop type command can be reused to facilitate program creation.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is a memory for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the small jackpot type counter CK, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a start winning entry into the first start opening 64, which serves as the start detection area. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has entered the first start opening 64 (start winning entry) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), it obtains the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 from the counter buffer 203c and stores them in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d has four reserve areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) so that data (counter values C1, C3, CK, and CS1) corresponding to one start winning entry of the first special symbol can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see FIG. 6).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a memory for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, small jackpot type counter CK, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a start winning entry into the second start opening 71. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has entered the second start opening 71 (start winning entry) during the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40), it obtains the values of each counter C1-C3, CK, and CS1 from the counter buffer 203c and stores them in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e has four reserve areas (second reserved areas 1-4) so that data corresponding to one start winning entry of the second special pattern (counter values C1-C3, CK, and CS1) can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see Figure 6).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f is memory for storing data (counter values C1 to C3, CK, and CS1) to be referenced when starting execution, drawing a jackpot for the first or second special symbol during execution, setting the dynamic display and variable effects of the special symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, etc.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start the execution of the first or second special symbol variable effect, it shifts the data corresponding to the oldest start winning among the data corresponding to the start winning (counter values C1-C3, CK, CS1) stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage area 203e described above to this reserved ball execution area 203f in order to execute processes such as the jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variable effect. Note that in the first embodiment, "shift" refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Now, referring back to Figure 6, the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described in detail. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol, and to set the dynamic display and variable effects of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the jackpot lottery for the first or second special pattern, the dynamic display of the special pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and the setting of the variable presentation use the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, the small jackpot type counter CK used to determine the small jackpot type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the presentation mode of the variable presentation, and the variable type counter CS1 used to determine the variation pattern. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 obtained by the MPU 201 from the counter buffer 203c when a ball enters the first start port 64 (start entry), which serves as the start detection area, and the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 obtained by the MPU 201 from the counter buffer 203c when a ball enters the second start port 71 (start entry).

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is made up of four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4). Each of the four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a small prize type counter storage area 203d5 that stores the value of the small prize type counter CK.

Furthermore, like the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4). Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d, each of the four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) is provided with a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter storage area 203e4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1, and a small win type counter storage area 203d5 that stores the value of the small win type counter CK.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1, 203e1, jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3, 203e3, variable type counter storage areas 203d4, 203e4, and small jackpot type counter storage areas 203d5, 203e5 are all located together in a single reserved ball storage area 203d, 203e, but multiple reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each counter C1 to C3, CK, and CS1.

As mentioned above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d stores up to four sets of data (values of each counter C1, C3, CK, CS1) obtained when a ball enters the first start port 64 (start entry), which serves as the start detection area. In this case, data is stored in the available areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) in order of lowest area number (1 to 4). In other words, the area with the lowest area number stores data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the first start port 64, and the first reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the first start port 64.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e also stores up to four sets of data (values of counters C1-C3, CK, and CS1) obtained when a ball enters the second start port 71 (start entry). In this case, data is stored in the available areas of the four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1-4) in order of lowest area number (1-4). In other words, the area with the lowest area number stores data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the second start port 71, and the second reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the second start port 71.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f consists of only one area. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, this reserved ball execution area 203f is provided with a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter storage area 203f4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1, and a small win type counter storage area 203f5 that stores the value of the small win type counter CK.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the special symbol variable effect, if data (the values of each counter C1-C3, CK, and CS1) is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, it shifts the data stored in the second reserved first area to each of the areas 203f1-203f5 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, when it is time to start executing the variable effect, if no data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e but data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the MPU 201 shifts the data stored in the first reserved first area to each of the areas 203f1-203f5 of the reserved ball execution area 203f.

The data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is then referenced in the fluctuation start process (see Figure 44), and a jackpot lottery is held based on the reference data and the game status, and the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. The special symbol display device 37, which serves as a result notification device, dynamically displays a result based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

The variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation presentation of the special pattern based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the special pattern 1 stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be explained below. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, it determines whether data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. If the determination determines that data is stored in the second reserved first area, it shifts the random number value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved first area to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Similarly, the random number value in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, the random number value in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the variable type counter storage area 203f4, and the random number value in the small win type counter storage area 203e5 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the small win type counter storage area 203f5.

When the shifting of data to the reserved ball execution area 203f is complete, the second reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e to the area with the area number one smaller (1st to 3rd). Note that in the first embodiment, data shifting is only performed for the second reserved areas (1st to 4th) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e where data is stored (reserved).

Here, we will explain the data shifting performed for each reserved area within the second reserved ball storage area 203e. For example, assume that the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b is "4" when a decision is made to start the variable effect, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In this state, when the data in the second reserved area 1 is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f and the second reserved area 1 becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data in the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the area (1st to 3rd) with the area number one smaller. In other words, the data in the second reserved area 2 is shifted to the second reserved area 1, the data in the second reserved area 3 is shifted to the second reserved area 2, and the data in the second reserved area 4 is shifted to the second reserved area 3.

Also, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b is "2" when a decision is made to start the variable effect, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the second reserved area 2 to the second reserved area 1, and ends the data shifting. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the second reserved areas (3rd to 4th) where no data is stored (reserved), which reduces the number of data shifts and the control burden.

It is also possible to configure the system so that each piece of data in the second holding area (2nd to 4th) is shifted to an area with an area number one smaller, regardless of whether or not data is present. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the second holding area (2nd to 4th), making it easier to create programs.

On the other hand, if the MPU 201 determines that no data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e when the timing to start executing the variable effect arrives, it then determines whether data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d.If the determination shows that data is stored in the first reserved first area, it shifts the random number value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Similarly, the random number value in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, the random number value in the variable type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the variable type counter storage area 203f4, and the random number value in the small win type counter storage area 203d5 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the small win type counter storage area 203f5.

When the shifting of data to the reserved ball execution area 203f is complete, the first reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d to the area with the area number one smaller (1st to 3rd). Note that in the first embodiment, data shifting is performed only for the first reserved areas (1st to 4th) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d where data is stored (reserved).

Here, we will explain the data shifting performed for each reserved area within the first reserved ball storage area 203d. For example, assume that the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a is "4" when a decision is made to start the variable effect, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In this state, when the data in the first reserved area 1 is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f and the first reserved area 1 becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data in the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the area with the area number one smaller (1st to 3rd). In other words, the data in the first reserved area 2 is shifted to the first reserved area 1, the data in the first reserved area 3 is shifted to the first reserved area 2, and the data in the first reserved area 4 is shifted to the first reserved area 3.

Also, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a is "2" when a decision is made to start the variable effect, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the first reserved second area to the first reserved first area, and ends the data shifting. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the first reserved areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (reserved), which reduces the number of data shifts and the control burden.

It is also possible to configure the system so that each piece of data in the first holding area (second to fourth) is shifted to an area with an area number one smaller, regardless of whether or not data is present. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), making it easier to create programs.

In this way, data related to the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed and data related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed are stored separately, and when data related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stored, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed as a priority; when data related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not stored but the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stored, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed. By configuring it in this way, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed as a priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and by performing dynamic displays based on each data, it is possible to execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

Returning to Figure 5, we will continue the explanation. The regular reserved ball number counter 203g is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (wait times) for the variable display of regular symbols performed by the regular symbol display device 83, based on the passage of balls through the through gate 67 detected during the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40), which is executed periodically every two milliseconds.

Like the reserved ball counters 203a and 203b, this regular reserved ball counter 203g is initially set to "0" by the RAM 203 initialization process (see S117 in FIG. 37) after power is turned on. Then, each time a ball is detected passing through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls for the variable display of regular symbols increases, one is added to the counter up to the maximum value of "4" (see S406 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, the regular reserved ball counter 203g is decremented by one each time a variable display of a regular symbol is executed (see S705 in FIG. 56).

The regular symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is memory for storing the regular symbol hit counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a ball passing through the through gate 67. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has passed through the through gate 67 during timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40), it obtains the value of the regular symbol hit counter C4 from the counter buffer 203c and stores it in the regular symbol reserved ball storage area 203h. The regular symbol reserved ball storage area 203h has four reserve areas (regular symbol reserved areas 1 to 4) so that data corresponding to one reserved ball of a regular symbol (regular symbol hit counter C4 value) can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see Figure 6).

The normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203i is memory for storing data (the value of the normal symbol win counter C4) to be referenced when starting execution or when processing the winning lottery and variable display of normal symbols during execution.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the variable display of the normal symbol, it shifts one of the data (the value of the normal symbol winning counter C4) stored in the above-mentioned normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203h to this normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203i in order to execute processes such as the normal symbol winning lottery and the setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. Note that in the first embodiment, "shift" refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Now, referring again to Figure 6, the details of the regular reserved ball storage area 203h and the regular reserved ball execution area 203i will be explained. The regular reserved ball storage area 203h and the regular reserved ball execution area 203i are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform processes such as the regular symbol winning lottery and setting the variable display of the regular symbol display device 83.

As described above, the normal symbol winning counter C4 used for the normal symbol winning lottery is used to draw the winning normal symbol and to set the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h stores the value of the normal symbol winning counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when a ball passes through the through gate 67.

The regular map reserve ball storage area 203h is made up of four reserve areas (regular map reserve areas 1 to 4). Each of the four reserve areas (regular map reserve areas 1 to 4) has a regular map random number counter storage area (not shown) that stores the value of the regular map counter C4.

This regular map reserve ball storage area 203h stores up to four sets of data (value of regular map per counter C4) obtained when a ball passes through the through gate 67. In this case, data is stored in the empty areas of the four reserve areas (regular map reserve areas 1 to 4) in order of lowest area number (1 to 4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the older the data corresponding to the ball passing through the through gate 67 that is stored, and regular map reserve area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest ball passing through the through gate 67.

On the other hand, the regular map reserve ball execution area 203i is composed of only one area. This regular map reserve ball execution area 203i, like the regular map reserve ball storage area 203h, is provided with a regular map random number counter storage area (not shown) that stores the value of the regular map win counter C4.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to execute the variable display of the normal symbol, it shifts the data stored in the normal symbol reserve first area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203h to this normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203i.

The data shifted to the normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203i is then referenced in the normal symbol variation process (see Figure 56), and a winning lottery is held based on the reference data and the game status, and the content of the variable display is determined. Under the control of the main control device 110, the normal symbol display device 83 performs a variable display based on the determined content.

The details of the data shift will be explained below. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable display of the normal symbol, it shifts the random number value in the normal symbol win random number counter storage area (not shown) in the normal symbol reserve first area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203h to the normal symbol win random number counter storage area (not shown) in the normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203i.

When the shifting of data to the regular map reserve ball execution area 203i is completed, the regular map reserve area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the regular map reserve ball storage area 203h to the area with the area number one smaller (1st to 3rd). Note that in the first embodiment, data shifting is only performed for the regular map reserve areas (1st to 4th) in the regular map reserve ball storage area 203h where data is stored (reserved).

Here, we will explain the data shifting performed for each reserved area within the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h. For example, assume that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203g is "4" when a decision is made to start variable display of normal symbols, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h. In this state, when the data in the normal symbol reserved area 1 is shifted to the normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i and the normal symbol reserved area 1 becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data in the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the area with the area number 1 smaller (1st to 3rd). In other words, the data in the normal symbol reserved area 2 is shifted to the normal symbol reserved area 1, the data in the normal symbol reserved area 3 is shifted to the normal symbol reserved area 2, and the data in the normal symbol reserved area 4 is shifted to the normal symbol reserved area 3.

Furthermore, for example, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203g is "2" when a decision is made to start variable display of normal symbols, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the normal symbol reserved area 2 to the normal symbol reserved area 1, and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the normal symbol reserved areas (3rd to 4th) where no data is stored (reserved), which reduces the number of data shifts and the control burden.

In addition, regardless of whether data is present or not, each piece of data in the general map holding areas (2nd to 4th) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the general map holding areas (2nd to 4th), making it easier to create programs.

Returning to Figure 5, the explanation continues. The time-saving low probability flag 203j is a flag that indicates, when on, the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," meaning that the normal symbol is in a low probability state, while the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened and the normal electric role 72 is in a prolonged opening state. This time-saving low probability flag 203j is initially set to off when the RAM is cleared when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (see S116 in Figure 37). In the first embodiment, when the rescue setting completed flag 203s is off (see S5401: No in Figure 47) and the number of rescue conditions achieved by the dynamic display of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached "800 times" (in the first embodiment), the time-saving low probability flag 203j is set to on to transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" (see S5406 in Figure 47). Thereafter, during the time-saving counting process executed in the variable stop process executed when the dynamic display of the special symbol stops, when the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m (described below) is no longer greater than "0", when the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is no longer greater than "0", or when the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is no longer greater than "0", and the time-saving low probability flag 203j is set to ON (see S5310: No in FIG. 46), or at the beginning of the winning process in the event of a jackpot win (see S602 in FIG. 48), the flag is set to OFF.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the time-saving low probability flag 203j is turned on as game information, the special symbol is in a low probability state, and the normal symbol is also in a low probability state, so the normal symbol winning random number table 202i is referenced to draw a winning lottery for the normal symbol, but the normal symbol variation table 202j is referenced to set the variable display time for the normal symbol as the shortened state of the normal symbol, and the normal electric symbol opening table 202k is referenced to set the extended opening state of the normal electric symbol 72, and the opening drive of the normal electric symbol 72 is performed.

The time-saving high probability flag 203k is a flag that indicates, when on, the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," a high probability state for normal symbols, a shortened state for the variable display time of normal symbols, and a prolonged state for the opening of normal electric role 72. This time-saving high probability flag 203k is initially set to off when the RAM is cleared upon power-on of the pachinko machine 10 (see S116 in FIG. 37). Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, at the end of a jackpot, the time-saving high probability flag 203k is set to on regardless of the type of jackpot that was won (see S6601 in FIG. 55). Thereafter, during the time-saving counting process executed in the variable stop process, which is the process performed when the dynamic display of the special symbol stops, when the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m (described below) is no longer greater than "0", when the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is no longer greater than "0", or when the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is no longer greater than "0", and the time-saving high probability flag 203k is set to ON (see S5310: Yes in FIG. 46), or at the beginning of the winning process when a jackpot is won (see S602 in FIG. 48), the flag is set to OFF.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the time-saving high probability flag 203k is turned on as game information, the normal symbol win random number table 202i is referenced to determine the high probability state for normal symbols, a lottery for a normal symbol win is conducted, the normal symbol variable table 202j is referenced to determine the shortened state for normal symbols, and the normal symbol opening table 202k is referenced to determine the extended opening state for normal electric symbol 72, and the opening drive for normal electric symbol 72 is performed.

Next, the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m is a counter for determining the first termination condition of the "time-saving function." It counts the number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed after a jackpot has ended and when a rescue condition is met, and determines the time-saving termination condition. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time-saving termination condition is set to be different depending on the number of times the special symbol is executed during a jackpot and when a rescue condition is met, and when the set number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the currently executing "time-saving function" is terminated, and the machine transitions from the "normal symbol high-probability time-saving state" or the "normal symbol low-probability time-saving state" to the "normal game state."

This special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m is initially set to "0" by the RAM 203 initialization process (see S117 in FIG. 37) after power is turned on. Also, during win processing, the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m is cleared to "0" as part of the initialization process at the time of a jackpot (see S603 in FIG. 48). Then, during jackpot termination processing, regardless of the type of jackpot or small jackpot that was won, the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m is set to "7" (see S6604 and S6607 in FIG. 55). Also, in a low-probability state for special symbols, if the number of times the dynamic display is executed reaches the number of times the rescue condition is met ("800 times" in the first embodiment), and if the rescue setting flag 203s, also described below as game information, is not set to on, the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m is set to "100" (see S5404 in FIG. 47). Meanwhile, the value of the special symbol 1 time reduction counter 203m is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" (see S5302 in Figure 46).

Then, when the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m becomes "0" (S5303: No in FIG. 46), it is determined that the time-saving termination condition based on the number of times the first special symbol is executed has been met, and the on-state high-probability time-saving flag 203k or low-probability time-saving flag 203j is set to off (see S5311 or S5312 in FIG. 46), thereby terminating the "time-saving function."

The value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m may be configured to be decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed. When configured in this manner, it is determined that the time-saving end condition has been met when the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "7").

Next, the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is a counter for determining the first termination condition of the "time-saving function." It counts the number of times the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed after a jackpot has ended and when a rescue condition is met, and determines the time-saving termination condition. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time-saving termination condition is set to be different depending on the number of times the special symbol is executed during a jackpot and when a rescue condition is met, and the machine is configured to terminate the "time-saving function" currently being executed and transition from the "normal symbol high-probability time-saving state" or the "normal symbol low-probability time-saving state" to the "normal game state."

This special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is initially set to "0" by the initial setting process of RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Also, during win processing, the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is cleared to "0" as part of the initialization process at the time of a jackpot (see S603 in FIG. 48). Then, during jackpot termination processing, if a jackpot type "Time-saving B" or "Time-saving C" is won during "normal game mode," the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is set to "1" (see S6608 in FIG. 55). At the end of a jackpot other than when a jackpot type "Time-saving B" or "Time-saving C" is won during "normal game mode," the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is set to "5" (see S6605 in FIG. 55). Furthermore, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the number of times the dynamic display is executed reaches the number of times the rescue condition is met (800 times in the first embodiment), and the rescue setting flag 203s, also described below, is not set to on, the value of the special symbol 2 time reduction counter 203n is set to 100 (see S5404 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the value of the special symbol 2 time reduction counter 203n is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" (see S5306 in FIG. 46).

Then, when the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n becomes "0" (S5307: No in FIG. 46), it is determined that the time-saving termination condition based on the number of times the second special symbol is executed has been met, and the on-state high-probability time-saving flag 203k or low-probability time-saving flag 203j is set to off (see S5311 or S5312 in FIG. 46), thereby terminating the "time-saving function."

The value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n may be configured to be decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed. When configured in this manner, it is determined that the time-saving end condition has been met when the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n reaches a predetermined value (for example, "5" or "1").

Next, the total time-saving counter 203o is a counter for determining one of the termination conditions of the "time-saving function." It counts the number of times the dynamic display of special symbols is executed after a jackpot has ended and when a rescue condition is met, and determines the time-saving termination condition. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time-saving termination condition is set to be different depending on the number of times the special symbol is executed when a jackpot has ended and when a rescue condition is met, and the machine is configured to terminate the "time-saving function" currently being executed and transition from the "normal symbol high probability time-saving state" or the "normal symbol low probability time-saving state" to the "normal game state."

This total time-saving counter 203o is initially set to "0" by the initialization process of RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Also, during win processing, the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is cleared to "0" as part of the initialization process at the time of a jackpot (see S603 in FIG. 48). Then, during jackpot termination processing, if a jackpot of type "Time-saving B" or "Time-saving C" is won during the "normal game state," the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is set to "8" (see S6609 in FIG. 55). At the end of a jackpot other than when a jackpot of type "Time-saving B" or "Time-saving C" is won during the "normal game state," the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is set to "12" (see S6606 in FIG. 55). Furthermore, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the number of times the dynamic display is executed reaches the number of times the rescue condition is met (800 times in the first embodiment), and if the rescue setting flag 203s, also described below, is not set to on, the value of the total time reduction counter 203o is set to 100 (see S5404 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the value of the total time reduction counter 203o is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" (see S5304 and S5308 in FIG. 46).

Then, when the value of the total time-saving counter 203o becomes "0" (S5305: No or S5309: No in FIG. 46), it is determined that the time-saving termination condition based on the number of times the special pattern is executed has been met, and the on-state high-probability time-saving flag 203k or low-probability time-saving flag 203j is set to off (see S5311 or S5312 in FIG. 46), thereby terminating the "time-saving function."

The value of the total time-saving counter 203o may be configured to be decremented by 1 each time a dynamic display of a special symbol is executed. In this configuration, it is determined that the time-saving termination condition has been met when the value of the total time-saving counter 203o reaches a predetermined value (for example, "12" or "8").

The jackpot flag 203p is a flag that determines whether or not a jackpot state will occur based on the ball passing through the specific area 65d.

This jackpot flag 203p is initially set to OFF by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, when a ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g provided in the specific area 65d that can be opened during a small jackpot game, the jackpot flag 203p is set to ON (see S6209 in FIG. 51). On the other hand, in the win process (see FIG. 48) described below, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203p is set to ON (see S608: Yes in FIG. 48), the jackpot flag 203p is set to OFF (see S609 in FIG. 48). After the jackpot flag 203p is set from ON to OFF, a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type or small jackpot type is initiated.

The rescue counter 203r is a counter that counts whether or not to transition to a "normal low-probability time-shortened state" based on the number of times that the dynamic display of a special symbol is executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of a special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (i.e., "800 times") in a low-probability state of a special symbol, that is, when the value of the rescue counter 203r as game information reaches the value stored in the rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 203q, the game state is configured to transition to a "normal low-probability time-shortened state."

This rescue counter 203r is initially set to "0" during the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 (see S117 in Figure 37). Then, in a low probability state for special symbols, i.e., in the "normal game state" or the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," the rescue counter is incremented by one each time a dynamic display of a special symbol is executed as a game condition in the rescue achievement counting process, which is an update process within the variation stop process (S513) (see S5402 in Figure 47). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the value of this rescue counter 203r reaches the value stored in the rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 203q (i.e., "800 times"), the values of the special chart 1 time reduction counter 203m, the special chart 2 time reduction counter 203n, and the total time reduction counter 203o are set to "100", and the time reduction low probability flag 203j is set to ON (see S5404 and S5406 in FIG. 47), and the state transitions to the "normal chart low probability time reduction state".

On the other hand, even in the "normal game state," if the rescue setting flag 203s described below is on, that is, if the game state has been such that the ceiling function has been activated at least once after a jackpot game, the rescue counter 203r is not updated when the dynamic display of a special symbol is executed (see S5401: Yes in Figure 47).

Therefore, the rescue counter 203r as game information is configured to be updatable only in a specific game state, i.e., the "normal game state" when the rescue setting flag 203s is off.

This rescue counter 203r is cleared to "0" at the beginning of the winning process when a jackpot is won (see S603 in Figure 48). This allows the number of times the rescue condition is met to be reset each time a jackpot occurs, and if a predetermined period of time passes without a jackpot being won in the dynamic display of special symbols after a jackpot game, a "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" can be triggered as a rescue measure for the player.

The value of the rescue counter 203r as game information may be updated by subtracting 1 each time a dynamic display of a special symbol is executed, or by some other method. If the method for updating the value of the rescue counter 203r is subtraction, the rescue counter 203r is set to the value of the number of rescue conditions that have been met, which is determined in the rescue condition meeting number lottery process when the RAM 203 is initialized after power-on and when a jackpot ends.

Furthermore, the timing for updating the value of the relief counter 203r does not have to be when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, but may be configured to update when the dynamic display of the special pattern starts (see Figure 44) or when the pattern determination time in the update state ends (see S503 in Figure 43).

Furthermore, the timing of transitioning to the "normal low probability time shortened state" can be determined in advance, such as when the dynamic display of the special symbol ends, when the symbol determination time ends, or when the dynamic display of the special symbol begins after the value of the rescue counter 203r reaches the number of times the rescue condition has been met.

The rescue setting flag 203s is a flag used to determine whether the dynamic display of a special symbol has reached the rescue condition fulfillment count once after a jackpot game. This rescue setting flag 203s is initially set to OFF during the startup process of the pachinko machine 10 (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, if the dynamic display of a special symbol does not transition to a jackpot state a predetermined number of times (i.e., 800 times) in a low probability state for a special symbol, that is, if the value of the rescue counter 203r (game information) reaches the value stored in the rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 203q (i.e., 800 times), the rescue setting flag 203s is set to ON after a jackpot game, assuming that the ceiling function has been activated once (see S5405 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the rescue setting flag 203s is set to OFF at the beginning of the winning process when a jackpot is won (see S602 in FIG. 48).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the rescue setting flag 203s is set to on, i.e., if the ceiling function has been activated even once after a jackpot game, the ceiling function is configured not to be activated again, and by referencing the rescue setting flag 203s, the ceiling function that is activated after a jackpot game can be limited to one time.

Furthermore, when the rescue setting flag 203s is set to ON, the rescue counter 203r is configured not to be updated when the dynamic display of a special symbol as a game condition is executed (see S5401: Yes in Figure 47).

In other words, a gaming state in which the rescue setting flag 203s is set to ON is not a gaming state in which the rescue counter 203r as gaming information can be updated; in other words, it is not the "normal gaming state" in which the rescue setting flag 203s is OFF, and is not a specific gaming state as an update state.

The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores a jackpot opening table 202g that is referenced to control the opening of the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65, which serves as a movable device, when a jackpot is won in the lottery game using the first or second special symbol.

Now, with reference to Figure 18, the jackpot opening table 202g will be described. Figure 18 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot opening table 202g stored in ROM 202. The jackpot opening table 202g is referenced when a jackpot with the first or second special symbol occurs, and based on the jackpot type or small jackpot type that generates the jackpot with each special symbol, the opening mode of the large prize opening plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 (number of rounds, opening time, interval time, ending time, maximum opening time, maximum number of prizes, number of prize balls), and the game state to which the player transitions after the jackpot ends are specified.

First, the jackpot opening table 202g is divided into opening modes based on the type of jackpot that is won when a jackpot is won or the type of small jackpot that is won when a small jackpot is won, which are selected based on the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 (hereinafter, the first start port 64 and the second start port 71 may be collectively referred to as "start ports 64, 71") that are most likely to be won in each game state.

Specifically, the opening mode of the large prize opening opening plate 65a is specified for "normal gaming state A," which is referenced when the small prize type "time reduction B" or "time reduction C" is won in "normal gaming state A," and for "normal high probability time reduction state/normal low probability time reduction state/normal gaming state B," which is referenced when the large prize type "time reduction A" or the small prize type "time reduction B," "time reduction C," or "time reduction D" is won in "normal high probability time reduction state," "normal low probability time reduction state," or "normal gaming state B."

As shown in Figure 18, in the "normal game state A" of the jackpot opening table 202g, if the small jackpot type "Time Reduction B" is won and a ball passes through the specific area 65d while the variable winning device 65 is open in the first round, the variable winning device 65 (large winning port) is opened for four rounds. The opening time for the jackpot is set to "30 seconds," the IT time is set to "1 second," and the ED time is set to "30 seconds." The maximum opening time for one round is set to "30 seconds," the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning ball is set to "10 balls." After the jackpot game ends when the small jackpot type "Time Reduction B" is won in the "normal game state A," the system is configured to transition to the "normal high probability time reduction state A." Note that the OP time when any of the small win types on the jackpot opening table 202g is won refers to the time it takes to transition to the jackpot game (second round) if the ball passes through the specific area 65d during the small win game (first round).

Next, in the "normal game state A" of the jackpot opening table 202g, if the small jackpot type "Time Reduction C" is won, and the variable winning device 65 (large prize opening) is opened for six rounds, provided that the ball passes through the specific area 65d while the variable winning device 65 is open in the first round. The opening time for that jackpot is set to "30 seconds," the IT time is set to "1 second," and the ED time is set to "30 seconds." The maximum opening time for one round is also set to "30 seconds," the maximum number of prizes in one round is set to "10," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one prize is set to "10." After the jackpot game ends when the small jackpot type "Time Reduction C" is won in the "normal game state A," the game is configured to transition to the "normal, high-probability, time-reduced state A."

Next, in the "normal game state A" of the jackpot opening table 202g, if the small jackpot type "Time Reduction D" is won and the variable winning device 65 (large prize opening) as a movable device is opened for nine rounds, provided that the ball passes through the specific area 65d while the variable winning device 65 is open in the first round. The opening time for that jackpot is set to "30 seconds," the IT time is set to "1 second," and the ED time is set to "30 seconds." The maximum opening time for one round is also set to "30 seconds," the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10." After the small jackpot type "Time Reduction D" jackpot game ends in the "normal game state A," the game is configured to transition to the "normal high probability time reduction state B."

Next, when the "Time-Reduction A" jackpot type is won in the "Normal High-Probability Time-Reduction State, Normal Low-Probability Time-Reduction State, and Normal Play State B" of the jackpot opening table 202g, the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65, which serves as a movable device, is repeatedly opened and closed over 10 rounds. The OP time is set to "10 seconds," the IT time is set to "1 second," and the ED time is set to "10 seconds." The maximum opening time for one round is set to "30 seconds," the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning ball is set to "10 balls." After the "Time-Reduction A" jackpot play ends in the "Normal High-Probability Time-Reduction State," "Normal Low-Probability Time-Reduction State," or "Normal Play State B," the system is configured to transition to the "Normal High-Probability Time-Reduction State B."

Next, in the "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State/Normal Low Probability Time-Shortened State/Normal Game State B" of the jackpot opening table 202g, if the small jackpot type "Time-Shortened B" is won, and the variable winning device 65 (large winning port) as a movable device is opened for four rounds, provided that the ball passes through the specific area 65d while the variable winning device 65 is open in the first round. The opening time for that jackpot is set to "10 seconds," the IT time is set to "1 second," and the ED time is set to "30 seconds." The maximum opening time for one round is also set to "30 seconds," the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning ball is set to "10 balls." Furthermore, in the "normal high probability time shortening state," "normal low probability time shortening state," or "normal game state B," after the end of a jackpot game of the small jackpot type "time shortening B," the game is configured to transition to the "normal high probability time shortening state B."

Next, in the "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State/Normal Low Probability Time-Shortened State/Normal Play State B" of the jackpot opening table 202g, if the small jackpot type "Time-Shortened C" is won, and the variable winning device 65 (large winning port) as a movable device is opened for six rounds, provided that the ball passes through the specific area 65d while the variable winning device 65 is open in the first round. The opening time for that jackpot is set to "10 seconds," the IT time is set to "1 second," and the ED time is set to "30 seconds." The maximum opening time for one round is also set to "30 seconds," the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning ball is set to "10 balls." Furthermore, in the "normal high probability time shortening state," "normal low probability time shortening state," or "normal game state B," after the end of a jackpot game of small jackpot type "time shortening C," the game is configured to transition to "normal high probability time shortening state B."

Next, in the "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State/Normal Low Probability Time-Shortened State/Normal Play State B" of the jackpot opening table 202g, if the small jackpot type "Time-Shortened D" is won, and the variable winning device 65 (large winning port) as a movable device is opened for nine rounds, provided that the ball passes through the specific area 65d while the variable winning device 65 is open in the first round. The opening time for that jackpot is set to "10 seconds," the IT time is set to "1 second," and the ED time is set to "30 seconds." The maximum opening time for one round is also set to "30 seconds," the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning ball is set to "10 balls." Furthermore, in the "normal high probability time shortening state," "normal low probability time shortening state," or "normal game state B," after the end of a jackpot game of small jackpot type "time shortening D," the game is configured to transition to the "normal high probability time shortening state B."

In this way, in a "cascade" state where right-hand play is maintained and special jackpots occur frequently and consecutively, the OP time, IT time, and ED time for any jackpot type are set to be shorter than the OP time, IT time, and ED time for the first jackpot in the "normal play state." This shortens the overall jackpot consumption time during the "cascade" state and shortens the time to reach the next jackpot in the "cascade" state. This shortens the time until the next jackpot occurs in the "cascade" state, preventing the player from losing interest in the game due to the long time it takes to reach the next jackpot even in the "cascade" state. By quickly achieving successive jackpots, the player is given a sense of exhilaration and can increase their interest in the game.

Furthermore, by making the OP time, IT time, and ED time for the first jackpot in the "normal game mode" longer than the OP time, IT time, and ED time for the jackpot in the "consecutive win" mode, it becomes possible to execute a wide variety of effects during that time. By configuring it in this way, for example, during the OP time and ED time for the first jackpot, it is possible to explain how to play the pachinko machine 10 (e.g., suggesting the firing mode, suggesting how to prevent cards inserted in the card sandwich from being forgotten to be removed, explaining the future game state, etc.), or to execute effects celebrating the first jackpot from the "normal game mode." This makes it easier for players to understand how to play the pachinko machine 10, and allows them to realize that they have finally won the jackpot, thereby contributing to increasing the player's interest.

The opening mode of the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a upon a jackpot based on the type of jackpot (OP time, IT time, ED time, number of times, maximum opening time, maximum number of winning balls, number of prize balls, and transition game state) is not limited to the above embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the number of times it opens (number of rounds) may be configured to differ for each type of jackpot, the maximum opening time may be configured to change for each type of jackpot, or the maximum number of winning balls may be configured to change. By varying the number of prize balls that can be paid out for each type of jackpot won, it is possible to create differences in the game value that is directly awarded depending on the type of jackpot won.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to transition to a different game state for each type of jackpot, and it may be configured so that multiple types of jackpots transition to a common game state. Furthermore, the OP time and ED time may be configured to be different, or the IT time may be set to be longer than the OP time or ED time. Also, the minimum opening time for one round may be set to be shorter than the IT time, OP time, or ED time. Furthermore, at least one of the OP time, IT time, or ED time may be set to be the same for each type of jackpot.

Next, the small win opening table 202h will be described with reference to Figure 19. Figure 19 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the small win opening table 202h stored in ROM 202. The small win opening table 202h is referenced when a small win occurs with the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and the opening mode of the large win opening plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 (number of openings in one round, opening time, interval time, ending time, maximum opening time, maximum number of winning balls, number of winning balls) is specified based on the type of small win when a small win occurs with each special pattern.

This small prize opening table 202h categorizes opening modes, etc. based on the game state at the time of winning a small prize, the type of special symbol, and the type of small prize. Specifically, the opening mode of the large prize opening plate 65a is specified for "normal game state A," which is referenced when a small prize is won in "normal game state A," and for "normal high probability time shortened state/normal low probability time shortened state/normal game state B," which is referenced when a small prize is won in "normal high probability time shortened state," "normal low probability time shortened state," or "normal game state B."

As shown in FIG. 19, when the small prize type "small prize A" is won in the "normal gaming state A" of the small prize opening table 202h, the large prize opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65, which serves as a movable device, is opened six times during one round, the OP time is set to "10 seconds," the IT time is set to "1.2 seconds," and the ED time is set to "5 seconds." The maximum opening time for one opening is set to "0.1 seconds," the maximum number of winning balls per round is set to "10 balls," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning ball is set to "10 balls." After the small prize game of the small prize type "small prize A" ends, the game transitions to the "normal gaming state A" because no ball has passed through the specific area 65d.

Next, in the "normal game state A" of the small prize opening table 202h, if the small prize type "Time Reduction B" or "Time Reduction C" is won, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65, which serves as a movable device, is opened six times during one round, the OP time is set to "10 seconds," and the IT time is set to "1.2 seconds." The maximum opening time for one opening is set to "0.1 seconds," the maximum number of prizes per round is set to "10 balls," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one prize is set to "10 balls." After the small prize game of the small prize type "Time Reduction B" or "Time Reduction C" ends, the game transitions to a large prize game (four or six rounds) based on the ball passing through the specific area 65d. Furthermore, if the ball passes through the specific area 65d when the small win type "Time Reduction B" or "Time Reduction C" is won, the game will not transition to the ending time for the small win game, but will transition to the opening time for the big win game ("10 seconds" (see Figure 18)). For this reason, no ending time is set when the ball passes through the specific area 65d when the small win type "Time Reduction B" or "Time Reduction C" is won.

Next, when the small prize type "small prize A" is won in the "normal high probability time shortened state/normal low probability time shortened state/normal game state B" of the small prize opening table 202h, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65, which serves as a movable device, is opened six times during one round, the OP time is set to "5 seconds," the IT time is set to "1.2 seconds," and the ED time is set to "5 seconds." Furthermore, the maximum opening time for one opening is set to "0.1 seconds," the maximum number of winning balls per round is set to "10," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10." After the small prize game for the small prize type "small prize A" ends, the game returns to the game state at the time of the small prize win because the ball has not passed through the specific area 65d.

Next, when the small prize type "Time Reduction B" or "Time Reduction C" is won in the "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State/Normal Low Probability Time Reduction State/Normal Play State B" of the small prize opening table 202h, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65, which serves as a movable device, is opened six times during one round, the OP time is set to "5 seconds," and the IT time is set to "1.2 seconds." The maximum opening time for one opening is set to "0.1 seconds," the maximum number of prizes per round is set to "10," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one win is set to "10." After the small prize game for the small prize type "Time Reduction B" or "Time Reduction C" ends, the game transitions to the large prize game (four or six rounds) based on the ball passing through the specific area 65d.

Next, when the small prize type "small prize B" is won in the "normal high probability time shortened state/normal low probability time shortened state/normal game state B" of the small prize opening table 202h, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65, which serves as a movable device, is opened 10 times during one round, the OP time is set to "5 seconds," the IT time is set to "1.2 seconds," and the ED time is set to "5 seconds." In addition, the maximum opening time for one opening is set to "0.1 seconds," the maximum number of winning balls per round is set to "10," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10." After the small prize play for the small prize type "small prize B" ends, the game transitions to the game state when a small prize is won, because the ball has not passed through the specific area 65d.

Next, when the small prize type "Time Reduction D" is won in the "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State/Normal Low Probability Time Reduction State/Normal Play State B" of the small prize opening table 202h, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65, which serves as a movable device, is opened 10 times during one round, the OP time is set to "5 seconds," and the IT time is set to "1.2 seconds." The maximum opening time for one opening is set to "0.1 seconds," the maximum number of winning balls per round is set to "10," and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10." After the small prize game for the small prize type "Time Reduction D" ends, the game transitions to the big prize game (9 rounds) based on the ball passing through the specific area 65d.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of times the large prize opening/closing plate 65a opens (i.e., six times) when a small prize is won with the dynamic display of the first special pattern (i.e., when the small prize type "small prize A," "time reduction B," or "time reduction C" is won) is less than the number of times the large prize opening/closing plate 65a opens (i.e., ten times) when a small prize is won with the dynamic display of the second special pattern (i.e., when the small prize type "small prize B" or "time reduction D" is won).

As mentioned above, if a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the rescue priority notification period in "normal game state A," the expected value of balls that can be won is higher when playing using the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won.

When a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during this rescue priority notification period, the opening time of the small jackpot is configured to display a right-hit notification effect (i.e., a rescue priority notification effect) that does not strongly suggest right-hit play and does not emphasize the occurrence of a jackpot compared to the jackpot priority notification effect (see Figure 89 (d)). Furthermore, if the ball does not pass through specific area 65d during a small jackpot play, the player will temporarily suspend ball firing and wait for the small jackpot play to end. Therefore, if the opening time when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won is set long, the period for which ball firing is suspended will also be long, which may cause stress to the player and may also lead to a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special 1 small jackpot is won, the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area 65d by performing a right-hand hit is set, and the period during which the ball is interrupted is not too long even if a right-hand hit is not performed when a special 1 small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, if a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the jackpot priority notification period in "normal game state A" (see Figure 28), the expected value of balls that can be won by playing using the right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won is configured to be higher. Furthermore, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the jackpot priority notification period, a right-hand play notification effect is displayed as the first notification mode during the opening time of the small jackpot, strongly suggesting right-hand play and emphasizing the occurrence of a jackpot (see Figure 89 (b)).

In other words, if a small win on Special Chart 1 is won in "Normal Game State A," the player will have to decide during the OP time when the right-hit notification effect is performed whether to use the right-hit play method when a small win is won, or the left-hit play method when a small win is won.

Here, if the OP time when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1 in "Normal Game State A" is set to be short (for example, "3 seconds"), even if the right-hit notification effects are different for each period (jackpot priority period or rescue priority notification period), the player may not be able to fully recognize the differences in the right-hit notification effects or the suggested content of each notification effect, and may end up making the wrong decision about how to play. Furthermore, because the OP time is short, there is a risk that the player may not be able to fully decide whether to play with a right-hit method when a small jackpot is won, or with a left-hit method when a small jackpot is won.

For this reason, by setting the OP time when a small win on Special Chart 1 is won in "Normal Game State A" longer (i.e., 10 seconds), the player can check the right-hit notification effect that is executed during that OP time and determine whether or not to play right during the small win game.

In addition, when a small jackpot is won other than when a special 1 small jackpot is won in "normal gaming state A" (i.e., when a small jackpot type "small jackpot B" or "time-saving D" is won in "normal gaming state A," or when a small jackpot type "small jackpot A," "time-saving B," "time-saving C," "small jackpot B," or "time-saving D" is won in "normal high-probability time-saving state," "normal low-probability time-saving state," or "normal gaming state B"), the expected value of balls that can be won by passing the ball through specific area 65d during the small jackpot game is configured to be higher, and since only effect 1 is executed for the right-hit notification during the small jackpot OP time, the OP time when the small jackpot is won is set to a uniform "5 seconds."

20 to 22, we will explain the opening and closing behavior of the large prize opening plate 65a by the large prize opening solenoid 65b based on a small prize win with each special symbol, the ball detection behavior of the large prize opening switch 65c, the opening and closing behavior of the specific area opening plate 65e by the specific area solenoid 65f, the ball detection behavior of the specific area switch 65g, and the setting behavior of the large prize flag 203p (see FIG. 5) based on ball detection by the specific area switch 65g. Figure 20 shows the drive patterns of the large prize opening solenoid 65b and the specific area solenoid 65f, the detection behavior of the large prize opening switch 65c and the specific area switch 65g, and the setting behavior of the large prize flag 203p when a small prize type "Time Reduction B (Small Prize A)" or a small prize type "Time Reduction C (Small Prize A)" is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and is a timing chart showing the behavior when a ball passes through the specific area 65d. FIG. 21 shows the drive patterns of the large prize opening solenoid 65b and the specific area solenoid 65f, the detection modes of the large prize opening switch 65c and the specific area switch 65g, and the setting mode of the large prize flag 203p when the small prize type "Time Reduction B (Small Prize A)" or "Time Reduction C (Small Prize A)" is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and is a timing chart when the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d. FIG. 22 shows the drive patterns of the large prize opening solenoid 65b and the specific area solenoid 65f, the detection modes of the large prize opening switch 65c and the specific area switch 65g, and the setting mode of the large prize flag 203p when the small prize type "Time Reduction D (Small Prize B)" is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and is a timing chart when the ball passes through the specific area 65d.

As shown in Figure 20, in "normal game state A," if the dynamic display of the first special symbol results in a small win type "Time Reduction B (Small Win A)" or a small win type "Time Reduction C (Small Win A)," the OP time is set to "10 seconds." Then, as a small win game, the large prize opening solenoid 65b is turned on for "0.1 seconds" six times during one round, and as a result, the large prize opening opening plate 65a changes from a closed state to an open state. Then, while the large prize opening opening plate 65a is open, a ball fired in a right-hand hit game flows into the variable prize winning device 65 and is detected by the large prize opening switch 65c.

When a small win occurs during the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the specific area solenoid 65f is turned on immediately after the large prize opening solenoid 65b begins to turn on, causing the specific area opening/closing plate 65e to change from a closed state to an open state. Then, even after the specific area solenoid 65f is turned on, allowing balls to flow into the specific area 65d, the large prize opening solenoid 65b is turned on multiple times (six times in the first embodiment), opening the large prize opening opening plate 65a, causing the balls that flow into the variable prize device 65 to flow down toward the specific area 65d. When a ball that has flowed down into the specific area 65d is detected by the specific area switch 65g, the jackpot flag 203p is set on in response to this detection, and the game transitions from a small prize game state to a jackpot game state as a bonus.

Next, as shown in Figure 21, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol in "normal gaming state A" results in a small jackpot type "time reduction B (small jackpot A)" or "time reduction C (small jackpot A)," and the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 65d, the OP time and the timing at which the large prize opening solenoid 65b and the specific area solenoid 65f are turned on will be the same as in Figure 20. If a right-hand hit is not performed while the large prize opening plate 65a is open, no ball will flow into the variable winning device 65 and will not be detected by the large prize opening switch 65c and the specific area switch 65g, so the jackpot flag 203p will remain off, and the game will return to the gaming state at the time of the small jackpot win without transitioning to the updated jackpot gaming state.

Next, as shown in Figure 22, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time-saving state" results in a small win type "time-saving D (small win B)," the OP time is set to "5 seconds." Then, as a small win game, the large prize opening solenoid 65b is turned on for "0.1 seconds" 10 times during one round, and as a result, the large prize opening opening plate 65a changes from a closed state to an open state. Then, while the large prize opening opening plate 65a is open, a ball fired in a right-hand play flows into the variable prize winning device 65 and is detected by the large prize opening switch 65c.

If a small jackpot is won during the dynamic display of this second special symbol, the specific area solenoid 65f is turned on immediately after the large prize opening solenoid 65b begins to turn on, causing the specific area opening/closing plate 65e to change from a closed state to an open state. Then, even after the specific area solenoid 65f is turned on, allowing balls to flow into the specific area 65d, the large prize opening solenoid 65b is turned on multiple times (10 times in the first embodiment), opening the large prize opening opening plate 65a, causing the balls that have flowed into the variable prize device 65 to flow down toward the specific area 65d. Then, when a ball that has flowed down into the specific area 65d is detected by the specific area switch 65g, the jackpot flag 203p is set on in response to this detection.

Next, with reference to Figures 23(a) to 23(c), the details of the normal winning random number table 202i, the normal winning fluctuation table 202j, and the normal electric role release table 202k will be explained. First, Figure 23(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the normal winning random number table 202i stored in ROM 202.

As described above, the normal symbol winning random number table 202i is divided into two types: one for a "normal symbol low probability state," which is used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state for normal symbols, i.e., a "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" (a period when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not in a "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" (including during a jackpot for a special symbol)), and one for a "normal symbol high probability state," which is used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," which is a state in which the probability of a normal symbol winning is higher than in a "normal symbol low probability state." The "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" each contain different numbers of random numbers that result in a win. In this way, by differentiating the numbers of random numbers that result in a win in the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state," the probability of a win in the variable display of normal symbols is changed between the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state."

As shown in Figure 23(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values of the normal symbol hit counter C4 that result in a win in the "normal symbol low probability state" is 70, and the values "30 to 99" are specified (set) in the normal symbol hit random number table 202i. In other words, the probability of a normal symbol hit in the "normal symbol low probability state" (i.e., "normal game state" or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state") is 70/100, and is set so that a win is easily derived when the normal symbol is variable displayed.

On the other hand, the number of values of the normal symbol hit counter C4 that will result in a win in the "normal symbol high probability state" is 99, and these values "1 to 99" are specified (set) in the normal symbol hit random number table 202i. In other words, the probability of a normal symbol winning in the "normal symbol high probability state" (i.e., the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state") is 99/100, and it is set so that a win is almost always derived when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

By changing the probability of winning or losing the normal symbol depending on the game state, it is possible to create a situation where the normal electric symbol 72 is easy to open, or where it is more difficult to open than the easy situation. As a result, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, the situation varies depending on the game state, so that the normal electric symbol 72 is easy to open and can enter the second start hole 71, or the situation where the normal electric symbol 72 is more difficult to open than the easy situation and the ball is less likely to enter the second start hole 71, thereby creating different gameplay for each game state.

In particular, in the "normal play state" where left-handed play is encouraged, the "normal symbol low probability state" is entered, the variable display time of the normal symbol is long, the normal electric symbol 72 is difficult to open, and even if it does open, the normal electric symbol 72 opens only for a short time, making it more difficult for a ball launched during right-handed play to enter the second start port 71 than in the "normal symbol high probability state." Furthermore, the first start port 64 is not equipped with a device to assist in winning, such as the normal electric symbol 72, and furthermore, a through gate 67 is not located in the flow area of a ball launched during left-handed play. Therefore, the time-saving function does not make it easier for a ball launched during left-handed play to enter the first start port 64. In other words, in the "normal gaming state," even if a right-handed ball is played, the right-handed ball is unlikely to enter the second starting gate 71. Furthermore, a ball fired in a left-handed game must enter the first starting gate 64 without using the time-saving function, and is configured to enter the first starting gate 64 on its own to dynamically display the first special symbol. In the "normal gaming state," it is more preferable to configure the game so that it is difficult for the player to determine the timing at which the ball can enter the second starting gate 71 in the "normal gaming state" by providing multiple types of variable display times for the normal symbols and opening patterns for the normal electric role 72, thereby making it difficult for the player to enter the second starting gate 71. Furthermore, in the "normal gaming state," if a right-handed game is played, an error notification may be generated when the ball passes through the through gate 67. This may indicate to the player and gaming facility employees that this is a gaming style that is not recommended, thereby discouraging players from playing right-handed games.

Next, with reference to Figure 23(b), details of the normal symbol variation table 202j for determining the variable display time of the normal symbol will be explained. Figure 23(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the normal symbol variation table 202j stored in ROM 202.

The normal symbol variable table 202j is divided into two types: one for the "normal game state" referenced in the "normal game state," and one for the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state/normal symbol low probability time shortened state" referenced in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state." The variable display time for the normal symbol is set differently for the "normal game state" and the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state/normal symbol low probability time shortened state." In this way, by making the variable display time for the normal symbol different in each game state, the time at which the result of the normal symbol win/loss is derived in each game state is changed.

As shown in Figure 23 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the normal symbol variable display time set in the "normal gaming state" is specified in the normal symbol variable table 202j to be "15 seconds." In other words, in the "normal gaming state," the time from when the variable display of the normal symbols begins until the stop symbols are derived is set to be "15 seconds" without exception.

In addition, the normal symbol variable table 202j specifies that the variable display time for normal symbols set in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" is "0.1 seconds." In other words, the time from when the variable display of normal symbols begins until the stopped symbol is derived in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" is set to be "0.1 seconds" without exception.

By changing the variable display time of the normal symbols depending on the game state, it is possible to change the period from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 until the normal electric role 72 is opened. As a result, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, the variable display resulting from the ball's passage through the through gate 67 results in a win, and the normal electric role 72 is opened based on the win, making it possible to vary depending on the game state whether the ball that passed through the through gate 67 can flow directly into the second start gate 71. Therefore, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbols for each game state, it is possible to vary the winning pattern of a single ball entering the through gate 67 and the second start gate 71, creating different gameplay characteristics for each game state.

In particular, among the game states in which right-hand play is encouraged, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," the variable display time of the normal symbol is short, making it easier to win, and the open time of the normal electric symbol 72 is also long, so while the ball is rolling on the top surface of the normal electric symbol 72, the normal electric symbol 72 is in an open (immersed) state, and a ball launched by right-hand play can enter the second starting hole 71. In other words, a ball hit from the right in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" is configured to easily enter the second starting hole 71 and difficult to enter the variable winning device 65.

Furthermore, among the game states in which right-hand play is encouraged, in the "normal symbol low-probability time-shortened state," it is more difficult to win than in the "normal symbol high-probability time-shortened state," but because the variable display time of the normal symbol is short and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is also long, it is configured so that a ball shot by right-hand play can enter the second starting hole 71. In other words, a ball shot to the right in the "normal symbol low-probability time-shortened state" is more likely to enter the second starting hole 71 and less likely to enter the variable winning device 65.

Next, the normal electric role release table 202k will be described with reference to Figure 23(c). Figure 23(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the normal electric role release table 202k stored in ROM 202. The normal electric role release table 202k is referenced when a normal symbol is hit, and the release (immersion) time and number of times the normal electric role 72 is released are determined based on the game state at the time the normal symbol is hit.

The normal electric role release table 202k is divided into groups based on the game state in which the normal symbol was drawn. Specifically, the release mode (release time) of the normal electric role 72 changes for the "normal game state" referenced by "normal game state" and the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state/normal symbol low probability time shortened state" referenced by "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state."

As shown in Figure 23 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal gaming state," the normal electric role 72 is set to open once when a normal symbol is won, and the opening time is specified in the normal electric role opening table 202k to be "0.1 seconds." In other words, when a normal symbol is won in the "normal gaming state," the normal electric role 72 is set to open for "0.1 seconds" x 1 time = "0.1 seconds."

Furthermore, the normal electric role opening table 202k specifies that the opening time of the normal electric role 72, which is set when a normal symbol is won in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state", is "5.8 seconds", and that the number of times it opens is one. In other words, when a normal symbol is won in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state", the normal electric role 72 is configured to open for "5.8 seconds" x 1 time = "5.8 seconds".

By changing the opening mode of the normal electric feature 72 depending on the game state, it is possible to vary the length of time that the normal electric feature 72 is open. As a result, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, the game state can vary whether the normal electric feature 72 is open for a long period, making it easier for the ball to enter the second start hole 71, or whether the normal electric feature 72 is open for a short period, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second start hole 71. This can create different gameplay experiences for each game state.

In particular, among the game states in which right-hand play is encouraged, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," the normal symbol is in a high probability state, the variable display time is short, and the opening period of the normal electric role 72 is long, making it easier for a ball launched by right-hand play to enter the second starting hole 71.

Furthermore, among the game states in which right-hand play is encouraged, in the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," although the probability of normal symbols is low, the variable display time is short and the opening period of the normal electric role 72 is long, making it easier for balls launched by right-hand play to enter the second starting hole 71.

Therefore, a ball hit to the right in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" is more likely to enter the second starting hole 71, and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is more likely to accumulate, making it easier for the fluctuation shortening function to operate and making it easier for the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed efficiently.

In this way, by providing game states that combine high or low probability states for special symbols, high or low probability states for normal symbols, and long or short variable display times and normal electric role 72 opening times, it is possible to change the playability of each game state, provide a wide variety of games, and increase the enjoyment of the game.

The winning probability of the variable display of normal symbols and the variable display time of the variable display are not limited to the above embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, any ratio is acceptable as long as the probability of winning a normal symbol is higher in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" than in the "normal game state" etc. For example, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the "normal game state" may be set to about 1/100, making it harder to win, or the winning probability of a normal symbol in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2, or a configuration may be adopted in which a win is not possible in the low probability state of a normal symbol. Furthermore, any time is acceptable as long as the variable display time is shorter in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" etc. than in the "normal game state." For example, the variable display time of a normal symbol in the "normal game state" may be set to a long time of 30 seconds or more (e.g., 100 seconds) or a short time of less than 10 seconds (e.g., 1 second).

Furthermore, the opening time and number of times the normal electric symbol 72 is opened are not limited to the above embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the opening time of the normal electric symbol 72 can be any opening time that is more advantageous to the player in a "normal game state with a high probability time reduction" than in a "normal game state." For example, the opening time of the normal electric symbol 72 in a "normal game state" can be set to 0.1 seconds or more (e.g., 1 second), and the number of times it is opened can be set to one or more (e.g., three times). Furthermore, the opening time of the normal electric symbol 72 in a "normal game state with a high probability time reduction" can be set to a long time of 5.8 seconds or more (e.g., 10 seconds), or a short time less than 5.8 seconds (e.g., 1 second). Furthermore, the number of times the normal electric symbol 72 is opened in a "normal game state with a high probability time reduction" can be set to one or more (e.g., five times).

Next, the time-saving termination condition table 202m will be described with reference to Figure 24. Figure 24 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the time-saving termination condition table 202m stored in ROM 202. The time-saving termination condition table 202m is referenced at the end of a jackpot game (when the game state transitions) when a first special symbol or a second special symbol is dynamically displayed, or when a rescue condition is established, and the termination conditions for the "time-saving function" that is granted depending on the game state at the time the jackpot is won are specified for each game state.

The time-saving termination condition table 202m in the first embodiment is divided by game state. Specifically, termination conditions for the "time-saving function" are set for "normal game state A," which is referenced when a jackpot is won in the "normal game state," "normal high-probability time-reduced state," "normal low-probability time-reduced state," or "normal game state B," which are referenced when a jackpot is won in the "normal high-probability time-reduced state," "normal low-probability time-reduced state," or "normal game state B," and for "when a rescue condition is met," which is referenced when a rescue condition is met.

The "time-saving function" in the first embodiment is configured to end when a jackpot game is triggered for any of the special symbols, or when one of the multiple time-saving end conditions listed below is met. Specific time-saving end conditions include the "Special symbol 1 time-saving count," which indicates the number of times the first special symbol is dynamically displayed after a jackpot has ended; the "Special symbol 2 time-saving count," which indicates the number of times the second special symbol is dynamically displayed after a jackpot has ended; and the "total time-saving count," which indicates the total number of times the first special symbol and second special symbol are dynamically displayed after a jackpot has ended.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, right-hand play is recommended when the "normal symbol low probability time-shortened state" or "normal symbol high probability time-shortened state" in which the "time-shortening function" is active, and since winning the second start slot 71 through right-hand play makes it easier to dynamically display the second special symbol, the machine is configured to make it easier for the time-shortening end condition based on the "special symbol 2 time-shortening count" to be met.

As shown in Figure 24, when the small win type "Time Reduction B" or "Time Reduction C" is executed in "Normal Game State A," the "Number of Time Reductions for Special Chart 1" is set to "7 times," the "Number of Time Reductions for Special Chart 2" is set to "1 time," and the "Total Number of Time Reductions" is set to "8 times."

Next, if a jackpot type "Time Reduction A" or a small jackpot type "Time Reduction D" is executed in the "Normal Symbol High Probability Time Reduction State," "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State," or "Normal Game State B," the "Number of Special Symbol 1 Time Reductions" is set to "7," "Number of Special Symbol 2 Time Reductions" is set to "5," and the "Total Number of Time Reductions" is set to "12." Note that in this embodiment, right-hand play is recommended in the "Normal Symbol High Probability Time Reduction State" and "Normal Symbol Low Probability Time Reduction State," and since it is difficult to win the first starting hole 64, the small jackpot types "Time Reduction B" or "Time Reduction C" based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol are configured to be difficult to win.

In addition, when the number of times the rescue condition is met in the "normal game state" (800 times in the first embodiment), which is the end of update state, is reached, the "normal low probability time reduction state" which is the awarded benefit is set to "100 times", "special game 1 time reduction count" is set to "100 times", "special game 2 time reduction count" is set to "100 times", and "total time reduction count" is set to "100 times".

In this way, by setting the time-saving end condition (special chart 2 time-saving count of "1") when winning a small jackpot type "Time-saving B" or "Time-saving C" in the "normal game state (mainly "normal game state A")" (special chart 2 time-saving count of "100") less than the time-saving end condition when transitioning to the "normal game state low-probability time-saving state" (special chart 2 time-saving count of "100"), when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won as a result of control judgment in "normal game state A," a right-hand hit is performed during the first round of small jackpot play, causing the ball to pass through specific area 65d as a profit-granting condition, generating a jackpot game as a bonus value, and transitioning to "normal chart high-probability time-saving state A," and when the number of times the rescue condition is met as the update end state is reached and transitioning to the "normal chart low-probability time-saving state" as a bonus is achieved, the expected value of the balls that the player can win can be configured to be higher in the latter case, where the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached and transitioning to the "normal game state low-probability time-saving state."

Returning to Figure 5, we will continue the explanation. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in Figure 6, the RAM 203 also has a stack area in which the contents of the MPU 201's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, input/output (Input/Output, hereafter abbreviated as "I/O") values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power cut (including when a power outage occurs; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when power is turned on (including when power is turned on after a power outage has been resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was cut off based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see Figure 39) when power is cut off, and the values written to RAM 203 are restored during the startup processing (see Figure 37) when power is turned on. When power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal of MPU 201 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. When this power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see Figure 59) is immediately executed as power outage processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. Connected to the input/output port 205 are various switches 208, including a group of switches and sensors, including switches (e.g., the large prize slot switch 65c) for detecting balls that have entered each prize slot 63, 64, 65, and 71, balls that have passed through the through gate 67, and balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path through the outlet 66; a setting key 501 for setting the startup mode when the power is turned on; a setting change switch 502 for updating the probability setting value by being pressed in "setting change mode"; a RAM erase switch 503 for erasing data stored in RAM 203; and a base display device control circuit 402 for controlling the display of the base display device 401 based on drive and control signals from the MPU 201.

Also connected to the output side of the input/output port 205 are the payout control device 111, audio lamp control device 113, special symbol display device 37, normal symbol display device 83, normal symbol hold lamp 84, large prize opening solenoid 65b for driving the large prize opening opening/closing plate 65a of the variable prize device 65 to open and close forward around the lower edge of the plate, a normal electric solenoid (not shown) for driving the plate 72a of the normal electric device 72, and other solenoids 209. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208, 502, 503 and the state of the setting key 501, and sets the display content of the base display device 401 as one of the results of executing the various processes.

The payout control device 111, which controls the awarding of winnings, drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as work memory, etc.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area that stores the contents of the MPU 211's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 211, as well as a work area (work region) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data even after power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply 115, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 in the event of a power outage or other power outage. When the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see Figure 59) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. In addition, a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

When the main control unit 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control unit 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and when the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the audio output from the audio output device (such as a speaker, not shown) 226, the output of the lights on and off from the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the indicator lamp 34) 227, and the settings for the display modes of the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, such as the variable effects, the right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot is won (described below), and the "hold change notice."

The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, display control device 114, voice output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. In the first embodiment, the system is configured so that commands can only be sent in one direction from the main control device 110 to the voice and lamp control device 113, and so that commands cannot be sent from the voice and lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. On the other hand, the voice and lamp control device 113 and display control device 114 are configured so that they can send and receive commands to each other.

The audio and lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22 to indicate the update has ended, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the background image of the "Super Reach" effect mode, etc., and instructs the display control device 114 to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display a display based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the display of the third symbol change on the third symbol display device 81, the right-hit notification display when a small win is won (described below), and the "hold change notice" based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to Figure 29, and details of the display content of the right-hit notification display when a small win is won will be described later with reference to Figures 70 and 89, respectively.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each component of the pachinko machine 10, and a power outage monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruptions due to power outages and the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc., via a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in 24-volt AC voltage supplied from an external source, generates 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., 5-volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these 12-volt voltage, 5-volt voltage, and backup voltage as needed to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when power is interrupted due to a power outage or other reason. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and if this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminals of the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing (see Figure 59). The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5-volt voltage, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing normally.

The base display device 401 is connected to a base display device control circuit 402 provided within the main control device 110 and connected to the input/output port 205. The base display device control circuit 402 drives and controls each of the 7-segment displays (see Figure 2) of the base display device 401 based on drive and control signals from the MPU 201, and displays various information related to the base value.

The base value is the number (ratio) of balls paid out (prize balls) per 100 balls during normal play, excluding jackpot and time-saving modes. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, every time the number of out balls guided from the play area to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls shot into the play area, in other words, the number of balls used in play; hereinafter referred to as the "total number of outs") reaches 60,000, the base value for those 60,000 balls is measured and saved.

The base display device 401 displays the base value (hereinafter referred to as the "real-time base value") measured in real time during the period leading up to the total number of outs reaching 60,000, the base value measured the previous (most recent) time the total number of outs reached 60,000, as well as the base value measured the time before that (the time before last) the total number of outs reached 60,000, and the base value measured the time before that (the time before last) the total number of outs reached 60,000, switching between these values every specified period (5 seconds in this embodiment). By displaying base values from multiple past times in addition to the real-time base value, it becomes possible to more accurately determine whether or not fraud has occurred, and it is also possible to predict to a certain extent the time when such fraud will occur.

Now, with reference to Figure 25, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 25 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least the following fixed value data: a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a small jackpot type table 222c, a stop pattern table 222d, a fluctuation pattern table 222e, and a break-even frequency table 222f. These tables 222a to 222e are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the small jackpot type table 202c, the stop pattern table 202e, and the fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to perform pre-reading processing based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, small jackpot type counter CK, stop pattern selection counter C3 and variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c in response to a start winning in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the reserved ball count command, as well as the jackpot random number table 222a, jackpot type table 222b, small jackpot type table 222c, stop pattern table 222d and variation pattern table 222e.

This pre-reading process determines what the pending variable effect that was the subject of the pre-reading process will result in (whether it will be a jackpot, whether it will be a "reach display," etc.) before the variable effect is executed, and controls are executed to determine whether to execute various effects, as well as the effect content (and execution time) of the "hold change notice" that changes the display mode of the pending pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see Figure 4).

RAM 223 is provided with at least a special chart 1 fluctuation start flag 223a, a special chart 2 fluctuation start flag 223b, a sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c, a sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d, a first reserved information storage area 223e, a second reserved information storage area 223f, an execution information storage area 223g, a sub-rescue counter 223i, a sub-rescue set flag 223j, and a break-even count storage area 223k.

The special symbol 1 variation start flag 223a is a flag that indicates, when on, that the first special symbol variation presentation should begin. This special symbol 1 variation start flag 223a is initially set to off when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special symbol 1 stop type command output from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1235 in Figure 63). It is then turned off when the first special symbol variation presentation is set (see S1302 in Figure 66).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the special symbol 1 variation start flag 223a is turned on, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 performs a setting process for the first special symbol variation effect (see S1306 to S1308 in FIG. 66) to execute the variation effect of the first special symbol that is on standby, if such a variation effect exists.

The special symbol 2 variation start flag 223b is a flag that indicates, when on, that the second special symbol variation presentation should begin. This special symbol 2 variation start flag 223b is initially set to off when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special symbol 2 stop type command output from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1255 in Figure 64). It is then turned off when the second special symbol variation presentation is set (see S1310 in Figure 66).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the special symbol 2 variation start flag 223b is turned on, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 performs a setting process for the second special symbol variation effect (see S1314 to S1316 in FIG. 66) to execute the variation effect of the second special symbol that is on standby, if such a variation effect exists.

The sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (wait times) for the first special pattern variable effect (dynamic display) that can be executed by the third pattern display device 81 (special pattern display device 37) and is reserved in the main control unit 110.

As mentioned above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on commands (reserved ball number commands) sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern variable effect is increased by a ball entering the first starting hole 64 and the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a in the main control unit 110 is incremented, the sound lamp control unit 113 receives a first reserved ball number command sent from the main control unit 110, and stores the incremented value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110 contained in the first reserved ball number command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern variable effect reserved in the main control unit 110) in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1207 in Figure 62).

In addition, when the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a is decremented in the main control unit 110, the sound lamp control unit 113 receives a special pattern command and a special stop type command corresponding to the first special pattern variable presentation sent from the main control unit 110, and when setting the mode of the first special pattern variable presentation in response to receiving these commands, it decrements (updates) the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c by 1 (see S1305 in Figure 66). In this way, the sound lamp control unit 113 updates the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c in accordance with the command sent from the main control unit 110 in conjunction with the update of the first reserved ball count counter 203a, so the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c can be updated in synchronization with the first reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110.

The sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d, like the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (standby times) for the second special pattern variable effect (dynamic display) that can be executed by the third pattern display device 81 (special pattern display device 37) and is reserved in the main control unit 110.

As mentioned above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on commands sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern variable effect is increased by a ball entering the second starting hole 71 and the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b in the main control unit 110 is incremented, the sound lamp control unit 113 receives a second reserved ball number command sent from the main control unit 110, and stores the incremented value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110 (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern variable effect reserved in the main control unit 110) contained in the second reserved ball number command in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d (see S1211 in Figure 62).

In addition, when the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b is decremented in the main control unit 110, the sound lamp control unit 113 receives a special pattern command and a special stop type command corresponding to the second special pattern variable presentation sent from the main control unit 110, and when setting the mode of the second special pattern variable presentation in response to receiving these commands, it decrements (updates) the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d by 1 (see S1313 in Figure 66). In this way, the sound lamp control unit 113 updates the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d in accordance with the command sent from the main control unit 110 in conjunction with the update of the second reserved ball count counter 203b, so the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d can be updated in synchronization with the second reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control unit 110.

The values of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d are used to display the reserved patterns and execution patterns on the third pattern display device 81 in a gaming state in which the variable presentation of each special pattern is encouraged. That is, in response to receiving the first reserved ball count command or the second reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d (see S1207 or S1211 in FIG. 62), and in response to receiving the special symbol 1 variation pattern command and special symbol 1 stop type command, or the special symbol 2 variation pattern command and special symbol 2 stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d (see S1305 or S1313 in FIG. 66). In order to notify the display control device 114 of the stored or updated values of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d corresponding to the special symbol promoted depending on the game status, the voice lamp control device 113 sends the first reserved ball count command for display or the second reserved ball count command for display to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this first reserved ball number command for display or the second reserved ball number command for display, it controls the drawing of images so that the reserved patterns corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, i.e., the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution pattern indicating the variable performance currently being performed, are displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see Figure 4 (b)) of the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the value of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c changes in synchronization with the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main control unit 110, and the value of the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d changes in synchronization with the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the number of reserved patterns displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see Figure 4(b)) of the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a or second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control unit 110 for the promoted special pattern. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the promoted special pattern depending on the game status.

The first pending information storage area 223e is an area for storing information for performing the variable effects of the reserved first special symbol, i.e., the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, small jackpot type counter CK, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 related to the variable effects of the first special symbol obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control unit 110 upon a start winning and transmitted by the first reserved ball count command.

The voice and lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a variable effect of the first special symbol using the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223e and the tables 222a to 222e stored in the ROM 222.

The second reserved information storage area 223f is an area for storing information for performing the variable effects of the reserved second special symbol, i.e., the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, small jackpot type counter CK, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 related to the variable effects of the second special symbol obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control unit 110 upon a start winning and transmitted by the second reserved ball count command.

The voice and lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the variable effect of the second special symbol using the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the second pending information storage area 223f and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222.

The execution information storage area 223g is an area for storing information on the variable presentation of the first or second special symbol being executed by at least the special symbol display device 37 and being executed by the third symbol display device 81 depending on the game status, i.e., the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, small jackpot type counter CK, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 upon a start winning and transmitted by the first reserved ball count command or the second reserved ball count command.

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is time to start the execution of the variable effect of the first or second special symbol, it shifts the information for performing the variable effect (values of counters C1 to C3, CK, CS1, etc.) stored in the first pending information storage area 1 of the first pending information storage area 223e or the second pending information storage area 1 of the second pending information storage area 223f to this execution information storage area 223g in order to execute the settings for the variable effect of the first or second special symbol.

The sub-rescue counter 223i, like the rescue counter 203r in the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts the number of times the dynamic display of a special symbol is executed when the probability of that special symbol is low.

This sub-rescue counter 223i is set to "0" at the start of the RAM initial value setting process and the winning process during the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1010 in FIG. 60 and S1403 in FIG. 69). Then, when a rescue counter command sent from the main control device 110 is received, the corresponding information is stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i (see S1280 in FIG. 65).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special chart 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A," the value of the sub rescue counter 223i at the time of the small win is compared with the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k described below to determine whether the small win belongs to a jackpot priority notification period or a rescue priority notification period, and to determine the content of the right-hit notification effect to be performed during the OP time when the small win is won.

The sub-rescue set flag 223j, like the rescue set flag 203s in the main control unit 110, is a flag used to determine whether the dynamic display of the special symbol has reached the number of times the rescue condition has been met once after a jackpot game.

This sub-rescue setting flag 223j is set to OFF at the start of the RAM initial value setting process and the winning process during the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1010 in FIG. 60 and S1404 in FIG. 69). Then, upon receiving a rescue setting command sent from the main control device 110, the sub-rescue setting flag 223j is set to ON (see S1278 in FIG. 65).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won in "normal gaming state A," the right-hit notification display process (see FIG. 70) is performed, and the content of the right-hit notification display is determined by checking the sub-rescue setting flag 223j.

For example, if the sub-rescue set flag 223j is on, the number of times the rescue condition has been met since the previous jackpot (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power was turned on) has been reached, and the game state cannot transition to the "normal low probability time shortened state." In this case, the expected value of the balls that can be won will be higher if a right-hit play method is selected when a small jackpot is won, so the right-hit notification effect is configured to strongly suggest right-hit play and emphasize the occurrence of a jackpot (see Figure 89 (b)).

The break-even count storage area 223k is one of the criteria for determining the content of the right-hit notification effect that is performed when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A," and is an area (memory area) that stores the number of rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol that marks the boundary between the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period.

This break-even number storage area 223k is set to the break-even number (543 in the first embodiment) during the RAM initial value setting process during the startup process of the voice and lamp control device 113 (see S1021 in Figure 60).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won in "normal gaming state A," the break-even count storage area 223k is referenced (see S1505 in FIG. 70), compared with the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i, and a command for the right-hit notification effect to be executed in the right-hit notification effect for that small jackpot is set (see S1506 or S1509 in FIG. 70).

Now, referring to Figure 27, we will explain the expected number of balls acquired in each state when a jackpot is achieved when a small jackpot type "Time Reduction B (Small Win A)" or a small jackpot type "Time Reduction C (Small Win A)" is won in "Normal Game State A," and when a jackpot is not achieved in the small jackpot game and the game returns to "Normal Game State A" and the special symbol is dynamically displayed until the rescue condition is met the number of times. Figure 27 is a table summarizing the difference in the average number of balls acquired when a small jackpot type "Time Reduction B (Small Win A)" or a small jackpot type "Time Reduction C (Small Win A)" is won in "Normal Game State A," and the average number of balls acquired is achieved when a right-hand play is performed to generate a jackpot when the small jackpot is won, and the game is returned to "Normal Game State A" without right-hand play when the small jackpot is won, the special symbol is dynamically displayed again, the rescue condition is met the number of times, and the game transitions to the "Normal Game Low-Probability Time Reduction State."

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the break-even number table 222f (see FIG. 28), which will be described later, is set based on the break-even number for a predetermined period calculated from the table in FIG. 27. When a special chart 1 small jackpot is won in "normal gaming state A," the break-even number table 222f is referenced, the break-even number is compared with the number of spins when a small jackpot is won, and the content of the right-hit notification effect to be performed during the OP time when the small jackpot is won is determined.

As shown in Case No. 1 in Figure 27, if a special chart 1 small jackpot is won in "normal gaming state A" and the number of spins at the time of winning the small jackpot (value of sub rescue counter 223i) is "500 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win by the end of the winning streak when playing with the right hand during the small jackpot game and causing the ball to pass through specific area 65d and win the jackpot will be approximately 4,000 balls (the average number of balls won in this case will be "α").

The end of a winning streak here refers to an event in which, when a small win type "Time Reduction B" or "Time Reduction C" is won in "Normal Game State A," right-hand play is initiated to transition to the big win state, and then the player goes through the "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State (Normal High Probability Time Reduction State A and Normal High Probability Time Reduction State B)" and "Normal Game State B," before returning to "Normal Game State A" (see Figure 11).

On the other hand, if the right-hand play is not performed when the small jackpot is won and the big jackpot is not generated, the number of spins required to achieve the rescue condition is 800, and the number of spins required to achieve the small jackpot is 500, so the remaining number of spins until the rescue condition is achieved is 300.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that approximately six balls fired during left-handed play enter the first starting hole 64 per minute (i.e., S1 = 6). Therefore, if left-handed play is continued, the time required until the number of times that the rescue condition is met is reached (i.e., until the remaining "300 spins" are executed) is approximately 50 minutes (see the "Time (minutes) until the number of times that the rescue condition is met" column in Figure 27). Therefore, the number of balls fired during approximately 50 minutes of left-handed play is approximately 5,000, and since the base value for the "normal play state" in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be "30," the number of balls paid out as prize balls during this period is approximately 1,500. In other words, the number of balls consumed during approximately 50 minutes of left-handed play (when approximately 5,000 balls are fired) is approximately 3,500 (see the "Number of balls used until the number of times that the rescue condition is met" column in Figure 27).

Furthermore, when the rescue condition is met enough times and the game transitions to the "normal low probability time shortened state," the average number of balls that a player can win by the end of the winning streak will be approximately 7,000 balls (see the "Average number of balls won when rescue condition is met" column in Figure 27).

Here, the number of balls consumed from when a special 1 small jackpot is won in "normal game state A" until the number of times the rescue condition is met without generating a jackpot is approximately 3,500. Therefore, the average number of balls acquired from when the special 1 small jackpot is won, when the number of times the rescue condition is met and the game transitions to the "normal game low probability time shortened state," is approximately 3,500 (the average number of balls acquired in this case is "β"), calculated as "average number of balls acquired when the rescue condition is met (7,000) - number of balls used until the number of times the rescue condition is met (3,500)" (the "Average number of balls acquired (β) from when a small jackpot A is won until the game ends" column in Figure 27). Furthermore, the time from when the special 1 small jackpot is won until the number of times the rescue condition is met, the game transitions to the "normal game low probability time shortened state," and the game ends is approximately 70 minutes (the "Average time consumed (minutes) from when a small jackpot A is won until the game ends" column in Figure 27).

Therefore, in case No. 1, the average number of balls won when playing with the right hand when a small jackpot is won is approximately 4,000 (α), and the average number of balls won when playing with the left hand when a small jackpot is won is approximately 3,500 (β), so the difference in the average number of balls won in case 2 (α - β) is approximately 500 (see the "Difference (α - β)" column in Figure 27).

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if a small jackpot on special symbol 1 is won after 500 spins in a low probability state for the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 500 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Similarly, in case No. 2, if a small jackpot on special symbol 1 is won at 542 spins in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 10 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 3, if a small jackpot on special symbol 1 is won at 543 spins in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in the player winning approximately two fewer balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 4, if a small jackpot on special symbol 1 is won after 600 spins in a low probability state for the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in an average of approximately 667 fewer balls being won by the player compared to the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A," if the number of rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol at the time of the small win is within 542 rotations, the right-hand play method at the time of the small win is configured to result in a greater average number of balls that the player can win than the left-hand play method at the time of the small win.

On the other hand, if the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when a small jackpot is won is 543 or more, the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A," the number of rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol at the time of the small win, "543 rotations," is stored as the break-even number for a predetermined period in the break-even number table 222f described below (see Figure 28).

Next, the break-even count table 222f will be described with reference to Figure 28. Figure 28 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the break-even count table 222f stored in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. As described above, the break-even count table 222f is set based on the table of expected ball wins for each state in Figure 27. When a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A," the sound lamp control device 113 compares the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won with the break-even count specified in the break-even count table 222f, and determines the content of the right-hit notification effect to be executed during the OP time of the small win game.

As shown in Figure 28, the break-even number table 222f in the first embodiment has the break-even number set as a predetermined period to "543 spins," the jackpot priority notification period set to "0 to 542 spins," and the rescue priority notification period set to "543 to 800 spins."

Therefore, if the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "0 to 542 spins," i.e., if a small win on special symbol 1 is won as a result of the control judgment during the jackpot priority notification period, a jackpot priority notification effect is displayed as the first notification mode (see Figure 89 (b)). If the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "543 to 800 spins," i.e., if a small win on special symbol 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period as a specific time, a rescue priority notification effect is displayed as the second notification mode (see Figure 89 (d)).

Here, in conventional pachinko machines, when a small prize type that can trigger a jackpot game is won (i.e., when a small prize type that allows the ball to pass through a specific area is won), a ball is fired during the small prize game to enter a variable prize-winning device, and an effect is implemented using a third symbol display device or the like to fire the ball toward the variable prize-winning device so that the ball passes through the specific area and triggers a jackpot game.

However, with these conventional pachinko machines, when a small win is achieved, only one notification effect is executed when hitting the right button, resulting in little variation in gameplay. Also, depending on the gameplay status, there is a risk that the expected number of balls that a player can win may decrease.

Therefore, by configuring the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, when a special chart 1 small win is won in "normal game state A," the content of the right-hit notification effect executed during the OP time of the small win game can be checked to determine whether selecting the right-hit game method when a small win is won or the left-hit game method when a small win is won will result in a higher average number of balls won, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Next, the first pending information storage area 223e, the second pending information storage area 223f, and the execution information storage area 223g will be described in detail with reference to Figure 26. Figure 26 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the first pending information storage area 223e, the second pending information storage area 223f, and the execution information storage area 223g.

The first pending information storage area 223e has four areas: first pending information storage areas 1 to 4. Each of the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 includes at least a jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, a variation type counter storage area 223e4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored, and a small win type counter storage area 223e5 in which the value of the small win type counter CK is stored.

Like the first pending information storage area 223e, the second pending information storage area 223f has four areas, second pending information storage areas 1 to 4. Each of the first to fourth second pending information storage areas includes at least a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223f2 in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, a variation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored, and a small win type counter storage area 223f5 in which the value of the small win type counter CK is stored.

Furthermore, the execution information storage area 223g is provided with at least a jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the currently executing first special pattern or second special pattern variable presentation is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223g2 in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, a variable type counter storage area 223g4 in which the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored, and a small jackpot type counter storage area 223g5 in which the value of the small jackpot type counter CK is stored.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223g is an area corresponding to the currently executing first or second special symbol variable effect. Furthermore, the first pending information storage first area of the first pending information storage area 223e is an area corresponding to the first special symbol variable effect that was held first in time among the held first special symbol variable effects, the first pending information storage second area is an area corresponding to the second-oldest first special symbol variable effect among the held first special symbol variable effects, the first pending information storage third area is an area corresponding to the third-oldest first special symbol variable effect among the held first special symbol variable effects, and the first pending information storage fourth area is an area corresponding to the fourth-oldest first special symbol variable effect among the held first special symbol variable effects.

Furthermore, the second pending information storage first area of the second pending information storage area 223f is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol that was reserved first in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special symbol, the second pending information storage second area is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol that was reserved second oldest in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special symbol, the second pending information storage third area is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol that was reserved third oldest in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special symbol, and the second pending information storage fourth area is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol that was reserved fourth oldest in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special symbol.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first reserved ball count command from the main control device 110, it extracts the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, stop pattern selection counter C3, small jackpot type counter CK, and variable type counter CS1 from the first reserved ball count command. The voice lamp control device 113 then stores the extracted values of each counter C1, C3, CK, and CS1 in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1, stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, variable type counter storage area 223e4, and small jackpot type counter storage area 223e5 of the corresponding first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4, which correspond to the reserved ball count included in the first reserved ball count command.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the first reserved ball count command is X (1≦X≦4), the number of first special symbol variable effects currently reserved is X, and the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 included in that first reserved ball count command correspond to the variable effect of the first special symbol that was reserved Xth in time among the variable effects of the reserved first special symbol. Therefore, the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 corresponding to the counter storage areas 223e1-223e5 in the first reserved information storage area X are stored. At this time, the main control unit 110 stores the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 included in the first reserved ball count command in the first reserved area X of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In other words, the same values as the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the first reserved area X of the main control unit 110 are stored in the first reserved information storage area X.

Furthermore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second reserved ball count command from the main control device 110, it extracts the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, small jackpot type counter CK, and variable type counter CS1 from the second reserved ball count command. The voice lamp control device 113 then stores the extracted values of each counter C1-C3, CK, and CS1 in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1, jackpot type counter storage area 223f2, stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3, variable type counter storage area 223f4, and small jackpot type counter storage area 223f5 of the corresponding third reserved information storage areas 1-4 that correspond to the reserved ball count included in the third reserved ball count command.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the second reserved ball count command is X (1≦Y≦4), the number of second special symbol variable effects currently reserved is Y, and the values of each counter C1-C3, CK, and CS1 included in that second reserved ball count command correspond to the first special symbol variable effect that was reserved Yth in time among the reserved second special symbol variable effects. Therefore, the values of counters C1-C3, CK, and CS1 corresponding to each counter storage area 223f1-223f5 in the first reserved information storage area Y are stored. At this time, the main control unit 110 stores the values of each counter C1-C3, CK, and CS1 included in the second reserved ball count command in the second reserved area Y of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In other words, the same values as each counter C1-C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the second reserved area Y of the main control unit 110 are stored in the second reserved information storage area Y.

On the other hand, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives from the main control device 110 a special symbol 1 variation pattern command and a special symbol 1 stop type command, which indicate the start of a first special symbol variation effect, it executes a process to shift the information stored in the first pending information storage area 223e to the execution information storage area 223g. In other words, if pending information related to the first special symbol exists, the first pending first special symbol variation effect will be executed, and the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1-223e5 of the first pending information storage first area corresponding to the first pending first special symbol variation effect will be moved to the storage areas 223g1-223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g corresponding to the currently executing first special symbol variation effect.

When the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage area 1 are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g, the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage area 2 are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage area 1. The values of counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage second area, and the values of counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage third area.

Furthermore, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives from the main control device 110 a special symbol 2 variation pattern command and a special symbol 2 stop type command, which indicate the start of a variation effect of the second special symbol, it executes a process to shift the information stored in the second pending information storage area 223f to the execution information storage area 223g. In other words, if pending information regarding the second special symbol exists, the execution of the variation effect of the second special symbol that was temporally reserved will begin, and the values of the counters C1-C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1-223f5 of the first second pending information storage area corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol that was reserved first will be moved to the storage areas 223g1-223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g corresponding to the currently executing variation effect of the second special symbol.

Then, when the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage first area. The values of counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage second area, and the values of counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage fourth area are moved to storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223g will store the same values as the counters C1-C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control unit 110. Furthermore, the first reserved information storage areas 1-4 and the second reserved information storage areas 1-4 will store the same values as the counters C1-C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the first reserved areas 1-4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d and the second reserved areas 1-4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control unit 110, respectively. In other words, the sound lamp control unit 113 stores the counters C1-C3, CK, and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects of the first special symbol and second special symbol currently being executed and currently being held by the main control unit 110 in the execution information storage area 223g, the first reserved information storage area 223e, and the second reserved information storage area 223f.

When the audio lamp control device 113 performs a look-ahead process (not shown), it determines the number of reserved balls (reserved ball count) for the first special symbol or second special symbol variable effect that are reserved from the first reserved ball count sub-counter 223c or the second reserved ball count sub-counter 223d. Based on the reserved ball count, it then looks ahead and reads the values of the counters C1-C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the area in the first reserved information storage area 1-4 or the second reserved information storage area 1-4 where the first special symbol or second special symbol variable effect is reserved, and determines whether the variable effect will result in a jackpot, the variable effect duration, etc. For example, if the value of sub-1 reserved ball counter 223c is "1" and the value of sub-2 reserved ball counter 223d is "0," the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol variable effect has been 1 and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol variable effect has been 0, so the values of the stored counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 for the first reserved information storage area 1 are read in advance and a judgment is made. Also, if the value of sub-1 reserved ball counter 223c is "0" and the value of sub-2 reserved ball counter 223d is "4," the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol variable effect has been 0 and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol variable effect has been 4, so the values of the stored counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 for the second reserved information storage area 4 are read in advance and a judgment is made.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are sent in only one direction, from the main control unit 110 to the sound and lamp control unit 113, and the sound and lamp control unit 113 cannot access the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. In contrast, the sound and lamp control unit 113 is provided with a first pending information storage area 223e and a second pending information storage area 223f, and the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects of the first and second special symbols held in the main control unit 110 are also stored in the sound and lamp control unit 113. Therefore, by referencing the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223e and the second pending information storage area 223f, the sound and lamp control unit 113 can perform pre-reading processing. In other words, when a variable effect of the reserved first special symbol and/or second special symbol is executed, the outcome of the variable effect (whether it will result in a jackpot, how long it will last, etc.) can be determined before the variable effect is executed, and the execution of various effects can be decided.

The above-mentioned shifting process in the first pending information storage area 223e or the second pending information storage area 223f, and the execution information storage area 223g moves (shifts) data only for the area corresponding to the pending variable effect among the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 or the second pending information storage areas 1 to 4, based on the number of pending balls when the special chart 1 variable pattern command and special chart 1 stop type command or the special chart 2 variable pattern command and special chart 2 stop type command are received (the values of the sub-first pending ball count counter 223c and the sub-second pending ball count counter 223d before the update based on the reception of the special chart 1 variable pattern command and special chart 1 stop type command or the special chart 2 variable pattern command and special chart 2 stop type command).

For example, suppose the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c before updating is "4" when the special chart 1 variation pattern command and special chart 1 stop type command are received, and data is stored in all areas of the first reserved information storage area 223e (first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4). In this case, the data in the first reserved information storage area 1 is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first reserved information storage area 2 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 1, the data in the first reserved information storage area 3 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 2, and the data in the first reserved information storage area 4 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 3.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c before the update when the special chart 1 variation pattern command and the special chart 1 stop type command are received is "2", the data in the first reserved information storage area 1 is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g, and the data in the first reserved information storage area 2 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 1, completing the data shift. As described above, in this embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the third and fourth first reserved information storage areas where no variable effects are reserved, thereby reducing the number of data shifts and the control burden.

In addition, regardless of whether data is present or not, each piece of data in the first pending information storage areas 1-4 or the second pending information storage areas 1-4 may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller (execution information storage area 223g or the first pending information storage areas 1-3 or the second pending information storage areas 1-3). In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in each of the first pending information storage areas 1-4 or the second pending information storage areas 1-4, which makes it easier to create programs.

Returning to Figure 25, we will continue the explanation. RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control unit 110 until the processing corresponding to those commands is carried out.

The command memory area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using the FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see Figure 62) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes that command and performs the appropriate processing.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio and lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the special pattern variation and continuous preview effects on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands received from the audio and lamp control device 113.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variation pattern of the variable effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 differs for each game state, and the ball launch pattern encouraged for each game state is shown to the player. Specifically, for example, in "normal game state A," in which left-handed play is encouraged, the word "LEFT HIT" encouraging left-handed play is displayed in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, while each variable symbol composed of Arabic numerals changes by vertical scrolling and is displayed to form only one active line (so-called a single line) in the main display area Dm. Also, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," in which right-handed play is encouraged, a main display right-hit instruction 89 encouraging right-handed play is displayed in the upper right area of the main display area Dm, while each variable symbol composed of Chinese numerals changes by vertical scrolling and is displayed to form one active line (so-called a single line) in the main display area Dm. In this way, by clearly differentiating the display mode of the variable symbols in each game state, it is possible to make it easier for players to recognize the game state and also to recognize the game mode (firing mode) required to perform the recommended game.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Figure 29. Figure 29 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice and lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 receives commands from the voice and lamp control device 113 indicating the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 determined by the voice and lamp control device 113. The output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, program ROM 232, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if different models of pachinko machines 10 have different jackpot lottery probabilities or different numbers of prize balls paid out per jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the program ROM 232 and work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third pattern display device 81 based on commands input from the voice and lamp control device 113.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores image data for each sprite, such as the designs (background designs and decorative designs) displayed on the third pattern display device 81. To store a large amount of image data, it is constructed using inexpensive NAND flash memory 234a, which provides a large storage capacity in a small area. In the first embodiment, a 2-gigabyte NAND flash memory 234a is used. This allows for the storage of a large number of images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, thereby enabling a wide variety of images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Note that, by its very nature, NAND flash memory 234a generates bad block data to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the character ROM 234 is equipped with a known arbitration circuit 234b (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598) that converts data addresses so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding bad data blocks. This arbitration circuit 234b analyzes bad data blocks in the NAND flash memory 234a within the character ROM 234 and avoids access to those bad data blocks. This allows the MPU 231 to easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address locations of bad data blocks, which differ between individual NAND flash memories 234a. Therefore, even when NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, access control to the character ROM 234 does not become complicated.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 36) transmitted from the MPU 231, which will be described later, and displays the drawn image in one of the first and second frame buffers 236b and 236c, which will be described later. At the same time, the image controller 237 outputs the image information for one frame previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 processes the drawing process for this one frame of an image and the display process for this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the first embodiment).

The image controller 237 sends a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as the "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 as a game condition every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see Figure 72 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes drawing processing for the next frame of image and also executes display processing to display the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at the image drawing and display processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing is complete, so it is possible to prevent starting to draw a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or to prevent an image from being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer where the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, and the image data required for the image controller 237 to draw an image is read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 before drawing, and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. At this time, the MPU 231 determines whether to transfer the data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 (and further, at which address to store it) depending on the content of the image, based on the program or table stored in the program ROM 232.

In addition, when the image controller 237 draws an image, it does not use image data from the character ROM 234, but instead uses image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 to perform the image drawing process. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the image controller 237 draws the image using image data that has been previously stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. This means that image drawing can be performed immediately without being affected by the slow read speed of the character ROM 234. Therefore, the desired image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the desired time.

Here, while NAND flash memory 234a facilitates large-capacity ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the initial setting process (main process (see Figure 71)) when the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. This eliminates the time required for reading, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that must be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110, audio lamp control unit 113, or display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND-type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is non-resident (undeveloped) in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for the drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image. However, when drawing the image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise result from providing the resident video RAM 235.

Whether the image data required for image controller 237 to draw an image is stored in resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 (and at what address) is determined by MPU 231 based on the contents of the image, using a program or table stored in program ROM 232. When instructing image controller 237 to draw an image, MPU 231 also instructs image controller 237 where the required image data is stored (whether it is stored in resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236, and at what address). Based on instructions from MPU 231, image controller 237 reads the required image data from a specified address in resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. This allows image controller 237 to concentrate on drawing the image.

In addition, when image controller 237 receives an instruction to draw an image from MPU 231, it may be configured to determine the storage location (whether it is stored in resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236, and at what address) of the image data required for drawing based on the type of image required for drawing. In this case, when MPU 231 stores image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236, image controller 237 may determine the type of image displayed by the stored image data (or the address in character ROM 234 where the corresponding image data is stored) and the storage location of that image data based on a control signal from MPU 231, and store the image type (or the address in character ROM 234 where the corresponding image data is stored) and the storage location of that image data in association with each other in RAM (not shown) provided in image controller 237. Then, image controller 237 may determine the storage location of the image data required for the image based on the information stored in that RAM. The image controller 237 determines where to store image data, thereby reducing the processing load on the MPU 231.

The image controller 237 is provided with a buffer RAM 237a. This buffer RAM 237a functions as a buffer memory for transferring data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236, and is composed of static RAM (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM") with a storage capacity equivalent to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a provided in the character ROM 234 (e.g., 132 kilobytes), and is configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

When transferring an image from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236, MPU 231 reads one block of data from character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in buffer RAM 237a, then waits until resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use to transfer the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236.

If buffer RAM 237a were not provided and image data were transferred directly from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236, character ROM 234 would be composed of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed. Therefore, while transferring image data of the desired size, resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236, which is composed of dynamic RAM (DRAM) with a single input/output port (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "single-port type"), would have that port occupied by the image data transfer from character ROM 234, preventing other data access for an extended period of time. As a result, image controller 237 would be unable to read image data from resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 to draw images or transfer drawing image data to third pattern display device 81, which could result in delays in image display on third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, even if multi-port DRAM (a type with multiple input/output ports) is used for the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236, there is a risk that the image controller 237 will be limited in its control of the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236, making that control more complex.

In contrast, this pachinko machine 10 is provided with a buffer RAM 237a composed of high-speed SRAM in the image controller 237, so image data that is read over a long period of time from the character ROM 234 can be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short period of time. Therefore, while image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be prevented from being occupied for a long period of time by the transfer of that image data.

In addition, the image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the drawing list includes the start address (starting address of the source) and final address (final address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the source.

In accordance with the various information in this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that has been read from character ROM 234 over a period of time to be temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from buffer RAM 237a to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short period of time. This prevents resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long period of time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, making the video RAMs 235, 236 unavailable for image drawing processing, which can result in the image not being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time.

In addition, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so it is easy to determine the time when the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying processing.

As mentioned above, the resident video RAM 235 is composed of a single-port DRAM, and is used to retain image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 remains resident in the resident video RAM 235. Data corresponding to the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, data corresponding to images that are displayed frequently, and data corresponding to images that should be displayed immediately among images determined to be displayed by the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) are transferred from the character ROM 234 and made resident in the resident video RAM 235.

The resident video RAM 235 is provided with at least a power-on main image area 235a, a power-on variable image area 235b, a back image area 235c, a third design area 235d, a character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, a reserved design area 235g, a cockpit image area 235h, a secondary display image area 235i, and a character design area 235j.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area that stores data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 (see Figure 30) that is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the display control device 114 is performing initialization processing when power is turned on. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area that stores image data corresponding to the power-on variable image 283 (see Figures 30(b) and 30(c)) that displays the results of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 through a variable presentation when a player starts playing while the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 first sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a, and to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on variable image 283 to the power-on variable image area 235b (see S2002 and S2003 in Figure 71).

Now, referring to Figure 30, we will explain the power-on main image 282 and the power-on variable image 283. Figure 30 is an explanatory diagram explaining the power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

Immediately after power-on, the display control device 114 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a, and then transfers image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. The remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is then transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image 282 shown in Figure 30(a) on the third pattern display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command, which are instructions to start the variation, from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 alternately displays, on the display screen of the power-on main image 282, a power-on stop image 283a with a "○" design in the lower right position as viewed from the screen, as shown in FIG. 30(b), and a power-on stop image 283b with an "X" design in the same position as the "○" design, as shown in FIG. 30(c), during the variation effect period. The display control device 114 then determines the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and display stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113, and if the result is a "jackpot display," the power-on stop image 283a shown in FIG. 30(b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect has stopped, and if the result is a "loss display," the power-on stop image 283b shown in FIG. 30(c) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect has stopped.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image 282 using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all of the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and arcade staff to view the power-on main image 282 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take its time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image 282 is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, players and arcade staff can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image 282 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and can therefore wait until the initialization process is complete without worrying that operation will stop until the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

Furthermore, when checking the operation of the pachinko machine 10 during its manufacture, the main image 282 is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, allowing immediate confirmation that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and prevents the efficiency of the operation check from being reduced by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234.

Furthermore, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image 282 is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64, the power-on variable image 283 is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image 283 that is constantly stored in the power-on variable image area 235b, and the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the images shown in Figures 30(b) and 30(c) alternately on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, a simple variable effect can be produced using the power-on variable image 283. Therefore, the player can be sure that a lottery has been drawn by the simple variable effect, even while the power-on main image 282 is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, when the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable image 283 is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b. Therefore, if a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64 while the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 and the power-on variable image 283 are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if a momentary power outage occurs and the data resident in the resident video RAM 235 remains, when power is restored, the power-on main image 282 and the power-on variable image 283 can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data resident in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b.

Returning to Figure 29, we will continue the explanation. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Here, with reference to Figures 31 and 32, we will explain the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c. Figures 31 and 32 are explanatory diagrams explaining three types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. Figure 31(a) shows rear image A corresponding to the "town stage," Figure 31(b) shows rear image B corresponding to the "sky stage," and Figure 32 shows rear image C corresponding to the "island stage."

Of the back faces A to C, the back faces and the corresponding back faces are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are horizontally longer than the display area displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, as shown in Figure 31. The image controller 237 draws the image by scrolling the image horizontally from left to right so that the back face image is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back surface images continue at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are configured with images the horizontal width of the display area, and after the image between positions c and d is displayed as the display area in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, when the image between positions a and a' is displayed as the display area in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, the back surface images are scrolled in a smooth transition in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage, the MPU 231 first sets the area between positions a and a' as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at that initial position is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Then, over time, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to move the display area from left to right relative to the scrolling image, successively displaying each display area in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, when the display area reaches the image between positions c and d, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the display area is again displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 as the image from positions a to a'. Thus, the image between positions a and c can be displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, scrolling repeatedly and smoothly as it flows to the left.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 32, the rear image on rear side C is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 over time in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... in Figure 32. Specifically, on rear side C, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 with their positions fixed. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky above the mountain changes over time.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the "Island Stage," the rear image shown in FIG. 32(a) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 32(a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, over time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to a bright blue, and after a predetermined time has passed, the rear image shown in FIG. 32(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 32(b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, over time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has passed, the rear image shown in FIG. 32(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 32(c), a black sky indicating nighttime is displayed. Then, over time, the color of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, the display returns to the rear image shown in FIG. 32(a), and the rear images of FIGS. 32(a) to (c) are again displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the range of the rear view image stored in the rear view image area 235c for each rear view image will be explained. As shown in Figure 31(a), rear view A corresponding to the initial city stage is stored in the rear view image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for the entire range of rear view A, i.e., all image data corresponding to positions a to d. Typically, the game is played while the initial city stage is displayed without changing the stage. Therefore, by keeping all image data for rear view A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage resident in the rear view image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be alleviated.

On the other hand, for rear surface B, which corresponds to an empty stage, as shown in Figure 31(b), only image data corresponding to a partial area of that rear surface, i.e., the image between position a and position b, is stored in the rear surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For rear surface C, which corresponds to an island stage, image data corresponding to the rear surface image between Figures 32(a) and 32(b), including Figure 32(a) and excluding Figure 32(b), is stored and remains resident in the rear surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process after power is turned on.

Here, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player to change stages is performed at any timing based on the player's will. Therefore, in order to instantly change the background image when the frame button 22 is operated at any timing, it would be ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all background images resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, doing so would require the use of a very large capacity RAM for the resident video RAM 235, which could lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is first displayed when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a' or the range from Figure 32(a) to Figure 32(b), and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, including that initial position, or the image between Figure 32(a) and Figure 32(b) is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when the stage is changed at any timing by the player operating the frame button 22, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be used to instantly display the initial position of back B or back C in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and can also be displayed while scrolling or changing color over time. Furthermore, for rear surface B and rear surface C, only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored, which helps prevent an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and keeps costs down.

Furthermore, the range from position a to position b of rear surface B is set so that, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled from left to right using image data resident in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to images from position b' to position d can be transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. This allows image data from position b' to position d to be transferred to normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled, so that after the range from position a to position b is scrolled using image data stored in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using image data corresponding to the rear surface image stored in normal video RAM 236 and displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

Similarly, for rear C, the range of Figures 32(a) to 32(b) is set so that after the image at the initial position is displayed, the transfer from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 can be completed while the images of Figures 32(a) to 32(b) are displayed using image data resident in the rear image area 235c of resident video RAM 235. This allows the image data corresponding to the images of Figures 32(b) to 32(c) and Figures 32(c) to 32(a) to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the images of Figures 32(a) to 32(b) are being displayed. Therefore, after the images of Figures 32(a) to 32(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the images of Figures 32(b) to 32(c) and Figures 32(c) to 32(a) can be displayed sequentially over time in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

For rear B and rear C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area (not shown) dedicated to rear images, which is provided in the image storage area 236a (see Figure 29) of the normal video RAM 236, which will be described later. This prevents the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear images from being overwritten by other image data, ensuring that the rear images can be displayed reliably.

Furthermore, on the back side B, the image data stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap with each other, with image data corresponding to the image between position b' and position b. Then, under control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from position b' is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, thereby allowing the back side image to be scrolled and displayed smoothly on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to use the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to display the image between positions c and d as the display area on the third pattern display device 81. Next, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to use the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to display the image between positions a and a' as the display area in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, the image between positions a and c can be displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 by repeatedly scrolling in a smooth flow toward the left.

Returning to Figure 29, we continue the explanation. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 resides. That is, the third symbol area 235d permanently stores image data corresponding to a total of 11 main symbols (see Figure 4), including the 10 main symbols numbered "0" through "9" and one main symbol bearing the words "challenge symbol." This eliminates the need to read image data from the character ROM 234 each time a variable effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable effect can be quickly initiated on the third symbol display device 81. This prevents a situation in which the variable effect does not immediately begin on the third symbol display device 81 after a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, even though the variable effect has already begun on the first symbol display device 37.

In addition, the third symbol area 235d also stores image data corresponding to main symbols without numbers "0" through "9," such as a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol and additional symbols resembling characters such as a plane, a furoshiki (wrapping cloth), or a helmet, and a main symbol with the words "challenge symbol" written on it. Some of this image data is used for a demo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a start win does not begin even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first variable effect stopped. As a result, when a demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in that demo effect. Therefore, by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image on the third symbol display device 81, a player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in a demo state, which is an update state.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters, including a "boy," are displayed in accordance with various effects, and the data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e. As a result, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of a command received from the main control device 110, it does not newly read corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead reads image data that is pre-resident in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, allowing the image controller 237 to draw the specified image. As a result, because there is no need to read corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, character designs can be changed instantly even if a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs within the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, when the sound and lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound and lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by means of an error command. Furthermore, if the sound and lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of any other error, the sound and lamp control device 113 also notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error along with the type of error by means of an error command. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the perspective of preventing player cheating and protecting players from errors, it is required that error messages be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. Therefore, the display control device 114 is able to instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The reserved symbol area 235g is an area for storing data related to the initial setting (default setting) display mode of the active symbol and reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, image data corresponding to a white "circle" symbol, which is the initial setting (default setting) display mode of the active symbol and reserved symbol, is stored in the reserved symbol area 235g. This eliminates the need to read image data from the character ROM 234 each time the active symbol and reserved symbol are displayed in the active symbol display area Db0 or reserved symbol display areas Db1-Db4 of the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even if a NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the active symbol or reserved symbol can be quickly displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which multiple balls enter the first ball entrance 64, and the reserved symbol is displayed on the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, but the reserved symbol (executed symbol) is not displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81.

The cockpit image area 235h is an area for storing image data corresponding to the cockpit image displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81. In other words, the cockpit image area 235h stores image data corresponding to cockpit images other than the execution and pending patterns displayed in the cockpit display area Db. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data corresponding to the cockpit display area Db from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if a NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the cockpit display area Db can be quickly displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, even when the cockpit display area Db continues to be displayed during the variable performance, or when the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed after executing the variable elements of "Super Reach" or "Special Reach," the cockpit display area Db can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out the cockpit image stored in the cockpit image area 235h.

In addition, the cockpit display area Db is configured to always be displayed fixedly in a certain position (at the bottom of the display area) in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, even when the back image of the main display area Dm is scrolled, unless a variable element of "Super Reach" or a variable element of "Special Reach" is executed. Therefore, the cockpit display area Db is a display object that is displayed more frequently than a specific third pattern or a specific back image. Therefore, by providing a cockpit image area 235h for the cockpit display area Db in the resident video RAM 235 and configuring display control based on the cockpit image stored in the cockpit image area 235h, it is possible to display the cockpit display area Db, which is displayed more frequently, more smoothly than when it is read directly from the NAND flash memory 234a.

The secondary display image area 235i is an area where image data corresponding to each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 resides. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third pattern display device 81, there is no need to read image data corresponding to the secondary display area Ds from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the secondary display area Ds can be quickly displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, even when the secondary display area Ds needs to be continuously displayed during a variable effect, or when the secondary display area Ds is redisplayed after a "reach display" is executed, the secondary display area Ds can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading the image data corresponding to the secondary display area Ds stored in the secondary display image area 235i.

Furthermore, like the cockpit display area Db, the secondary display area Ds is configured to be always displayed fixedly in a certain position (at the top of the display area) in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, even when the back image of the main display area Dm is scrolled, unless a variable element of "Super Reach" or a variable element of "Special Reach" is executed. Therefore, like the cockpit display area Db, the secondary display area Ds is a display object that is displayed more frequently than a specific third pattern or a specific back image. Therefore, by providing a secondary display image area 235i for the secondary display area Ds in the resident video RAM 235 and configuring display control based on image data corresponding to the secondary display area Ds stored in the secondary display image area 235i, it is possible to display the frequently displayed secondary display area Ds more smoothly than when data is read directly from the NAND flash memory 234a.

The character pattern area 235j is an area that stores image data corresponding to the initial setting (default setting) of the character display Se1 at the time of reach, which is displayed when a "reach display" occurs in the variable performance. In other words, data related to the "white" color, which is the normal display color of the character display Se1, and the character pattern of the "weak pattern" is stored in this character pattern area 235j. As described above, this pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when any of the "reach displays" is executed, the character display Se1 corresponding to that "reach display" is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, the display mode of the character display Se1 is determined by various counters 223g, etc. at the start of the variable effect, and the character display Se1 is required to be displayed promptly during the variable effect based on that determination.

In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to the initial setting (default setting) of character display Se1 is pre-resident in character design area 235j. Therefore, based on the received display variation pattern command and display stop type command, the display control device 114 reads image data corresponding to character display Se1 that is pre-resident in character design area 235j of resident video RAM 235, allowing the image controller 237 to instantly draw character display Se1. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to character display Se1 from character ROM 234. Therefore, even if a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for character ROM 234, character display Se1 can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading image data corresponding to character display Se1 stored in character design area 235j.

In addition, the initial setting (default setting) for character display Se1 is the display mode that appears most frequently. Therefore, by storing character display Se1 with a high appearance frequency in character design area 235j, the processing burden of display control related to character display Se1 can be reduced.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is composed of a single-port DRAM. The normal video RAM 236 is used to temporarily store image data previously read out from the character ROM 234 when the image controller 237 uses image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. This normal video RAM 236 is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required to draw the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into multiple sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 that stores the type of image data. In response, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described below) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of image in that frame buffer. While the image is being displayed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously displayed is read from the other frame buffer, and the image information is transmitted to the third pattern display device 81 along with a drive signal, thereby causing the third pattern display device 81 to display that one frame of image.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the read one frame of image on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing and display processes are executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, it is possible to perform the drawing process of one frame's worth of image while continuously displaying one frame's worth of image in 20 millisecond increments.

The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231, and has at least a data table storage area 232a.

The data table storage area 232a is an area that stores a display data table 232a1 serving as game information describing the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113); an additional data table 232a2 describing the display content to be displayed over time for an effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in addition to one effect based on a command from the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113); and a transfer data table 232a3 that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data used in one effect displayed by the display data table 232a1 that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235.

A display data table 232a1 is prepared for each performance mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113). For example, display data tables 232a1 corresponding to variable performances, demo performances, confirmation display performances, and restart performances are prepared.

As mentioned above, the demo effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a start win does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since the variable effect 1 stopped.The third symbol, consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9," is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes.When a demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall staff can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The confirmation display effect is an effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 after the variable effect, thereby confirming the display of the stopped pattern. For example, if the stopped pattern is a losing pattern, an effect emphasizing the "missing display" is displayed; if the stopped pattern is the jackpot type "time-saving A," an effect emphasizing the "jackpot display" is displayed; and if the stopped pattern is any of the small jackpot types "small jackpot A," "time-saving B," "time-saving C," "small jackpot B," or "time-saving D," an effect emphasizing the respective "small jackpot display" is displayed. By visually checking this confirmation display effect, the player can easily determine the game value awarded based on the content of the stopped pattern.

The restart effect is an effect in which an image of the third symbol vibrating is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) sent from the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113) is not received within a predetermined time after the third symbol is displayed as stopped following the end of the variable effect. When the player visually confirms that the third symbol is displayed as vibrating after the variable third symbol is displayed as stopped on the third symbol display device 81, the player can recognize that the stopped symbol has not been confirmed at that point.

The data table storage area 232a stores one display data table 232a1 each corresponding to the demo effect, the confirmation display effect, and the restart effect. Furthermore, if there are 32 variable effect patterns set, one table will be prepared for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Furthermore, the variable display data table 232a1 also contains a default variable display data table 232a1, which is a variable effect that is clearly different from the normal variable effect. This is used when the variable effect pattern instructed by the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 does not match the stop symbol that should be displayed when that variable effect stops; for example, when the variable effect pattern is a winning variable effect pattern and a losing stop symbol is instructed by the main control unit 110 (voice lamp control unit 113). This default variable displays the third symbol in a high-speed variable manner until a confirmation command (display confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is received, and upon receipt of the confirmation command, a special stop symbol indicating a loss (for example, symbols displayed as "9," "8," and "7" in order from the left) is confirmed as the stop symbol.

If the variable effect pattern instructed by the main control unit 110 via the audio lamp control unit 113 does not match the stop symbol that should be displayed when the variable effect stops, the display control unit 114 may not be able to correctly reflect the results of the lottery performed by the main control unit 110 and perform the variable effect or the final display effect.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, a default variation effect is performed in such cases, and after the variation effect, a special stop pattern indicating a special loss is displayed as a confirmed win on the third pattern display device 81. This prevents the third pattern display device 81 from mistakenly displaying a confirmed win or small win display even if the result of the lottery on the main control device 110 is a loss.

In addition, even if a special stop pattern is confirmed and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, if the lottery result on the main control device 110 is a big win or a small win, the game state on the actual pachinko machine 10 will transition to a big win state or a small win state, so the player can continue playing with peace of mind.

Furthermore, by using a special stop pattern as the confirmation display, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a jackpot or small win state even if the confirmation display is a miss. This prevents the player from feeling anxious when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot or small win state even though the confirmation display is a miss.

Now, with reference to Figure 33, the details of the display data table 232a1 will be explained. Figure 33 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the variable display data table 232a1 from the display data table 232a1. The display data table 232a1 corresponds to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that makes up one frame's worth of image, and, depending on the sprite type, drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, is specified.

The sprite type is information used to specify the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information used to specify the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information used to specify the magnification ratio relative to the standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to that magnification ratio. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when rotating a sprite for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite will be visible through it. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing it.

In the variable display data table 232a1, the drawing content for one frame specified for each address includes drawing information for each sprite, such as one back image, one cockpit image, eleven third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express light shining through the images, characters (character 1, character 2, ...) used for various effects such as boy images and text, and character patterns (character pattern 1, character pattern 2, ...) such as the text display Se1 when a reach occurs. One or more pieces of information regarding effects, characters, and text patterns are specified depending on the content to be displayed in that frame.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the character display Se1 that appears in the "reach display" is configured in its initial setting (default setting) display mode such that the display color of the character display Se1 is "white" and the character pattern of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs is "weak pattern." Therefore, even if the lottery process for the chance-up pattern of the character display Se1 is not performed properly, the character display Se1 can be displayed in its initial setting display mode. Therefore, even if an error or the like occurs in the lottery process for the character display Se1, the character display Se1 can be displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the initial setting display mode of the character display Se1 in the display color "white," which has the lowest advantageous suggestion, and the character pattern of the "weak pattern," it is possible to configure the display mode so that the likelihood of a jackpot is not excessively increased even in the variable presentation of a miss. Therefore, even if the lottery process for the character display Se1 is not performed properly due to an error or other reason, the display will not appear to arouse the player's expectations, allowing the player to enjoy a comfortable game without feeling distrustful.

The default display mode for character display Se1 may be configured to not display character display Se1. By not displaying character display Se1 when the lottery process for character display Se1 is not performed properly due to an error or other reason, it is possible to provide a comfortable game experience without excessively raising the player's expectations for a jackpot or causing the player to feel distrustful.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information remain constant over time. Therefore, the variable display data table 232a1 specifies only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of back image. This back type specifies whether to display one of backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "town stage," "sky stage," or "island stage"), or whether to display a back image different from backs A to C. Furthermore, if the back type specifies that a back image different from backs A to C should be displayed, information specifying which back image should be displayed is also specified.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the back faces A to C should be displayed based on the back face type, it identifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player from back faces A to C as the drawing target, and also determines the range of back face images to be displayed for that frame over time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back face image different from back faces A to C should be displayed, it determines the back face image to be displayed from the back face type.

In this embodiment, the display data table 232a1 describes a case where only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. However, instead, the back surface type and position information indicating which range of the back surface image corresponding to that back surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table 232a1 began. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the time the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began based on the display data table 232a1 and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the back surface type, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table 232a1 (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether the information indicates the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or the information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table 232a1 (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. Alternatively, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may instead be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored.

The display position of the cockpit image is fixed to the center of the bottom of the screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information remain constant over time. Therefore, like the rear image, the variable display data table 232a1 only specifies the cockpit type, which is information for specifying the type of cockpit image. This cockpit type contains information that specifies whether the cockpit display area Db will continue to be displayed during the variable performance, or whether the cockpit display area Db will be erased during the execution of the variable element of the "Super Reach" or the variable element of the "Special Reach."

If the cockpit type specifies that the cockpit display area Db is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the cockpit image corresponding to the cockpit display area Db as the drawing target. On the other hand, if the cockpit type specifies that the cockpit display area Db is not to be displayed (erased), the MPU 231 specifies that the cockpit image corresponding to the cockpit display area Db is not to be drawn.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) have symbol type offset information recorded as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference in the numbers attached to each third symbol. The reason offset information is specified rather than directly specifying the type of third symbol is because the display of the third symbol in the variable performance changes depending on the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance and the stopped symbol of the current variable performance, and the symbol offset information from the start of the variable performance until a predetermined time has passed records the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance. This causes the variable performance to start from the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This allows the fluctuation performance to stop at the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, each third symbol is assigned a unique number, so the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stopping symbol corresponding to the stopping type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to that third symbol.Furthermore, by expressing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time period during which the symbol offset information is switched from the offset information for the stopped symbols in the previous variable effect to the offset information for the stopped symbols in the current variable effect is set to be the time during which the third symbol is displayed in a rapidly changing state. While the third symbol is displayed in a rapidly changing state, it is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the symbol offset information from the offset information for the stopped symbols in the previous variable effect to the offset information for the stopped symbols in the current variable effect during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be aware of the interruption.

The first address of the variable display data table 232a1, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the variable display data table 232a1 ("02F0H" in the example of Figure 35) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and address "02F0H" containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation to be specified in that variable display data table 232a1 is written.

The MPU 231 selects the display data table 232a1 to use in response to commands (e.g., display variable pattern commands) from the audio lamp control device 113, reads it from the data table storage area 232a, and stores it in the display data table buffer 233b of the work RAM 233 (described later), while initializing the pointer 233e (described later) to "0." Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233e is incremented by 1 through an update process. Based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the MPU 231 identifies the next image content to be drawn based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 36) as game information (described later), and sends the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby issuing a drawing instruction for that image. As a result, the drawing content is identified in the order specified in the display data table 232a1 in accordance with the update of the pointer 233e, and the image specified in the display data table 232a1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 can change the effect image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 simply by performing the simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table 232a1 with the display data table buffer 233b.

Here, if a configuration were adopted in which a program executed by the MPU 231 was launched each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 was changed, as in conventional pachinko machines, the launch and execution of programs that become increasingly complex and expansive as the variety of effect images increases would place a heavy load on the processing. This would limit the processing capacity of the display control device 114, potentially limiting the variety of effect images that could be controlled.

In contrast, with this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table 232a1 with the display data table buffer 233b as appropriate, so a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

In addition, the reason why a display data table 232a1 is prepared in this way for each effect, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the effect to be displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and a drawing list can be created frame by frame in accordance with the set display data table 232a1 is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined in advance based on the results of a lottery held based on the start winning.

In contrast, in gaming machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines 10, the display content changes on the fly based on user operation, making it impossible to predict the display content. Therefore, it is not possible to provide a display data table 232a1 corresponding to each effect as described above. In this way, the configuration in which a display data table 232a1 is prepared for each effect, a display data table buffer 233b is set according to the effect to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame in accordance with the set display data table 232a1 can only be realized because the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the effects to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the results of a lottery held based on the start winning.

Next, the additional data table 232a2 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 34. Figure 34 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the additional data table 232a2. The additional data table 232a2 lists the display content to be displayed over time for an effect to be added to one effect based on a command from the main control unit 110 (audio lamp control unit 113) and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control unit 110 (audio lamp control unit 113), and includes concepts such as, for example, displaying an image that is not normally displayed in one effect and overlaying another effect on that one effect, changing the color tone of part or all of that one effect, or changing the image displayed in that one effect.

In other words, the additional data table 232a2 pre-determines the drawing content required to add and display an image that is not normally displayed to one performance displayed by the display data table 232a1 selected based on a command from the main control unit 110 (audio lamp control unit 113), the drawing content required to change the color tone of part or all of that one performance, and the drawing content required to change and display an image that is displayed as the initial setting (default setting) in that one performance.

In this embodiment, we will explain a case where the display content for displaying an additional change pattern is specified by the additional data table 232a2 in response to the "reach display" change effect displayed by the change display data table 232a1 selected based on the change pattern command (display change pattern command) from the main control unit 110 (audio lamp control unit 113).

In other words, the additional data table 232a2 is prepared in accordance with, for example, change patterns such as the character pattern of the character display Se1 in the "reach display" variable effect, and specifically, multiple additional data tables 232a2 corresponding to change patterns of the character display Se1 are stored in the data table storage area 232a.

In the first embodiment, the reach occurrence character display Se1 is configured to be able to display two types of display modes: a "weak pattern" and a "strong pattern." Specifically, when the reach occurrence character display Se1 "weak pattern" is selected, the character pattern "Let's go!" is displayed. Furthermore, when the reach occurrence character display Se1 "strong pattern" is selected, the character pattern "We can do it!", which is more optimistic than the "weak pattern," is displayed.

The reach-occurrence character display Se1 is also configured so that the displayed character color (display color) can be changed. Specifically, the reach-occurrence character display Se1 displays characters in "white," which is the normal display color. Furthermore, the reach-occurrence character display Se1 displays characters in "red," which is the display color for a chance-up pattern that has a higher chance of winning than the normal display color.

This additional data table 232a2 specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table 232a1. The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object to be additionally displayed in one frame of image, and also specifies drawing information for the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the sprite type.

For example, in the example of additional data table 232a2 shown in Figure 34, the sprite type (character type, character type), display position, magnification rate, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are specified for one character (character 1) and one character design (character design 1) in association with address "01F4H" specified in display data table 232a1. On the other hand, if there is no object to be added for display at the time indicated by the address specified in display data table 232a1, Null data is specified in additional data table 232a2, meaning that there is no object to be added corresponding to that address (this corresponds to address "0001H" in Figure 34).

Note that, like the display data table 232a1, the first address of the additional data table 232a2, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the additional data table 232a2 ("02EFH" in the example of Figure 34) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Furthermore, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address "02EFH" containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the effects to be specified in that additional data table 232a2 is written.

The additional data table 232a2 shown in Figure 34 exemplifies an example that corresponds to the change pattern of the variable presentation, which is the "normal reach only" variation pattern, and is set to a time corresponding to the variation time of the "normal reach only" variable presentation, i.e., a variation time of 15 seconds. Specifically, "01F4H" is set as the address corresponding to 10 seconds from the start of the variation, which is the start of the "normal reach" variable element, and is configured to set the display mode (e.g., a change in hair color) of the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 at the start of the "normal reach" variable element and the change pattern (e.g., a character pattern) of the character display Se1 emitted from the character design when a reach occurs.

When the MPU 231 receives a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command from the audio lamp control device 113, it reads from the data table storage area 232a an additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the change pattern of the variation effects indicated by the display variation pattern command and display stop type command, and stores it in the additional data table buffer 233c of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233e is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e is identified from one display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and one or more additional data tables 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and the image content to be drawn next is identified to create a drawing list (see FIG. 36), which will be described later. Note that if an additional data table 232a2 is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, the drawing list is created from only the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

For example, in the example of Figure 34, when pointer 233e is "0001H", null data is specified at address "0001H" in additional data table 232a2, so it is determined that no display object to be added exists, and a drawing list is generated based on the various sprites specified at address "0001H" in display data table 232a1. On the other hand, when pointer 233e is "01F4H", the MPU 231 creates a drawing list by adding the sprites of character 1 and character design 1 specified at address "01F4H" in additional data table 232a2 to the various sprites specified at address "01F4H" in display data table 232a1, and instructs image controller 237 to draw the images.

The drawing list is then sent to the image controller 237, which issues a drawing instruction for the image. As a result, the drawing content is identified in the order specified in the display data table 232a1 according to the update of the pointer 233e, and the drawing content specified in the additional data table 232a2 is added, so that the image specified in the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, when the display control device 114 displays another effect image (for example, a "strong pattern" image of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs) in addition to the effect image (for example, a variable effect image) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command (for example, a display variable pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 113, the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the other effect image to be displayed can be set in the additional data table buffer 233c, so that the additional effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed.

For example, if there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of additional effect images to be displayed, and a separate display data table specifying images in which the other effect images are overlaid on each original effect image were prepared, 32 x 5 = 160 types of display data tables would have to be prepared. However, by separately specifying the data table corresponding to the other effect images as additional data table 232a2, as in this pachinko machine 10, only 32 + 5 = 37 types of display data tables 232a1 and additional data tables 232a2 are prepared, thereby preventing an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 232a. Therefore, data tables 232a1 and 232a2 corresponding to a variety of effects can be stored within the capacity provided in the data table storage area 232a, making it easy to further diversify the effect images.

Furthermore, by defining the additional effect image to be displayed as the additional data table 232a2, as in this pachinko machine 10, even if it is decided to display the additional effect image after setting the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233b, the additional effect image to be displayed can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed by simply setting the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the other effect image in the additional data table buffer 233c without changing the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b.

Furthermore, because the additional data table 232a2 is configured to have the same data structure as the display data table 232a1, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e can be easily identified from the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 set in the additional data table buffer 233c while updating the pointer 233e every time, and a drawing list corresponding to one frame can be easily generated from these. Therefore, even if the display of another effect is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 or the like in addition to the effect performed based on a command from the main control device 110, by specifying the display content of the additional effect to be displayed in the additional data table 232a2, a wide variety of effect displays can be easily produced from the few data tables 232a1 and 232a2.

Next, the details of the transfer data table 232a3 will be explained with reference to Figure 35. Figure 35 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the transfer data table 232a3. The transfer data table 232a3 is prepared in correspondence with the display data table 232a1 prepared for each effect. In other words, the transfer data table 232a3 specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table 232a1 that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Note that if all image data for sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table 232a1 is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then a transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to that display data table 232a1 will not be prepared. This prevents the capacity of the data table storage area 232a from increasing.

Transfer data table 232a3 stores transfer data information for sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should begin transfer at the time indicated by an address specified in display data table 232a1 (addresses "0001H" and "01F4H" in Figure 35 correspond to this). The transfer start timing for the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in image storage area 236a by the time drawing of that specific sprite begins according to display data table 232a1, and transfer data table 232a3 specifies transfer data information for the transfer target image data in association with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table 232a1, null data is specified in the transfer data table 232a3, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the address indicated by the address (this corresponds to address "0002H" in Figure 35).

The transfer data information includes the starting address (storage source starting address) and ending address (storage source ending address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, as well as the starting address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

Note that, like the display data table 232a1, the first address of the transfer data table 232a3, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the transfer data table 232a3 ("02EFH" in the example of Figure 35) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Furthermore, for each address between address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and address "02EFH" containing the "End" information, transfer data information for the image data to be transferred as specified in the transfer data table 232a3 is written.

When the MPU 231 selects the display data table 232a1 to use in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 113, if a transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to that display data table 232a1 exists, it reads that transfer data table 232a3 from the data table storage area 232a and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233d of the work RAM 233, which will be described later.

Then, each time the pointer 233e is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e is identified from the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and a drawing list (see Figure 36) described below is created. At the same time, transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite for which transfer should begin at that time is obtained from the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d, and this transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of Figure 35, if pointer 233e is "0001H" or "01F4H", the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in transfer data table 232a3 to the drawing list created based on display data table 232a1 and additional data table 232a2, and sends the drawing list after addition to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if pointer 233e is "0002H", null data is specified at address "0002H" in transfer data table 232a3, so it determines that there is no image data to be transferred and from which transfer should begin, and sends the drawing list to image controller 237 without adding any transfer data information to the created drawing list.

If transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 performs processing to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a provided in the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table 232a3 specifies transfer data information for image data to be transferred at a specific address so that image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 by the time drawing of that specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table 232a1. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table 232a3, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table 232a1, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without fail. The image data stored in the image storage area 236a can then be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table 232a1.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This allows the corresponding effects to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table 232a1. Furthermore, by writing to the transfer data table 232a3, it is possible to easily and reliably transfer only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 113, and at the same time, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to that display data table 232a1 is set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. Therefore, the sprite image data used in that display data table 232a1 can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

Furthermore, the transfer data table 232a3 specifies transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This makes it possible to manage and control the transfer of image data for each sprite, facilitating the processing associated with the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the processing can be simplified while also allowing for detailed control of the transfer of image data. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load associated with the transfer.

Furthermore, the transfer data table 232a3 has the same data structure as the display data table 232a1, and specifies transfer data information for image data to be transferred at the time indicated by an address specified in the display data table 232a1. Therefore, the timing for starting transfer can be specified so that image data for a specific sprite is reliably stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can easily be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to Figure 29, we will continue the explanation. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs. This work RAM 233 contains at least a simple image display flag 233a, a display data table buffer 233b, an additional data table buffer 233c, a transfer data table buffer 233d, a pointer 233e, a drawing list area 233f, a time counter 233g, a stored image discrimination flag 233h, a drawing target buffer flag 233i, a character pattern memory 233j, and a red character flag 233k.

The simple image display flag 233a indicates whether the power-on images (power-on main image 282 and power-on variable image 283) shown in Figures 30(a) to 30(c) are to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. This simple image display flag 233a is set to ON during the initialization process of the main process (see Figure 71) executed by the MPU 231 after power is turned on, in order to display the power-on main image 282 on the third pattern display device 81 (see S2004 in Figure 71). Then, once all resident target image data has been stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process (see Figure 85(b)) of the transfer setting process (see Figure 85(a)), the flag is set to OFF to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S2415 in Figure 85(b)).

This simple image display flag 233a is referenced during V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2021 in FIG. 72(b)). If the simple image display flag 233a is on, a simple command determination process (see S2028 in FIG. 72(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2029 in FIG. 72(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233a is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 73 to 80) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 81 to 84) are executed so that various images are displayed in accordance with the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The simple image display flag 233a is also referenced in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)) executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)). If the simple image display flag 233a is determined to be on during this transfer setting process, resident target image data exists that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233a is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233b is a buffer for storing one display data table 232a1 corresponding to the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands, etc. from the voice lamp control device 113. The MPU 231 determines the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands, etc. from the voice lamp control device 113, selects the display data table 232a1 corresponding to that effect from the data table storage area 232a, and stores the selected display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233e (described later) by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see Figure 36) (described later) that contains image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

The additional data table buffer 233c is a buffer for storing one or more additional data tables 232a2 corresponding to effects (changing patterns such as the display color of the character display Se1) to be displayed in addition to the effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b in response to commands from the audio lamp control device 113, etc. As the MPU 231 stores the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b, it temporarily clears the contents of the additional data table buffer 233c by writing null data, which means that there are no additional display objects to be displayed.

Then, based on commands from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 uses the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b to determine whether or not there is an effect to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, each time an effect to be displayed in addition occurs, the MPU 231 selects the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to that effect from the data table storage area 232a, and stores the selected additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233e (described later) by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see Figure 36) (described later) that contains image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e in the additional data table buffer 233c.

As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the effects corresponding to the additional data table 232a2 in addition to the effects corresponding to the display data table 232a1. Furthermore, if the additional data table 232a2 is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 displays the effects corresponding to the display data table 232a1 as is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the additional data table buffer 233c is configured to be able to store multiple (e.g., 32) additional data tables 232a2. Therefore, each time an effect to be added is added, the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to that effect is determined, and then the additional data table 232a2 is added and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, thereby enabling the display of multiple effects corresponding to the multiple additional data tables 232a2 to be added to the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1.

The transfer data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b in response to commands from the voice lamp control device 113, etc. When the MPU 231 stores the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b, it also selects the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to that display data table 232a1 from the data table storage area 232a and stores the selected transfer data table 232a3 in the transfer data table buffer 233d.

Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to that display data table 232a1 is prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233d by writing null data to it, which means that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233e (described later) by one, if transfer data information for the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e is specified in the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d (i.e., if null data is not written), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to the drawing list (see Figure 36) (described later) that contains image drawing instructions for the image controller 237, which are generated for each frame.

As a result, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information. As described above, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address in the transfer data table 232a3 so that the image data corresponding to a given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of that given sprite begins in accordance with the display data table 232a1. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table 232a3, when drawing a given sprite in accordance with the display data table 232a1, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without fail.

In addition, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the display data table 232a1, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, by writing to the transfer data table 232a3, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233e is used to specify the address from which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information for the image data to be transferred from the display data table 232a1, additional data table 232a2, and transfer data table 232a3 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, additional data table buffer 233c, and transfer data table buffer 233d, respectively.

The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233e to "0" as the display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b. Then, during the display setting process (see Figure 81) of the V interrupt process (see Figure 72(b)) executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process (see Figure 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233e is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233e is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e from the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and creates a drawing list (see Figure 36) described below. The MPU 231 also obtains transfer data information related to the image data of a specified sprite for which transfer should begin at that time from the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effects corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b are displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and if the additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, the effects corresponding to the stored additional data table 232a2 can be added to the effects corresponding to the display data table 232a1 and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b or the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, the effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, when a transfer data table 232a3 is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used to draw a specified sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on that transfer data table 232a3, until the drawing of that sprite begins using the corresponding display data table 232a1.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the display data table 232a1, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, by writing to the transfer data table 232a3, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233f is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, and is generated based on the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d.

Now, with reference to Figure 36, the details of the drawing list will be explained. Figure 36 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images. As shown in Figure 36, for each sprite used in one frame of image, such as the background image, third design (design 1, design 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ...), cockpit image, execution design, reserved design (reserved design 1, reserved design 2, ...), character design (character design 1, ...), and error design, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for that sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information that causes the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite includes information indicating the ROM type (or RAM type) in which the image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, as well as its address. The image controller 237 retrieves the image data for that sprite from the memory area specified by the ROM type (or RAM type) and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information.

The image controller 237 performs scaling on the standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the character ROM 234 (or various video RAMs 235, 236) according to the magnification ratio, rotation according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency according to the semi-transparency value, compositing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction according to the color information, and filtering according to the filter specification information using the method specified by the information, and then draws the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233i (described below).

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of images based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by pointer 233e in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying an execution pattern or a reserved pattern, or a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage ROM type (or RAM type) and address for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table 232a1 and additional data table 232a2, or the sprite type identified from the content of other images. In other words, because the character ROM 234 (or resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data for that sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage ROM type (or RAM type) and address where the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies the other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as defined in the display data table 232a1 and additional data table 232a2. Note that in this embodiment, no other information is set for the rear view image and cockpit image.

Furthermore, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the background image is described first, followed by detailed information corresponding to each sprite in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ...), cockpit image, execution pattern, reserved pattern (reserved pattern 1, reserved pattern 2, ...), text pattern (text pattern 1, text pattern 2, ...), and error pattern.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and then overwrites the drawn sprites in the frame buffers 236b and 236c. Therefore, in one frame of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the front.

In addition, if transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233e in transfer data table 232a3 stored in transfer data table buffer 233d, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area provided in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred should be stored) to the end of the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Returning to Figure 29, we will continue the explanation. The timing counter 233g is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b. When the MPU 231 stores one display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b, it sets time data indicating the presentation time (variable presentation time) of the presentation displayed based on that display data table 232a1. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing and display processing for one frame of image is completed, each time the display setting processing (see FIG. 81) of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 72(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed, the time counter 233g is decremented by one (see S2309 in FIG. 81). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233g becomes "0" or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the effect.

The stored image discrimination flag 233h is a flag that indicates the storage status of all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, indicating whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image discrimination flag 233h is generated by the initial setting process (see S2001 in Figure 71) executed by the MPU 231 during main processing when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 233h generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image discrimination flag 233h is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred corresponding to sprite 1 during the normal image transfer setting process (see Figure 86) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to sprite 1 for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON," indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of image storage area 236a as sprite 1 will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of image data for sprite 1, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "OFF."

In addition, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 references the stored image discrimination flag 233h to determine whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S2454 in Figure 87).

If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S2455 in Figure 87), and the image controller 237 is caused to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "ON", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer process for that image data is canceled. This prevents unnecessary transfers from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each section of the display control device 114 and traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 will be displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"). If the drawing target buffer flag 233i is "0", the MPU 231 specifies the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer; if the drawing target buffer flag 233i is "1", the MPU 231 specifies the second frame buffer 236c. Information about this specified drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 along with the drawing list (see S2502 in Figure 88).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is displayed on the specified drawing target buffer. Simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 also reads previously displayed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transfers this image information to the third pattern display device 81 along with a drive signal, thereby executing a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 along with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233i, i.e., by setting the value from "0" to "1" and vice versa. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time drawing processing is performed in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 72(b)) executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image is completed (see S2502 in FIG. 88).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing and display processes are executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, it is possible to perform the drawing process of one frame's worth of image while continuously displaying one frame's worth of image in 20 millisecond increments.

The character pattern memory 233j is a memory for storing whether a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern" will be displayed in the reach-occurrence character display Se1 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during a "reach display." Based on the contents stored in this character pattern memory 233j, the MPU 231 determines whether the character pattern in the reach-occurrence character display Se1 will be a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern," and sets the "weak pattern" or "strong pattern" to be displayed in the reach-occurrence character display Se1 based on that determination.

This character pattern memory 233j is first initialized (i.e., cleared to 0) by the initial setting process (see S2001 in Figure 71) executed by the MPU 231 during main processing when the power is turned on. Then, when the display control device 114 receives commands from the audio lamp control device 113 regarding the character pattern of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs, the contents corresponding to those commands are set (see S2192 in Figure 79).

Specifically, for example, when a weak pattern command for display is received, data indicating a "weak pattern" is set in the character pattern memory 233j as the character display Se1 when a reach occurs. Furthermore, when a strong pattern command for display is received, data indicating a "strong pattern" is set in the character pattern memory 233j as the character display Se1 when a reach occurs.

In this way, when the MPU 231 receives a weak display pattern command or a strong display pattern command (hereinafter, the weak display pattern command and the strong display pattern command may be collectively referred to as "pattern commands") from the voice lamp control device 113, it sets the character pattern memory 233j based on the received pattern commands. On the other hand, when the variable effect ends, that is, when the MPU 231 receives a display confirmation command from the voice lamp control device 113, it clears (turns off) the character pattern memory 233j to 0 along with the red character flag 233k, etc., described below, in the display setting process (see FIG. 81) (see S2314 in FIG. 81).

When the contents of a pattern-related command are set in the character pattern memory 233j, the MPU 231 determines the character pattern additional data table 232a2 that corresponds to the contents stored in the character pattern memory 233j, and sets (stores) the character pattern additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c (see 2196 in Figure 79). Then, as described above, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character pattern additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c.

As a result, by setting the additional data table for character patterns 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, the character pattern of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs in the variable effect is changed from the original content defined by the display data table 232a1 (for example, the character display Se1 when a reach occurs is changed from a "weak pattern" to a "strong pattern") and displayed. Therefore, simply by storing the additional data table for character patterns 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, the character pattern of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs that is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

In the first embodiment, even if the initial setting (default setting) character pattern for character display Se1, i.e., a "weak pattern" character pattern for character display Se1 when a reach occurs, is set in character pattern memory 233j, the character pattern additional data table 232a2 is selected based on that character pattern and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. This configuration eliminates the need for processing to check whether the display mode of character display Se1 is the initial setting, allows for common processing, and reduces the number of steps required when designing a program.

Instead of the above configuration, if the contents set in the character pattern memory 233j are the initial settings (default settings), the additional data table 232a2 may not be stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. In this configuration, while a process is required to determine whether or not the settings are the initial settings, there is no need to store an unnecessary additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, which reduces the processing burden related to display control.

The red character flag 233k is a flag for setting the display color of the character display Se1 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to "red" during a "reach display." The MPU 231 sets the display color of the character display Se1 to "red" based on the setting of this red character flag 233k.

This red-character flag 233k is first initialized (i.e., turned off) by the initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 during main processing when the power is turned on. Then, when the MPU 231 receives a display red-character command from the voice lamp control device 113, it sets this red-character flag 233k on (see S2194 in FIG. 79). On the other hand, when the variable effect ends, that is, when the MPU 231 receives a display confirmation command from the voice lamp control device 113, it turns off (clears to 0) the red-character flag 233k along with the character pattern memory 233j, etc., during the display setting process (see FIG. 81) (see S2314 in FIG. 81).

When the red-character flag 233k is set to ON, the MPU 231 determines the additional data table 232a2 for text color that corresponds to the red-character flag 233k being ON, and sets (stores) the additional data table 232a2 for text color in the additional data table buffer 233c (see S2196 in Figure 79). Then, as described above, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c.

If both the character pattern additional data table 232a2 and the character color additional data table 232a2 are set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c, a drawing list is created based on the character pattern additional data table 232a2 and the character color additional data table 232a2.

As a result, by setting the additional data table 232a2 for character color based on the red character flag 233k, the display color of the character display Se1 in the variable effect is changed from the original content ("white") specified by the display data table 232a1 to "red" regardless of the character pattern. Therefore, simply by creating the additional data table 232a2 for character color based on the settings of the red character flag 233k and storing the additional data table 232a2 for character color in the additional data table buffer 233c, the display color of the character display Se1 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 37 to 59. The processes of the MPU 201 can be broadly divided into start-up processes that are initiated when the power is turned on, main processes that are executed after the start-up processes, timer interrupt processes that are initiated periodically (every 2 millisecond period in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processes that are initiated when a power outage signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal.

Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. This startup process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on.

During this startup process, first, the initial value setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). For example, access permission to RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-controllers (peripheral controllers such as the voice lamp controller 113 and dispensing controller 111) to become operable (S102). Then, access to RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 503 (see Figure 5) provided on the main control unit 110 is turned on (S104). If the result of the determination is that the RAM clear switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether power outage information is stored in RAM 203 (S105). If no information is stored (S105: No), it is possible that processing did not end normally the previous time the power was shut off. In this case, the processing proceeds to S116 to initialize RAM 203.

If power outage information is stored in RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S107: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S116.

As will be described later in the processing of S156 in Figure 39, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in a specified area of RAM 203 are correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), power outage information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S107: Yes), the power outage information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in RAM 203 (S108). Next, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

If it is determined in the processing of S109 that the setting key 501 is on (S109: Yes), since the RAM erase switch 503 was off and the setting key 501 was on when the power was turned on, the base display device 401 first begins displaying the probability setting value (S110) in order to start up the startup mode in "setting confirmation mode." It is then determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S111), and the "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, if the setting key 501 has been turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is terminated (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is terminated, and processing proceeds to S113. In addition, if the setting key 501 is not turned on in the processing of S109 (S109: No), the processing of S110 to S112 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S113 in order to start up the startup mode in "normal mode."

In the processing of S113, a setting value command is generated based on the probability setting value and set in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203 (S113), and processing proceeds to S163.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the sound and lamp control device 113 does not have a power backup function, and the RAM 223 within the sound and lamp control device 113 is initialized during the startup process (see S1010 in Figure 60). Therefore, each time the pachinko machine 10 is started up, a setting value command is set and sent from the main control device 110 to the sound and lamp control device 113.

The setting value command set here is sent to the voice and lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in Figure 40), which will be described later. When the voice and lamp control device 113 receives this setting value command, it is configured to store (memorize) the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command in a setting value memory (not shown) provided in RAM 223.

In the processing of S163, processing related to the base display device is performed (S163), after which an interrupt is permitted (S114) and the process proceeds to the main processing (see FIG. 39) described below. In this processing related to the base display device, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment display provided on the base display device 401 are lit, and a wait process is executed in this state for 5 seconds. As a result, every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment display provided on the base display device 401 are lit continuously for at least 5 seconds, making it possible to confirm that all segments are lit normally and to easily determine whether the display on the base display device 401 is operating normally.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S104 that the RAM clear switch 503 is on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether the setting key 501 is on (S115) to determine whether the startup mode should be "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode."

If it is determined in the processing of S115 that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the processing proceeds to S116 to start up the startup mode in "RAM clear mode."

In the processing of S116, initialization processing of RAM 203 (S116 and S117) is performed.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized at power-on, regardless of whether settings have been changed, such as when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed when the startup process is executed, RAM initialization processing (S116 and S117) is executed. Similarly, if power outage information is not set (S105: No) or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), RAM 203 initialization processing (S116 and S117) is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116 and S117), i.e., "RAM clear mode," the used area of RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then an initial value is set in RAM 203 (for example, the first reserved ball counter 203a is cleared to "0") (S117), and processing proceeds to S113.

In addition, this RAM initialization process (S116 and S117) clears the used areas of RAM 203, excluding areas related to the base values displayed on the base display device 401 (total out counter, low probability payout counter, real-time base value data, etc. (none of which are shown)). As a result, even if the RAM clear switch 503 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement of the real-time base value that was being performed before the operation continues, and the measured real-time base value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

If it is determined in the processing of S115 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), a setting change process is performed to change the startup mode to "setting change mode" (S118).

Now, with reference to Figure 38, we will explain the setting change process (S118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 38 is a flowchart showing this setting change process (S118).

This setting change process (S118) is executed when the startup mode is "setting change mode," and is a process for accepting and confirming changes (updates) to the probability setting values from hall personnel, etc.

In this setting change process (S118), first, the start of display of the current probability setting value is set on the base display device 401 (S121), and then processing proceeds to S122. This setting to start displaying the probability setting value causes the base display device 401 to begin displaying the probability setting value.

The probability setting value displayed here may be fixed to a specific value, rather than the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off. In other words, when the startup mode switches to "setting change mode," the base display device 401 may always start displaying a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1," which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "3"), "2," which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values, or "3," which is the maximum value of the probability setting values. This allows hall personnel and others to change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off.

On the other hand, when the startup mode becomes "setting change mode," the base display device 401 may begin displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. This allows hall staff and others to change the probability setting value while taking into account the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Furthermore, when the startup mode switches to "setting change mode," the base display device 401 may begin displaying the probability setting value as "2" if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off is "2" or higher; if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off is "1," the display may begin displaying the probability setting value set before the power was cut off. For example, if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off is high, such as "3," there may be many cases where it is desirable to slightly reduce the probability setting value (e.g., by 1). In such cases, if the probability setting value begins displaying as the probability setting value set before the power was cut off, the following problem arises. That is, the probability setting value is updated by incrementing it by 1 each time the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on. If the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on when the probability setting value is "3," the probability setting value is reset to "1." Therefore, for example, if you want to change the probability setting value from "3" to "2," you must repeatedly turn on the RAM clear switch 503 to cycle through the probability setting value almost once. In contrast, if the probability setting value set before the power was turned off was high, by starting to display the probability setting value as "2," it is possible to update the probability setting value while minimizing the number of times the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on.

Next, in S122, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "3" (S122). If it is not within the specified range, i.e., the probability setting value is abnormal (S122: No), the probability setting value is changed to its initial value (S123), and processing proceeds to S124. This initial value may be "1," which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "3"), "2," which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values, or "3," which is the maximum value of the probability setting values. On the other hand, if the result of S122 is that the probability setting value is determined to be within the range of "1" to "3" (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is normal, so processing S123 is skipped and processing proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), it is then determined whether the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

If it is determined as a result of S125 that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125: Yes), the probability setting value is updated (S126) and the process returns to S122.

The probability setting value is updated in S126 by adding 1 to the previous probability setting value if it is between "1" and "2", or by resetting the previous probability setting value to "1" if it is "3". The probability setting value updated by S126 is displayed on the base display device 401.

The loop process of S122 → S123 → S124: No → S125 (and S126) → S122 continues until it is determined in S124 that the RAM clear switch 503 has been turned on (S124: Yes). If it is determined in S124 that the RAM clear switch 503 has been turned on (S124: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is confirmed as the probability setting value to be used in the upcoming game (S127), and the jackpot random number table 202a is set according to that probability setting value (S128).

After processing S128, it is then determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S129). In processing S129, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from an on state to an off state, or it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in an off state.

As a result of the processing of S129, as long as it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state (S129: No), the processing of S129 is repeatedly executed. Then, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state (S129: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set to end (S130), and this setting change processing (S118) is terminated.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the startup process (see Figure 37), proceeds to S116, executes RAM203 initialization process (S116 and S117), and erases (clears) the data in RAM203. In this way, by having hall staff or the like turn on the RAM erase switch 503 in the process of S124 to confirm the probability setting value, hall staff or the like can be made strongly aware that the data in RAM203 will be erased thereafter.

Furthermore, in the processing of S124, the probability setting value was confirmed by detecting that the RAM erase switch 503 was on, but it may also be configured to confirm the probability setting value by detecting that the setting key 501 is off.

Next, referring to Figure 39, we will explain the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing. Figure 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is broadly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

The main processing first determines whether power outage information is stored in RAM 203 (S151). If power outage information is not stored in RAM 203 (S151: No), the power outage monitoring circuit 252 has not output a power outage signal SG1, and the power supply has not been interrupted. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, "9999" and "99"), they are cleared to "0". The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding counter buffers 203c in RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated using the same method as the processing in S207 (see Figure 40) of the timer interrupt processing described below (S153), and the process proceeds to S151.

While this main processing is being executed, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40), described below, is initiated and executed at predetermined intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt processing, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during a jackpot, processing is performed to control the opening and closing of the variable winning device 65, and if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the display of normal symbols is controlled by the normal symbol display device 83. Furthermore, in the jackpot lottery executed when variable display is initiated on the special symbol display device 37, which serves as the result notification device, the number of jackpot random number values compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether the state is high or low probability. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt processing operation varies depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt processing operation until the execution timing of the next timer interrupt processing operation is not constant but changes depending on the state of the game at that time.

The above-mentioned S152 and S153 processes, which are part of the main processing, are executed within the remaining time of this timer interrupt processing. In other words, this remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, so that the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the regular hit counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, it is possible to impart randomness to the updates of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the regular hit counter C4, which use these as their initial values for update.

If power outage information is stored in RAM 203 during the processing of S151 (S151: Yes), the power was cut off due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 output a power outage signal SG1, which resulted in the execution of the NMI interrupt processing described later in FIG. 59. Therefore, the processing at the time of power outage from S154 onwards is executed.

In the processing of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S155). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved (S156), and access to RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), continuing the infinite loop until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, the checksum value in the backed-up stack area and work area of RAM 203.

Note that S151 is executed at the end of one cycle of S152 and S153, which are performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40). As a result, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, various settings made using the timer interrupt process are completed, and the power outage information is confirmed when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 have finished updating. Therefore, when recovering from a power outage, processing can be started from S151 after the start-up process is completed. In other words, processing can be started from S151, just as when initialization is performed during the start-up process.

Therefore, during processing at power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 do not need to be saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer; instead, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) during the initial setup process (S101), and processing can begin from S151. As a result, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or going out of control.

Next, with reference to Figure 40, we will explain the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, external output processing is first executed (S201). In the timer interrupt process and main processing (see FIG. 39), commands or signals to be sent to the payout control device 111, audio lamp control device 113, hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processes. When a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. When a signal is generated, the signal is output to a device corresponding to the signal (for example, an external output terminal board (not shown) for connecting the hall computer and pachinko machine 10). In the external output process of S201, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device), and the signals are output to various devices.

After processing S201, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then a win process is executed to execute processing when each special symbol is hit (S203). This win process (S203) will be described later in Figure 48.

After S203, a normal electric role control process is executed (S204), which executes drive control processing for the normal electric role 72. Briefly explained, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display device 83, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, if a winning normal symbol (e.g., a "○" symbol) appears as a control judgment result, indicating a winning state, the normal electric role 72 is opened for a predetermined time, whereas if a losing normal symbol (e.g., an "X" symbol) appears, the normal electric role 72 remains closed. This normal electric role control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

After processing S204, the process of reading the various winning switches is then executed (S205). That is, the states of the various switches 208 connected to the main control unit 110 are read, and the state of the switches 208 is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Furthermore, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of balls won to be sent to the payout control device 111 is set in a command sending ring buffer provided in RAM 203. As a result, the specified prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when its counter value reaches its maximum value ("9999" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0". The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when its counter value reaches its maximum value ("99" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0", and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of RAM 203.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variable type counter CS1, normal win counter C4, and small win type counter CK are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variable type counter CS1, normal win counter C4, and small win type counter CK are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (in the first embodiment, "9999", "99", "99", "9", "99", and "99", respectively), they are cleared to "0". Furthermore, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or normal win counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or normal win counter C4, and that initial value is set for the jackpot random number counter C1 or normal win counter C4. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 and CK are then stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of RAM 203.

Next, the start winning process is executed in response to winning at the first start opening 64 and the second start opening 71 (S208). Details of this start winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to Figure 41.

Next, a gate passing process is executed to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S209). If it is determined in this gate passing process (S209) that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the normal symbol hit counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of this normal symbol hit counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h (see Figure 6), and the number of reserved variable displays of normal symbols is displayed on the normal symbol reserved lamp 84. Details of this gate passing process (S209) will be described later with reference to Figure 42.

After the gate passing process (S209) is executed, a process for dynamically displaying a special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 as a result notification device and a special symbol change process for setting a change pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S210) based on the processing contents of the start winning process (S208). Details of the special symbol change process (S210) will be described later with reference to Figure 43.

Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passing process (S209), a judgment is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss, and a normal symbol variation process is executed (S211), which is a setting process for causing the normal symbol display device 83 to display a variable display of the normal symbol based on the judgment result. In this normal symbol variation process (S211), the probability of a hit of the normal symbol is set to either a high probability (e.g., 99/100) or a low probability (70/100) depending on the game status described above. Then, the normal symbol is displayed variably based on the hit or miss result, and the display result according to the hit or miss result is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83. Details of the normal symbol variation process (S211) will be described later with reference to Figure 56.

After executing the normal map change processing (S211), the launch control processing is executed (S212), and then other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S213), after which the timer interrupt processing ends.

The launch control process (S212) determines whether ball launch is on or off when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch has not been operated. If ball launch is on, the ball launch signal information is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203 in order to send a ball launch signal to the launch control device 112, which acts as a launch device. As a result, the ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112, which acts as a launch device, via the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

In addition, in this embodiment, we have described a case where periodically executed processing is executed by timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40), and counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the main processing during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. However, some or all of the processing executed by timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (e.g., every 2 milliseconds) within the main processing. For example, in this embodiment, some or all of the prize ball count signal, payout abnormality signal reading processing (S202), win processing (S203), normal electric control processing (S204), and switch reading processing (S205) executed by timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds within the main processing, rather than by timer interrupt processing.

In this case, a step can be provided in the main processing to determine whether a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed, and the processing to be performed at predetermined intervals can be performed only if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, with the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 being performed regardless of whether the predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is performed during the remaining time of the processing to be performed at predetermined intervals. However, since the time required to perform the processing to be performed at predetermined intervals varies depending on the state of the game, even with this configuration, each counter CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated randomly.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 41, we will explain the start winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 41 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S208).

The start winning process (S208) determines whether a ball has won the first start opening 64 or the second start opening 71, and if a winning ball has been won, the values of each counter C1-C3, CS1, and CK are stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the winning start opening 64, 71. The process also executes a process to transmit the reserved values of each counter C1-C3, CS1, and CK, together with the number of reserved balls, to the audio lamp control device 113.

In this start winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether a ball has entered the first start hole 64 (start winning) (S301). Here, the MPU 201 detects a ball entering the first start hole 64 over three timer interrupt processes (see Figure 40) based on the output signal of the first start hole switch (not shown) that detects a ball entering the first start hole 64 (winning), which was read in the switch reading process (see S205 in Figure 40).

If it is determined in S301 that the ball has entered the first starting slot 64 (a starting slot has been entered) (S301: Yes), the system then determines whether the game state is in the "normal game state," i.e., whether left-handed play is encouraged (S302). If the determination result is not in the "normal game state" (S302: No), this means that the ball was fired by a non-encouraged (prohibited) left-handed play rather than an encouraged right-handed play and entered the first starting slot 64. Therefore, an alarm is output from the audio output device 226 (see Figure 5), and left-handed play error processing is executed, such as displaying the text "Please hit right" on the third symbol display device 81 (S303), and processing proceeds to S304.

By configuring it in this way, if a ball is detected by the first start port switch (not shown) in the "normal high probability time shortened state" or "normal low probability time shortened state" where left-handed play is not encouraged, error processing such as outputting an alarm will be performed, discouraging players from playing with their left hand in play states where left-handed play is not encouraged (encouraging them to play with their right hand), and eliminating play in formats that differ from the encouraged play specifications as much as possible, making it possible to achieve the playability expected in each play state.

Note that if the processing of S302 determines that the gaming state is "normal gaming state" (S302: Yes), this is a gaming state in which left-handed play is encouraged, so processing of S303 is skipped, the left-handed play error processing of S303 is not performed, and processing proceeds to S304.

If, as a result of the processing in S301, it is determined that a ball has entered the first start hole 64 (a start hole has occurred) (S301: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N1 for the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol held in reserve in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S304). Then, if there has been a ball entering the first start hole 64 but the number of reserved balls N1 is not less than 4 (S304: No), this start hole process (S208) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40).

On the other hand, if the number of activated reserved balls N1 is less than 4 (S304: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is incremented by 1 (S305). Then, since the winning ball this time was in the first starting hole 64 corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination for the random number values C1, C3, CS1, and CK (S306), and processing proceeds to S311.

If, in the process of S301, it is determined that the ball has not entered the first starting hole 64 (S301: No), it is then determined whether the ball has entered the second starting hole 71 (starting entry) (S307). Here, as with the first starting hole 64, a ball entering the second starting hole 71 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see Figure 40) based on the output signal of the second starting hole switch (not shown) that detects a ball entering the second starting hole 71 (entry), which was read in the switch reading process (see S205 in Figure 40).

If it is determined that the ball has entered the second starting hole 71 (a starting winning has occurred) (S307: Yes), processing proceeds to S308.

In addition, in the processing of S307, if it is determined that the ball has entered the second starting hole 71 (S307: Yes), it is determined whether the game state is in the "normal game state." If it is determined that the game state is in the "normal game state," it is a game state in which left-handed play is encouraged, so normal right-handed play error processing may be performed.

When it is determined that a ball has entered the second start port 71 (a start-up win has occurred) (S307: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (the number of reserved balls N2 that are activated for the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special symbol that are reserved in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit ("4" in the first embodiment) (S308). If there is no win in the second start port 71 (S307: No), or if there is a win in the second start port 71 but the number of reserved balls that are activated N2 is not less than 4 (S308: No), this start-up win process (S208) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40).

On the other hand, if the number of activated reserved balls N2 is less than 4 (S308: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N2) is incremented by 1 (S309). Then, since the winning bid occurred in the second starting hole 71 corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination for the random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S310), and processing proceeds to S311.

Furthermore, in the processing of S301 and S307, if a ball simultaneously enters the first starting hole 64 and the second starting hole 71, the processing for the ball entering the first starting hole 64 may be executed first, the processing for the ball entering the second starting hole 71 may be awaited, and the processing for the ball entering the second starting hole 71 may be executed in the start winning processing (S208) in the next timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40).

In S311, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variable type counter CS1, and small jackpot type counter CK are read from counter buffer 203c (see Figure 5) and stored in each reserved ball storage area. That is, of the first reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in first reserved ball storage area 203d set as the storage destination in S306, the values are reserved (stored) in jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, variable type counter storage area 203d4, and small jackpot type counter storage area d5, which correspond to the value indicated by first reserved ball number counter 203a (S311).

Specifically, for example, in the processing of S306 based on a winning entry into the first starting hole 64, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination, and if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition in the processing of S305 is "1," the values of counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area. Also, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "2," the values of counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area; if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "3," the values of counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area; and if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "4," the values of counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area.

Similarly, in the processing of S310 based on a winning entry into the second starting hole 71, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination, and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition in the processing of S309 is "1", the values of counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved area 1. Furthermore, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "2", the values of counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved area 2; if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "3", the values are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved area 3; and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "4", the values are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved area 4.

Next, in order to send a first reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, which includes the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition by the processing of S305 (number of active reserved balls N1) and the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, stop pattern selection counter C3, variable type counter CS1 and small jackpot type counter CK stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d by the processing of S306, the first reserved ball number command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203 (S312). In addition, in order to transmit a second reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, the second reserved ball number command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203 (S312), which includes the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N1) after the addition in S309 and the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variable type counter CS1, and small jackpot type counter CK stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e in S310. As a result, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 40) that is executed next. After S312 is completed, this start-up winning process (S208) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

In addition, the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1, and CK included in the first reserved ball count command or the second reserved ball count command in the processing of S312 may be the values read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S312, or the values stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e in the processing of S312 may be read.

Next, referring to Figure 42, we will explain the gate passing process (S209), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 42 is a flowchart showing this gate passing process (S209). The gate passing process (S209) determines whether or not a ball has passed (entered) the through gate 67, and if a ball has passed (entered), it executes a process to store (reserve) the value of the regular ball hit counter C4 in the regular ball reserved storage area 203h.

In this gate passing process (S209), it is first determined whether the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S401). Here, based on the output signal of the through gate switch (not shown) that detects the ball passing through (scoring) the through gate 67, which was read in the switch reading process (see S205 in Figure 40), passage through (scoring) the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see Figure 40).

In the processing of S401, if the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S401: No), this gate passing processing (S209) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has passed through (entered) the through gate 67 (S401: Yes), it is then determined whether the game state is a "normal game state," i.e., whether the shooting of balls by left-handed play is encouraged (S402). If the result of the determination is a "normal game state" (S402: Yes), it is then determined whether the dynamic display of the second special pattern is fluctuating or whether there is a reserved ball for the dynamic display of the second special pattern (S403). If the result of the determination is that the dynamic display of the second special pattern is not fluctuating and there are no reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special pattern (S403: No), this means that a ball that was shot by a right-hand hit, which is not encouraged (prohibited) in "normal gaming state A", but by a left-hand hit, which is encouraged, has passed through the through gate 67. Therefore, an alarm is output from the audio output device 226 (see Figure 5), and normal right-hand hit error processing is executed (S404), such as displaying the text "Please return to left-hand hit" on the third pattern display device 81 as a limited effect, and processing proceeds to S405.

By configuring it in this way, if a ball is detected by the through gate 67 in the "normal game state" where right-hand play is not recommended, error processing such as outputting an alarm sound is performed, which discourages players from playing right-hand games in game states where right-hand play is not encouraged, and eliminates as much as possible gameplay that differs from the recommended game specifications, thereby achieving the gameplay expected in each game state.

In the processing of S402, if the game state is not "normal game state" (S402: No), the state is "normal high probability time shortened state" or "normal low probability time shortened state" in which right-hand play is encouraged, so the normal right-hand play error processing of S404 is not performed, the processing of S403 and S404 is skipped, and processing proceeds to S405.

In S405, the process determines whether the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203g (the number of activated reserved balls HN for the variable display of normal symbols reserved in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit ("4" in the first embodiment) (S404). Then, even if there is passage (entry) through the through gate 67, if the number of activated reserved balls HN is not less than 4 (S405: No), this gate passage process (S209) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40).

On the other hand, if the number of active reserved balls HN is less than 4 (S405: Yes), the value of the regular reserved ball count counter 203g (number of active reserved balls HN) is incremented by 1 (S406). Then, the value of the regular per counter C4 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see Figure 5), and the read data is stored in one of the regular reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the regular reserved ball storage area 203h that corresponds to the value indicated by the regular reserved ball count counter 203g (S407).

Specifically, for example, if the value of the regular map reserved ball count counter 203g after the addition in S406 is "1," the value of the regular map hit counter C4 is reserved in the regular map reserved area 1. Furthermore, if the value of the regular map reserved ball count counter 203g after the addition is "2," the value of the regular map hit counter C4 is reserved in the regular map reserved area 2; if the value of the regular map reserved ball count counter 203g after the addition is "3," the value of the regular map reserved ball count counter 203g after the addition is "4," the value of the regular map hit counter C4 is reserved in the regular map reserved area 4. After S407 is completed, this gate passing process (S209) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

In the first embodiment, the command for the number of reserved balls for normal symbols related to the variable display of normal symbols is not sent to the voice lamp control device 113, but the command for the number of reserved balls for normal symbols related to the variable display of normal symbols may be sent to the voice lamp control device 113 to perform effects (announcements) related to the reserved symbols related to the variable display of normal symbols. In this case, by including the value of the normal symbol hit counter C4 in the command for the number of reserved balls for normal symbols and sending it, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to be able to perform so-called pre-reading processing related to normal symbols, and variations in the effects related to normal symbols may be provided.

Next, referring to Figure 43, we will explain the special chart change processing (S210), which is one process of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 43 is a flowchart showing this special chart change processing (S210).

This special symbol variation process (S210) controls the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37, which serves as a result notification device for the first and second special symbols, and the variation effects performed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the game status.

In this special symbol change process (S210), the MPU 201 first determines whether either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently in a jackpot (S501). The jackpot period includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of a jackpot, the predetermined period before the jackpot game begins (i.e., the jackpot opening), and the predetermined period after the jackpot game ends (i.e., the jackpot ending). If the determination in S501 indicates that either special symbol is in a jackpot (S501: Yes), the special symbol change process (S210) ends and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

If it is determined in the processing of S501 that a jackpot is not currently occurring (S501: No), it is next determined whether either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently occurring in a small jackpot (S551). Small jackpot periods include the period during the small jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 (result notification device) when a small jackpot occurs, the period before the start of the small jackpot game (i.e., the small jackpot opening), and the period after the end of the small jackpot game (i.e., the small jackpot ending). If the determination in S551 indicates that a small jackpot is occurring for either special symbol (S551: Yes), the special symbol change processing (S210) is terminated and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

If it is determined in the processing of S551 that a small win is not occurring (S551: No), then it is determined whether the first special pattern (Special Pattern 1) or the second special pattern (Special Pattern 2) is being dynamically displayed on the special pattern display device 37 (S502). If the first special pattern or the second special pattern is not being dynamically displayed on the special pattern display device 37 (S502: No), then it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the dynamic display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern on the special pattern display device 37 stopped (S503). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the dynamic display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern stopped (S503: No), the special pattern change processing (S210) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40). As a result, the stopped symbol in the dynamic display (variable presentation) of the first special symbol or second special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 (third symbol display device 81) for a predetermined period of time, allowing the player to see the stopped symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S503, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the dynamic display stopped (S503: Yes), a determination is made as to whether the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N2 for the dynamic display (variable effect) for the second special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is greater than "0" (S504). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N2) is not "0" (S504: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the dynamic display (variable effect) for the second special pattern, and first the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N2) is decremented by 1 (S505). This is because the execution of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variable effect) for the second special pattern is started by the variation start processing (S510) described below, and the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S506). This data shift process (S506) shifts the data stored in the second reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e sequentially toward the reserved ball execution area 203f, shifting the data in each area in the following order: second reserved area 1 → reserved ball execution area 203f, second reserved area 2 → second reserved area 1, second reserved area 3 → second reserved area 2, and second reserved area 4 → second reserved area 3.

On the other hand, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N2) is determined to be "0" in the processing of S504 (S504: No), then it is determined whether the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1 for the dynamic display (variable effect) for the first special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is greater than "0" (S507). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is not "0" (S507: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the dynamic display (variable effect) for the first special pattern, and first the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is decremented by 1 (S508). This is because the execution of one of the dynamic displays (variable effects) for the reserved first special pattern is started by the variation start processing (S510) described below, and the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S509). This data shift process (S509) shifts the data stored in the first reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d sequentially toward the reserved ball execution area 203f, shifting the data in each area in the following order: first reserved area 1 → reserved ball execution area 203f, first reserved area 2 → first reserved area 1, first reserved area 3 → first reserved area 2, and first reserved area 4 → first reserved area 3.

After the data shift process of S506 or S509, based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift process, a change start process is executed for the special pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 as result notification devices (S510), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40).

Now, with reference to Figure 44, we will explain the fluctuation start process (S510), which is one process of the special chart fluctuation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 44 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation start process (S510).

As described above, this variation start process (S510) determines whether or not to dynamically display each special symbol, and if so, performs settings for the dynamic display.

In this fluctuation start process (S510), first, a jackpot lottery (win/lose determination) process is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a (S5101).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not a jackpot has occurred is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the current game state (mode) by referencing the jackpot random number table 202a, which is set based on the probability setting value. As described above, the jackpot random number table 202a specifies the jackpot random number value so that the jackpot probability is 2/10,000 for a setting value of "1" and 4/10,000 for a setting value of "3."

In the process of S5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number values specified in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, a jackpot is determined to have occurred. If the result of the process of S5101 is that a jackpot has occurred (S5101: Yes), the display mode for the jackpot is set based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot type table 202b (see Figure 8) corresponding to each special symbol (S5102).

In this process, the jackpot type table 202b determines whether the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is a "time-reduced A" jackpot type that transitions to "normal high probability time-reduced state A" after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of a jackpot on the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is stored in a shift source buffer (not shown) in the reserved ball execution area 203f, and whether it is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d or data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e is stored. If the data is data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special chart 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see Figure 8).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the random number that results in a jackpot is not set in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 regardless of the set value (see Figure 7), and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is configured so that it cannot result in a jackpot. Therefore, in the processing of S5101 in the process of starting the change in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the result of the determination that is S5101: No is always derived.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined (S5103), and processing proceeds to S5109. Specifically, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 select a presentation mode based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of a jackpot and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, and from the selected presentation mode, the dynamic time (fluctuating time) of the dynamic display (fluctuating presentation) is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of this jackpot, the stop pattern table 202e to be used (see Figures 13 to 15) is first selected depending on the stop type of the jackpot.

Then, in the variation pattern table 202f provided for each presentation mode set in the processing of S5103, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. The variation time is then set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and variation time.

If it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the result is not a jackpot (S5101: No), a small jackpot lottery (win/lose determination) process is then performed to determine whether or not the result is a small jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a (S5104).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol results in a small win is set to be the same for all probability settings. Furthermore, whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol results in a small win is set to be the same for all probability settings. Specifically, in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, the small win random number value is specified so that the small win probability is 33/10,000 for all settings. Furthermore, in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, the small win random number value is specified so that the small win probability is 1,550/10,000 for all settings.

In S5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the small jackpot random number values specified in the jackpot random number table 202a. If they match, it is determined that the small jackpot has been selected for the first or second special symbol. If the result of S5104 is that a small jackpot has been selected (S5104: Yes), the display mode for the small jackpot is set based on the value of the small jackpot type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the small jackpot type table 202c (see Figure 9(a) or 9(b)) (S5105).

In this process, the small win type table 202c determines the small win type associated with the value of the small win type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. This determines whether the small win type is "Small Win A," which does not result in a jackpot state; "Time Reduction B," which transitions to "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State A" after a jackpot with a maximum of five rounds; "Time Reduction C," which transitions to "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State A" after a jackpot with a maximum of seven rounds; "Small Win B," which does not result in a jackpot state; or "Time Reduction D," which transitions to "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State B" after a jackpot with a maximum of ten rounds. Then, based on the determined small win type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of a small win on the special symbol display device 37, which serves as a result notification device, is set.

Specifically, the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is stored in a shift source buffer (not shown) in the reserved ball execution area 203f to determine whether it is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e. If the data is shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the small prize type is determined based on the value of the small prize type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special prize type table 202c1 (see FIG. 9(a)). Also, if the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the small prize type is determined based on the value of the small prize type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special prize type table 202c2 (see FIG. 9(b)).

Next, the fluctuation pattern for the small win is determined (S5106), and processing proceeds to S5109. Specifically, the special symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, which serve as result notification devices, select a presentation mode based on the display mode (stop type) for the small win and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, and from the selected presentation mode, the dynamic time (fluctuating time) of the dynamic display (fluctuating presentation) is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In determining the fluctuation pattern for this small win, the stop pattern table 202e to be used (see Figures 13 to 15) is first selected depending on the stop type for the small win.

Then, in the variation pattern table 202f provided for each presentation mode set in the processing of S5106, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. The variation time is then set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and variation time.

On the other hand, if the processing of S5104 determines that the result is not a small win (S5104: No), the result of the dynamic display of each special symbol is a loss, and the display mode for a loss is set (S5107). In the processing of S5107, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the loss symbol, and one of the following presentation modes is set as the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b, and the current game status. In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202e is set so that the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each presentation mode differs depending on the game status of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the fluctuation pattern in the event of a loss in each game state is determined (S5108), and processing proceeds to S5109.

In the process of S5108, the fluctuation time until a losing symbol is displayed is determined on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, in the stop pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (presentation mode) at the time of a losing symbol determined in the process of S5107, a fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time.

In the processing of S5109, a fluctuation pattern command is set that notifies the display control device 114 of the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of S5103, S5106, or S5108 via the voice lamp control device 113 (S5109).

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the jackpot type is "Time Reduction A," and a variation pattern for the "60-second" "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected, a variation pattern command indicating the second special symbol, jackpot, "Time Reduction A," and "60-second" "Super Reach" presentation mode (i.e., special symbol 1 variation pattern command; hereinafter, the variation pattern command for the first special symbol may be referred to as the "special symbol 1 variation pattern command") is set. Also, if the jackpot lottery and small jackpot lottery are lost in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and a variation pattern for the "60-second" "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected, a variation pattern command indicating the second special symbol, loss, and "60-second" "Super Reach" presentation mode (i.e., special symbol 2 variation pattern command; hereinafter, the variation pattern command for the second special symbol may be referred to as the "special symbol 2 variation pattern command") is set.

In this way, even if the variable effect has the same variable time, by setting the correct or incorrect state of the variable effect and the general details of the variable effect pattern in the variable effect pattern command, the audio lamp control device 113 can grasp the details of the variable effect, including whether it is correct or incorrect, and the variable time, and determine a more detailed variable effect variable pattern based on this information.

Next, a stop type command is set (S5110) to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S5102, S5105, or S5107 via the voice lamp control device 113, and this change start processing (S510) is terminated, returning to the special chart change processing (Figure 43).

Returning to Figure 43, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S507, if it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is "0" (S507: No), it is determined whether or not a demo effect is being performed in the third pattern display device 81, i.e., whether or not a demo is in progress (S511). In this determination processing, after a demo command is sent to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the period until it is determined that either the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N1 or number of activated reserved balls N2) is greater than "0" is determined to be the period during which a demo is in progress.

If it is determined that a demo is not in progress (S511: No), a demo command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S512), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, if it is determined that a demo is in progress (S511: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). The demo command set in the process of S512 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S201 in FIG. 40).

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it sends a display demo command to the display control device 114, and based on the reception of the display demo command, the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display a demo performance.

As mentioned above, the demo command is set when there are no reserved balls when a predetermined time has passed since the fluctuation stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation effect does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since the fluctuation stopped, a demo effect will be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S511 that a demo is not in progress (S511: No), a further process may be executed to determine whether a second predetermined time longer than the aforementioned predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped, and if the second predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped, the processing of S512 may be executed to set a demo command. In this way, if there are no reserved balls after the fluctuation stopped, the stopped symbols of the stopped fluctuation effect can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demo effect.

In the processing of S502, if it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is in a dynamic display state (S502: Yes), it determines whether the change time for the dynamic display of the currently running first special symbol has elapsed or whether the change time for the dynamic display of the currently running second special symbol has elapsed, and performs a change stop process (S513) to stop the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the dynamic display of the second special symbol depending on the determination result, then ends this special symbol change process (S210), and returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40).

Now, with reference to Figure 45, we will explain the fluctuation stop processing (S513), which is one process of the special chart fluctuation processing (see Figure 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 45 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation stop processing (S513).

In this variation stop process (S513), it is determined whether the variation time for the dynamic display of each special symbol has elapsed, and if the variation time has elapsed, the stop result for each stop type is displayed on the special symbol display device 37, and each confirmation command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, if the state is the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" or the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state," it is determined whether the time reduction termination condition for the "time reduction function" has been met based on the count of the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol has changed, and if the time reduction termination condition for the "time reduction function" has been met, processing such as switching the "time reduction function" from enabled to disabled is performed. Furthermore, if the state is the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined whether the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed has reached the number of times the rescue condition has been met, and if the number of times the rescue condition has been met, processing is performed to set the number of time reductions required to transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state."

The variation stop process (S513) first determines whether the dynamic display time (variation time) for the dynamic display of the currently active special symbol has elapsed (S5201). The display time for the dynamic display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 or the like (determined according to the special symbol 1 variation pattern command or the special symbol 2 variation pattern command). If the dynamic display time (variation time) for the dynamic display of this special symbol has not elapsed (S5201: No), the display of the special LED group 37b on the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the currently active special symbol is updated (S5202), the variation stop process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 43).

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special pattern display device 37, a display mode is set in which the upper LED group 37b1 lights up or goes out in a predetermined lighting pattern from the start of the dynamic display of the first special pattern until the change time has elapsed, and a display mode is set in which the lower LED group 37b2 lights up or goes out in a predetermined lighting pattern from the start of the dynamic display of the second special pattern until the change time has elapsed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5201, if the dynamic display time (variation time) for the dynamic display of the special symbol in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S5201: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol in the dynamic display of the special symbol is stopped for the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 (S5203). The stopped symbol is preset by the processing of S5102, S5105, or S5107 of the variation start processing (see FIG. 44).

In the first embodiment, if the determination result of the dynamic display of each special symbol is a miss, only the leftmost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2 is lit, and if the determination result is a jackpot, the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2 is lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (category) of the jackpot.

Once the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 corresponding to the stopped pattern of the dynamic display of each special pattern is set in the processing of S5203, a confirmation command is set (S5204) to confirm and display the stopped pattern of the variable effect of each special pattern on the third pattern display device 81 in synchronization with the display of the special LED group 37b on the special pattern display device 37, and processing proceeds to S5205. If the variable effect of a first special pattern is being executed on the third pattern display device 81, a confirmation command is set to confirm and display the variable effect of the first special pattern (i.e., special pattern 1 confirmation command. Hereinafter, the confirmation command for the first special pattern may be referred to as the "special pattern 1 confirmation command."), and if the variable effect of a second special pattern is being executed on the third pattern display device 81, a confirmation command is set to confirm the variable effect of the second special pattern (i.e., special pattern 2 confirmation command. Hereinafter, the confirmation command for the second special pattern may be referred to as the "special pattern 2 confirmation command.").

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this special symbol 1 confirmation command, it sends a display special symbol 1 confirmation command to the display control device 114 to stop the variable presentation of the first special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81, and when it receives the special symbol 2 confirmation command, it sends a display special symbol 2 confirmation command to the display control device 114 to stop the variable presentation of the second special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81. Upon receiving the display special symbol 1 confirmation command or the display special symbol 2 confirmation command, the display control device 114 is configured to stop the variable presentation of the third symbol corresponding to the first or second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and display the fixed symbol.

In S5205, it is determined whether the game is in a "time-shortened state (either a "normal high-probability time-shortened state" or a "normal low-probability time-shortened state")," and if it is determined to be in a "time-shortened state" (S5205: Yes), a time-shortened counting process is executed to determine whether the time-shortened end conditions for the "normal high-probability time-shortened state" or the "normal low-probability time-shortened state" have been met (S5206), and then the process proceeds to S5207. Furthermore, if it is determined in S5205 that the game is not in a "time-shortened state" (S5205: No), the process does not determine the time-shortened end conditions, so S5206 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5207.

The time-saving counting process (S5206) may be configured to be executed when the dynamic display of the special symbol begins (variation start process (S510)), or when the dynamic display of the special symbol is confirmed (when a predetermined time has elapsed in the special symbol variation process (S210) (S503: Yes)).

Now, with reference to Figure 46, we will explain the time-saving counting process (S5206), which is one process in the fluctuation stop process (see Figure 45) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 46 is a flowchart showing this time-saving counting process (S5206).

In this time-saving counting process (S5206), when the "time-saving function" is enabled, the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol, which is the termination condition for the "time-saving function" (for example, the number of times the first special symbol changes and the number of times the second special symbol changes), is counted, and it is determined whether the counting result meets the time-saving termination condition, and the "time-saving function" is changed from enabled to disabled depending on the determination result.

In this time-saving counting process (S5206), the type of dynamic display of the stopped special symbol is first determined (S5301). If the determination indicates that the dynamic display of the first special symbol has stopped (S5301: "Special Symbol 1"), the dynamic display of the first special symbol has been executed once. Therefore, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m (S5302). Next, it is determined whether the subtracted value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m is greater than "0" (S5303). If the determination indicates that the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m is greater than "0" (S5303: Yes), the time-saving termination condition based on the number of dynamic displays of the first special symbol has not been met. Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the total time-saving counter 203o (S5304). Next, it is determined whether the subtracted value of the total time-saving counter 203o is greater than "0" (S5305). If the result of the determination is that the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is greater than "0" (S5305: Yes), the time-saving termination condition based on the total number of dynamic displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has not been met, so S5310 to S5312 are skipped, this time-saving counting process (S5206) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation stop process (see Figure 45).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5303, if the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m is not greater than "0" (S5303: No), that is, if the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m is equal to or less than "0", the time-saving termination condition based on the number of times the first special symbol is dynamically displayed is met, and processing proceeds to S5310 to disable the "time-saving function". Also, in the processing of S5305, if the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is not greater than "0" (S5305: No), that is, if the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is equal to or less than "0", the time-saving termination condition based on the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are dynamically displayed is met, and processing proceeds to S5310 to disable the "time-saving function".

Furthermore, if it is determined in the processing of S5301 that this is the timing when the dynamic display of the second special symbol has stopped (S5301: "Special Symbol 2"), this means that the dynamic display of the second special symbol has been executed once, so 1 is subtracted from the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n (S5306), and then it is determined whether the subtracted value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is greater than "0" (S5307). If the result of the determination is that the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is greater than "0" (S5307: Yes), then the time-saving termination condition based on the number of times the second special symbol has been dynamically displayed has not been met, so next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the total time-saving counter 203o (S5308), and then it is determined whether the subtracted value of the total time-saving counter 203o is greater than "0" (S5309). If the result of the determination is that the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is greater than "0" (S5309: Yes), the time-saving termination condition based on the total number of dynamic displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has not been met, so S5310 to S5312 are skipped, this time-saving counting process (S5206) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation stop process (see Figure 45).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5307, if the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is not greater than "0" (S5307: No), that is, if the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is less than "0", the time-saving termination condition based on the number of times the second special symbol is dynamically displayed is met, and processing proceeds to S5310 to disable the "time-saving function". Also, in the processing of S5309, if the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is not greater than "0" (S5309: No), that is, if the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is less than "0", the time-saving termination condition based on the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are dynamically displayed is met, and processing proceeds to S5310 to disable the "time-saving function".

In S5310, the process determines whether the time-saving high probability flag 203k is on to determine whether the state is in a "normal high probability time-shortened state" or a "normal low probability time-shortened state" (S5310). If the time-saving high probability flag 203k is on (S5310: Yes), the time-saving high probability flag 203k is set to off (S5311) to end the "normal high probability time-shortened state," and the process terminates the time-saving counting process (S5206) and returns to the fluctuation stop process (see Figure 45). On the other hand, if the time-saving high probability flag 203k is not set to on (S5310: No), the time-saving low probability flag 203j is set to on, meaning the state is in a "normal low probability time-shortened state," so the time-saving low probability flag 203j is set to off (S5312), the time-shortening count process (S5206) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see Figure 45).

In this way, when the "time-saving function" is enabled, the "normal high-probability time-saving state" or the "normal low-probability time-saving state" can be ended depending on the termination conditions of the "time-saving function." By appropriately enabling or disabling the "time-saving function," it is possible to increase the variety of gameplay and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Returning to Figure 45, the explanation continues. When the time-saving counting process of S5206 is completed, or when it is determined in the process of S5205 that the "time-saving state" is not in effect (S5205: No), a determination is made as to whether the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed has reached the number of times the rescue condition has been met, and rescue achievement counting process is executed (S5207) to transition to the "normal symbol low-probability time-saving state" based on the determination result, this variation stop process (S513) is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see Figure 43).

The rescue achievement counting process (S5207), i.e., the determination of whether the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed has reached the number of times the rescue condition has been met, may be configured to be executed when the dynamic display of the special symbol begins (variation start process (S510)), or when the dynamic display of the special symbol is confirmed (when a predetermined time has elapsed in the special symbol variation process (S210) (S503: Yes)). Accordingly, the timing of transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" will also be a predetermined timing after the number of times the rescue condition has been met.

Now, with reference to Figure 47, we will explain the relief arrival counting process (S5207), which is one process of the fluctuation stop process (see Figure 45) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 47 is a flowchart showing this relief arrival counting process (S5207).

This rescue achievement counting process (S5207) counts the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, determines whether the counting result has reached the number of times the rescue condition has been met, and performs processing to set the number of time reductions based on the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" depending on the determination result.

In this relief arrival counting process (S5207), first, it is determined whether the relief setting flag 203s is on (S5401). If the relief setting flag 203s is on (S5401: Yes), since the state has already transitioned to the "normal low probability time shortened state", steps S5402 to S5406 are skipped, this relief arrival counting process (S5207) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see Figure 45).

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S5401 is that the rescue setting flag 203s is not on (S5401: No), the state has not yet transitioned to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" since the special symbol entered the low probability state, i.e., the state is being updated, so the value of the rescue counter 203r as game information is incremented by 1 (S5402). Next, a rescue counter command is set (S5451), and processing proceeds to S5403. The rescue counter command set in the processing of S5451 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next (see S201 in Figure 40).

When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a rescue counter command, it stores the corresponding information in the sub rescue counter 223i, and when a special chart 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A," it compares the value of the sub rescue counter 223i at the time of the small win with the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k to determine whether the small win belongs to a jackpot priority notification period or a rescue priority notification period, and determines the content of the right-hit notification effect to be performed during the OP time when the small win is won.

In S5403, it is determined whether the value of the relief counter 203r incremented in S5402 is smaller than the number of times the relief condition was met, i.e., the value stored in the number of times the relief condition was met storage area 203q (S5403).

If the result of the determination in S5403 is that the value of the relief counter 203r incremented in the processing of S5402 is smaller than the number of times the relief condition has been met (S5403: Yes), the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed has not reached the number of times the relief condition has been met, so the processing of S5404 to S5406 is skipped, this relief achievement counting processing (S5207) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation stop processing (see Figure 45).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5403, if the value of the rescue counter 203r added in the processing of S5402 is not less than the number of times the rescue condition has been met, i.e., if the value of the rescue counter 203r is equal to or greater than the number of times the rescue condition has been met (S5403: No), the rescue condition has been met, so the values of the special chart 1 time-saving counter 203m, the special chart 2 time-saving counter 203n, and the total time-saving counter 203o are each set to "100" (S5404), and the rescue setting completed flag 203s is set to ON to indicate a transition to the "normal chart low-probability time-shortened state" (S5405). Then, a rescue setting completed flag command is set (S5452), and the time-shortened low-probability flag 203j is set to ON to transition the game state to the "normal chart low-probability time-shortened state" (S5406), this rescue achievement counting processing (S5207) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 45). This allows a "normal low probability time shortened state" to occur based on the satisfaction of the rescue condition. The rescue setting completion flag command set in the processing of S5452 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next (see S201 in Figure 40).

The value of the rescue counter 203r as game information may be updated by subtracting 1 each time a dynamic display of a special symbol is executed as a game condition, or by some other method. If the value of the rescue counter 203r is updated by subtraction, the rescue counter 203r is set to the value of the number of rescue conditions that have been met, which is determined in the rescue condition meeting number lottery process when the RAM 203 is initialized after power-on and when a jackpot ends.

Furthermore, the timing for updating the value of the relief counter 203r does not have to be when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, but may be configured to update it when the dynamic display of the special pattern starts (see Figure 44) or when the pattern determination time ends (see S503 in Figure 43).

Next, with reference to Figure 48, we will explain the winning process (S203), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S203) as a benefit awarding control.

When a jackpot for a special symbol occurs, this winning process (S203) sets the number of times (number of rounds) the variable winning device 65 (jackpot opening) will be opened depending on the type of jackpot, and also sets the opening time of the variable winning device 65. Then, when a jackpot state (game) is reached, a jackpot opening/closing control process (S620) is executed to open or close the variable winning device 65, and when the jackpot state ends, a jackpot end process (S622) is executed to set the end of the jackpot state.

In addition, when a small win occurs for each special symbol, this win processing (S203) sets the number of times (number of rounds) the variable winning device 65 is opened according to the small win, and also sets the opening time of the variable winning device 65. Then, when the small win state (game) is reached, a small win opening/closing control processing (S616) is executed to open or close the variable winning device 65, and when the small win state ends, a small win end processing (S618) is executed to set the end of the small win state.

Furthermore, when a ball passes through a specific area 65d that can be opened during a small win game, this winning process (S203) sets the number of times (number of rounds) the variable winning device 65 will be opened depending on the type of jackpot that will occur as a result of the ball passing through the specific area 65d, and also sets the opening time of the variable winning device 65. Then, when a jackpot state (game) is reached based on passing through the specific area 65d, a jackpot opening/closing control process (S620) is executed to open or close the variable winning device 65, just as in the case of a jackpot with a special symbol, and when the jackpot state ends, a jackpot end process (S622) is executed to set the end of the jackpot state.

In the winning process (S203), first, it is determined whether a jackpot has been won in the dynamic display of any special symbol (S601). If the determination results in a jackpot (S601: Yes), in order to play the jackpot, the high probability time-saving flag 203k, the low probability time-saving flag 203j, and the rescue setting flag are set to OFF (S602). Then, the values of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m, the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n, the total time-saving counter 203o, and the rescue counter 203r are cleared to "0" (S603). Next, the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type or small jackpot type is set in a round counter (not shown) provided in RAM 203 (S605). Then, in order to send a jackpot opening command indicating that a jackpot has started to the audio and lamp control device 113, the jackpot opening command is set in a command sending ring buffer provided in RAM 203 (S606), and then an opening time corresponding to the jackpot type (for example, "30 seconds" or "10 seconds") is set (S607), and processing proceeds to S615. As a result, the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing executed next (see S201 in FIG. 40) sends a jackpot opening command corresponding to the jackpot type or small jackpot type to the audio and lamp control device 113.

The round counter mentioned above is initially set to "0" when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 checks the value of the round counter, and if a value is set in the round counter (i.e., "1" or greater), it decrements the value of the round counter by one while controlling the opening of the variable winning device 65 in response to a jackpot game. When the value of the round counter reaches "0," the jackpot currently in progress is terminated.

If, in the processing of S601, it is determined that the dynamic display of any special symbol has not resulted in a jackpot (S601: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203p is turned on based on the ball passing through the specific area 65d within the variable winning device 65 (S608). If the result of the determination is that the jackpot flag 203p is turned on (S608: Yes), this means that the ball passed through the specific area 65d within the variable winning device 65 during a small jackpot game. Therefore, first, the jackpot flag 203p is set to off (S609), and processing proceeds to S602, where processing similar to that in the case of a jackpot with a special symbol is performed. In this case, processing such as setting the round number corresponding to the type of small jackpot to the round counter (S602) is performed.

With this configuration, in addition to winning a jackpot when a special symbol is dynamically displayed, a player can also win a small jackpot and have the ball pass through the specific area 65d during the small jackpot game, resulting in a jackpot game equivalent to the dynamic display of a special symbol. This increases the variety of jackpot games awarded, and enhances the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d during the small jackpot game, the jackpot flag 203p remains off, the jackpot game is not executed, and the game state at the time the small jackpot was won can be restored. This increases the variety of gameplay methods for the small jackpot game, and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

If it is determined in the processing of S608 that the jackpot flag 203p is not on (S608: No), it is then determined whether a small jackpot has been won in the dynamic display of any special symbol (S610). If the result of the determination is that a small jackpot has been won (S610: Yes), the number of times the variable winning device 65 has been opened according to the type of small jackpot is set in an opening counter (not shown) provided in RAM 203 in order to play a small jackpot game (S611).

Then, in order to send a small win opening command indicating that a small win is about to begin to the sound and lamp control device 113, the small win opening command is set in a command sending ring buffer provided in RAM 203 (S612), and then the opening time for the small win (for example, "5 seconds" or "10 seconds") is set (S613). Then, the prize counter (not shown) is set to "10" (S614), and processing proceeds to S615. As a result, the small win opening command is sent to the sound and lamp control device 113 by the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next (see S201 in Figure 40).

When the audio and lamp control device 113 receives the small win opening command, it executes the right-hit notification display process when a small win is won, and determines and executes the content of the right-hit notification display to be performed during the opening time (described later in Figure 70).

The aforementioned opening counter is initially set to "0" when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 checks the value of the opening counter, and if a value is set in the opening counter (i.e., "1" or greater), it subtracts 1 from the value of the opening counter while controlling the opening of the variable winning device 65 in accordance with the small win game. When the value of the opening counter reaches "0," the small win currently in progress is terminated.

The above-mentioned winning counter is initially set to "0" when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 checks the value of the winning counter, and if a value is set in the winning counter (i.e., "1" or greater), it controls the opening of the variable winning device 65 depending on whether a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is being played, while subtracting one from the winning counter value each time a ball is detected by the large prize opening switch 65c. When the value of the winning counter reaches "0," it is configured to end one round of the jackpot game or small jackpot game currently being played.

In S615, it is determined whether or not a small win is occurring (S615). If it is determined that a small win is occurring (S615: Yes), a small win opening/closing control process is executed to control the opening and closing of the variable winning device 65 during the small win game (S616).

Now, with reference to Figure 49, we will explain the small win opening/closing control process (S616), which is one process of the win process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 49 is a flowchart showing this small win opening/closing control process (S616).

In this small win opening/closing control process (S616), the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 65 is performed based on the number of times the variable winning device 65 has been opened (i.e., the opening counter) set in the winning process (S203).

In this small win opening/closing control process (S616), first, it is determined whether the value of the opening counter (not shown) is greater than "0" (S6001). If the result of the determination is that the opening counter is not greater than "0", that is, if the value of the opening counter is "0" or less (S6001: No), there are no more openings of the variable winning device 65 during the small win game, so this small win opening/closing control process (S616) is terminated and the process returns to the win process (see Figure 48).

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S6001 is that the value of the opening counter is greater than "0" (S6001: Yes), then it is determined whether the opening time set in S613 of the winning process (S203) or the interval time set based on the small win opening table 202h has elapsed (S6002). If the result of the determination is that the opening time or interval time for the small win has not elapsed (S6002: No), it is not time to open the variable winning device 65, so steps S6003 to S6005 are skipped and processing proceeds to S6006.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6002, if the opening time or interval time at the time of the small win has elapsed (S6002: Yes), it is time to open the variable winning device 65, so first the opening setting of the variable winning device 65 is performed (S6003). Then, one opening time of the variable winning device 65 is set (S6004), and next a large winning opening opening command indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened is generated and set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203 (S6005), and processing proceeds to S6006.

In S6006, it is determined whether the variable winning device 65 is open at the time of the small win (S6006). If the determination results in the variable winning device 65 not being open at the time of the small win (S6006: No), the variable winning device 65 is not open at the time of the small win, but is in the opening time or interval time. Therefore, S6007 and S6008 are skipped, the small win opening/closing control process (S616) is terminated, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 48). On the other hand, if it is determined in S6006 that the variable winning device 65 is open at the time of the small win (S6006: Yes), first, specific area device opening/closing control process is performed to control the opening and closing of the specific area 65d (S6007).

Now, with reference to Figure 50, we will explain the specific area device opening/closing control process (S6007), which is one process of the small win opening/closing control process (S616) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 50 is a flowchart showing this specific area device opening/closing control process (S6007).

This specific area device opening/closing control process (S6007) controls the opening/closing of the specific area 65d during small win play.

In this specific area device opening/closing control process (S6007), first, it is determined whether the specific area 65d is open, i.e., whether the specific area solenoid 65f is on (S6101). If the result of this determination is that the specific area 65d is not open, i.e., if the specific area solenoid 65f is off (S6101: No), it is then determined whether the opening conditions for the specific area 65d are met, i.e., whether the variable winning device 65 is open (S6102). If the result of this determination is that the opening conditions for the specific area 65d are met, i.e., when the variable winning device 65 opens (S6102: Yes), the specific area solenoid 65f is set from off to on, opening the specific area 65d (S6103), and the process proceeds to S6104.

Note that if it is determined in the processing of S6101 that the specific area 65d is open, i.e., if the specific area solenoid 65f is on (S6101: Yes), the processing of S6102 and S6103 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S6104. Also, if the opening condition for the specific area 65d is not met in the processing of S6102 (S6102: No), the processing of S6103 to S6105 is skipped, the specific area device opening/closing control processing (S6007) is terminated, and the processing returns to the small win opening/closing control processing (see FIG. 49).

In the processing of S6104, it is determined whether the closing conditions for the specific area 65d are met, i.e., if a ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g or if the opening time for the specific area 65d (for example, 30 seconds after the opening of the specific area 65d) has elapsed (S6104: Yes), it is determined that the closing conditions for the specific area 65d are met, and in order to close the specific area 65d, the specific area solenoid 65f is changed from ON to OFF, thereby setting the specific area 65d to be closed (S6105), and this specific area device opening/closing control processing (S6007) is terminated, and the processing returns to the small prize opening/closing control processing (see FIG. 49).

In this way, by performing the opening/closing control process for the specific area 65d based on the establishment of predetermined conditions during a small win game, and opening the specific area 65d during a small win game to allow the ball to pass through, it is possible to generate a jackpot game based on the small win game. Furthermore, if the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d during a small win game, the jackpot game will not be generated and the game state at the time of the small win can be returned to.

Returning to Figure 49, the explanation will continue. After the specific area device opening/closing control process of S6007, the large prize opening open process during a small win is then performed to determine the closing conditions of the open variable prize device 65 (S6008), and this small win opening/closing control process (S616) is terminated, returning to the win process (see Figure 48).

Now, with reference to Figure 51, we will explain the process for processing large prize openings during small prize wins (S6008), which is one process of the small prize opening/closing control process (S616) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the process for processing large prize openings during small prize wins (S6008).

This small win large prize opening open processing (S6008) executes processing to determine whether the closing conditions for the variable prize opening device 65 that is open during small win play are met.

In this small win large prize opening opening process (S6008), first, it is determined whether the opening time of one of the variable prize winning devices 65 set in S6004 of the small win opening/closing control process (S616) described above has elapsed (S6201). If the determination result shows that the opening time of one of the variable prize winning devices 65 has not elapsed (S6201: No), it is then determined whether the large prize winning device switch 65c has been turned on, i.e., whether a ball has entered the variable prize winning device 65 (S6202).

In the processing of S6202, if a ball is detected by the large prize opening switch 65c and enters the variable prize device 65 (S6202: Yes), the value of the prize counter is decremented by 1 (S6203), and then it is determined whether the value of the prize counter after decrementing by 1 is greater than "0" (S6204). If the value of the prize counter is not greater than "0" (S6204: No), that is, if the value of the prize counter is less than "0," this means that 10 or more balls have entered the variable prize device 65 and the condition for ending the small prize game (the condition for closing the variable prize device 65) is met, so processing proceeds to S6205 to close the variable prize device 65.

In the process of closing the variable prize device 65 from S6205, first, the variable prize device 65 is set to be closed (S6205), then a special prize opening close command is set to the sound and lamp control device 113 indicating that the variable prize device 65 has been closed (S6206), and processing proceeds to S6207. The special prize opening close command set in the process of S6206 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the sound and lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S201 in Figure 40).

Next, in the processing of S6207, since the conditions for ending the small win game have been met, the value of the opening counter is cleared to "0" (S6207), the processing for when the large prize opening is open during the small win (S6008) is terminated, and the processing returns to the small win opening/closing control processing (see Figure 49).

If it is determined in S6202 that the special prize opening switch 65c is not turned on (S6202: No), it is then determined whether the specific area switch 65g is turned on (S6208). If the determination results in the specific area switch 65g being turned on (S6208: Yes), this means that the ball passed through the specific area 65d while it was open during the small prize game. Therefore, to trigger a jackpot game after the small prize game, the jackpot flag 203p is set to on (S6209), and the process returns to the small prize opening/closing control process (S6008) and the small prize opening/closing control process (see FIG. 49). On the other hand, if it is determined in S6208 that the specific area switch 65g is not turned on (S6208: No), the process skips S6209 and returns to the small prize opening/closing control process (S6008) and the small prize opening/closing control process (see FIG. 49).

As a result, during a small win game, a jackpot game can be triggered after the small win game based on the ball passing through specific area 65d at the same time that specific area 65d is open, increasing the variety of jackpot games that can be awarded and increasing the excitement of the game. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through specific area 65d during the small win game, the jackpot flag 203p will remain off, the jackpot game will not be executed, and the game state will return to the state it was in when the small win was won.

By configuring it in this way, the player can check the content of the right-hit notification when a small win is won, and if the player determines that, depending on the situation, a big win will not occur with that small win, and that the expected number of balls that can be won would be higher if the player played left-hit when a small win is won, the player can prevent a big win from occurring by not playing right-hit and not allowing the ball to pass through the specific area 65d.

As a result, the content of the right-hit notification effect when a small win is won changes depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol remains until the number of times the rescue condition is met. Depending on the content of the right-hit notification effect, the player can choose between a right-hit playing method when a small win is won or a left-hit playing method when a small win is won, creating new gameplay possibilities and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

If, in the processing of S6201, it is determined that the opening time of variable winning device 65 1 has elapsed (S6201: Yes), the closing conditions for opening variable winning device 65 1 are met, and it is time to close variable winning device 65 for that opening, so processing proceeds to S6210 to close variable winning device 65.

In the processing of S6210, in order to close the variable winning device 65 that is currently open, the large winning opening solenoid 65b is turned from on to off, setting the variable winning device 65 to be closed (S6210), and then a large winning opening close command indicating the completion of the opening of one of the variable winning devices 65 is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S6211). The large winning opening close command set in the processing of S6211 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next (see S201 in Figure 40).

When the audio and lamp control device 113 receives the small prize opening close command, it executes a presentation indicating that the variable prize device 65 has been closed. Note that because the opening and closing of the variable prize device 65 during a small prize game is short (opening: 0.1 seconds, closing: 1.2 seconds), the audio and lamp control device 113 may be configured not to execute a presentation associated with the opening and closing of one of the variable prize devices 65, even when it receives a large prize opening close command.

After processing S6211, the opening of one variable winning device 65 has been completed, so the value of the opening counter is decremented by 1 (S6212), the small win large winning opening opening processing (S6008) is terminated, and the process returns to the small win opening/closing control processing (see Figure 49). This allows the variable winning device 65 to be opened the number of times set in the opening counter value during one round during small win play.

Returning to the winning process (S203) in Figure 48, the explanation will continue. After the small winning opening/closing control process of S616 (see Figure 49) is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the opening counter is greater than "0" (S617). If the result of the determination is that the opening counter is greater than "0" (S617: Yes), the small winning will continue, so the process of S618, which is the small winning end setting process, is skipped and this winning process (S203) is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S617, if the value of the opening counter is not greater than "0" (S617: No), that is, if the value of the opening counter is "0" or less, all opening operations of the variable winning device 65 for this small win have been completed, so in order to end the small win state, small win termination processing is performed (S618), and this win processing (S203) is terminated.

Now, with reference to Figure 52, we will explain the small win end process (S618), which is one process of the win process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 52 is a flowchart showing this small win end process (S618).

In this small win termination process (S618), first, the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S6301), and then, if the specific area 65d is open, the process for closing the specific area 65d is set (S6302). Then, the small win termination setting process is performed (S6303), which executes various processes at the end of the small win, and this small win termination process (S618) is terminated, and the process returns to the win process (see Figure 48).

Returning to FIG. 48, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S615, if it is determined that the small win game is not in progress (S615: No), it is then determined whether or not the big win game is in progress (S619).
If it is determined that a jackpot is occurring (S619: Yes), a jackpot opening/closing control process is executed to control the opening/closing of the variable winning device 65 (S620).

Now, with reference to Figure 53, we will explain the jackpot opening/closing control process (S620), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Figure 53 is a flowchart showing this jackpot opening/closing control process (S620).

In this jackpot opening/closing control process (S620), the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 65 is performed based on the number of times the variable winning device 65 has been opened, as set in the winning process (S203).

In this jackpot opening/closing control process (S620), it is first determined whether the opening time set in S607 of the winning process (S203) or the interval time set in S6510 (see FIG. 54) of the large prize opening open process (S6407) described below has elapsed (S6401). If the determination results in the opening time or interval time for the jackpot having elapsed (S6401: No), it is not time to open the variable prize device 65, and the variable prize device 65 remains closed. Therefore, steps S6002 to S6005 are skipped and processing proceeds to S6406.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6401, if the opening time or interval time for a jackpot has elapsed (S6401: Yes), it is time to open the variable winning device 65, so the variable winning device 65 is set to open (S6402), and then the winning counter (not shown) is set to "10" (S6403). The maximum opening time for the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot is set ("30 seconds" in the first embodiment) (S6404), a large winning opening opening command indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened is generated and set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203 (S6405), and processing proceeds to S6406. Upon receiving this large winning opening opening command, the audio and lamp control device 113 is configured to notify the third symbol display device 81 that the variable winning device 65 has been opened, and to prompt the player to place a ball into the open variable winning device 65.

In S6406, it is determined whether the variable winning device 65 is open (S6406). If the determination shows that the variable winning device 65 is not open (S6406: No), the variable winning device 65 is not open, but is in the opening time or interval time. Therefore, S6407 is skipped, the jackpot opening/closing control process (S620) is terminated, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 48). On the other hand, if it is determined in S6406 that the variable winning device 65 is open (S6406: Yes), the jackpot opening/closing control process is performed (S6407) to determine the closing conditions for the open variable winning device 65, the jackpot opening/closing control process (S620) is terminated, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 48).

Now, with reference to Figure 54, we will explain the large prize opening processing (S6407), which is one process of the large prize opening/closing control processing (S620) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Figure 54 is a flowchart showing this large prize opening processing (S6407).

This large prize opening open processing (S6407) executes processing to determine whether the closing conditions for the open variable prize opening device 65 are met.

In this jackpot opening processing (S6407), first, it is determined whether the opening time of the variable prize winning device 65 set in S6404 of the jackpot opening/closing control processing (S620) described above has elapsed (S6501). If the determination shows that the opening time of the variable prize winning device 65 has elapsed (S6501: Yes), the closing condition for the variable prize winning device 65 is met, and it is time to close the variable prize winning device 65 for that round. Therefore, the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S6502), and processing proceeds to S6506 to close the variable prize winning device 65. The closing processing of the variable prize winning device 65 from S6506 will be described later.

On the other hand, if the opening time of the variable prize-winning device 65 has not elapsed during the processing of S6501 (S6501: No), it is then determined whether the large prize opening switch 65c has been turned on, i.e., whether a ball has entered the variable prize-winning device 65 (S6503).

If it is determined in the processing of S6503 that the large prize opening switch 65c has not detected a ball (S6503: No), the large prize opening open processing (S6407) is terminated and the process returns to the large prize opening open/close control processing (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, if the large prize opening switch 65c detects a ball and the ball has entered the variable prize winning device 65 (S6503: Yes), the prize winning counter value is decremented by 1 (S6504), and then it is determined whether the prize winning counter value is greater than "0" (S6505). If the prize winning counter value is not greater than "0" (S6505: No), that is, if the prize winning counter value is "0" or less, 10 or more balls have entered the variable prize winning device 65 and the closing condition for the variable prize winning device 65 is met, so the process proceeds to S6506 to close the variable prize winning device 65.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6505 that the value of the winning counter is greater than "0" (S6505: Yes), the closing conditions for the variable winning device 65 have not been met, and in order to continue opening the variable winning device 65, the processing of S6506 to S6510 is skipped and the large prize opening open processing (S6407) is terminated. After the large prize opening open processing (S6407) is terminated, the processing returns to the large prize opening/closing control processing (see FIG. 53).

In the process of closing the variable prize device 65 from S6506, first, the variable prize device 65 is set to be closed (S6506), and then a special prize opening close command indicating that the variable prize device 65 has been closed is set to the sound and lamp control device 113 (S6507), and processing proceeds to S6508. The special prize opening close command set in the process of S6507 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the sound and lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S201 in Figure 40).

Next, in the processing of S6508, since one round of the variable winning device 65 has been consumed, the round counter value is decremented by 1 (S6508), and then it is determined whether the round counter value is greater than "0" (S6509). If the round counter value is greater than "0" (S6509: Yes), there are still rounds remaining in the jackpot (the remaining number of times the variable winning device 65 can be opened), so the interval time until the next variable winning device 65 is opened (for example, "1 second") is set (S6510), this large winning opening open processing (S6007) is terminated, and the processing returns to the jackpot opening/closing control processing (see FIG. 53).

On the other hand, in the processing of S6509, if the round counter value is not greater than "0" (S6509: No), that is, if the round counter value is "0" or less, all opening operations of the variable winning device 65 for this jackpot have been completed, so in order to end the jackpot state, no interval time is set (i.e., S6510 is skipped), the jackpot opening processing (S6007) is terminated, and the jackpot opening/closing control processing (see FIG. 53) is terminated.

Returning to the winning process (S203) in Figure 48, the explanation will continue. After the jackpot opening/closing control process of S620 (see Figure 53) is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S621). If the result of the determination is that the round counter is greater than "0" (S621: Yes), the jackpot state continues, so the process of S622, which is the jackpot end setting process, is skipped and this winning process (S203) is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S621, if the round counter value is not greater than "0" (S621: No), that is, if the round counter value is "0" or less, all opening operations of the variable winning device 65 for this jackpot have been completed, so in order to end the jackpot state, jackpot termination processing is performed (S622), and this win processing (S203) is terminated.

Now, with reference to Figure 55, we will explain the jackpot termination process (S622), which is one process of the win process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Figure 55 is a flowchart showing this jackpot termination process (S610).

This jackpot termination process (S622) sets the values of each time-saving counter based on the type of jackpot won (jackpot based on the small jackpot type) and the game status at the time of the win.

In this jackpot termination process (S622), first, the time-saving high probability flag 203k is set to ON (S6601) to activate the "high probability time-saving function." Next, it is determined whether the jackpot was won in "normal gaming mode" (S6602). If the result of the determination is that the jackpot was not won in "normal gaming mode" (S6602: No), processing proceeds to S6604.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S6602 is that the jackpot was won in "normal game mode" (S6602: Yes), it is then determined whether the jackpot type "Time Reduction B" or "Time Reduction C" (jackpot based on small jackpot type) was won (S6603), and if the jackpot type "Time Reduction B" or "Time Reduction C" (jackpot based on small jackpot type) was not won (S6603: No), the process proceeds to S6604.

In the processing of S6604, the special chart 1 time-saving counter 203m is set to "7" (S6604), then the special chart 2 time-saving counter 203n is set to "5" (S6605), the total time-saving counter 203o is set to "12" (S6606), and processing proceeds to S6610.

If, in the processing of S6603, it is determined that a jackpot type "Time Reduction C" (a jackpot based on a small jackpot type) has been won (S6603: Yes), the special chart 1 time reduction counter 203m is set to "7" (S6607), then the special chart 2 time reduction counter 203n is set to "1" (S6608), the total time reduction counter 203o is set to "8" (S6609), and processing proceeds to S6610.

In the processing of S6610, an ending command indicating the start of the jackpot ending presentation is set to the audio and lamp control device 113 (S6610). The ending command set in the processing of S6610 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the audio and lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next (see S201 in Figure 40). When the audio and lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it executes the jackpot ending presentation.

After the processing of S6611 is completed, an ending time (for example, 10 seconds) is set according to the game status (S6611), and a jackpot end setting process is performed (S6613) to execute various processes at the end of the jackpot. This jackpot end process (S622) is then terminated, and the process returns to the win process (see Figure 48).

Next, with reference to Figure 56, we will explain the general map change processing (S211), which is one process of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 56 is a flowchart showing this general map change processing (S211).

This normal symbol variation process (S211) controls the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 83 due to the ball passing through the through gate 67.

In this normal symbol change process (S211), first, it is determined whether the normal electric symbol 72 is currently projecting (operating), i.e., whether a normal symbol is currently winning (S701). If the result of the determination is that the normal electric symbol 72 is currently projecting (S701: Yes), a normal symbol is currently winning, so the normal symbol change process (S211) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40).

On the other hand, if the normal electric symbol 72 is not projecting (S701: No), the normal symbol is not winning, so the process then determines whether the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is currently displaying a variable normal symbol (S702). If the result of this determination is that the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is not currently displaying a variable normal symbol (S702: No), the process then determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed since the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stopped (S703). If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the variable display stopped (S703: No), the process ends this normal symbol change process (S211) and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). This causes the stopped symbol in the variable display to be displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 for the predetermined time, allowing the player to view the stopped symbol.

On the other hand, if the result of processing S703 is that a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was stopped (S703: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the normal reserved ball count counter 203g (the number of variable display activation reserved balls HN for normal symbols reserved in the main control unit 110) is greater than "0" (S704).

If the result of the processing in S704 is that the value of the normal reserved ball counter 203g (number of activated reserved balls HN) is not greater than "0" (S704: No), this means that there are no reserved balls for the variable display of the normal pattern to be executed, so the normal pattern change processing (S211) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40). On the other hand, if the value of the normal reserved ball counter 203g (number of activated reserved balls HN) is greater than "0" (S704: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the variable display for the reserved normal pattern, and first the value of the normal reserved ball counter 203g (number of activated reserved balls HN) is decremented by 1 (S705). This is because the number of reserved balls for the normal pattern is reduced by one as the execution of one of the variable displays for the reserved normal pattern is started by the processing described below (S706-S712).

Next, the data stored in the regular map reserve ball storage area 203h is shifted (S706). This data shift process shifts the data stored in regular map reserve areas 1 to 4 of the regular map reserve ball storage area 203h sequentially toward the regular map reserve ball execution area 203i, with the data in each area being shifted in the following order: regular map reserve area 1 → regular map reserve ball execution area 203i, regular map reserve area 2 → regular map reserve area 1, regular map reserve area 3 → regular map reserve area 2, and regular map reserve area 4 → regular map reserve area 3.

After the data shift process of S706, in order to execute the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 83 based on the data stored in the normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203i by the data shift process (i.e., the value of the normal symbol hit counter C4), it is first determined whether the time-saving low probability flag 203j or the time-saving high probability flag 203k is turned on (S707). If the result of the determination is that the time-saving low probability flag 203j or the time-saving high probability flag 203k is not turned on (S707: No), it is determined that the "normal game state" is in which the "time-saving function" is disabled, the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to "15 seconds" (S708), and processing proceeds to S710. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving low probability flag 203j or the time-saving high probability flag 203k is on (S707: Yes), it is determined that the "time-saving function" is active in the "normal symbol high probability time-saving state" or "normal symbol low probability time-saving state," the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds" (S709), and processing proceeds to S710.

In S710, the process determines whether the time-saving high probability flag 203k is on (S710). If the time-saving high probability flag 203k is not on (S710: No), i.e., in a low-probability state of normal symbols, the process refers to the group for low-probability states in the normal symbol win random number table 202i to determine the value of the normal symbol win counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203i, and determines the stopping symbol of the variable display of normal symbols (i.e., whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss) (S711). Also, if the time-saving high probability flag 203k is on (S710: Yes), i.e., in a high-probability state of normal symbols, the process refers to the group for high-probability states in the normal symbol win random number table 202i to determine the value of the normal symbol win counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203i, and determines the stopping symbol of the variable display of normal symbols (i.e., whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss) (S712). After processing S711 and S712, this normal change processing (S211) ends and the program returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40).

By changing the probability of winning or losing a normal symbol depending on the game state, when a player hits to the right, it is possible to create a difference in whether the normal electric symbol 72 is likely to open when the ball passes through the through gate 67. As a result, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, the situation changes depending on the game state: whether the normal electric symbol 72 is likely to open (i.e., a high probability state for a normal symbol) and the ball is likely to flow into the second starting hole 71, or whether the normal electric symbol 72 is more difficult to open than it is (i.e., a low probability state for a normal symbol) and the ball flows down in front of the closed (submerged) normal electric symbol 72 and may flow into the variable winning device 65. By changing this depending on the game state, it is possible to create different gameplay for each game state.

If it is determined in the processing of S702 that the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is in a variable display state (S702: Yes), it is determined whether the variable display time has elapsed (S713). The variable display time of the normal symbol display device 83 is determined according to the game status by the processing of S708 or S709, and if this variable display time has not elapsed (S713: No), the display of the normal symbol display device 83 is updated (S714), this normal symbol variation processing (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if the variable display time for the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S713: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol previously set by S711 or S712 is set for the normal symbol display device 83 (S715), this normal symbol variation processing (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40).

As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is set based on this normal symbol variation process (S211), and the "○" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit from the time the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 begins until the variable display time has elapsed. If the variable display result is a win, the "○" symbol is lit, and if it is a loss, the "X" symbol is lit.

Next, with reference to Figure 57, we will explain the normal electric control process (S204), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 57 is a flowchart showing this normal electric control process (S204).

This normal electric role control process (S204) executes drive control to open and close (protrude and retract) the normal electric role 72 according to the game status when a normal symbol win occurs. That is, it sets the opening (protrusion) time of the normal electric role 72 according to the game status, drives the normal electric role 72 to open based on the set time, and executes control to close (retract) the open (protruding) normal electric role 72 when the set protrusion time has elapsed.

In this normal electric symbol control process (S204), first, it is determined whether the normal electric symbol 72 is open (protruding), i.e., whether a normal symbol is winning (S801). If, as a result of the determination, it is determined that the normal electric symbol 72 is not open (S801: No), i.e., if it is determined that a normal symbol is not winning, it is then determined whether the variable display of the normal symbol has ended (S802).

If the result of the determination in S802 is that the variable display of the normal symbol has not ended (S802: No), this normal electric role control process (S204) ends and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40). On the other hand, if the variable display of the normal symbol has ended (S802: Yes), the process then determines whether a win has occurred in the variable display (S803).

If the result of the determination in S803 is that the variable display has not been hit (S803: No), this normal electric control process (S204) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40). On the other hand, if the variable display has been hit (S803: Yes), in order to execute control related to the hit, it is first determined whether the time-saving low probability flag 203j or the time-saving high probability flag 203k is turned on (S804).

If it is determined in S804 that the time-saving low probability flag 203j and the time-saving high probability flag 203k are not on (S804: No), it is determined that the game is in a "normal gaming state" in which the "time-saving function" is disabled, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 in a winning state is set to "0.1 seconds" based on the specifications of the normal electric role opening table 202k (S805). The value of the electric role counter (not shown) is set to "1" (S806) to open the normal electric role 72 once based on the winning combination, and processing proceeds to S809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S804 that the time-saving low probability flag 203j or the time-saving high probability flag 203k is on (S804: Yes), it is determined that the "time-saving function" is enabled in the "normal high probability time-saving state" or "normal low probability time-saving state," and the opening (immersion) time of the normal electric role 72 in the winning state is set to "5.8 seconds" based on the contents of the normal electric role opening table 202k (S807), and the value of the electric role counter (not shown) is set to "1" (S808) to open the normal electric role 72 based on the winning once, and processing proceeds to S809.

In the processing of S809, the opening (protruding) processing of the normal electric switch 72 is performed (S809), the normal electric switch 72 that was in the closed (retracted) state is driven to the open state, this normal electric switch control processing (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40).

As a result, when a player hits from the right, the ball that passes through the through gate 67 reaches the position of the normal electric feature 72, and the normal electric feature 72 can be left open for a long or short period of time. As a result, by varying the game state depending on whether the ball that passes through the through gate 67 is easily guided toward the second starting hole 71, or whether it flows down in front of the normal electric feature 72 when it is closed and can flow down toward the variable winning device 65, different gameplay characteristics can be created for each game state.

If it is determined in the processing of S801 that the normal electric role 72 is open (S801: Yes), that is, if it is determined that a normal symbol is winning, it is then determined whether the opening time for one normal electric role 72 set in S805 or S807 has elapsed (S810). If, as a result of the determination, it is determined that the opening time for one normal electric role 72 set has not elapsed (S810: No), in order to maintain the open state of the normal electric role 72, the processing of S811 to S813 is skipped, this normal electric role control processing (S204) is terminated, and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S810 that the set opening time of the normal electric role 72 has elapsed (S810: Yes), first, the closing (immersion) processing of the normal electric role 72 is performed (S811), and "1" is subtracted from the value of the electric role counter set in the processing of S806 or S808 (S812). Then, it is determined whether the subtracted electric role counter value is greater than "0" (S813). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the electric role counter is greater than "0" (S813: Yes), since the number of openings of the normal electric role 72 based on the win remains, processing proceeds to S809, a predetermined interval processing is performed, and then the opening processing of the normal electric role 72 is performed again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the electric role counter is not greater than "0" (S813: No), that is, if the value of the electric role counter is "0" or less, this means that all openings of the normal electric roles 72 based on the win have been completed, so the normal electric roles 72 are not reopened, the normal electric role control process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40).

Next, with reference to Figure 58, the base value processing (S251) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. Figure 58 is a flowchart showing this base value processing (S251). In this base value processing (S251), the base value is calculated (measured) and displayed.

In this base value process (S251), first, a base value calculation process is executed (S851). In this base value calculation process, a real-time base value is calculated (measured), and when the total number of outs reaches 60,000, the real-time base value data is shifted to the previous real-time base value data.

Next, it is determined (S852) whether 5 seconds have passed since the last execution of the base value processing (S853). If 5 seconds have passed since the last execution of the base value processing (S853) (S852: Yes), the base value display processing is executed (S853), the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, and the base value processing (S251) is terminated.

On the other hand, if, in the processing of S852, five seconds have not passed since the last time the base value processing (S853) was executed (S852: No), processing of S853 is skipped and this base value processing (S251) is terminated.

Next, referring to Figure 59, we will explain the NMI interrupt processing executed by the main control unit 110 in the event of a power outage or the like. Figure 59 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt processing is processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like.

This NMI interrupt processing stores information about the occurrence of a power outage in RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. When the power outage signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal, the MPU 201 suspends the control it is currently executing and begins NMI interrupt processing, stores the information about the occurrence of a power outage in RAM 203 as the setting for the information about the occurrence of a power outage (S901), and terminates the NMI interrupt processing.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in RAM 213. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, causing the MPU 211 to interrupt the control currently being executed and start the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to Figures 60 to 70, we will explain the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. The processes of the MPU 221 can be broadly divided into start-up processes (see Figure 60) that are started when the power is turned on, and main processes (see Figure 61) that are executed after the start-up processes.

First, referring to Figure 60, we will explain the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 60 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is initiated when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, the initial setting process associated with power-on is first executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was initiated during the power-off processing of S1116 (see FIG. 61) due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 61, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110, it executes the power-off processing of S1116. Before executing this power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on to set the update to the end state, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S1116 is currently being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1002: No), this startup process was initiated after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S1116 was completed, or after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1003).

Checking for data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" was written to a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in that specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004, where initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If this startup process is initiated after the power supply has been completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because RAM 223's memory is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that RAM 223 data has been corrupted (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, if this startup process is initiated after a momentary power outage has occurred and the power-off process of S1116 has been completed, or if it is initiated after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 is normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1002: Yes), this startup process was initiated after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S1116 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, control cannot continue in this case, so the process proceeds to S1004 and initialization of RAM 223 begins.

In the processing of S1004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to "0".

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written to a specific area of RAM 223, and RAM corruption check data is set (S1006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written to this specific area, it is possible to check whether data corruption has occurred in RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of RAM 223 (S1005: No), an abnormality in RAM 223 is reported (S1007), and an infinite loop occurs until the power is cut off. The abnormality in RAM 223 is reported by the indicator lamp 34. The abnormality in RAM 223 may be reported by sound output from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In S1008, the process determines whether the power-off flag is on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 61). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1008 will be reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is initiated after a momentary power outage and after the power-off process of S1116 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the working area of RAM 223 is cleared (S1009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113. After setting the initial value of RAM 223 (S1010), the break-even number "543" obtained from the break-even number table 222f is set to the break-even number storage area 223k (S1021), interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012. The working area of RAM 223 refers to the area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control unit 110.

On the other hand, if the power-off flag is off and S1008 is reached, the process proceeds from S1004 to S1006 to S1008 because the current startup process was initiated after the power was completely shut off, or if the process was initiated because only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which clears the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1010. After setting the initial values of RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012.

The clearing process of S1009 is skipped because when the process proceeds from S1004 to S1006 and then to S1008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, and if only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the startup process is initiated, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, allowing control of the voice lamp control device 113 to continue.

In the processing of S1012, it is determined whether or not a setting value command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1012), and the processing of S1012 is repeatedly executed and waits until the setting value command is received (S1012: No). Then, if a setting value command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command is stored in the setting value memory (not shown) (S1013), and the processing proceeds to the main processing (see Figure 61).

In this way, during the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113, by waiting to transition to the main process (see FIG. 61) until it receives a setting value command generated at the end of the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 37), the voice lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp the probability setting value set by the main control device 110 and execute the main process and subsequent processes based on that probability setting value. Furthermore, if a setting value command is not received from the main control device 110, the end of the startup process of the main control device 110 has not been reached and the startup process of the main control device 110 has not ended normally, so the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 does not end normally and does not transition to the main process. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to determine whether the startup process of the main control device 110 has been executed normally, and it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from running out of control when the main control device 110 has not started up normally.

Next, referring to Figure 61, we will explain the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice and lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice and lamp control device 113. Figure 61 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

When the main processing is executed, it is first determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the last time the processing of S1101 was executed (S1101). If "1 millisecond" or more has not passed (S1101: No), the processing of S1102 to S1109 is not executed and the processing proceeds to S1110. The reason for determining whether or not "1 millisecond" has passed in the processing of S1101 is that S1102 to S1109 do not need to be executed in a short cycle (within "1 millisecond"), whereas the variable performance processing of S1110 and the command determination processing of S1111 are processes that are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1110 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform variable performance settings without delay based on the commands received by the command determination processing.

If it is determined in S1101 that more than 1 millisecond has passed since the last time S1101 was executed (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to S1102. Note that if S1101 is executed for the first time after the startup process shown in FIG. 60, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1112 are sent to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107 described below (S1103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process notifies the user that power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) when power is turned on. This notification is made by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Alternatively, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the user that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. Note that if the power is not being turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without making a notification by the power-on notification process.

Next, in the processing of S1105, a winning effect process is performed to execute an effect related to a big win set by the command determination processing of S1111 described below (S1105), and the processing proceeds to S1106. Note that in the first embodiment, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened or an effect notifying a right hit) is executed while the variable winning device 65 is opened for a big win or a small win using the first special pattern and the second special pattern. Details of this winning effect process (S1105) will be described later with reference to Figure 69.

Next, in the processing of S1106, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing is executed (S1106). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing monitors whether or not a frame button 22 has been pressed during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and sets up a corresponding effect to be performed if input to the frame button 22 is confirmed during the valid period.

Once the frame button input monitoring and performance process (S1106) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1107), followed by the sound editing and output process (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29-33 are set to correspond to the display made by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display made by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S1108, the LCD display execution management process is executed (S1109), and processing proceeds to S1110. In the LCD display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed by the third pattern display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in this LCD display execution monitoring process, and the sound editing and output process of S1108 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed by the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S1110, in order to display a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable effect process corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed based on the special symbol 1 variable pattern command and special symbol 1 stop type command, or the special symbol 2 variable pattern command and special symbol 2 stop type command received from the main control device 110 (S1110), and the processing proceeds to S1111. Details of this variable effect process (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

In S1111, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control unit 110 (S1111), and processing proceeds to S1112. Details of this command determination processing (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

At S1112, a counter update process is executed to update various counters stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1112). For example, this counter update process updates the counter that determines the detailed change pattern of the change presentation, and the hold change counter (not shown) that draws the "hold change notice." The counter is updated by incrementing it by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, "0 to 99") and resetting it to "0" after it reaches the maximum value ("99").

After processing S1112 is completed, it is determined whether power failure information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). Power failure information is stored when a power failure command is received from the main control unit 110. If power failure information is stored in processing S1113 (S1113: Yes), the power failure flag and the power failure processing in progress flag are both turned on (S1115), and power failure processing is executed (S1116). After the power failure processing is executed, the power failure processing in progress flag is turned off (S1117), and the processing then enters an infinite loop. During power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, turning off output from the audio output device 226 and lamp display device 227. The stored power failure information is also erased.

On the other hand, if no power outage information is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: No), a determination is made as to whether RAM 223 has been corrupted or not based on the keywords stored in RAM 223 (S1114). If RAM 223 has not been corrupted (S1114: No), the processing returns to S1101 and the main processing is repeated. On the other hand, if RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1114: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processing.

If it is determined that RAM has been corrupted and an infinite loop occurs, the main processing will not be executed, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. This will let the player know that an abnormality has occurred, and they can call a hall staff member or the like and request that the pachinko machine 10 be repaired. Furthermore, if it is confirmed that RAM 223 has been corrupted, the audio output device 226 or lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM corruption.

Next, with reference to Figure 62, we will explain the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 62 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111).

This command determination process (S1111) is executed within the main process (see Figure 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether a command from the main control unit 110 has been received in the command storage area provided in RAM 223 (S1201). If the determination results in a command being received from the main control unit 110 (S1201: Yes), the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read and analyzed, and it is determined whether a command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol (i.e., special symbol 1 variation pattern command, special symbol 1 stop type command, special symbol 1 confirmation command, etc.) has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1202). Then, if it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol has been received (S1202: Yes), special symbol 1 command processing is performed to execute each process related to that command (S1203), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 61).

Here, referring to Figure 63, we will explain the special chart 1 command processing (S1203) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 63 is a flowchart showing this special chart 1 command processing (S1203).

This special symbol 1 command processing (S1203) executes various setting processes related to the dynamic display (variable presentation) of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control unit 110.

In the special symbol 1 command processing (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol 1 variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1231). If the determination results in a special symbol 1 variation pattern command being received (S1231: Yes), the variation pattern type of the first special symbol included in the received special symbol 1 variation pattern command is extracted (S1232).

The variation pattern type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in RAM 223 and is used in the variation presentation process (see FIG. 66) described below when setting a display special symbol 1 variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation presentation of the first special symbol and its variation pattern type depending on the game status. After that, this special symbol 1 command process (S1203) ends, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S1231: No), it is then determined whether or not a special chart 1 stop type command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1233). Then, if it is determined that a special chart 1 stop type command has been received (S1233: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special chart 1 stop type command (S1234).

The stop type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in RAM 223 and is used in the variable effect processing (see FIG. 66) described below when setting a special symbol 1 stop type command for display that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect of the first special symbol depending on the game status. Then, the special symbol 1 variable start flag 223a, which indicates that the variable effect of the first special symbol will begin, is set to on (S1235), and this special symbol 1 command processing (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 62).

The special symbol 1 stop type command is a command that is always sent by the main control unit 110 after the main control unit 110 sends the special symbol 1 variation pattern command when starting the first special symbol variation presentation, as a command indicating the stop type of the first special symbol variation presentation whose variation pattern is indicated by the special symbol 1 variation pattern command. By setting the special symbol 1 variation start flag 223a on by processing S1235, a determination is made in the variation presentation process (see FIG. 66) that is executed later as to whether the variation pattern type of the first special symbol variation presentation extracted based on the values of each counter C1, etc., included in the first reserved ball count command matches the variation pattern type of the first special symbol variation presentation extracted from the received special symbol 1 variation pattern command. Also, a determination is made as to whether the stop type of the first special symbol variation presentation extracted based on the values of each counter C1, etc., included in the first reserved ball count command matches the stop type of the first special symbol variation presentation extracted from the received special symbol 1 stop type command. If, as a result of these determinations, in the variation presentation of the first special symbol 1, the variation pattern based on the first reserved ball count command does not match the variation pattern based on the special symbol 1 variation pattern command, or if the stop type based on the first reserved ball count command does not match the stop type based on the special symbol 1 stop type command, it is determined that some kind of abnormality has occurred (for example, an abnormal command reception due to noise), and error processing is performed to indicate the abnormality.

If it is determined as a result of processing S1233 that a special symbol 1 stop type command has not been received (S1233: No), it is then determined whether a special symbol 1 confirmation command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1236). The special symbol 1 confirmation command is a command used to confirm and display the first special symbol variable effect when the first special symbol variable effect is being executed on the third pattern display device 81. If it is determined that this special symbol 1 confirmation command has been received (S1236: Yes), a display special symbol 1 confirmation command is set to the display control unit 114 to confirm and display the first special symbol variable effect when the first special symbol variable effect is being executed (S1237), and the special symbol 1 command processing (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 62).

When the display control device 114 receives a display special symbol 1 confirmation command from the voice lamp control device 113, if the third pattern display device 81 is executing a first special symbol variable performance, it confirms and displays the first special symbol variable performance, but if the third pattern display device 81 is not executing a first special symbol variable performance, it is configured to ignore the display special symbol 1 confirmation command (do not execute processing based on the command, do not change the display content based on the command).

If it is determined as a result of processing S1236 that the special symbol 1 confirmation command has not been received (S1236: No), processing related to other first special symbol variable effects is performed (S1238), this special symbol 1 command processing (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 62).

Returning to Figure 62, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S1202 that a command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol has not been received (S1202: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol (i.e., special symbol 2 variation pattern command, special symbol 2 stop type command, special symbol 2 confirmation command, etc.) has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1204). Then, if it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol has been received (S1204: Yes), special symbol 2 command processing is performed to execute each process related to that command (S1205), and this command determination processing (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see Figure 61).

Here, referring to Figure 64, we will explain the special chart 2 command processing (S1205) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 64 is a flowchart showing this special chart 2 command processing (S1205).

This special symbol 2 command processing (S1205) executes various setting processes related to the dynamic display (variable presentation) of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control unit 110.

In the special symbol 2 command processing (S1205), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1251). If the determination results in a special symbol 2 variation pattern command being received (S1251: Yes), the variation pattern type of the second special symbol included in the received special symbol 2 variation pattern command is extracted (S1252).

The variation pattern type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in RAM 223 and is used in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 66) described below when setting a display special symbol 2 variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect of the second special symbol and its variation pattern type depending on the game status. After that, this special symbol 2 command processing (S1205) ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, if it is determined that a special pattern 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S1251: No), it is then determined whether a special pattern 2 stop type command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1253). Then, if it is determined that a special pattern 2 stop type command has been received (S1253: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special pattern 2 stop type command (S1254).

The stop type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in RAM 223 and is used in the variable effect processing (see FIG. 66) described below when setting a special symbol 2 stop type command for display that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect of the second special symbol depending on the game status. After that, the special symbol 2 variable start flag 223b, which indicates that the variable effect of the second special symbol will begin, is set to on (S1255), and this special symbol 2 command processing (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 62).

The special symbol 2 stop type command is a command that is always sent by the main control unit 110 after the main control unit 110 sends the special symbol 2 variation pattern command when starting the variation presentation of the second special symbol, as a command indicating the stop type of the variation presentation of the second special symbol whose variation pattern is indicated by the special symbol 2 variation pattern command. By setting the special symbol 2 variation start flag 223b on by processing S1255, in the variation presentation process executed later (see FIG. 66), a determination is made as to whether the variation pattern type of the variation presentation of the second special symbol extracted previously based on the values of each counter C1, etc. included in the second reserved ball count command matches the variation pattern type of the variation presentation of the second special symbol extracted from the received special symbol 2 variation pattern command. A determination is also made as to whether the stop type of the variation presentation of the second special symbol extracted previously based on the values of each counter C1, etc. included in the second reserved ball count command matches the stop type of the variation presentation of the second special symbol extracted from the received special symbol 2 stop type command. If, as a result of these determinations, in the variation presentation of the second special symbol 1, the variation pattern based on the second reserved ball count command does not match the variation pattern based on the special symbol 2 variation pattern command, or if the stop type based on the second reserved ball count command does not match the stop type based on the special symbol 2 stop type command, it is determined that some kind of abnormality has occurred (for example, an abnormal command reception due to noise), and error processing is performed to indicate the abnormality.

If it is determined as a result of processing S1253 that a special symbol 2 stop type command has not been received (S1253: No), it is then determined whether a special symbol 2 confirmation command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1256). The special symbol 2 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the second special symbol variable effect when the second special symbol variable effect is being executed on the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined that this special symbol 2 confirmation command has been received (S1256: Yes), a display special symbol 2 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the second special symbol variable effect when the second special symbol variable effect is being executed is set to the display control unit 114 (S1257), and the special symbol 2 command processing (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 62).

When the display control device 114 receives a display special symbol 2 confirmation command from the voice lamp control device 113, if the third pattern display device 81 is executing a variable performance of the second special symbol, it confirms and displays the variable performance of the second special symbol, but if the third pattern display device 81 is not executing a variable performance of the second special symbol, it is configured to ignore the display special symbol 2 confirmation command (do not execute processing based on the command, do not change the display content based on the command).

If it is determined as a result of processing S1256 that the special symbol 2 confirmation command has not been received (S1256: No), processing related to other second special symbol variable effects is performed (S1258), this special symbol 2 command processing (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 62).

Returning to Figure 62, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S1204 that a command related to the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special pattern has not been received (S1204: No), it is then determined whether or not a first reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1206). If it is determined that a first reserved ball number command has been received (S1206: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (see Figure 5) of the main control unit 110 contained in the first reserved ball number command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control unit 113 (S1207). Then, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, stop pattern selection counter C3, variable type counter CS1, and small jackpot type counter CK, which are also included in the first reserved ball count command, are stored in the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved information storage area 223e indicated by the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c updated in S1207 (S1208). Then, a first reserved ball count command for display is set to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special pattern (S1209), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 61).

Here, the first reserved ball count command is sent from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the first starting hole 64 (starting win). Therefore, each time a starting win occurs, the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c of the sound lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to match the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110 by processing in S1207. Therefore, even if the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c of the sound lamp control unit 113 deviates from the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110 due to noise or other factors, the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c of the sound lamp control unit 113 can be corrected to match the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110 when a starting win is detected.

The voice lamp control device 113 is also able to perform pre-reading processing by referencing the counters C1, C3, CS, and CK stored in the first pending information storage area 223e. In other words, if a variable effect of the reserved first special symbol is executed, it can determine what the result of that variable effect will be (whether it will result in a jackpot, how long it will last, etc.) before the variable effect is executed, and can then decide to execute various effects.

If, as a result of processing S1206, it is determined that the first reserved ball count command has not been received (S1206: No), it is then determined whether or not a second reserved ball count command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1210). If it is determined that the second reserved ball count command has been received (S1210: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b (see Figure 5) of the main control unit 110 contained in the second reserved ball count command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the second special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d of the voice lamp control unit 113 (S1211). Then, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variable type counter CS1, and small jackpot type counter CK, which are also included in the second reserved ball count command, are stored in the second reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved information storage area 223f indicated by the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d updated in S1211 (S1212). Then, a second reserved ball count command for display is set to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the second special pattern (S1213), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 61).

Here, the second reserved ball count command is sent from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the second starting hole 71 (starting win). Therefore, each time a starting win occurs, the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d of the sound lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to match the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control unit 110 by processing S1211. Therefore, even if the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d of the sound lamp control unit 113 deviates from the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control unit 110 due to noise or other factors, the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d of the sound lamp control unit 113 can be corrected to match the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control unit 110 when a starting win is detected.

The voice lamp control device 113 is also able to perform pre-reading processing by referencing the counters C1-C3, CS, and CK stored in the second pending information storage area 223f. In other words, if a variable effect of the reserved second special symbol is executed, it can determine what the result of that variable effect will be (whether it will result in a jackpot, how long it will last, etc.) before the variable effect is executed, and can then decide whether to execute various effects.

If, as a result of the processing of S1210, it is determined that the second reserved ball count command has not been received (S1210: No), then a rescue-related command reception process is executed to determine whether various rescue-related commands have been received from the main control unit 110 (S1214), and processing proceeds to S1215.

Now, with reference to Figure 65, we will explain the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 65 is a flowchart showing this rescue-related command reception process (S1214).

In this rescue-related command reception process (S1214), various setting processes are performed based on the rescue-related commands sent from the main control unit 110.

In the rescue-related command reception process (S1214), first, it is determined whether a rescue setting complete command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1277). If the determination result shows that a rescue setting complete command has been received (S1277: Yes), the sub-rescue setting complete flag 223j is set to ON (S1278), the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 62).

If it is determined in the processing of S1277 that a rescue setting command has not been received (S1277: No), it is then determined whether a rescue counter command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1279). If the result of the determination is that a rescue counter command has been received (S1279: Yes), the corresponding information is stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i (S1280), this rescue-related command reception processing (S1214) is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 62).

Also, if it is determined in the processing of S1279 that a rescue counter command has not been received (S1279: No), this rescue-related command reception processing (S1214) is terminated and processing returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 62).

Returning to Figure 62, the explanation will continue. After completing the rescue-related command reception processing of S1214, processing according to the other command is then executed (S1215), and this command determination processing (S1111) is terminated, returning to the main processing (see Figure 61). Here, if the received other command is a command to be used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, and the processing result is stored in RAM 223. If it is a command to be used by the display control device 114, the command is set so that it is sent to the display control device 114. For example, a demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the processing of S1215, temporarily stored in a command sending ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S1102) of the main processing.

Next, with reference to Figure 66, we will explain the variable effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 66 is a flowchart showing this variable effect processing (S1110).

This variable effect processing (S1110) is executed within the main processing (see FIG. 61), and executes various processes to execute a variable effect of the first or second special symbol in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4) of the third pattern display device 81 depending on the game status. Specifically, when the start conditions for the variable effect of the first special symbol are met, a variable effect of the first special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, when the start conditions for the variable effect of the second special symbol are met, a variable effect of the second special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation effect processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether the special chart 1 variation start flag 223a stored in RAM 223 is on or not (S1301). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 variation start flag 223a is on (S1301: Yes), since both the special symbol 1 variation pattern command and the special symbol 1 stop type command have been received, the special symbol 1 variation start flag 223a is turned off to start the variation performance of the first special symbol (S1302). Next, the data contained in the first reserved information storage area provided in the first reserved information storage area 223e is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g (S1303). Furthermore, the data contained in the second to fourth first reserved information storage areas provided in the first reserved information storage area 223e is shifted to the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 3 (S1304). The value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S1305), and the process proceeds to S1306.

In other words, in this case, the number of reserved first special pattern variable effects is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved first special pattern variable effect is started, so the values of the counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first reserved information first area corresponding to the first reserved variable effect are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g corresponding to the first special pattern variable effect currently being executed. In addition, the values of counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in storage areas 223e1-223e5 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to storage areas 223e1-223e5 of the first pending information storage first area, the values of counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in storage areas 223e1-223e5 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to storage areas 223e1-223e5 of the first pending information storage second area, and the values of counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in storage areas 223e1-223e5 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to storage areas 223e1-223e5 of the first pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223g will store the same values as the counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control unit 110, and the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved information storage area 223e will store the same values as the counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in the first reserved ball storage areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control unit 110, respectively.

In the processing of S1306, the first reserved ball number command for display is set based on the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c subtracted in the processing of S1305 (S1306), and the processing proceeds to S1307.

The first reserved ball count command for display set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in Figure 61). The display control device 114 controls the display of the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 according to the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the first special pattern indicated by this first reserved ball count command for display.

Next, in the processing of S1307, the display special symbol 1 variation pattern command setting processing is executed to display the variation performance of the first special symbol (S1307), and the processing proceeds to S1308.

Now, with reference to Figure 67, we will explain the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 67 is a flowchart showing this display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307).

This display special symbol 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) is executed within the variation effect process (see Figure 66), and obtains the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation effect to be executed based on the values of each counter C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in the execution information storage area 223g. Based on this variation pattern, a display special symbol 1 variation pattern command is set to display the first special symbol variation effect in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

In this display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307), first it is determined whether or not the "normal gaming state" is in (S1351), and if it is in "normal gaming state" (S1351: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is a variation pattern for re-variation (see Figure 16 (b)) (S1355), and if it is a variation pattern for re-variation (S1355: Yes), a display re-variation effect command is set (S1356), and processing proceeds to S1357.

Also, if the result of the determination in S1355 is that the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control unit 110 is not a fluctuation pattern for re-fluctuation (S1355: No), processing in S1356 is skipped and processing proceeds to S1357.

In the processing of S1357, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control unit 110 is a fluctuation pattern for promotion effects (see Figure 16 (b)) (S1357), and if it is a fluctuation pattern for promotion effects (S1357: Yes), a promotion effect command for display is set (S1358), this display special chart 1 fluctuation pattern command setting processing (S1307) is terminated, and the processing returns to the fluctuation effect processing (see Figure 66).

Furthermore, if the result of the determination in S1357 is that the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is not a variation pattern for promotion effects (S1357: No), processing proceeds to S1359. Furthermore, if the processing in S1351 determines that the game is not in a "normal game state" (S1351: No), processing also proceeds to S1359.

In the processing of S1359, other display special chart 1 variation pattern commands are set (S1359), this display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting processing (S1307) is terminated, and the processing returns to the variation performance processing (see Figure 66).

The display special symbol 1 variation pattern command, display re-variation effect command, and display promotion effect command set here are temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and are then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 61). The display control device 114 begins display control of the variation effect of the first special symbol so that the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the display special symbol 1 variation pattern command, display re-variation effect command, and display promotion effect command.

In this embodiment, the display effect commands are set in accordance with the variation pattern commands received from the main control device 110, but the effect commands may also be set in accordance with the game state. For example, a special effect may be executed from the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 until the variation display for a specific number of spins is executed, or the effect may change depending on the number of times the variation display has been executed since the previous jackpot (for example, the background may change, the symbols may change, or the variation effect itself may change).

Returning to Figure 66, the explanation will continue. When the display special symbol 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) is completed, in the process of S1308, the display special symbol 1 stop type command setting process is executed to set the stop type command for the variation effect of the first special symbol (S1308), this variation effect process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see Figure 61).

Here, with reference to Figure 68, we will explain the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 68 is a flowchart showing this display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308).

This display special symbol 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) obtains the stop type of the first special symbol variable effect that will now be executed based on the values of each counter C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in the execution information storage area 223g, and sets a display special symbol 1 stop type command based on that stop type to display the first special symbol variable effect in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, if a small win on special chart 1 is won, a stop type command is set when the small win on special chart 1 is won in order to distinguish the stop patterns after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on the game status and various other conditions.

In this display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308), it is first determined whether a special chart 1 small win, i.e., small win type "Time Reduction B (Small Win A)" or "Time Reduction C (Small Win A)" has been won (S1371). If a special chart 1 small win has not been won (S1371: No), a display special chart 1 stop type command based on the values of the other counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK is set (S1372), and this display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 66).

If it is determined in the processing of S1371 that a small win on Special Chart 1 has been won (S1371: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the "normal gaming state A" is in effect (S1373). If it is in "normal gaming state A" (S1373: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the sub-rescue setting flag 223j is on (S1374).

If the result of the judgment in S1374 is that the sub-rescue set flag 223j is not on, i.e., if the sub-rescue set flag 223j is in the off state (S1374: No), since the number of times the rescue condition has been met has never been reached since the last jackpot (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power was turned on), it is next judged whether the value of the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1376), and if the value of the sub-rescue counter 223i is equal to or smaller than the break-even count storage area 223k, If the value is not smaller than the value stored in the count storage area 223k, in other words, if the value of the sub-rescue counter 223i is equal to or greater than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1376: No), this means that a small win on special symbol 1 has been won during the rescue priority notification period (see FIG. 28), so a display challenge symbol command is set (S1378) (see FIG. 89(c)), the display special symbol 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable presentation process (see FIG. 66).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1376, if the value of the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1376: Yes), this means that a small win on special chart 1 has been won during the jackpot priority notification period (see Figure 28), and the process proceeds to S1377.

Also, if the result of the determination in S1373 is that the game is not in "normal game state A" (S1373: No), then processing also proceeds to S1377. Furthermore, if the processing in S1374 determines that the sub-rescue set flag 223j is on (S1374: Yes), then the number of times the rescue condition has been met has been reached once since the previous jackpot (or the RAM 203 initialization processing when the power was turned on), and the game state is such that it is not possible to transition to the "normal low probability time shortened state," so processing also proceeds to S1377 in this case.

In the processing of S1377, a small win symbol command for display is set (S1377) (see FIG. 89(a)), and the processing for setting the special symbol 1 stop type command for display (S1308) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable effect processing (see FIG. 66).

By configuring it in this way, the stopped symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the variable effect can be differentiated depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when a small jackpot on Special Symbol 1 is won in "Normal Game State A" (the number of times remaining until the rescue condition is met) and various other circumstances. As a result, when a small jackpot on Special Symbol 1 is won, the player is given the choice of either executing a right-hand hit to trigger a jackpot, or not executing a right-hand hit to trigger a jackpot, returning to "Normal Game State A" and allowing the special symbol to be executed until the rescue condition is met, creating new gameplay features and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The display special symbol 1 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 61). When the display control device 114 determines and displays the first special symbol change effect executed by the display special symbol 1 change pattern command, display re-change effect command, and display promotion effect command set by the process of S1307, it sets a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display special symbol 1 stop type command.

Returning to the variation effect processing (S1110) of Figure 66, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S1301, if it is determined that the special chart 1 variation start flag 223a is not on (S1301: No), it is then determined whether the special chart 2 variation start flag 223b stored in RAM 223 is on (S1309). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 variation start flag 223b is on (S1309: Yes), both the special symbol 2 variation pattern command and the special symbol 2 stop type command have been received, so the special symbol 2 variation start flag 223b is turned off to start the variation performance of the second special symbol (S1310). Next, the data contained in the second reserved information storage area 1 provided in the second reserved information storage area 223f is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g (S1311). Furthermore, the data contained in the second reserved information storage areas 2 to 4 provided in the second reserved information storage area 223f is shifted to the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 3 (S1312). The value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1314.

In other words, in this case, the number of held second special pattern variable effects is reduced by one, and the execution of the first held second special pattern variable effect is started, so the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second held information first area corresponding to the first held variable effect are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h5 of the execution information storage area 223g corresponding to the second special pattern variable effect currently being executed. In addition, the values of counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK stored in storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage first area, the values of counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK stored in storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage second area, and the values of counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK stored in storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage fourth area are moved to storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223g will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control unit 110, and the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved information storage area 223f will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK stored in the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control unit 110, respectively.

In the processing of S1314, the second reserved ball number command for display is set based on the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d subtracted in the processing of S1313 (S1314), and the processing proceeds to S1315.

The second reserved ball count command for display set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in Figure 61). The display control device 114 controls the display of the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 according to the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the second special pattern indicated by this second reserved ball count command for display.

Next, in the processing of S1315, the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation effect to be executed is obtained based on the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1, and CK stored in the execution information storage area 223g, and a display special symbol 2 variation pattern command is set to display the second special symbol variation effect in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (S1315), and processing proceeds to S1316.

The display special symbol 2 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in Figure 61). The display control device 114 begins display control of the variation presentation of the second special symbol so that the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display special symbol 2 variation pattern command.

Next, in the processing of S1316, the stop type of the second special symbol variable effect to be executed is obtained based on the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1, and CK stored in the execution information storage area 223g, and a display special symbol 2 stop type command is set based on this stop type to display the second special symbol variable effect in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (S1316), this variable effect processing (S1110) is terminated, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 61).

The display special symbol 2 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 61). When the display control device 114 is to confirm and display the second special symbol variation effect executed by the display special symbol 2 variation pattern command set by the processing of S1317, it sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display special symbol 2 stop type command.

Next, with reference to Figure 69, we will explain the winning effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio and lamp control device 113. Figure 69 is a flowchart showing this winning effect processing (S1105).

This winning effect processing (S1105) is executed as part of the main processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound and lamp control device 113, and executes processing while the main control device 110 is executing a big win game. Furthermore, during this winning effect processing (S1105), while the main control device 110 is executing a small win game, a right-hit notification effect is executed based on the game status and various other circumstances.

In this winning effect processing (S1105), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won (S1401). If a jackpot has been won (S1401: Yes), the sub-rescue counter 223i is cleared to "0" as an initialization processing (S1403).

Next, the sub-rescue setting completed flag 223j is set to OFF (S1404), other initialization processing is performed (S1405), and processing proceeds to S1406.

In the processing of S1406, processing related to the jackpot opening is executed (S1406), and then a display jackpot right-hit notification command is set (S1407), and processing proceeds to S1411.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that a jackpot has not been won (S1401: No), it is then determined whether a small jackpot has been won (S1408). If a small jackpot has been won (S1408: Yes), the display control for the right-hit notification display to be performed when the small jackpot is won is executed (S1409), and processing proceeds to S1410.

Here, referring to Figure 70, we will explain the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won, which is executed by the MPU 221 in the audio and lamp control device 113. Figure 70 is a flowchart showing the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won as display control.

This right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won is executed within the winning display process (see Figure 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound and lamp control device 113, and determines the content of the right-hit notification display to be executed on the third pattern display device 81 during the opening time when a small win is won.

In this right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won, first it is determined whether or not the game is in "normal game mode A" (S1501). If it is in "normal game mode A" (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether the type of small win won is "Time-saving B (small win A)" or "Time-saving B (small win A)," i.e., whether or not it is a special chart 1 small win (S1502).

If the result of the determination in S1502 is that a small win has been won on Special Chart 1 (S1502: Yes), it is then determined whether the sub-rescue set flag 223j is on (S1503). If the sub-rescue set flag 223j is not on, that is, if the sub-rescue set flag 223j is off (S1503: No), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has never been reached since the previous jackpot (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power was turned on). Next, the value of the sub-rescue counter 223i is set to be smaller than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k. It is determined whether the value of the sub rescue counter 223i is equal to or greater than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1505), and if the value of the sub rescue counter 223i is not smaller than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k, that is, if the value of the sub rescue counter 223i is equal to or greater than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1505: No), a small win has been won for special chart 1 during the rescue priority notification period (see FIG. 28), so a rescue priority notification command for display is set (S1509) (see FIG. 89 (d)), the right-hit notification effect processing (S1409) when this small win is won is terminated, and the process returns to the winning effect processing (see FIG. 69).

Also, in the processing of S1505, if the value of the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1505: Yes), the special chart 1 small jackpot has been won during the jackpot priority notification period (see Figure 28), and the process proceeds to S1506.

Furthermore, if the result of the determination in S1501 is not "normal game state A" (S1501: No), regardless of which type of small win is won, the expected value of the balls that can be won is higher if a right-hand play is performed to generate a jackpot, so processing proceeds to S1506. Also, if the type of small win that was won is not a special chart 1 small win (S1502: No), in this case too, the expected value of the balls that can be won is higher if a right-hand play is performed to generate a jackpot, so processing proceeds to S1506. Furthermore, if the sub-rescue setting flag 223j is turned on in the processing of S1503 (S1503: Yes), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has been reached since the previous jackpot (or the initialization processing of RAM 203 when the power was turned on), and the game state cannot transition to the "normal chart low probability time shortened state." Since the expected value of the balls that can be won is higher if a right-hand play is performed to generate a jackpot, processing proceeds to S1506.

In the processing of S1506, a jackpot priority notification command for display is set (S1506) (see Figure 89 (b)), the right-hit notification effect processing (S1409) when a small jackpot is won is terminated, and the process returns to the winning effect processing (see Figure 69).

By configuring it in this way, the type of right-hit notification effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the opening time when a small jackpot is won can be determined based on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when a small jackpot is won on Special Symbol 1 in "Normal Game State A" (the number of times remaining until the rescue condition is met) and various other circumstances. As a result, the player is given the choice of whether to execute the right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won, or the left-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won, creating new gameplay possibilities and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, if a special chart 1 small win is won during the rescue priority notification period and the rescue priority notification display (see Figure 89 (d)) is executed, and the player returns to "normal game state A" without performing a right-hand hit on that small win, even if the player wins a special chart 1 small win again before reaching the rescue condition fulfillment count and transitioning to the "normal chart low probability time shortened state," the right-hand hit notification display on that small win will be a rescue priority notification display.

In other words, if a small win on Special Chart 1 is won in "Normal Game State A" and a rescue priority notification effect is executed during the right-hit notification effect for that small win, the right-hit notification effect for the small win on Special Chart 1 will be a rescue priority notification effect from then on, and will not switch to a jackpot priority notification period effect until a jackpot is generated.

On the other hand, let's consider a case where a player wins a small jackpot on Special Chart 1, and a rescue priority notification is executed during the right-hand hit notification for that small jackpot. Then, while playing using the left-hand play method used when the small jackpot was won, a second small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won, and a jackpot priority notification is executed during that second small jackpot. In this case, even though the player avoided transitioning to a jackpot game in accordance with the rescue priority notification during the first small jackpot on Special Chart 1 and continued playing with the left hand using their existing balls, the jackpot priority notification is executed during the second small jackpot on Special Chart 1, which could lead the player to distrust the pachinko machine 10 and stop playing with the pachinko machine 10.

However, by configuring the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, even if a player wins a small special jackpot on Special Chart 1 during the rescue priority notification period and then wins a small special jackpot on Special Chart 1 again while playing using the left-hand play method used when a small jackpot was won, the rescue priority notification period presentation (see Figure 89 (d)) will be executed in the same way as the previous time, so the player can rest assured and continue to aim for the "shortened normal jackpot low probability time state."

Returning to the winning effect processing (S1105) in Figure 69, the explanation will continue. After the right-hit notification effect processing in the event of a small win in S1409 is completed, processing in the event of other small wins is then executed (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411.

In the S1411 process, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently occurring (S1411). If a jackpot is currently occurring (S1411: Yes), jackpot effect processing is executed (S1412), and this jackpot effect processing (S1105) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 61).

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1411 is that the big win is not occurring (S1411: No), then it is determined whether or not a small win is occurring (S1413). If a small win is occurring (S1413: Yes), small win effect processing is executed (S1414), and this win effect processing (S1105) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 61).

If it is determined in the processing of S1413 that a small win is not occurring (S1413: No), the processing of S1414 is skipped, this win effect processing (S1105) ends, and the processing returns to the main processing (see Figure 61).

Next, with reference to Figures 71 to 88, the various controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 as display control will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly divided into main processing (see Figure 71), which is executed repeatedly after power-on; command interrupt processing (see Figure 72(a)), which is executed when a command is received from the audio and lamp control device 113; and V interrupt processing (see Figure 72(b)), which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main processing, and executes command interrupt processing or V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal occur simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the audio and lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to Figure 71, we will explain the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114. Figure 71 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing executes initialization processing when the power is turned on.

When this main process is started by the MPU 231 upon power-on, it first executes the initial setting process associated with power-on (S2001). Specifically, it initializes the MPU 231 and performs processes such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236. It also sets various flags in the work RAM 233 and sets initial values for each flag. Unless otherwise specified, the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0."

Furthermore, during the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to a different color depending on the model of pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color appropriate for the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2002). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 (see Figure 30) is stored, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified in the transfer instruction is complete, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal to the MPU 231, indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 knows that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has finished. This image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so that it will not be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified in the transfer instruction, it may write transfer completion information indicating the end of the transfer to a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided within the image controller 237. The MPU 231 may then read the information in this register or partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and by detecting the writing of the transfer completion information by the image controller 237, determine that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has completed.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2002, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on variable image 283 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003).

This transfer instruction includes the starting address of character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to power-on variable image 283 is stored, the data size of that image data, destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and the starting address of the destination power-on variable image area 235b. In accordance with this transfer instruction, image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to power-on variable image 283 from character ROM 234 to power-on variable image area 235b of resident video RAM 235. The image data transferred to power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so that it will not be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image 283 to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2003, the simple image display flag 233a is then turned on (S2004). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233a is on, the resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 85(b)) described below is executed, which instructs the image controller 237 to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233a is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(b)). As a result, during this time, the simple command determination process (see S2028 in FIG. 72(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2029 in FIG. 72(b)) are executed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) so that the image-on image (power-on main image 282 and power-on variable image 283) shown in FIG. 30 is drawn.

As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 10 uses NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

Therefore, as in this main process, after power is turned on, the power-on main image 282 and power-on variable image 283 are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image 282 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image 282 on the third pattern display device 81, it can take its time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. Therefore, they can wait until initialization is complete without worrying that operation will stop until the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

Furthermore, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image 282 is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when power is turned on, allowing immediate confirmation that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Therefore, even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the main image 282 can be confirmed when power is turned on, preventing a decrease in the efficiency of operation checks.

Furthermore, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to transfer the power-on variable image 283 along with the power-on main image 282 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Therefore, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, resulting in a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), and an instruction to start a variable effect is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, i.e., if a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are received, the power-on variable image 283 shown in Figures 30(b) and 30(c) can be immediately displayed during the variable effect period, allowing for a simple variable effect. Therefore, even while the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can be sure that a lottery has been drawn by the simple variable effect of the power-on variable image 283.

As mentioned above, the power-on main image 282 continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, because the character ROM 234 is composed of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, this transfer takes time, and therefore the power-on main image 282 continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, with this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable effect can be produced using the power-on variable image 283 transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. This allows players to play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image 282 is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After processing S2004, interrupt permission is set (S2005), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by processing S2005, command interrupt processing (see Figure 72(a)) and V interrupt processing (see Figure 72(b)) are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to Figure 72 (a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Figure 72 (a) is a flowchart showing this command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted and stored sequentially in a command buffer area provided in work RAM 233 (S2011), and the command interrupt process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process (see S2022 in Figure 72(b)) or simple command determination process (see S2028 in Figure 72(b)) of the V interrupt process (see Figure 72(b)), which will be described later, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to Figure 72 (b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Figure 72 (b) is a flowchart showing this V interrupt processing. This V interrupt processing executes various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing, and also identifies the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, creates a drawing list (see Figure 36) for that image, and sends this drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing for that image.

As described above, this V interrupt processing begins when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of an image is completed, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing processing or display processing of the image is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer where the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first provide an overview of the V interrupt processing flow, and then describe each process in detail with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 72(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233a is on (S2021). If it is determined that the simple image display flag 233a is on (S2021: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, until the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, a simple command determination process (S2028) is executed to determine whether the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 30 on the third pattern display device 81. Next, a simple display setting process (S2029) is executed to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, and then the process proceeds to S2404.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2021, if the simple image display flag 233a is not on, i.e., is off (S2021: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third pattern display device 81 instead of the power-on image shown in Figure 30, a command determination process (S2022) is executed, followed by a display setting process (S2023), and the processing proceeds to S2024.

The command determination process (S2022) analyzes the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process (see Figure 72 (a)), and executes processing according to that command. If a display demo command or display variation pattern command has been stored, the demo display data table 232a1 or a variation display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233b. Furthermore, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the set display data table 232a1 is set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. If a command related to the character display Se1 displayed during "reach display" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "character command") has been stored, the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the display mode of the character display Se1 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c.

This command determination process analyzes and processes all commands currently stored in the command buffer area. This is because the command determination process is performed every 20 milliseconds that a V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands will be stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond interval.

In particular, when the main control unit 110 decides to start a variable effect, it is highly likely that display variable pattern commands, display stop type commands, character commands, etc. are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the display mode of the variable effect or "reach display" character display Se1 selected by the main control unit 110 or voice lamp control unit 113, and control the drawing of images so that a display image corresponding to that display mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 73 to 80.

In the display setting process (S2023), the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically identified based on the contents of the display data table 232a1 and additional data table 232a2 set in the display data table buffer 233b and additional data table buffer 233c by the command determination process (S2022) or the like. Furthermore, depending on the processing status, etc., the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the determined effect is set in the display data table buffer 233b. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 81 to 84.

After the display setting process (S2023) is executed, task processing is then executed (S2024). This task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, as determined by the display setting process (S2023) or the simplified display setting process (S2029), and determines various parameters required for drawing each sprite, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2025). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233a is on, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area in the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233a is off, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table 232a3 set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. Furthermore, when a character-related command or a rear image-related command is received from the voice and lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the character design used in a display mode other than the initial setting (default setting) of the character display Se1 or image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of this transfer setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 85 to 87.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2026). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in Figure 36 is generated from the types of sprites that make up one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, as determined in the task process (S2024), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S2025). This drawing list is then sent to the image controller 237 along with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process in accordance with the drawing list. Details of this drawing process will be described later with reference to Figure 88.

Next, an update process is performed on various counters provided in the display control device 114 (S2027). Then, this V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S2027 is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining the stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process (S2022), when reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table (not shown) corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command ("10R time-saving jackpot", "9R time-saving jackpot", "4R time-saving jackpot", "small win (jackpot symbol)", "small win (challenge symbol)", "normal reach" presentation mode when missing, "super reach" presentation mode when missing, "special reach" presentation mode when missing, "non-reach" presentation mode, "special variable" presentation mode) is compared with the stop pattern counter, and the stop pattern after the variable presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

Next, with reference to Figures 73 to 80, the above-mentioned command determination process (S2022), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described in detail. First, Figure 73 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

As shown in Figure 73, this command determination process first determines whether there are any unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area (S2101). If there are no unprocessed new commands (S2101: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see Figure 72 (b)). On the other hand, if there are unprocessed new commands (S2101: Yes), this indicates that the new command has been processed, and the new command flag determined in the display setting process (S2023) is set to ON (S2102). Next, the command type is analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (S2103).

Then, it is first determined whether there is a command for displaying the number of reserved balls among the unprocessed commands (S2104). If there is a command for displaying the number of reserved balls (S2104: Yes), the command for displaying the number of reserved balls is processed (S2105), and processing returns to S2101.

Here, the details of the reserved ball count command processing (S2105) will be explained with reference to Figure 74 (a). Figure 74 (a) is a flowchart showing the reserved ball count command processing. This reserved ball count command processing executes processing corresponding to the reserved ball count command for display received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the reserved ball count command processing (S2105), first, the new reserved ball count command flag, which is determined in the display setting processing (S2023) and indicates that the display reserved ball count command has been processed, is turned on (S2121), and then the reserved ball count information contained in the display reserved ball count command is obtained (S2122). Note that in the processing of S2122, if two or more display reserved ball count commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball count information is obtained from the most recently stored display reserved ball count command. This allows the latest reserved ball count information to be obtained.

Then, of the number discrimination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls obtained in the processing of S2122 is turned on, and the number discrimination flags corresponding to the other numbers of reserved balls are turned off (S2123), this reserved ball number command processing (S2105) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 73).

As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), when the new reserved ball count command flag, which indicates the update completion state, is on, the reserved image data is expanded by referencing the number discrimination flag so that the reserved ball count pattern for the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag that is set on is displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 73, if it is determined in the processing of S2104 that there is no display reserved ball count command (S2104: No), it is then determined whether there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands (S2106). If there is a display demo command (S2106: Yes), demo command processing is executed (S2107) and processing returns to S2101.

Now, with reference to Figure 74 (b), the demo command processing (S2107) will be described in detail. Figure 74 (b) is a flowchart showing the demo command processing. This demo command processing executes processing corresponding to the display demo command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the demo command processing (S2107), first, the demo display data table 232a1 corresponding to the demo effect is selected from the data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2131). Next, Null data is written into the additional data table buffer 233c to clear its contents, and Null data is also written into the transfer data table buffer 233d to clear its contents (S2132). This is because the demo display data table 232a1 specifies image drawing so that the image data required for drawing does not need to be newly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and therefore a corresponding transfer data table 232a3 is not prepared in the data table storage area 232a.

Next, time data corresponding to the demo display is set in the timing counter 233g (S2133), and the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2134). Then, a demo display flag (not shown), which indicates that a demo effect will be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when it is on, is set to on, and a confirmation command flag (not shown), which indicates that a confirmation display effect will be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when it is on, is set to off. Furthermore, the confirmation display flag, which indicates that a confirmation display effect is being displayed when it is on, is set to off (S2135), and the demo command processing (S2107) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 73).

When this demo command processing (S2107) is executed, the display setting processing (see Figure 81) updates the pointer 233e initialized by the processing of S2134, extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e from the demo display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the processing of S2131, and identifies the content of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, in the display setting process (see FIG. 81), the time counter 233g, to which time data corresponding to the demo display has been set by the process of S2133, is used to measure the time of the demo effect specified in the demo display data table 232a1. Furthermore, based on the state of the demo display flag and the final display flag set by the process of S2135, if the display setting process determines that the demo effect in the demo display data table 232a1 has ended as a result of the timing of the timer counter 233g, the demo effect is controlled to be displayed again as the effect to be displayed next.

Returning to Figure 73, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S2106 that there are no display demo commands (S2106: No), it is then determined whether or not there are any display variation pattern commands, display stop type commands, or display determination commands (hereinafter, display variation pattern commands, display stop type commands, and display determination commands may be collectively referred to as "variation presentation commands") among the unprocessed commands (S2108). If there are any variation presentation commands (S2108: Yes), variation presentation command processing is executed (S2109), and the processing returns to S2101.

Here, with reference to Figure 75, the variable performance command processing (S2109) will be explained in detail. Figure 75 is a flowchart showing the variable performance command processing. As described above, this variable performance command processing executes processing corresponding to the variable performance command, such as the display variable pattern command, display stop type command, or display confirmation command, received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variable performance command processing (S2109), it is first determined whether there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands (S2141). If there is a display confirmation command (S2141: Yes), confirmation command processing is executed (S2142), this variable performance command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 73).

Here, details of the confirmation command processing (S2142) will be explained with reference to Figure 76 (a). Figure 76 (a) is a flowchart showing the confirmation command processing. This confirmation command processing executes processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the confirmation command processing (S2142), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S2151), which notifies the display setting processing (see FIG. 81) that a display confirmation command has been received in the ON state, and then this confirmation command processing (S2142) is terminated and the process returns to the variable performance command processing (see FIG. 75).

As a result, the display setting process (see Figure 81) monitors the state of the confirmation command flag, and when the flag is turned on, executes display setting process so that the display of the confirmation display effect begins on the third pattern display device 81. Also, when processing the display setting for a variable effect, if the confirmation command flag does not turn on even after the effect time set for that variable effect has elapsed, executes display setting process so that the restart effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to Figure 75, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S2141 that there is no display confirmation command (S2141: No), it is then determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2143). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2143: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S2144), this variation performance command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 73).

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2144) will be described in detail with reference to Figure 76 (b). Figure 76 (b) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing (S2144), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display promotion effect pattern command among the unprocessed commands that is set by the display special chart variation pattern command setting processing in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1356 in FIG. 67) (S2161). If there is a display promotion effect pattern command (S2161: Yes), then the variation display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display promotion effect pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table 232a1 is read from the data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2162).

Here, the main control unit 110 always determines the start of a variation at least several seconds apart, so it will never receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process (see Figure 73), it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands will be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a risk that some of the commands may change due to noise or other factors, and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In order to prepare for such a case, in the process of S2162, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233b.

If the display data table buffer 233b is set to a variable display data table 232a1 corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variable time, and the main control unit 110 actually instructs a variable presentation with a shorter variable time than the set variable display data table 232a1, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) will be received from the main control unit 110 (audio lamp control unit 113) while the variable presentation according to the set variable display data table 232a1 is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, causing the third pattern to suddenly stop and be displayed while it is changing, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, by setting the display data table buffer 233b for the change pattern with the shortest change time, as in the first embodiment, even if the main control unit 110 actually instructs a change presentation with a change time longer than the set display data table 232a1 for the change, the display setting process (S2023) controls the display on the third pattern display device 81 so that a restart presentation is displayed after the change presentation according to the display data table buffer 233b has ended and until a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control unit 110 (voice lamp control device 113), as described below. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the restart presentation as part of the change presentation and continue to watch the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort until the stopped display of the third pattern is confirmed.

Next, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the variable display data table 232a1 set in S2162 is determined and read from the data table storage area 232a, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233d (S2163). Then, null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233c, clearing its contents (S2164).

Then, of the data table discrimination flags provided for each variable display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variable display data table 232a1 set by the processing of S2162 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other variable display data tables 232a1 are set off (S2165). By referencing the data table discrimination flag set by the processing of S2165, the display control in the display control device 114 can easily determine which variation pattern the variable display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b corresponds to. The display control device 114 then determines whether there is a contradiction between the variation pattern of the set variable display data table 232a1 and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command received later, and if there is a contradiction, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the default variation is set in the display data table buffer 233b.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the processing of S2162, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233g (S2166), and the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2167). Then, the confirmation command flag, demo display flag, and confirmation display flag are all set to off (S2168), and further, the restart timer counter used in the display setting processing (see FIG. 81) is initialized to "0" (S2169), this fluctuation pattern command processing (S2144) is terminated, and the processing returns to the fluctuation performance command processing (see FIG. 75).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2161 that there is no display promotion effect pattern command (S2161: No), other variation pattern command processing is executed (S2170), this variation pattern command processing (S2144) is terminated, and the processing returns to the variation effect command processing (see Figure 75).

When this variable pattern command processing (S2144) is executed, the display setting processing (see FIG. 81) updates the pointer 233e initialized by the processing of S2167, extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e from the variable display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the processing of S2162, and specifies the content of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e is extracted, and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table 232a1 is controlled so that it is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process (see FIG. 81), the time for the variable effect specified in the variable display data table 232a1 is measured using the timing counter 233g, for which time data has been set based on the variable display data table 232a1 by the process of S2166. Then, when it is determined that the variable effect in the variable display data table 232a1 has ended, if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control unit 110 (voice lamp control unit 113), the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is not received within a predetermined time after the variable effect has ended, the display settings are controlled so that a restart effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, prioritizing the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command would result in the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command not being performed, so it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

In contrast, in this variable effect command processing (S2109), the presence or absence of a display confirmation command is determined first, so the confirmation command processing, which is the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command, is always executed first, while the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and as in the processing of S2168, the confirmation command flag set by the display confirmation command can be overwritten and set to off. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be given priority over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with priority.

Similarly, if both a display demo command and a display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, prioritizing the processing corresponding to the display demo command would result in the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command not being performed, so it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

In contrast, in the command determination process (see Figure 73), the presence or absence of a display demo command is determined first, so the demo command process, which is the process corresponding to the display demo command, is always executed first, while the process corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later. As in the process of S2162, the demo display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the display demo command can be overwritten with the variation display data table 232a1. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be given priority over the display demo command, and the variation effects associated with the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with priority.

Returning to Figure 75, we will continue the explanation. In the processing of S2143, if it is determined that there is no display variable pattern command (S2143: No), the unprocessed command related to the variable effect is a display stop type command, so stop type command processing is executed (S2145), this variable effect command processing (S2109) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 73).

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2145) will be explained with reference to Figure 77. Figure 77 is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command ("10R time-saving jackpot," "9R time-saving jackpot," "4R time-saving jackpot," "small jackpot (jackpot symbol)," "small jackpot (challenge symbol)," "normal reach" presentation mode upon a miss, "super reach" presentation mode upon a miss, "special reach" presentation mode upon a miss, "non-reach" presentation mode, and "special variable" presentation mode) is determined (S2175), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter, which is updated each time V interrupt processing (see Figure 72 (b)) is executed, to finally set the stop symbol after the variable presentation to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2176).

Then, of the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2176 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are set off (S2177), this stop type command processing (S2145) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance command processing (see FIG. 75).

As described above, the variable display data table 232a1 contains offset information (pattern offset information) from the stopped pattern set by the processing of S2176 as type information for identifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation based on the variable display data table 232a1. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2024 in FIG. 72(b)), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stopped pattern set by the processing of S2176 is identified from the stopped pattern discrimination flag set by S2177, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing (see FIG. 81), described below, is added to the identified stopped pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. Note that, as described above, the image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Note that the main control unit 110 always determines the start of a variation at least several seconds apart, so the display control unit 114 will never receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process (see FIG. 73), it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands will be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a risk that part of the command may change due to noise or other factors, and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display stop type command. To prepare for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the S2175 process determines the stop type table, assuming that the stop type is "non-reach." As a result, the stop pattern (e.g., "456") corresponding to "non-reach," which is a "losing display," is set by the S2176 process.

If a stop pattern corresponding to a jackpot were set, the third pattern display device 81 would display the jackpot stop pattern even if the actual result was a miss, which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 had reached a jackpot, reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, in this embodiment, by setting a stop pattern corresponding to the "non-reach" presentation mode of the "miss display," if the actual result is a jackpot, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 will transition to a jackpot state even if the third pattern display device 81 displays a stop pattern corresponding to the "miss display," which can delight the player.

Referring back to Figure 73, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S2108 that there are no variable effect commands (S2108: No), it is then determined whether there are any win commands among the unprocessed commands (S2110). If there are any win commands (S2110: Yes), win command processing is executed (S2111), and the processing returns to S2101.

Here, with reference to Figure 78, the details of the win-related command processing (S2111) will be explained. Figure 78 is a flowchart showing the win-related command processing. This win-related command processing executes processing corresponding to commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 during a big win or small win.

In the winning command processing (S2111), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot priority notification command set in the right-hit notification performance processing (see FIG. 70) of the audio lamp control device 113 when a small win is won among the unprocessed commands (S2181). If there is a display jackpot priority notification command (S2181: Yes), processing proceeds to S2185. S2185 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2181 that there is no display jackpot priority notification command (S2181: No), it is then determined whether there is a display rescue priority notification command among the unprocessed commands (S2183), and if there is a display rescue priority notification command (S2183: Yes), processing proceeds to S2185.

In the processing of S2185, the small win right hit notification command flag is set to ON (S2185). Then, of the small win right hit notification image discrimination flags provided for each small win right hit notification effect, the small win right hit notification image discrimination flag corresponding to the small win right hit notification effect indicated by the small win right hit notification command is set to ON, and the small win right hit notification image discrimination flags corresponding to the other small win right hit notification effects are set to OFF (S2186), ending this win-related command processing (S2111) and returning to the command determination processing (see FIG. 73).

When the normal image transfer setting process (see Figures 86 and 87) detects that the small win right hit notification command flag set by the processing of S2185 is on, the small win right hit notification image type is identified from the small win right hit notification image discrimination flag set by the processing of S2186. Then, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to the identified small win right hit notification image type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process (see Figure 81), the type of small win right hit notification image is identified from the small win right hit notification image discrimination flag set by processing S2186 based on the small win right hit notification command flag set by processing S2185, and processing is performed to display the right hit notification image corresponding to that small win right hit notification image type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined in the processing of S2183 that there is no display rescue priority notification command among the unprocessed commands (S2183: No), other win command processing is executed (S2184), this win-related command processing (S2111) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 73).

Returning to Figure 73, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S2110 that there are no winning commands (S2110: No), it is then determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include commands related to the character display Se1 displayed on the third pattern display device 81, such as pattern commands such as a weak pattern command for display, a strong pattern command for display, and a color command such as a red character command for display (hereinafter, pattern commands and color commands may be collectively referred to as "character commands") (S2112). If there are character commands (S2112: Yes), character command processing is executed (S2113), and the processing returns to S2101.

Now, with reference to Figure 79, the details of the character command processing (S2113) will be explained. Figure 79 is a flowchart showing the character command processing. This character command processing executes processing corresponding to the character command received from the voice and lamp control device 113.

In character-related command processing (S2113), it is first determined whether there is a pattern-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2191). If there is a pattern-related command (S2191: Yes), the character pattern memory 233j is set based on the received pattern-related command (S2192). Then, processing proceeds to S2195, where the character change command flag is set to ON (S2195). The character change command flag is configured to notify the normal image transfer setting processing (see Figures 86 and 87), described below, that a character-related command including a pattern-related command has been processed when it is ON.

Next, the additional data table 232a2 for character patterns corresponding to the character-changed image type indicated by the character pattern memory 233j is determined, the determined additional data table 232a2 for character patterns is read from the data table storage area 232a, and the additional data table 232a2 for character patterns is set in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2196).

As a result, in the display setting process (see Figure 81), the display content of the next frame of image on the third pattern display device 81 is specified so that the display mode of character display Se1 corresponding to the additional data table for character patterns 232a2 based on the character pattern memory 233j, stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the processing of S2196, is additionally displayed for the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

Then, among the character change discrimination flags provided for each character change image type, the character change discrimination flag corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the character pattern memory 233j is set to ON (S2197), this character-based command processing (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 73).

The character change discrimination flag set here is configured to be set to off when the currently executed variable effect ends, that is, when the confirmation command flag indicating that a display confirmation command has been received is on during the display setting process (see Figure 81) (see S2314 in Figure 81).

If it is determined in S2191 that there are no pattern-based commands (S2191: No), it then determines whether there are any red-text display commands among the unprocessed commands (S2193). If there are any red-text display commands (S2193: Yes), it sets the red-text flag 233k to ON (S2194) and proceeds to S2195.

In the processing of S2195 after S2194, just as when a pattern-related command is received, the character change command flag is set to ON (S2195), which notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (see Figure 86) described below that a character-related command, including a display red character command, has been processed in the ON state.

Next, the additional data table for text color 232a2 corresponding to the text change image type indicated by the red text flag 233k and the variable effect to be executed (display data table 232a1) is determined, the determined additional data table for text color 232a2 is read from the data table storage area 232a, and the additional data table for text color 232a2 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2196).

As a result, in the display setting process (see Figure 81), the display content of the next frame of image on the third pattern display device 81 is specified so that the display mode of the character display Se1 corresponding to the additional data table 232a2 for character color based on the red character flag 233k, which was stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the processing of S2203, is additionally displayed in relation to the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

Then, among the character change discrimination flags provided for each character change image type, the character change discrimination flag corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the red character flag 233k is set to ON (S2197), this character-based command processing (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 73).

Therefore, for example, if a pattern command and a red character display command are received for the change effect, the character change determination flag will be set to ON based on the pattern command and ON based on the red character display command.

Specifically, in the example shown, in variable effect 1, a case where a strong pattern command for display and a red character command for display are received as pattern commands is shown. In this case, the character change discrimination flag is set to a value indicating that when a reach occurs, the character display Se1 is displayed in a "strong pattern" and the display color of the character display Se1 is displayed in "red." Therefore, as the additional data table 232a2, a character pattern additional data table 232a2 and a character color additional data table 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c.

If it is determined in the processing of S2193 that there is no red-character display command (S2193: No), other character-based command processing is then executed (S2198), this character-based command processing (S2113) is terminated, and the flow returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 73).

When the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the first embodiment detects that the character change command flag set by the processing of S2195 is on during the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) described below, it determines that a specified character change additional data table 232a2 has been set in the additional data table buffer 233c by the character-based command processing (S2113), and identifies the character change image type corresponding to the character change additional data table 232a2 set in the additional data table buffer 233c from the character change determination flag set by the processing of S2197. It then instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required to display the identified character change image type.

Returning to Figure 73, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S2112 that there are no text-based commands (S2112: No), it is then determined whether there are any background image-based commands among the unprocessed commands (S2114). If there are any background image-based commands (S2114: Yes), background image-based command processing is executed (S2115), and the processing returns to S2101.

Here, details of the rear image command processing (S2115) will be explained with reference to Figure 80 (a). Figure 80 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image command processing. This rear image command processing executes processing corresponding to the rear image command received from the audio and lamp control device 113.

In the background image command processing (S2115), first, the background image change flag is set to ON (S2202), which notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) described below of the change in the background image resulting from receiving a background image change command in the ON state, and then the processing proceeds to S2205.

In the processing of S2205, the rear image command flag is set to ON (S2205), and among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (rear image A to C), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and the rear image discrimination flags corresponding to the other rear image types are set to OFF (S2206), this rear image change command processing (S2113) is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing (see Figure 73).

In the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86), when it is detected that the rear image command flag set by the process of S2205 is on, the changed rear image type is identified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S2206. If the identified rear image type is rear B or rear C, as described above, since some of the image data corresponding to those rear images is not resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Furthermore, in the task processing (S2024 in Figure 72 (b)), if it is specified that one of back faces A to C is to be displayed based on the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table 232a1, the back face type to be displayed at that time is identified from the back face image discrimination flag set in S2206, and further, the range of the back face image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which image data corresponding to that range of the back face image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

Note that because a player does not operate the frame button 22 consecutively within 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands will not be received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process (see FIG. 73), there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to noise or the like, causing another command to be mistakenly interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S2206, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This rear image change does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately depending on the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Referring back to Figure 73, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S2114 that there are no rear-image related commands (S2114: No), it is then determined whether there are any error commands among the unprocessed commands (S2116). If there are any error commands (S2116: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2117) and the processing returns to S2101.

Now, with reference to Figure 80 (b), the error command processing (S2115) will be described in detail. Figure 80 (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In error command processing (S2117), first, the error occurrence flag, which indicates that an error has occurred when in the ON state, is set to ON (S2211). Then, of the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S2212), after which the error command processing (S2117) is terminated and processing returns to command judgment processing (see Figure 73).

In the display setting process (Figure 81), when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2211, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2212, and a warning image corresponding to that error type is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, processing in S2212 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing players and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence situation.

Returning to Figure 73, we will continue the explanation. If it is determined in the processing of S2116 that there are no error commands (S2116: No), processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is then executed (S2118), and processing returns to S2101.

In S2101, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether there are any unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and if there are any unprocessed new commands (S2101: Yes), the processes of S2102 to S2118 are executed again. Then, S2101 to S2118 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and if S2101 determines that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination process (S2022) is terminated.

The simple command determination process (S2028), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233a is on during V interrupt processing (see FIG. 72(b)), is similar to the command determination process (S2022). However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 30, namely the display table confirmation command, the display variation pattern command, and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the processes corresponding to each command, namely the confirmation command process (see FIG. 76(a)), the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 76(b)), and the stop type command process (see FIG. 77), are executed. Other commands are discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see Figure 76 (b)) executed in this case, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image 283 is set in the display data table buffer 233b in the processing of S2162, and since the image data of the power-on main image 282 and power-on variation image 283 required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, the processing of S2163 writes null data to the transfer data table buffer 233d and clears its contents.

Next, with reference to Figures 81 to 84, we will explain in detail the above-mentioned display setting process (S2023), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see Figure 72 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figures 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process (S2023), as shown in FIG. 81, first, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S2301). If the new command flag is not on, i.e., it is off (S2301: No), it is determined that a new command was not processed in the command determination process executed earlier (see FIG. 73), and steps S2302 to S2306 are skipped, and processing proceeds to S2307. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2301: Yes), it is determined that a new command was processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S2302), processing corresponding to the new command is executed in steps S2303 to S2306.

In the processing of S2303, it is determined whether the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S2303), and if the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S2303: Yes), it is determined that the display reserved ball count command was processed in the previous command determination processing (see Figure 73), and the reserved image setting processing is executed (S2304).

Here, the details of the reserved image setting process (S2304) will be explained with reference to Figure 83 (a). Figure 83 (a) is a flowchart showing the reserved image setting process. This reserved image setting process is a process for expanding image data that displays the reserved patterns and execution patterns for the number of reserved balls notified by the voice lamp control device 113 in the initial setting (default setting, i.e., a white "circle" pattern) on the third pattern display device 81 in conjunction with the processing of the number of reserved balls for display command.

The reserved image setting process (S2304) first references the number discrimination flag and expands reserved image data (S2341) to display the reserved and execution patterns for the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag that is set to ON in the cockpit display area Db (see Figure 4(a)) of the third pattern display device 81. The task process (see S2024 in Figure 72(b)) uses this expanded reserved image data to identify the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the reserved image, and determines various parameters required for drawing each sprite, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle.

Then, the new reserved ball count command flag is set to OFF (S2342), this reserved image setting process (S2304) is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process (see Figure 81).

Returning to Figure 81, the explanation continues. After the reserved image setting process (S2304), or in the process of S2303, if the new reserved ball count command flag is not on (S2303: No), it is then determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S2305). If the result of the determination is that the error occurrence flag is on (S2305: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S2306).

Here, the warning image setting process (S2306) will be described in detail with reference to Figure 83 (b). Figure 83 (b) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is used to develop image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81.

The warning image setting process (S2306) first references the error discrimination flags and develops warning image data that causes the third pattern display device 81 to display error warning images corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to ON (S2351). The task process (see S2024 in Figure 72 (b)) uses this developed warning image data to identify the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image, and determines various parameters required for drawing each sprite, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle.

Then, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2352), the warning image setting process (S2306) ends, and the process returns to the display setting process (see Figure 81).

Returning to Figure 81, the explanation continues. After the warning image setting process (S2306), or if it is determined in the process of S2305 that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (S2305: No), then the pointer update process is executed (S2307).

Now, with reference to Figure 84, the details of the pointer update process (S2307) will be explained. Figure 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process updates the pointer 233e, which specifies the address from which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information for the image data to be transferred from the display data table 232a1, additional data table 232a2, and transfer data table 232a3 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, additional data table buffer 233c, and transfer data table buffer 233d, respectively.

In this pointer update process (S2307), pointer 233e is first incremented by 1 (S2361). That is, pointer 233e is updated so that, in principle, it is incremented by 1 each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 72(b)) is executed. Also, as described above, the various data tables 232a1-232a3 contain "Start" information at address "0000H," with the actual data specified at addresses "0001H" and beyond. If the value of pointer 233e is initialized to "0" when display data table 232a1 is stored in display data table buffer 233b, this pointer update process updates the value to "1," allowing actual data to be read from each of data tables 232a1-232a3, starting from address "0001H."

After updating the value of pointer 233e through processing in S2361, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233e in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b is "End" information (S2362). If the result is "End" information (S2362: Yes), this means that the pointer 233e has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is the demo display data table 232a1 or the restart display data table 232a1 (S2363). If it is the demo display data table 232a1 or the restart display data table 232a1 (S2363: Yes), the pointer 233e is set to "1" (S2364). Furthermore, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table 232a1 or the restart display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b is set in the timing counter 233g (S2365), and processing proceeds to S2367. As a result, in the display setting process (see FIG. 81), the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demo display data table 232a1 or the restart display data table 232a1, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display demo or restart performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2363 that the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is neither the demo display data table 232a1 nor the restart display data table 232a1 (S2363: No), the value of the pointer 233e is decremented by 1 (S2366), and processing proceeds to S2367. As a result, in the display setting processing (see FIG. 81), if a display data table 232a1 other than the demo display data table 232a1 or the restart display data table 232a1, such as the variable display data table 232a1 or the final display data table 232a1, is set in the display data table buffer 233b, the drawing contents of the previous address containing the "End" information are always displayed, so that the third pattern display device 81 can be displayed in a stopped state at the last image specified in that display data table 232a1.

Note that in the processing of S2362, if it is determined that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 233e after updating in the processing of S2361 in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b is not "End" information (S2362: No), the processing of S2363 to S2366 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2367.

In the processing of S2367, it is determined whether the confirmation command flag is on (S2367). If the confirmation command flag is not on but off (S2367: No), the pointer update processing (S2307) is terminated and the process returns to the display setting processing (see FIG. 81). On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2367: Yes), this means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113. Therefore, the value of the pointer 233e is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the "End" information is stored in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2368). Then, the value of the time counter 233g is set to "1" (S2369), the pointer update processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting processing. As a result, when a confirmation command is received, the display setting processing can develop the drawing content specified at the end of the set display data table 232a1 and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

Returning to Figure 81, the explanation continues. After the pointer update process (S2307), the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233e updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table 232a1 and additional data table 232a2 set in the display data table buffer 233b and additional data table buffer 233c (S2308). In task processing (see S2024 in Figure 72(b)), the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are identified based on the drawing contents expanded in the S2308 process, along with the previously expanded pending image and warning image, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

In the first embodiment, when the display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and the drawing of the same sprite is set at the address indicated by the pointer 233e, the drawing list is generated with priority given to the drawing content indicated by the additional data table 232a2. As a result, by redefining the drawing content of the sprite specified in the display data table 232a1 with the additional data table 232a2, the drawing content of the display data table 232a1 can be changed to the drawing content of the additional data table 232a2 and displayed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the additional data table buffer 233c is configured to be able to store multiple additional data tables 232a2. However, when multiple additional data tables 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c and the same sprite is set to be drawn at the address indicated by the pointer 233e, the drawing list is generated by giving priority to the drawing content indicated by the most recently stored additional data table 232a2. In other words, the storage order of the additional data tables 232a2 is stored, and the drawing content of the most recent additional data table 232a2 can be displayed with priority, so that if the display content is changed and then further changed, it can be displayed accurately.

If Null data is entered in the additional data table 232a2, subsequent processing is performed assuming that no sprites exist to be added. Furthermore, when the additional data table buffer 233c is cleared with Null data, Null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233c.

Next, the value of the time counter 233g is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233g after decrement is equal to or less than "0" (S2310). If the value of the time counter 233g is not equal to or less than "0", that is, if it is equal to or greater than "1" (S2310: No), the display setting process (S2023) is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see Figure 72 (b)).

On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233g is "0" or less in the processing of S2310 (S2310: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) should be sent from the main control unit 110 via the audio lamp control unit 113 in conjunction with the end of that performance, so in the subsequent processing of S2311, it is checked whether the confirmation command flag is on (S2311).

If the determination result in S2311 is that the confirmation command flag is on (S2311: Yes), this means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and the contents of the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d are cleared by writing null data to each of them (S2312).

Next, the variable effect currently being executed ends, so the contents set for that variable effect are cleared; that is, the small win right-hit notification command flag and the back image change flag are turned off (S2313), and the character pattern memory 233j, red character flag 233k, and character change discrimination flag are turned off (S2314). This configuration allows the contents set for that variable effect to be initialized each time a variable effect ends, preventing problems such as the contents of the character display Se1 set in the previous variable effect appearing in the next variable effect.

Next, time data corresponding to the duration of the final display is set in the timing counter 233g (S2315), and the value of the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2316). The final command flag is then set to OFF (S2317), and the final display flag, which is in the "0" state (OFF state) and indicates that the final display is being displayed, is set to ON (i.e., "1") (S2318). The contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are then copied directly to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag stored in the work RAM 233 (S2319), and the display setting process (S2023) is terminated, with the process returning to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)).

As a result, when the variable display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 in conjunction with the end of the effect, the drawing content can be set so that the confirmation display effect of the stopped pattern in the variable effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, simply by changing the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table 232a1, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect. Furthermore, compared to the conventional method of changing the display content by launching a separate program, the program does not become complex and bloated, and therefore does not place a heavy load on the MPU 231. Therefore, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the processing of S2319 is used to identify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous variable performance, and the variable display data table 232a1 contains symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation based on the display data table 232a1.

Therefore, in the task processing (see S2024 in Figure 72 (b)), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time has elapsed, the stopping pattern of the previous fluctuation performance is identified from the previous stopping pattern discrimination flag set by S2319, and the third pattern to be actually displayed is identified by adding the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting process to the identified stopping pattern. As a result, the fluctuation performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous fluctuation performance.

On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is not on but off in the processing of S2311 (S2311: No), the processing proceeds to processing of S2320 shown in FIG. 82, where it is determined whether the confirmation display flag is on (S2320). If the confirmation display flag is on (S2320: Yes), the determination in processing of S2310 that the value of the timing counter 233g is "0" or less (S2310: Yes) means that the confirmation display effect has ended. Therefore, after setting the confirmation display flag to off (S2321), the demo display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2322), and then time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display is set in the timing counter 233g (S2323). Then, the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2324), the demo display flag is set to ON, indicating that a demo effect is being performed when in the ON state (S2325), the process proceeds to FIG. 81, this display setting process (S2023) ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72 (b)).

This allows the drawing content to be set so that if a display variable pattern command indicating the start of the next variable effect or a display demo effect command indicating the start of a demo effect is not received before the final display effect ends, a demo effect will automatically be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Note that if the processing of S2320 determines that the confirmation display flag is on, i.e., the branching condition of Yes at S2320 is met, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed. In this case, the processing of S2312 has cleared the contents of both the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d. Therefore, the processing of S2322 omits the process of clearing these data table buffers 233c and 233d. This reduces the processing load on the MPU 231.

On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off in the processing of S2320 (S2320: No), then it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S2326). If the demo display flag is on (S2326: Yes), the determination in the processing of S2310 that the value of the timing counter 233g is "0" or less (S2310: Yes) means that the demo effect has ended. Therefore, processing proceeds to FIG. 81, this display setting processing (S2023) is terminated, and processing returns to the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 72(b)). In this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect will start again, as described above, by the pointer update processing (S2307) executed in the display setting processing of the next V interrupt processing. Therefore, the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

On the other hand, if the demo display flag is not on but off in the processing of S2326 (S2326: No), the determination in the processing of S2310 that the value of the timing counter 233g is "0" or less (S2310: Yes) means that the variable effect has ended. Therefore, if a confirmation command is not received within a predetermined time after the variable effect has ended, in order to start the restart effect, the restart timer counter, which was initialized to "0," is incremented by 1 in conjunction with the variable display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variable effect being set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2327), and it is determined whether the value of the restart timer counter after the increment has reached a predetermined value (e.g., "100") (S2328).

If the restart timer counter is not at the predetermined value (S2328: No), processing proceeds to FIG. 81, the display setting processing (see FIG. 81) is terminated, and processing returns to the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 72(b)). On the other hand, if the restart timer counter is at the predetermined value (S2328: Yes), the restart display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d, clearing their contents (S2329). Then, time data corresponding to the duration of the restart effect is set in the timing counter 233g (S2330), and the value of the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2331). Processing then proceeds to FIG. 81, the display setting processing (S2023) is terminated, and processing returns to the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 72(b)).

As a result, if the display control device 114 does not receive a confirmation command (display confirmation command) sent from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 even after a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol was displayed as stopped upon the end of the variable effect, the display control device 114 can set the drawing content so that a restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the restart effect is an effect in which an image of the third symbol vibrating is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when a player visually confirms that the third symbol is displayed as vibrating after the variable third symbol is displayed as stopped on the third symbol display device 81, the player can recognize that the stopped symbol has not been confirmed at that point.

After the final drawing content specified by the restart display data table 232a1 is displayed, the above-mentioned pointer update process (S2307) causes the drawing content to be displayed again from the beginning of the restart display data table 232a1. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received.

In addition, the simple display setting process (S2029 in FIG. 72(b)), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233a is on during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)), is similar to the display setting process (S2023). However, in the simple display setting process, if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control unit 110 via the audio lamp control unit 113 after the duration of the variable effect using the power-on variable image 283 has ended, a process is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233b a display data table 232a1 that specifies the static display of one image (either FIG. 30(b) or FIG. 30(c)) of the power-on variable image 283 corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time.

Furthermore, after the time for the power-on variable image 283 to perform the variable effect has ended, if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should have been received from the main control unit 110 via the audio lamp control unit 113 is not received, a process is performed in which the display data table 232a1, which specifies restarting the power-on variable image 283 variable effect, is set in the display data table buffer 233b.

Next, with reference to Figures 85 to 87, we will explain in detail the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2025), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see Figure 72 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. First, Figure 85 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process (S2025), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233a is on (S2401). If the simple image display flag 233a is on (S2401: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S2402), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see Figure 72 (b)). This sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 85 (b).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if the simple image display flag 233a is not on, i.e., is off (S2401: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S2403), this transfer setting process (S2025) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see Figure 72 (b)). As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 86 and 87.

Now, with reference to Figure 85(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (S2402), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2025) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 85(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S2402).

This resident image transfer setting process (S2402) first determines whether an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S2411). If a transfer instruction has been sent (S2411: Yes), it then determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on that transfer instruction has been completed (S2412). In this S2412 process, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 237, if a transfer completion signal indicating the completion of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. Then, in S2412, if it is determined that the transfer process has not been completed (S2412: No), image transfer processing is still being performed by the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process (S2402) is terminated and the process returns to the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2412 that the transfer processing has ended (S2412: Yes), the processing proceeds to S2413. Also, if in the processing of S2411 an instruction to transfer the untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S2411: No), the processing proceeds to S2413.

In the processing of S2413, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S2413), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S2413: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S2414), the resident image transfer setting processing (S2402) is terminated, and the processing returns to the transfer setting processing (see Figure 85 (a)).

As a result, the drawing list (see Figure 36) sent to the image controller 237 during the drawing process will include transfer data information for untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information listed in the drawing list.

The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, information about the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area in resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred should be stored). The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address in the specified resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is complete, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

On the other hand, if the result of processing S2413 is that all resident target image data has been transferred (S2413: Yes), the simple image display flag 233a is set to OFF (S2415), the resident image transfer setting process (S2402) is terminated, and the process returns to the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)). As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 72(b)), the command determination processing (see FIGS. 73 to 80) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 81 to 84) are executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S2028 in FIG. 73(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S2029 in FIG. 72(b)). Therefore, the normal image drawing is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see Figures 86 and 87) (see S2401: No in Figure 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process (S2402), the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, except for the power-on main image 282 and power-on variable image 283 that have already been transferred during the main process (see FIG. 71). The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 will remain resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to resident video RAM 235, MPU 231 can use the image data resident in resident video RAM 235 to perform image drawing processing in image controller 237. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from character ROM 234, which is made up of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. As a result, the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as background images, third symbols, character symbols, error messages, cockpit images, and secondary display images, as well as image data of reserved symbols and character symbols that are to be displayed immediately after their display is determined by the main control unit 110, audio lamp control unit 113, display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND-type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time until an image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to Figures 86 and 87, we will explain the normal image transfer setting process (S2403), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2025) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figures 86 and 87 are flowcharts showing this normal image transfer setting process (S2403).

In this normal image transfer setting process (S2403), first, the information stored at the address indicated by the pointer 233e updated by the pointer update process (S2307) of the previously executed display setting process (see Figure 81) is obtained from the transfer data table 232a3 set in the transfer data table buffer 233d (S2421).

Then, it determines whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S2422), and if it is (S2422: Yes), it extracts from the transfer data information the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, as well as the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and stores these in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S2423). Furthermore, it sets the transfer start flag, which indicates that image data exists and should be transferred (S2424), to ON, and proceeds to processing at S2425.

On the other hand, if the acquired information in S2422 is not transfer data information but null data (S2422: No), S2423 and S2424 are skipped and processing proceeds to S2425.

In S2425, detailed image transfer processing is executed to terminate the image transfer (S2425), and the normal image transfer setting processing (S2403) is terminated, returning to the transfer setting processing (see Figure 85 (a)).

Now, with reference to Figure 87, we will explain the image transfer detail process (S2425), which is one process of the normal image transfer setting process (S2403) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 87 is a flowchart showing this image transfer detail process (S2425).

In this image transfer detail process (S2425), it is first determined whether an image data transfer instruction was set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S2441). If a transfer instruction was set (S2441: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on that transfer instruction has completed (S2442).

In this S2442 process, after an image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. If it is determined through S2442 that the transfer process has not ended (S2442: No), image transfer processing is still being performed in the image controller 237, so the image transfer detail process (S2425) ends and the process returns to the normal image transfer setting process (see Figure 86). On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S2442: Yes), the process proceeds to S2443. Also, if the result of S2441 shows that an image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process ended (S2441: No), the process proceeds to S2443.

In the S2443 process, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on (S2443). If the transfer start flag is on (S2443: Yes), image data exists that should be transferred, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S2444). The image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the S2423 process of the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) is set as the image to be transferred, and the process proceeds to S2454. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is off (S2443: No), it is then determined whether the small win right-hit notification command flag is on (S2445).

If the small win right hit notification command flag is on (S2445: Yes), this means that the presentation command for the right hit notification in the event of a small win is processed and the additional data table 232a2 for right hit notification has been set in the additional data table buffer 233c.Therefore, after setting the small win right hit notification command flag to off (S2446), the starting address (source starting address) and ending address (source ending address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data for the small win right hit image corresponding to the small win right hit notification discrimination flag that is in the on state, among the small win right hit notification discrimination flags provided for each small win right hit image type, are stored, and the starting address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is identified (S2447).The image data indicated by this identified various information is designated as the image to be transferred, and processing proceeds to S2454. In addition, in S2447, if the image data of a small win right hit image corresponding to an ON small win right hit notification discrimination flag is selected as the image to be transferred, all ON small win right hit notification discrimination flags are set to OFF.

If the small win right-hit notification command flag is not on but off (S2445: No) in the processing of S2445, it is then determined whether the rear image command flag is on (S2448). If the rear image command flag is on (S2448: Yes), this indicates a change of the rear image. Therefore, the rear image command flag is set to off (S2449). Then, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data for the rear image corresponding to the on rear image discrimination flag, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type, is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are identified (S2450). The image data indicated by this identified information is designated as the image to be transferred, and processing proceeds to S2454.

Note that if the rear image discrimination flag that is in the ON state is for rear A, all corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore there is no image data to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, in the processing of S2448, if the rear image discrimination flag that is in the ON state is for rear A, the rear image command flag is considered to be OFF (S2448: No), and processing proceeds to S2451.

If the background image command flag is not on but off in the processing of S2448 (S2448: No), then it is determined whether the character change command flag is on or not (S2451). If the character change command flag is off (S2451: No), this image transfer detail processing (S2425) is terminated and the processing returns to the normal image transfer setting processing (see Figure 87).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2451, if the character change command flag is on (S2451: Yes), this means that the character design (character display Se1 when a reach occurs) will be changed. Therefore, after setting the character change command flag to off (S2452), the starting address (source starting address) and ending address (source ending address) of the character ROM 234 where image data of the character design corresponding to the character change discrimination flag that is in the on state, among the character change discrimination flags provided for each character change image type, are stored, and the starting address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are identified (S2453), and the image data indicated by this identified various information is designated as the image to be transferred, and processing proceeds to S2454.

In S2454, it is determined whether the image to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S2454). This determination in S2454 is made by referencing the stored image determination flag 233h. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite selected as the image to be transferred is read from the stored image determination flag 233h, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236; if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of the processing of S2454 is that the image to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S2454: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, so the image transfer detail processing (S2425) ends and processing returns to the normal image transfer setting processing (see Figure 87). This prevents unnecessary transfers from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S2454 is that the image to be transferred is not stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S2454: No), a transfer instruction for the image to be transferred is set (S2455). As a result, the transfer data information for the image to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 during the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information listed in the drawing list.

The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address in the specified video RAM. When the transfer is complete, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After processing S2455, the stored image discrimination flag 233h is updated (S2456), this image transfer detailed processing (S2425) is terminated, and processing returns to the normal image transfer setting processing (see Figure 87). As described above, the stored image discrimination flag 233h is updated by setting the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image to be transferred to "on," and also by setting the storage status corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the sprite to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process (S2403), processing for a character-based command, etc. is executed during the previously executed command determination process (see FIG. 73), and if the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the character-changed image indicated by that character-based command is set in the additional data table buffer 233c, the image data of the character-changed image used in that additional data table 232a2 can be transferred without delay from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Furthermore, if the rear image is changed based on the reception of a rear image change command during the previously executed command determination process (see Figure 73), image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this embodiment, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) from the audio lamp control device 113, the display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and at the same time, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to that display data table 232a1 is set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in that display data table 232a1 can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

Here, transfer data table 232a3 specifies transfer data information for image data to be transferred at a specified address so that image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in image storage area 236a by the time drawing of that specified sprite begins in accordance with display data table 232a1. Therefore, by transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in transfer data table 232a3, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with display data table 232a1, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing that sprite can be sure to be stored in image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This allows the corresponding effects to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table 232a1. Furthermore, by writing to the transfer data table 232a3, it is possible to easily and reliably transfer only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table 232a3 also specifies transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easier to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be simplified while also allowing for detailed control of the transfer of image data. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load associated with the transfer.

Next, with reference to Figure 88, we will explain in detail the drawing process (S2026) as the above-mentioned update process, which is one process of the V interrupt process (see Figure 72 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 88 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

During the drawing process (S2026), a drawing list as shown in Figure 36 is generated (S2501) from the types of sprites that make up one frame determined during task processing (see S2024 in Figure 72(b)), the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instructions set during the transfer setting process (S2025 in Figure 72(b)).

In other words, in S2501, the processing determines, for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the sprite's image data is stored, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined by task processing. The processing then associates the determined storage RAM type and address with the parameters required for that sprite, as determined by task processing. The sprites are then sorted in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back in one frame's image to the sprite that should be placed furthest foreground. A drawing list is then generated by describing, in the sorted sprite order, the type and address of the storage RAM where the sprite's image data is stored, and the parameters required to draw the sprite, as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a variable effect (variable pattern) is executed on the third pattern display device 81, the drawing list can be updated by executing a drawing process (S2026) as an update process based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition (i.e., the passage of 20 milliseconds, which is the drawing period for one frame).

For example, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol results in a jackpot and the dynamic display variation pattern is in progress, the update is completed and the drawing process is executed until the end of the variation pattern, and a confirmation command is executed, ending the dynamic display that results in a jackpot and creating a jackpot gaming state with a bonus awarded.

In addition, when one variation effect is executed, the number of times the drawing list is updated, i.e., the variation pattern, is determined by lottery from among the multiple variation patterns shown in the variation pattern table 202f (see Figures 16 and 17).

For example, when the dynamic display indicating a win in the "Time-saving A" jackpot type is determined by lottery from among the multiple variation patterns shown in Special Chart 1 Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f2 (see FIG. 16(b)), and is executed with the "E6: Normal Reach (Promotion Effect)" variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variable element + 'Slow-speed variation' variable element + 'Normal Reach' variable element + 'Re-variation' variable element + 'Promotion Effect' variable element," a variation effect is executed in which it is not possible to confirm that a jackpot (a jackpot based on a small win) has been won (i.e., a miss display) until the end of the "Normal Reach" variable element, and then an effect is executed in which the "jackpot display" appears until the end of the "Re-change" variable element, which is executed subsequently.

Furthermore, until the end of the variable element of the "re-variation" at the specified time, each symbol row may contain the same main symbol with a number such as "2" or "8" that cannot be confirmed as a win in the small prize type "Time Reduction C" (7-round time-reduction jackpot) (i.e., a win in the small prize type "Time Reduction B" (5-round time-reduction jackpot)). (Hereinafter, this refers to the same main symbol with a number that cannot be confirmed as a win in the small prize type "Time Reduction C" (7-round time-reduction jackpot) (i.e., a win in the small prize type "Time Reduction B" (5-round time-reduction jackpot)). Three symbols (sometimes referred to as "5R symbols") are stopped, and then, by the time the variable elements of the "promotion effect" that is executed at a specific time end, the 5R symbols change to a state where three of the same main symbols with the numbers "5" or "7" attached to each symbol row are stopped (i.e., main symbols that confirm that a small win type "time-saving C" (7-round time-saving jackpot) has been won (hereinafter, main symbols that confirm that a small win type "time-saving C" (7-round time-saving jackpot) has been won may be referred to as "7R symbols")).

In this way, the variable element of the "promotion effect" which is a limited effect that takes place between the end of the "re-variation" variable element and the end of the variation pattern, switches multiple times between the first notification state where three 5R main symbols are lined up in each symbol row, and the second notification state where three 7R main symbols are lined up in each symbol row, and an effect is given suggesting whether the reel will stop on the 5R symbol or the 7R symbol, and finally ends the variable pattern in progress with three 7R main symbols lined up in each symbol row.

When the control judgment result indicates that the small win type "Time Reduction C" is established and a big win game begins, the profit award condition is to win a prize ball as an award value by winning the variable winning device 65, which is in an open state.

In this way, in the case of a jackpot (jackpot based on a small win) variation as an updated state, if a jackpot result is announced, the system continues to be controlled to the jackpot state. In this jackpot state, the large prize entry port, which is closed except in the jackpot state and small win state, opens, providing the player with an opportunity to win a prize ball. Furthermore, a prize ball is generated when the ball enters the variable prize entry device 65 as a result of the player's ball firing operation.

The effect of switching the main symbol in the variable element of the "promotion effect" can be any effect as long as it is possible to switch the main symbol that was displayed up until the end of the variable element of the "re-variation" to a different main symbol in the variable element of the "promotion effect." For example, a 5R symbol and a 7R symbol may be displayed simultaneously, with one of the main symbols disappearing and the remaining main symbol ultimately becoming the main symbol of the jackpot. Alternatively, an effect may be displayed in which a 7R symbol that has entered from the outside attempts to push aside the 5R symbol displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and a display may be made to indicate whether or not the 7R symbol will ultimately be displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, an effect may be displayed in which the 5R symbol is cut apart each time the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, and a display may be made to indicate whether or not the 5R symbol can ultimately be destroyed to reveal the 7R symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, the 5R and 7R symbols were used as examples of "promotion effects," but any type of effect may be used as long as the game value suggested by the main symbol displayed before the start of the variable element of the "promotion effect" is switched to a main symbol with a higher game value. For example, the effect may be a switch to a jackpot round symbol other than 5R or 7R, a switch from a normal symbol to a time-saving symbol, a switch from a normal symbol to a probability variable symbol, a switch from a time-saving symbol to a probability variable symbol, or a switch to a symbol that transitions to a more advantageous game state, or a switch to a third symbol different from the 5R and 7R symbols.

Furthermore, during the execution of the variable pattern in the dynamic display of 1, once the main pattern, which is the 7R pattern, has switched to a state in which three of them are lined up in each symbol row by the end of the variable pattern, the main pattern, which is the 5R pattern, will not switch to a state in which three of them are lined up in each symbol row until at least a jackpot occurs and a prize ball is drawn.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "promotion effect" is described as switching from a 5R symbol to a 7R symbol. However, it is also possible to configure the "promotion effect" to execute a failure effect, where the result of executing the "promotion effect" is not to switch to a 7R symbol, but to end the variation effect with three 5R main symbols lined up. In this case, whether the 5R symbol or the 7R symbol appears, a right-hit notification effect is executed after the variation effect ends, and a suggestion on how to play is given to the player.

Furthermore, even if the dynamic display indicating a win in the "Time-saving B" small prize type ends and three 5R main symbols are lined up in each symbol row (first notification mode), if you do not play with the right hand and do not cause the ball to win in the variable prize-winning device 65, no prize ball (specific benefit) will be generated, and the ball will not pass through the specific area 65d, so the game will return to the state it was in when the small prize was won and a new variable display will be executed.

Next, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2025 in Figure 72 (b)), the start address (start address of the source) and end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, as well as the start address of the transfer destination (image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236), are added to the end of the drawing list as transfer data information.

As mentioned above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite. Therefore, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored, depending on the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233i are sent to the image controller (S2502). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233i is "0", the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233i is "1", the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order, starting with the sprite listed at the top of the drawing list, and then overwrites and expands them into the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the back of one frame of image generated by the drawing list, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foreground.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, as well as the start address of the transfer destination (image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information. The image data stored from the source start address to the source end address is then read out in order from character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a. Thereafter, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the destination start address in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236. The image data stored in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and the image is drawn in accordance with the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously displayed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits this image information to the third pattern display device 81 along with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image displayed in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being displayed, an image displayed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and display process to be performed simultaneously in parallel.

After S2502, the drawing process (S2026) updates the drawing target buffer flag 233i (S2503). Then, this drawing process ends and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see Figure 72 (b)). The drawing target buffer flag 233i is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value from "0" to "1" and vice versa. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent.

Here, the drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see Figure 72 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of image is completed.

As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing and display processes are executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b.

After that, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, it is possible to perform the drawing process of one frame's worth of image while continuously displaying one frame's worth of image in 20 millisecond increments.

Next, referring to Figure 89, we will explain the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Figure 89 is a diagram showing the progression of effects on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A."

In more detail, Figure 89(a) shows the state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period), the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops. Figure 89(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state in Figure 89(a).

Furthermore, Figure 89(c) shows a state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops. Figure 89(d) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Figure 89(c).

Figure 89 (a) shows a state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal gaming state A" is at "58" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), a small win on special symbol 1 is won, the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops.

In Figure 89 (a), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. The value of the rescue counter 203r is "58", indicating that the variable effect is occurring during the jackpot priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in Figure 28.

Furthermore, the third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special symbol 1 small jackpot has been won. As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that, during the jackpot priority notification period, the right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won gives the player a higher expected number of balls to win than the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 89(a), the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row of the third symbol 81b to suggest that the player will play a right-hand hit in the small jackpot game that will be executed subsequently, thereby generating a jackpot game.

Next, Figure 89(b) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is currently being performed, following the state in Figure 89(a). A main display right-hit instruction 89 is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, suggesting that the player perform a right-hit game during the small win game.

In addition, the middle right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81c that reads "Hit right," and the bottom right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81d that reads "Aim for V," both of which are messages that suggest right-hand play. Furthermore, on the left side of the main display area Dm, a character design 81e of a boy facing to the right and raising his hand is displayed, which also suggests right-hand play.

Next, Figure 89 (c) shows the state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal gaming state A" is at "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops.

In Figure 89 (c), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. The value of the rescue counter 203r is "637", indicating that this is a variable effect during the rescue priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in Figure 28.

Furthermore, the third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special symbol 1 small jackpot has been won. As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that during the rescue priority notification period, the expected value of balls that a player can win is higher when playing left-handed when a small jackpot is won than when playing right-handed when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 89(c), to suggest that the expected value of balls that can be won will be higher if the right-hand play is not performed and a big win play is not generated in the small win game that will be executed subsequently, the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row on the left and right of the third symbol 81b, and the main symbol with the words "challenge symbol" written on it is stopped in the central symbol row.

Next, Figure 89(d) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed, following the state in Figure 89(c).

A text message 81f is displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm saying "The number of times the rescue condition will be met will soon be reached," which literally suggests that by rotating the dynamic display of the special symbol several times, the number of times the rescue condition will be met will be reached and the game will transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state."

In addition, a text message 81g asking "Right hit?" is displayed in the middle right part of the main display area Dm, which, compared to the text message 81c in Figure 89(b), gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

Furthermore, in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, a text message 81h is displayed that reads "Get a V and you'll win the jackpot." Compared to the text message 81d in Figure 89(b), this text message also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, a character design 81i of a boy looking down is displayed in the left part of the main display area Dm, and compared to the character design 81e in Figure 89(b), this display also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. Furthermore, a main display right-hand play instruction 89 is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, suggesting that right-hand play will be used in the small win game.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol in "normal game state A" results in a win of the small win type "Time-saving B (small win A)" or the small win type "Time-saving B (small win A)" (i.e., special symbol 1 small win), comparing the two events of executing a right-hand hit during the small win game to cause the ball to pass through the specific area 65d and generate a big win game, and executing the dynamic display of the special symbol the number of times that the rescue condition is met and transitioning to the "normal symbol low-probability time-shortened state," the expected value of the balls that the player can win is higher in the latter case of transitioning to the "normal symbol low-probability time-shortened state."

In addition, when a small win on Special Symbol 1 is won during "Normal Game State A," the right-hit notification effect that is executed during the small win opening determines the number of times the special symbol is executed when the small win is won (the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met) and various other conditions (the state of the rescue set flag 203s, the value of the rescue counter 203r), and the content of the right-hit notification effect is configured to differ depending on whether the expected value of balls is higher when a small win is won using the right-hit play method, or whether the expected value of balls is higher when a small win is won using the left-hit play method.

By configuring it in this way, when a small win on Special Chart 1 is won in "Normal Game State A," the player can choose between two play methods: a right-hand play method when a small win is won, or a left-hand play method when a small win is won.

As a result, if a player wins a small prize on Special Chart 1 in "normal game state A," by checking the content of the right-hit notification effect that is executed during the opening time of the small prize game, it is possible to determine whether selecting the right-hit play method when a small prize is won or the left-hit play method when a small prize is won will result in a higher average number of balls won. This gives the player a choice of play methods, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Second Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figures 90 to 98. The following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will focus on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the same components and processes as those in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won during "normal game state A," a break-even number is set to determine whether a right-hitting play method when a small win is won will result in a higher expected value of balls dispensed, or whether a left-hitting play method when a small win is won will result in a higher expected value of balls dispensed.The break-even number is compared with the number of times the special symbol is executed when a small win is won, and the content of the right-hitting notification effect when a small win is won is changed.

However, when actually playing pachinko machine 10 at an amusement hall, if you win a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 around this break-even point, the difference in expected ball payout value between playing with the right hand when you win a small jackpot and playing with the left hand when you win a small jackpot is minimal, and this may change depending on the playing situation, so further improvement in the content of the suggestions is required.

Specifically, for example, the winning rate for each winning slot may change depending on the condition of the nails and the player's playing method (such as how they hit the ball), and it is also possible that some players may decide on their playing method based on their previous playing results with the pachinko machine 10 or their own previous playing results.

The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment was invented in consideration of the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide optimal suggestions regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming condition occurs, and increase the player's interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, an ambiguous notification period is set up during the predetermined period before switching from the jackpot priority notification period to the rescue priority notification period, and when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won during this ambiguous notification period, the right-hit notification effect suggests that there is little difference between the right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won and the left-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won, with the aim of providing a gaming machine in which the player can decide the playing method by their own judgment.

To achieve this objective, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in the gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a notification control means for issuing a notification when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area. and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is met based on a specific game operation by the player if a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means. The notification control means includes switching means for, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifying the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a specific timing before a specific period before the specific information reaches the specified updated state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specified timing. The gaming machine includes third display execution means for displaying a third display mode that displays the first notification mode and the second notification mode between the specific timing and the specific timing.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine comprises an "ejection device" as "launching means," a "start detection area" as "starting ball entry area," a "result notification device" as "display means," a "movable device" as "variable ball entry means," "game conditions" as "update conditions," "game information" as "specific information," an "update process" as "update means," an "update state" as "specific game state," an "update end state" as "predetermined update state," an "awarded benefit" as "predetermined benefit state," a "notification mode" as "alert mode," a "display control" as "alert control means," a "discrimination control" as "determination means," a "control judgment result" as "specific judgment result," an "benefit awarding condition" as "predetermined game condition," an "award value" as "specific benefit," a "benefit awarding control" as "benefit generating means," a "predetermined time" as "predetermined timing," and a "specific time" as "specific timing."

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that it can land in the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

Furthermore, the specified benefit state may be anything that can confer some kind of benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state", the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, the light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update status of the specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable entry device (large entry port), small entry port, regular electric entry port, non-electric entry port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specified gaming condition, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state" as a specific gaming state, the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, the light emission control of a specific emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the specific information is information that is updated to new content when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and is capable of identifying a predetermined period based on the update status, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be the value of a counter stored in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern began, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern stopped, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, etc. These include the remaining number of times the display will be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening, the time after which the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening stops, the number of wins when one of the openings such as the big prize opening opens, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern on the display means, the time from the start of the startup process of the gaming machine, the setting values of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall staff that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the updating means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or may be a hardware circuit update.

The determination means may be any means that performs a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area, such as starting winning processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state that indicates that the result of updating specific information by the update means has resulted in a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time period passing, a specified period passing, the use of all of a predetermined series of data, the detection of a ball entering a specified area, or the detection of a frame button input by the player.

The starting ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to change and be displayed when a gaming ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 starting area, a special ball 2 starting area, or a regular ball starting area.

Furthermore, the display means may be any device capable of announcing the lottery results for a specified symbol, such as a third symbol display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying information on each display device.

Furthermore, a specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means and becomes a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, or game states in which the update means does not operate. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated through so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state," a "time-shortened state," the state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined jackpot occurs, the state from when the power is turned on until the predetermined jackpot ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, the state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that results in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, the state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of a special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry slot which will start the jackpot game, a state where the dynamic display of a special symbol is not being executed and the ball is waiting to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to press a frame button while the dynamic display of a special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a losing prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, a dynamic display of a special pattern corresponding to a drop lottery, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern is executed reaches a specific number of times, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a prize, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a losing prize, a transition to a specific game state, etc.

Furthermore, the predetermined game conditions may be conditions that are met when a player performs a predetermined game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a predetermined area, a predetermined number of fired game balls entering a predetermined area, a fired game ball not entering a predetermined area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a predetermined area and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, a player operating an effect button, a lottery being held when a player operates an effect button and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being less than a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the dynamic display of the next special pattern can be started to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes passing, an instruction to execute various processes being issued, and a command to execute various processes being issued.

Furthermore, the "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update status of specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value exceeds a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events; for example, by varying the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their color, their display area, their display density, their display time, and the number of times they are displayed, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the firing mode, indications of whether firing is possible, indications of whether play is possible, indications of the timing of operation execution on the operating means, indications of the game status, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, distinctions between probability variable and normal patterns, distinctions between time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and distinctions between probability variable and time-saving patterns.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small jackpot on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A," if the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed is less than the break-even number, the machine determines that the average number of balls that the player can win using the right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won is greater, and executes a jackpot priority notification effect in the right-hit notification effect. Furthermore, if the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed is equal to or greater than the break-even number, the machine determines that the average number of balls that the player can win using the left-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won is greater, and executes a rescue priority notification effect in the right-hit notification effect.

However, since the difference in the average number of balls won between the two methods (right-handed playing when a small jackpot is won and left-handed playing when a small jackpot is won) around the break-even point is minimal (for example, cases No. 2 and No. 3 in Figure 27), the difference is so small that it is difficult to say that either playing method will clearly result in a higher average number of balls won.

Furthermore, there may be slight individual differences between each pachinko machine 10 installed in a hall due to the condition of the game pins and ball launch unit 112a, etc., and since players' playing methods are not the same, if these factors cause the starting ball entry rate or the ball entry rate into the large prize slot to differ from the rate at the time of manufacture, the actual number of break-even times at the time of play may differ from the break-even number at the time of manufacture (i.e., "543 times"). For this reason, the difference in the average number of balls won between the two methods (right-handed playing when a small jackpot is won and left-handed playing when a small jackpot is won) around the break-even number may become even less clear.

Furthermore, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the period until the number of times the rescue condition is met in "normal game state A" is composed of only two periods, the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period, and if a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won, it is determined which of the two periods it falls into and one of the two right-hit notification effects is executed, the difference in the average number of balls won between the two (right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won and left-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won) is slight near the break-even number, so some players may have doubts about the content of the right-hit notification effect.

For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment has an ambiguous notification period, which is a period of time within a range of 20 spins before and after the break-even number in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, during which there is no clear difference regardless of which playing method is selected (hereinafter, the period between the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period, which is 20 spins before and after the number of special symbol executions in which the average number of balls won when a small jackpot is won is approximately the same for the right-hitting playing method and the left-hitting playing method, may be referred to as the "ambiguous notification period". In addition, the right-hitting notification effect when a small jackpot is won on special symbol 1 during the ambiguous notification period may be referred to as the "ambiguous notification effect").

Then, in the right-hit notification display when a special symbol 1 small win is won as a result of control judgment during the ambiguous notification period, the third notification mode is configured to reuse and display both the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the jackpot priority notification display (see Figure 89 (b)) and the rescue priority notification display (see Figure 89 (d)). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce storage capacity and maintain the quality of the image data.

In addition, depending on the player, they can choose which playing style to use based on their own "winning streak" that day, the condition of the pachinko machine 10 they are playing, etc., which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

First, referring to Figure 90, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice and lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. Figure 90 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice and lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. The differences between the block diagram of the first embodiment and the block diagram of the second embodiment are that the break-even count storage area 223k has been deleted from the RAM 223, the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m has been added, and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n has been added.

The jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m is one of the criteria for determining the content of the right-hit notification effect that is performed when a special symbol 1 small jackpot is won in "normal gaming state A," and is an area that stores the number of rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol that marks the boundary between the jackpot priority notification period and the ambiguous notification period.

This jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m is set to "524," the number of rotations that marks the boundary between the jackpot priority notification period and the ambiguous notification period, during the RAM initial value setting process that occurs during the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1022 in Figure 92).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won in "normal gaming state A," the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m is referenced (see S1515 in FIG. 95), compared with the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i, and a command for the right-hit notification effect to be executed in the right-hit notification effect for that small jackpot is set (see S1506, S1508, or S1509 in FIG. 70).

The ambiguous notification count storage area 223n is one of the criteria for determining the content of the right-hit notification effect that is performed when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A," and is an area that stores the number of rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol that marks the boundary between the ambiguous notification period and the rescue priority notification period.

This ambiguous notification count storage area 223m is set to "564," the rotation count that marks the boundary between the ambiguous notification period and the relief priority notification period, during the RAM initial value setting process during the startup process of the voice and lamp control device 113 (see S1023 in Figure 92).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a special chart 1 small win is won in "normal game state A," this ambiguous notification count storage area 223m is referenced (see S1507 in FIG. 95), compared with the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i, and a command for the right-hit notification effect to be executed in the right-hit notification effect for that small win is set (see S1506, S1508, or S1509 in FIG. 70).

Next, the break-even number table 222f of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 91. Figure 91 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the break-even number table 222f stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

The break-even count table 222f of the second embodiment is set based on the table of expected ball win counts for each state in Figure 27. The break-even count table 222f of the second embodiment also specifies the break-even count, jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period. When a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A," the audio lamp control device 113 compares the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won with the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period specified in the break-even count table 222f, and determines the content of the right-hit notification effect to be executed during the OP time of the small win game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A," the break-even count table 222f of the first embodiment is referenced, and if the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed is less than the break-even count, a jackpot priority notification effect (see Figure 89 (b)) is executed as the right-hit notification effect, and if the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed is equal to or greater than the break-even count, a rescue priority notification effect (see Figure 89 (d)) is executed as the right-hit notification effect.

However, since the difference in the average number of balls won between the two methods (right-handed playing when a small jackpot is won and left-handed playing when a small jackpot is won) around the break-even point is minimal (for example, cases No. 2 and No. 3 in Figure 28), the difference is so small that it is difficult to say that either playing method will clearly result in a higher average number of balls won.

In addition, there may be slight individual differences between each pachinko machine 10 installed in a hall due to the condition of the game pins and ball launch unit 112a, etc., and since players' playing methods are not the same, the difference in the average number of balls won between the two methods (right-handed playing when a small jackpot is won and left-handed playing when a small jackpot is won) around the break-even point may become even less clear.

Furthermore, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the period until the number of times the rescue condition is met in "normal game state A" is composed of only two periods, the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period, and if a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won, it is determined which of the two periods it falls into and one of the two right-hit notification effects is executed, the difference in the average number of balls won between the two (right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won and left-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won) is slight near the break-even number, so some players may have doubts about the content of the right-hit notification effect.

For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment provides an ambiguous notification period within a range of 20 spins before and after the break-even number, during which there is no clear difference regardless of which playing method is selected.

By configuring it in this way, depending on the player, they can choose which playing style to use based on their own "winning streak" on that day, the condition of the pachinko machine 10 they are playing, etc., thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In other words, the break-even number table 222f of the second embodiment defines three periods: a jackpot priority notification period from the time of RAM 203 initialization processing when the power is turned on or from the end of a jackpot game until the number of spins obtained by subtracting 20 from the break-even number; an ambiguous notification period covering 20 spins before and after the break-even number; and a rescue priority notification period from the number of spins obtained by adding 20 to the break-even number until the number of spins at which the rescue condition is met.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 91, in the break-even count table 222f of the second embodiment, the number of times the rescue condition is met is set to "800 spins," the break-even count is set to "543 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 523 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "524 to 563 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "564 to 800 spins."

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A," the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won is compared with the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period specified in the break-even count table 222f, and the content of the right-hit notification effect to be executed during the OP time of the small win game is determined.

In other words, if a small win on Special Chart 1 is won as a result of the control judgment during the jackpot priority notification period, a jackpot priority notification effect is displayed as the first notification mode (see Figure 97(b)); if a small win on Special Chart 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period, a rescue priority notification effect is displayed as the second notification mode (see Figure 97(d)); and if a small win on Special Chart 1 is won during the ambiguous notification period, an ambiguous notification effect is displayed as the third notification mode, consisting of a jackpot priority notification effect and a rescue priority notification effect (see Figure 98(b)).

Here, if the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the ambiguous notification effect (see Figure 98(b)) were composed of completely different image data from the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the jackpot priority notification effect (see Figure 97(b)) and the rescue priority notification effect (see Figure 97(d)), it would be necessary to store new image data for the ambiguous notification effect, which would put a strain on memory capacity and require other image data to be deleted or the quality of the image data (i.e., image quality) to be reduced, which could reduce the enjoyment of the pachinko machine 10.

However, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, by reusing the image data used in the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect as ambiguous notification effects, it is possible to reduce storage capacity and maintain the quality of the image data.

Next, with reference to Figures 92 to 95, the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment will be described. The main differences between the control processes in the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment and the control processes in the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment are that the process related to the break-even count storage area 223k has been removed, and that the process related to the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n has been added.

First, referring to Figure 92, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice and lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. Figure 92 is a flowchart showing the startup process of the second embodiment. The startup process of the first embodiment differs from the startup process of the second embodiment in that the processing related to the break-even count storage area 223k has been removed, and processing related to the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n has been added.

In the startup process of the second embodiment, once S1010 is completed, the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m is set to "524" (S1022), the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n is set to "564" (S1023), and the process proceeds to S1011.

Next, referring to FIG. 93, the display special symbol 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the display special symbol 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) in the second embodiment. The difference between the display special symbol 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) in the first embodiment and the display special symbol 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) in the second embodiment is that the step (S1381) that references the value in the break-even count storage area 223k has been changed to reference the value in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m.

In the second embodiment, in the display special symbol 1 stop type command setting process (S1381), if the result of the determination in S1374 is that the sub-rescue set flag 223j is not on, i.e., if the sub-rescue set flag 223j is off (S1374: No), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has never been reached since the previous jackpot (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power was turned on). Next, it is determined whether the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority count storage area 223m (S1381). If the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is not smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority count storage area 223m, i.e., if the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is equal to or greater than the value stored in the jackpot priority count storage area 223m (S1381: No), this means that a special symbol 1 small jackpot has been won during the ambiguous notification period or the rescue priority notification period (see FIG. 91), and processing proceeds to S1378.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1381, if the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority count storage area 223m (S1381: Yes), this means that a special chart 1 small jackpot has been won during the jackpot priority notification period (see Figure 91), and processing proceeds to S1377.

Next, referring to Figure 94, the winning effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio and lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. Figure 94 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing (S1105) in the second embodiment. The difference between the winning effect processing (S1105) in the first embodiment and the winning effect processing (S1105) in the second embodiment is that a process for resetting the values in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n has been added.

In the winning effect processing (S1105) of the second embodiment, if the result of the determination in S1401 is that a jackpot has been won (S1401: Yes), as an initialization process, the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m is reset to "524" and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n is reset to "564" (S1421), and processing proceeds to S1403.

Next, referring to Figure 95, the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won, executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. Figure 95 is a flowchart showing the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won in the second embodiment. The difference between the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won in the first embodiment and the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won in the second embodiment is that the process of referencing the break-even count storage area 223k has been removed, and a process of referencing the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n has been added.

In the second embodiment, in the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small jackpot is won, if the result of the determination in S1503 is that the sub-rescue set flag 223j is not on, i.e., if the sub-rescue set flag 223j is off (S1503: No), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has never been reached since the previous jackpot (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power was turned on), so it is next determined whether the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority count storage area 223m (S1515). If the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is not smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority count storage area 223m, i.e., the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is equal to or greater than the value stored in the jackpot priority count storage area 223m (S1515: No), processing proceeds to S1507.

In the processing of S1507, it is determined whether the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n (S1507). If the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is not smaller than the value stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n, that is, if the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is greater than or equal to the value stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n (S1507: No), a special chart 1 small win has been won during the rescue priority notification period (see Figure 91), so a rescue priority notification command for display is set (S1509) (see Figure 97 (d)), the right-hit notification effect processing (S1409) when this small win is won is terminated, and the process returns to the win effect processing (see Figure 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1507 that the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n (S1507: Yes), since a small win on special chart 1 has been won during the ambiguous notification period (see Figure 91), an ambiguous notification command for display is set (S1508) (see Figure 98 (b)), the right-hit notification effect processing (S1409) when this small win is won is terminated, and the process returns to the winning effect processing (see Figure 94).

Furthermore, in the processing of S1515, if it is determined that the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority count storage area 223m (S1515: Yes), since a special chart 1 small jackpot has been won during the jackpot priority notification period (see FIG. 91), a jackpot priority notification command for display is set (S1506) (see FIG. 97(b)), the right-hit notification effect processing (S1409) when this small jackpot is won is terminated, and the process returns to the win effect processing (see FIG. 94).

Next, with reference to Figure 96, the details of the hit-related command processing (S2111) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described. Figure 96 is a flowchart showing the hit-related command processing (S2111) in the second embodiment. The difference between the hit-related command processing (S2111) in the first embodiment and the hit-related command processing (S2111) in the second embodiment is that a process for determining the ambiguous notification command for display has been added.

In the second embodiment of the win-related command processing (S2111), if it is determined in S2181 that there is no jackpot priority notification command for display (S2181: No), it is then determined whether there is an ambiguous notification command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2182), and if there is an ambiguous notification command for display (S2182: Yes), processing proceeds to S2185. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2182 that there is no ambiguous notification command for display (S2182: No), processing proceeds to S2183.

Next, with reference to Figures 97 and 98, we will explain the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. Figures 97 and 98 are diagrams showing the progression of effects on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A."

In more detail, Figure 97(a) shows the state in which a small win on Special Chart 1 is won when the rescue counter 203r in "Normal Game State A" is at "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period), the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops. Figure 97(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state in Figure 97(a).

Furthermore, Figure 97(c) shows the state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops. Figure 97(d) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Figure 97(c).

Figure 98(a) shows the state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "551" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period), the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops. Figure 98(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state in Figure 98(a).

Note that Figures 97(a) and 97(b) have the same presentation as Figures 89(a) and 89(b), and are intended to show that the right-hit notification presentation executed when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the jackpot priority notification period in "normal gaming state A" is the same in the first and second embodiments, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Furthermore, Figures 97(c) and 97(d) have the same presentation as Figures 89(c) and 89(d), and are intended to show that the right-hit notification presentation executed when a special chart 1 small win is won during the rescue priority notification period in "normal gaming state A" is the same in the first and second embodiments, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Figure 98(a) shows the state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "551" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period), a small win on special symbol 1 is won, the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops.

In Figure 98 (a), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. The value of the rescue counter 203r is "551", which indicates that the break-even count table 222f shown in Figure 91 is showing a variable effect during the ambiguous notification period.

Furthermore, the third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that a special chart 1 small win has been won. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, if a special chart 1 small win is won during the ambiguous notification period, when the expected number of balls that a player can win is compared between playing with the right-hand hitting method when a small win is won and playing with the left-hand hitting method when a small win is won, the difference is so slight that it is difficult to say that the average number of balls won will be clearly higher by using one hitting method or the other.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 98(a), to suggest that there will be no significant difference in the expected value of balls that can be won in the small win game that will be played subsequently, regardless of whether or not right-hand play is played, the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row on the left and right of the third symbol 81b, and the main symbol with the words "challenge symbol" written on it is stopped in the central symbol row.

Next, Figure 98(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed, following the state in Figure 98(a).

In addition, a text message 81g asking "Right hit?" is displayed in the middle right part of the main display area Dm, which, compared to the text message 81c in Figure 97(b), gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

Furthermore, in the lower left portion of the main display area Dm, a text message 81h is displayed that reads "Get a V and you'll win the jackpot." Compared to the text message 81d in Figure 97(b), this text message also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, in the middle left portion of the main display area Dm, character design 81e is displayed, depicting a boy facing to the right and raising his hand, and further, in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, character design 81i is displayed, depicting a boy looking down. These two character designs 81e and 81i are the character designs displayed in the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect (see 81e in Figure 97(b) and 81i in Figure 97(d)).

In this way, by reusing the image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the ambiguous notification effect from the image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect, it is possible to reduce storage capacity and maintain the quality of the image data.

These two character designs are distinctively depicted in Figure 97(b), which strongly suggests that a jackpot will be generated by playing right-hand during a small jackpot in the jackpot priority notification period, and Figure 97(d), which suggests that a jackpot will not be generated by not playing right-hand during a small jackpot in the rescue priority notification period. By displaying these two character designs simultaneously, it is suggested that there is little difference between the two methods of play.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the ambiguous notification period is set as a period during which the difference between the expected value of balls dispensed when a small jackpot is won in the "normal gaming state A" using the right-hand play method and the expected value of balls dispensed when a small jackpot is won using the left-hand play method is small. Then, in the right-hand play notification effect when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1 during the ambiguous notification period, both the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect are displayed.

This configuration reduces storage capacity and maintains the quality of image data. Also, by displaying both the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect, it is possible to suggest that either method of play is acceptable.

As a result, depending on the player, they can choose which playing style to use based on their own "winning streak" that day, the condition of the pachinko machine 10 they are playing, etc., which can increase their interest in the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and achieves the same effects.

Third Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figure 99. The following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will focus on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won during "normal game state A," a break-even number is set to determine whether a right-hitting play method when a small win is won will result in a higher expected value of balls dispensed, or whether a left-hitting play method when a small win is won will result in a higher expected value of balls dispensed.The break-even number is compared with the number of times the special symbol is executed when a small win is won, and the content of the right-hitting notification effect when a small win is won is changed.

However, when actually playing pachinko machine 10 at an amusement hall, if you win a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 around this break-even point, the difference in expected ball payout value between playing with the right hand when you win a small jackpot and playing with the left hand when you win a small jackpot is minimal, and this may change depending on the playing situation, so further improvement in the content of the suggestions is required.

Specifically, for example, the winning rate for each winning slot may change depending on the condition of the nails and the player's playing method (such as how they hit the ball), and it is also possible that some players may decide on their playing method based on their previous playing results with the pachinko machine 10 or their own previous playing results.

The third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 was invented in consideration of the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide optimal suggestions regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming condition occurs, and increase the player's interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, an ambiguous notification period is set up during the predetermined period before switching from the jackpot priority notification period to the rescue priority notification period, and when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won during this ambiguous notification period, the right-hit notification presentation does not clearly indicate whether the right-hit method for a small jackpot win or the left-hit method for a small jackpot win should be performed, but rather the player himself/herself is allowed to decide the playing method, thereby providing a gaming machine.

To achieve this objective, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, a judgment means for executing a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area, and a control means for controlling the execution of a predetermined judgment based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting ball entry area. and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is met based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means. The notification control means, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifies the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and includes switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. The gaming machine also includes third display execution means for displaying a third display mode that displays the first notification mode and the second notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, and the third display mode includes a predetermined mode that switches between the first notification mode and the second notification mode multiple times.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine comprises an "ejection device" as "launching means," a "start detection area" as "starting ball entry area," a "result notification device" as "display means," a "movable device" as "variable ball entry means," "game conditions" as "update conditions," "game information" as "specific information," an "update process" as "update means," an "update state" as "specific game state," an "update end state" as "predetermined update state," an "awarded benefit" as "predetermined benefit state," a "notification mode" as "alert mode," a "display control" as "alert control means," a "discrimination control" as "determination means," a "control judgment result" as "specific judgment result," an "benefit awarding condition" as "predetermined game condition," an "award value" as "specific benefit," a "benefit awarding control" as "benefit generating means," a "predetermined time" as "predetermined timing," and a "specific time" as "specific timing."

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that it can land in the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

Furthermore, the specified benefit state may be anything that can confer some kind of benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state", the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, the light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update status of the specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable entry device (large entry port), small entry port, regular electric entry port, non-electric entry port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specified gaming condition, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state" as a specific gaming state, the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, the light emission control of a specific emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the specific information is information that is updated to new content when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and is capable of identifying a predetermined period based on the update status, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be the value of a counter stored in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern began, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern stopped, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, etc. These include the remaining number of times the display will be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening, the time after which the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening stops, the number of wins when one of the openings such as the big prize opening opens, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern on the display means, the time from the start of the startup process of the gaming machine, the setting values of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall staff that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the updating means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or may be a hardware circuit update.

The determination means may be any means that performs a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area, such as starting winning processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state that indicates that the result of updating specific information by the update means has resulted in a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time period passing, a specified period passing, the use of all of a predetermined series of data, the detection of a ball entering a specified area, or the detection of a frame button input by the player.

The starting ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to change and be displayed when a gaming ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 starting area, a special ball 2 starting area, or a regular ball starting area.

Furthermore, the display means may be any device capable of announcing the lottery results for a specified symbol, such as a third symbol display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying information on each display device.

Furthermore, a specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means and becomes a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, or game states in which the update means does not operate. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated through so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state," a "time-shortened state," the state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined jackpot occurs, the state from when the power is turned on until the predetermined jackpot ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, the state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that results in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, the state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of a special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry slot which will start the jackpot game, a state where the dynamic display of a special symbol is not being executed and the ball is waiting to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to press a frame button while the dynamic display of a special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a losing prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, a dynamic display of a special pattern corresponding to a drop lottery, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern is executed reaches a specific number of times, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a prize, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a losing prize, a transition to a specific game state, etc.

Furthermore, the predetermined game conditions may be conditions that are met when a player performs a predetermined game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a predetermined area, a predetermined number of fired game balls entering a predetermined area, a fired game ball not entering a predetermined area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a predetermined area and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, a player operating an effect button, a lottery being held when a player operates an effect button and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being less than a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the dynamic display of the next special pattern can be started to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes passing, an instruction to execute various processes being issued, and a command to execute various processes being issued.

Furthermore, the "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update status of specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value exceeds a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events; for example, by varying the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their color, their display area, their display density, their display time, and the number of times they are displayed, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the firing mode, indications of whether firing is possible, indications of whether play is possible, indications of the timing of operation execution on the operating means, indications of the game status, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, distinctions between probability variable and normal patterns, distinctions between time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and distinctions between probability variable and time-saving patterns.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small jackpot on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A," if the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed is less than the break-even number, the machine determines that the average number of balls that the player can win using the right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won is greater, and executes a jackpot priority notification effect in the right-hit notification effect. Furthermore, if the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed is equal to or greater than the break-even number, the machine determines that the average number of balls that the player can win using the left-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won is greater, and executes a rescue priority notification effect in the right-hit notification effect.

However, since the difference in the average number of balls won between the two methods (right-handed playing when a small jackpot is won and left-handed playing when a small jackpot is won) around the break-even point is minimal (for example, cases No. 2 and No. 3 in Figure 27), the difference is so small that it is difficult to say that either playing method will clearly result in a higher average number of balls won.

In addition, there may be slight individual differences between each pachinko machine 10 installed in a hall due to the condition of the game pins and ball launch unit 112a, etc., and since players' playing methods are not the same, the difference in the average number of balls won between the two methods (right-handed playing when a small jackpot is won and left-handed playing when a small jackpot is won) around the break-even point may become even less clear.

Furthermore, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the period until the number of times the rescue condition is met in "normal game state A" is composed of only two periods, the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period, and if a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won, it is determined which of the two periods it falls into and one of the two right-hit notification effects is executed, the difference in the average number of balls won between the two (right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won and left-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won) is slight near the break-even number, so some players may have doubts about the content of the right-hit notification effect.

For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has an ambiguous notification period, which is a period of time within 20 spins before and after the break-even number in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, during which there is no clear difference regardless of which playing method is selected (hereinafter, the period between the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period, which is 20 spins before and after the number of special symbol executions in which the average number of balls won when a small jackpot is won is approximately the same for the right-hitting playing method and the left-hitting playing method, may be referred to as the "ambiguous notification period". In addition, the right-hitting notification effect when a small jackpot is won on special symbol 1 during the ambiguous notification period may be referred to as the "ambiguous notification effect").

Then, in the right-hit notification display when a special chart 1 small win is won as a result of the control judgment during the ambiguous notification period, the third notification mode is configured to alternately display both the jackpot priority notification display (see Figure 89 (b)) and the rescue priority notification display (see Figure 89 (d)) multiple times.

This configuration reduces storage capacity and maintains the quality of image data. Furthermore, by displaying both the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect, players can easily understand that there is little difference between the two play methods (i.e., right-hand play when a small jackpot is won and left-hand play when a small jackpot is won).

Furthermore, depending on the player, they can choose which playing style to use based on their own "winning streak" that day, the condition of the pachinko machine 10 they are playing, etc., which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Note that the differences between the configuration and processing content of the first embodiment and the configuration and processing content of the third embodiment are the same as the differences between the configuration and processing content of the first embodiment and the configuration and processing content of the second embodiment, and are the same as those in Figures 90 to 96 of the second embodiment, so explanation will be omitted.

Now, with reference to Figure 99, we will explain the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. Figure 99 is a diagram showing the progression of effects on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A."

In more detail, Figure 99(a) shows the state in which a special chart 1 small win is won during the period when the value of the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is between "524 and 563 spins" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period (see Figure 91)), and the opening of the small win game is in progress. Figure 99(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game continues from the state in Figure 99(a), and the content of the right-hit notification effect changes after a certain period of time has passed since the state in Figure 99(a). 99(c) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game continues from the state in FIG. 99(b) and the content of the right-hit notification effect has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state in FIG. 99(b), and FIG. 99(d) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game continues from the state in FIG. 99(c) and the content of the right-hit notification effect has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state in FIG. 99(c).

Figure 99(a) shows a state in which a special chart 1 small win is won during the period when the value of the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is between "524 and 563 spins" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period (see Figure 91)), and the opening of the small win game is in progress.

In Figure 99(a), the middle right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81c "Hit right," and the bottom right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81d "Aim for V," both of which are messages suggesting right-hand play. Furthermore, on the left side of the main display area Dm, a character image 81e of a boy facing to the right and raising his hand is displayed, which also suggests right-hand play.

The presentation content in Figure 99(a) is the same as the right-hit notification presentation (i.e., jackpot priority notification presentation) (see Figure 89(b)) that occurs when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the jackpot priority notification period.

Next, 99(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is still being executed from the state in Figure 99(a), and the content of the right-hit notification effect has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state in Figure 99(a).

In Figure 99(b), a text message 81f is displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm saying "The number of times the rescue condition is met will soon be reached," which literally suggests that by rotating the dynamic display of the special symbol several times, the number of times the rescue condition is met will be reached and the game will transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state."

In addition, a text message 81g reading "Right hit?" is displayed in the middle right portion of the main display area Dm, a text message that gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. Furthermore, a text message 81h reading "Get a V and you'll win the jackpot" is displayed in the bottom right portion of the main display area Dm, a text message that also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, a character image 81i of a boy looking down is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm, giving the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. Furthermore, a main display right-hand play instruction 89 is displayed in the upper right side of the main display area Dm, suggesting that right-hand play will be used in the small win game.

The presentation content in Figure 99(b) is the same as the right-hit notification presentation (i.e., the rescue priority notification presentation) (see Figure 89(d)) that occurs when a small win on Special Chart 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period.

Next, Figure 99(c) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is still being executed from the state in Figure 99(b), and the content of the right-hit notification effect has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state in Figure 99(b).

Note that the effect in Figure 99(c) is the same as that in Figure 99(a), so explanation will be omitted.

Next, Figure 99(d) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is still being executed from the state in Figure 99(c), and the content of the right-hit notification effect has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state in Figure 99(c).

Note that the effect in Figure 99(d) is the same as that in Figure 99(b), so explanation will be omitted.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when a special chart 1 small win is won during the ambiguous notification period, the right-hit notification display alternates between the jackpot priority notification display and the rescue priority notification display multiple times, and this switching display is repeated from Figure 99 (d) onwards until the end of the small win game.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the ambiguous notification period is set as a period during which the difference between the expected value of balls dispensed when a small jackpot is won in the "normal gaming state A" using the right-hand play method and the expected value of balls dispensed when a small jackpot is won using the left-hand play method is small. Then, in the right-hand play notification effect when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1 during the ambiguous notification period, two effects, a jackpot priority notification effect and a rescue priority notification effect, are displayed alternately multiple times.

This configuration reduces storage capacity and maintains the quality of image data. Furthermore, by displaying both the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect, players can easily understand that there is little difference between the two play methods (i.e., right-hand play when a small jackpot is won and left-hand play when a small jackpot is won).

Furthermore, depending on the player, they can choose which playing style to use based on their own "winning streak" that day, the condition of the pachinko machine 10 they are playing, etc., which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and achieves the same effects.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figures 100 and 101. The following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will focus on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the same components and processes as those in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that transition to a predetermined game state advantageous to the player after a predetermined period of time has passed, thereby awarding the player a profit. In this advantageous game state, if a predetermined condition is met through the player's play, the player can obtain prize balls.

In such gaming machines, the suggestions given to players regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period are not sufficiently satisfactory, and further improvements in the content of the suggestions are required.

Specifically, for example, if the hints regarding the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state remain the same over a given period of time, the player will not be able to understand the magnitude of the profit that the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming state occurs. Furthermore, the player will not be able to experience the excitement that would arise from changing the hints depending on the magnitude of the profit.

The present invention was invented in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide optimal suggestions regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit they will obtain if an advantageous gaming condition occurs, and increase their interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win that can result in a big win (i.e., a small win that can pass through the specific area 65d) is won in "normal gaming state A," the player is given the option of whether or not to allow the small win to result in a big win. This aims to provide a gaming machine that enriches the variety of games and can notify the player of how to play in a way that will increase the expected value of the balls that can be won.

To achieve this objective, the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a variable pattern when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a predetermined judgment means for issuing a predetermined judgment based on the gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area. and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is met based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, wherein the notification control means, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifies the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and includes switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a new variable display without generating the specific profit when, in the specific game state, the judgment means reaches the specific judgment result and the first notification mode is displayed.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine comprises an "ejection device" as "launching means," a "start detection area" as "starting ball entry area," a "result notification device" as "display means," a "movable device" as "variable ball entry means," "game conditions" as "update conditions," "game information" as "specific information," an "update process" as "update means," an "update state" as "specific game state," an "update end state" as "predetermined update state," an "awarded benefit" as "predetermined benefit state," a "notification mode" as "alert mode," a "display control" as "alert control means," a "discrimination control" as "determination means," a "control judgment result" as "specific judgment result," an "benefit awarding condition" as "predetermined game condition," an "award value" as "specific benefit," a "benefit awarding control" as "benefit generating means," a "predetermined time" as "predetermined timing," and a "specific time" as "specific timing."

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that it can land in the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

Furthermore, the specified benefit state may be anything that can confer some kind of benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state", the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, the light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update status of the specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable entry device (large entry port), small entry port, regular electric entry port, non-electric entry port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specified gaming condition, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state" as a specific gaming state, the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, the light emission control of a specific emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the specific information is information that is updated to new content when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and is capable of identifying a predetermined period based on the update status, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be the value of a counter stored in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern began, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern stopped, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, etc. These include the remaining number of times the display will be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening, the time after which the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening stops, the number of wins when one of the openings such as the big prize opening opens, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern on the display means, the time from the start of the startup process of the gaming machine, the setting values of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall staff that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the updating means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or may be a hardware circuit update.

The determination means may be any means that performs a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area, such as starting winning processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state that indicates that the result of updating specific information by the update means has resulted in a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time period passing, a specified period passing, the use of all of a predetermined series of data, the detection of a ball entering a specified area, or the detection of a frame button input by the player.

The starting ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to change and be displayed when a gaming ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 starting area, a special ball 2 starting area, or a regular ball starting area.

Furthermore, the display means may be any device capable of announcing the lottery results for a specified symbol, such as a third symbol display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying information on each display device.

Furthermore, a specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means and becomes a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, or game states in which the update means does not operate. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated through so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state," a "time-shortened state," the state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined jackpot occurs, the state from when the power is turned on until the predetermined jackpot ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, the state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that results in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, the state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of a special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry slot which will start the jackpot game, a state where the dynamic display of a special symbol is not being executed and the ball is waiting to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to press a frame button while the dynamic display of a special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a losing prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, a dynamic display of a special pattern corresponding to a drop lottery, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern is executed reaches a specific number of times, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a prize, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a losing prize, a transition to a specific game state, etc.

Furthermore, the predetermined game conditions may be conditions that are met when a player performs a predetermined game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a predetermined area, a predetermined number of fired game balls entering a predetermined area, a fired game ball not entering a predetermined area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a predetermined area and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, a player operating an effect button, a lottery being held when a player operates an effect button and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being less than a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the dynamic display of the next special pattern can be started to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes passing, an instruction to execute various processes being issued, and a command to execute various processes being issued.

Furthermore, the "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update status of specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value exceeds a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events; for example, by varying the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their color, their display area, their display density, their display time, and the number of times they are displayed, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the firing mode, indications of whether firing is possible, indications of whether play is possible, indications of the timing of operation execution on the operating means, indications of the game status, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, distinctions between probability variable and normal patterns, distinctions between time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and distinctions between probability variable and time-saving patterns.

First, referring to Figure 100, the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. Figure 100 is a flowchart showing the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the fourth embodiment. The difference between the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the first embodiment and the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the fourth embodiment is that a display left-hit command setting process has been added.

In the fourth embodiment, in the process for setting the display special symbol 1 variation pattern command (S1307), if it is determined in the process of S1351 that the game is in the "normal gaming state" (S1351: Yes), it is then determined whether the variation display of the first special symbol to be executed is the first variation display since the end of the right-hit gaming state (i.e., the big win gaming state, the small win gaming state, or the "time-shortened state") (S1361). If it is the first variation display since the end of the right-hit gaming state (S1361: Yes), a left-hit command for display is set (S1362), and the process proceeds to S1355.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1361 is that this is not the first variable display since the end of the right-hand play state (S1361: No), the processing in S1362 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1355.

Next, referring to Figure 101, we will explain the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. Figure 101 is a diagram showing the progression of effects on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won during the rescue priority notification period in "normal gaming state A."

In more detail, Figure 101(a) shows the state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal gaming state A" is at "58" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops; Figure 101(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state in Figure 101(a); and Figure 101(c) shows the state in which the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d from the state in Figure 101(b), the small win state ends without transitioning to the jackpot state, and the game returns to "normal gaming state A," and the variable presentation of the first special symbol is being executed.

Figure 101(a) shows a state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), a small win on special symbol 1 is won, the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops.

In Figure 101(a), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. The value of the rescue counter 203r is "58", indicating that the variable effect is occurring during the jackpot priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in Figure 28.

Furthermore, the third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special symbol 1 small jackpot has been won. Note that, like the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured so that, during the rescue priority notification period, the expected value of balls that a player can win is higher when playing left-handed when a small jackpot is won than when playing right-handed when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 101(a), the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row of the third symbol 81b to suggest that the player will play a right-hand hit in the small jackpot game that will be executed subsequently, thereby generating a jackpot game.

Next, Figure 101(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed, following the state shown in Figure 101(a).

In addition, the middle right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81c that reads "Hit right," and the bottom right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81d that reads "Aim for V," both of which are messages that suggest right-hand play. Furthermore, on the left side of the main display area Dm, a character design 81e of a boy facing to the right and raising his hand is displayed, which also suggests right-hand play.

Next, Figure 101(c) shows a state in which, from the state in Figure 101(b), the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win state ends without transitioning to the big win state, and the game returns to "normal gaming state A," and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed.

In Figure 101(c), the upper right portion of the main display area Dm in the third pattern display device 81, the reserved number display 87a for special pattern 1, displays "2," indicating that the number of reserved balls for the variable display of the first special pattern has been reduced by 1 from the state in Figure 101(a). Also, the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, the variable area 87b for special pattern 1, displays a flashing state, indicating that the variable display of the first special pattern is currently being executed.

Furthermore, a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "59", which is a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the text message 81a shown in FIG. 101(a). In other words, after winning a small prize in the "normal gaming state A" shown in FIG. 101(a), the player did not perform a right-hand hit during the small prize game shown in FIG. 101(b), and the ball did not pass through the specific area 65d, suggesting that the small prize game ended and the game returned to "normal gaming state A" without transitioning to the big prize state.

In addition, a text message 81m reading "Left Hit" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the game has returned from a small win state suggesting right-hit play to "normal game state A" suggesting left-hit play.

By configuring the pachinko machine 10 in this manner, in the specific game state "normal game state A" in which the rescue condition can be established (the rescue set flag 203s is off), if a small win on special symbol 1 is won as a result of control judgment, the player can avoid a jackpot state in terms of the awarded value by not performing a right-hand hit, and the next special symbol can be dynamically displayed without generating any prize balls.

As a result, even if you win a special chart 1 small win in "normal gaming state A," where the rescue condition can be met, you can return to "normal gaming state A" without triggering a big win and try to meet the rescue condition again.

As a result, the player can confirm the content of the right-hit notification effect (i.e., the big win priority notification effect or the rescue priority notification effect) when a small win on Special Chart 1 is won in "normal game state A," and decide which playing method to use (the right-hit playing method when a small win is won, or the left-hit playing method when a small win is won) and play accordingly, creating new gameplay features and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, if the system is configured so that a jackpot can occur unconditionally regardless of the player's playing method, such as if the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be selected as a jackpot type, and the player avoids the occurrence of a jackpot based on a small jackpot by playing left-handed when a small jackpot is won in accordance with the right-hit notification when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1, and even if the player uses up their balls to hit left-handed in order to fulfill the rescue condition, there is a risk that the jackpot will occur before the rescue condition is fulfilled the number of times, and the consumed balls will be wasted. Furthermore, there is a risk that the player will decide that there is a possibility of losing their balls even if they play according to the suggestions of the right-hit notification when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1, and will continue to play without considering the right-hit notification when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1.

Therefore, in order to prevent such an event from occurring, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured so that only a small special symbol 1 win is possible in the "normal game state A" in which the rescue condition can be met, and even if the small special symbol 1 win is met, the machine returns to the "normal game state A" without triggering a jackpot state, allowing the rescue condition to be met again.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal game state A" where the rescue condition can be met (the rescue set flag 203s is off), the player does not execute a right-hand play, so that a big win state does not occur and the next special symbol can be dynamically displayed without generating any prize balls.

By configuring it in this way, even if you win a small special jackpot on Special Chart 1 in "Normal Game State A," where the rescue condition can be met, you can return to "Normal Game State A" without triggering a jackpot, and aim to meet the rescue condition again.

As a result, the player can confirm the content of the right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1 in "normal game state A" (i.e., the big jackpot priority notification effect or the rescue priority notification effect), and decide which playing method to use (the right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won, or the left-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won) and play accordingly, creating new gameplay features and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and achieves the same effects.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figures 102 to 105. The following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will focus on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first and second embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments will be assigned the same reference numerals as those of the first and second embodiments, and description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, an ambiguous notification period is set up within a range of 20 spins before and after the break-even number, during which there is no clear difference regardless of which playing method is selected, and in the right-hit notification effect when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during this ambiguous notification period, the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the jackpot priority notification effect (see Figure 89(b)) and the rescue priority notification effect (see Figure 89(d)) are reused to execute the ambiguous notification effect (see Figure 98(b)), suggesting that the expected value of balls will be small regardless of which playing method (right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won or left-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won) is used.

When configured in this way, if the player wins the small prize on Special Chart 1, they must check the right-hit notification effect that is displayed during the small prize opening time (i.e., 10 seconds (see Figure 19)), and then decide which playing method to select, so further improvement in the content of the suggestions is required.

Specifically, for example, even if a player wins a special chart 1 small win during the ambiguous notification period and an ambiguous notification effect is displayed as a right-hit notification effect, the player may not fully understand the implications of the notification effect during the small win opening time (i.e., 10 seconds (see Figure 19)) during which the effect is displayed, and may be confused about which game method to use.

Furthermore, even if a player is able to see the ambiguous notification and understand the implications of the notification, they must make a decision during this opening time, taking into account the player's own remaining playing time, the opening hours of the hall, the number of balls remaining, the remaining amount of money, etc., which could lead to making an incorrect decision in some cases.

The fifth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 was invented in consideration of the above-mentioned problems, and aims to appropriately suggest a predetermined game state during a variable presentation over a predetermined period, deepening the player's understanding of the level of profit they will obtain if an advantageous game state occurs, and increasing their interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, while the dynamic display of the special symbol during the ambiguous notification period is being executed, a presentation is executed to indicate that the ambiguous notification period is in progress, and the player can determine in advance the playing method (right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won or left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won) if they win a special symbol 1 small jackpot during the ambiguous notification period, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that allows players to play smoothly and without confusion when playing for a small jackpot.

To achieve this objective, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a display means for displaying a predetermined symbol in the starting ball entry area when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area. The gaming machine comprises a determination means that makes a predetermined determination based on the entry of a winning ball into the game, and a benefit generating means that generates a specific benefit when a specific determination result is reached by the determination means and a predetermined game condition is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player. When a specific determination result is reached by the determination means, the notification control means notifies the player of the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and includes a switching means that switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. The gaming machine also comprises a special effect execution means that executes a special effect during the variable display between the predetermined timing and the specific timing.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine comprises an "ejection device" as "launching means," a "start detection area" as "starting ball entry area," a "result notification device" as "display means," a "movable device" as "variable ball entry means," "game conditions" as "update conditions," "game information" as "specific information," "update processing" as "update means," an "update state" as "specific game state," an "update end state" as "predetermined update state," "awarded benefit" as "predetermined benefit state," a "notification mode" as "alert mode," "display control" as "alert control means," "discrimination control" as "determination means," a "control judgment result" as "specific judgment result," "benefit awarding conditions" as "predetermined game conditions," an "award value" as "specific benefit," "benefit awarding control" as "benefit generating means," a "predetermined period" as "predetermined timing," a "specific period" as "specific timing," and a "limited effect" as a "special effect."

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that it can land in the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

Furthermore, the specified benefit state may be anything that can confer some kind of benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state", the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, the light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update status of the specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable entry device (large entry port), small entry port, regular electric entry port, non-electric entry port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specified gaming condition, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state" as a specific gaming state, the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, the light emission control of a specific emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the specific information is information that is updated to new content when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and is capable of identifying a predetermined period based on the update status, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be the value of a counter stored in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern began, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern stopped, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, etc. These include the remaining number of times the display will be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening, the time after which the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening stops, the number of wins when one of the openings such as the big prize opening opens, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern on the display means, the time from the start of the startup process of the gaming machine, the setting values of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall staff that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the updating means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or may be a hardware circuit update.

In addition, the "special effect" may be anything that can suggest the current state when announcing the result of a lottery for a specific symbol, and may include an effect that enlarges the symbol, an effect that shrinks the symbol, an effect that changes the shape of the symbol, an effect that changes the color tone of the symbol, an effect that changes from a specific symbol to another symbol, an effect that changes the background, an effect that changes, adds, or removes the background music, an effect that changes, adds, or removes sound effects, an effect that changes the way in which light-emitting elements turn on, blink, or turn off, an effect that changes the effect display area, an effect that displays a specific character for a certain period of time, an effect that makes a specific character perform a different action than usual for a certain period of time, an effect that displays a specific string of characters for a certain period of time, an effect that displays a specific picture for a certain period of time, an effect that changes the display area of a specific picture for a certain period of time, an effect that changes the display color of a specific picture for a certain period of time, an effect that increases or decreases a specific number, an effect that makes a specific movable object move or stop for a certain period of time, etc.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state that indicates that the result of updating specific information by the update means has resulted in a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time period passing, a specified period passing, the use of all of a predetermined series of data, the detection of a ball entering a specified area, or the detection of a frame button input by the player.

The starting ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to change and be displayed when a gaming ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 starting area, a special ball 2 starting area, or a regular ball starting area.

Furthermore, the display means may be any device capable of announcing the lottery results for a specified symbol, such as a third symbol display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying information on each display device.

Furthermore, a specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means and becomes a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, or game states in which the update means does not operate. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated through so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state," a "time-shortened state," the state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined jackpot occurs, the state from when the power is turned on until the predetermined jackpot ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, the state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that results in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, the state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of a special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry slot which will start the jackpot game, a state where the dynamic display of a special symbol is not being executed and the ball is waiting to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to press a frame button while the dynamic display of a special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a losing prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, a dynamic display of a special pattern corresponding to a drop lottery, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern is executed reaches a specific number of times, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a prize, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a losing prize, a transition to a specific game state, etc.

Furthermore, the predetermined game conditions may be conditions that are met when a player performs a predetermined game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a predetermined area, a predetermined number of fired game balls entering a predetermined area, a fired game ball not entering a predetermined area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a predetermined area and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, a player operating an effect button, a lottery being held when a player operates an effect button and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being less than a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the dynamic display of the next special pattern can be started to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes passing, an instruction to execute various processes being issued, and a command to execute various processes being issued.

Furthermore, the "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update status of specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value exceeds a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events; for example, by varying the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their color, their display area, their display density, their display time, and the number of times they are displayed, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the firing mode, indications of whether firing is possible, indications of whether play is possible, indications of the timing of operation execution on the operating means, indications of the game status, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, distinctions between probability variable and normal patterns, distinctions between time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and distinctions between probability variable and time-saving patterns.

The determination means may be any means that performs a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area, such as starting winning processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

First, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 102. Figure 102 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment. The difference between the block diagram of the first embodiment and the block diagram of the fifth embodiment is that an ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m has been added.

The ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m is a flag for displaying (see FIG. 104(a)) the text "During ambiguous notification period" in the background of the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the ambiguous notification period (see FIG. 91) in "normal gaming state A." Based on the setting of this ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m, the MPU 231 sets the text "During ambiguous notification period" in the background of the variable effect as a limited effect.

This ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m is first initialized (i.e., turned off) by the initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 during the main processing when the power is turned on. Then, when the MPU 231 receives an ambiguous notification period suggestion command from the voice and lamp control device 113, it sets this ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m to on (see S2204 in FIG. 104).

When the MPU 231 detects that the rear image command flag is on, it identifies the corresponding image type from the ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m (see S2450 in Figure 87). It then sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to the identified image type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S2455 in Figure 87).

Next, referring to Figure 103, the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. Figure 103 is a flowchart showing the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the fifth embodiment. The difference between the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the first embodiment and the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the fifth embodiment is that a process for setting a suggestion command during an ambiguous notification period has been added.

In the fifth embodiment, in the process for setting the display special chart 1 variation pattern command (S1307), if the process in S1351 determines that the game is in "normal gaming mode" (S1351: Yes), it is then determined whether the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m (S1352).

In the processing of S1352, if the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is not smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m, i.e., if the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is equal to or greater than the value stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m (S1352: No), then it is determined whether the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n (S1353).

If the result of the judgment in S1353 is that the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n (S1353: Yes), the number of times the current special pattern variable effect has been executed is within the ambiguous notification period, so a suggestion command is set during the ambiguous notification period (S1354) (see 81k in Figure 105(a)), and processing proceeds to S1355.

By setting this suggestion command during the ambiguous notification period, during the period when the special pattern variable effect is executed during the ambiguous notification period, a display indicating that the ambiguous notification period is in progress is always displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a limited effect (see 81k in Figure 105(a)).

If there is no indication that the special symbol variation effect is in the ambiguous notification period during its execution, the player will only realize that the current number of times the special symbol variation effect has been executed is in the ambiguous notification period when they win a special symbol 1 small win and check the right-hit notification effect (see Figure 105 (c)) displayed during the small win opening. Then, during the opening time (i.e., 10 seconds), they must decide whether or not to trigger a jackpot with the small win game. At this time, the player must make a decision taking into account their own remaining playing time, the hall's opening hours, the number of remaining balls in their possession, the remaining amount of money, etc., which could lead to a wrong decision in some cases. Furthermore, the small win game could end while the player is considering which hit to use, preventing the jackpot from being triggered, resulting in a result that is different from the player's original intention.

However, by configuring the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the player can recognize that the current number of times the special symbol variable effect has been executed is within the ambiguous notification period by checking the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. If the player wins a special symbol 1 small win during the ambiguous notification period, the player can determine in advance whether or not a big win should be generated during the small win game, allowing the player to play the small win game smoothly and without confusion.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1352 that the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m (S1352: Yes), the number of times the current special symbol variable effect has been executed is within the jackpot priority notification period, so S1353 and S1354 are skipped and processing proceeds to S1355. Also, if the result of the determination in S1353 is that the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is not smaller than the value stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n (S1353: No), the number of times the current special symbol variable effect has been executed is within the rescue priority notification period, so in this case too, S1354 is skipped and processing proceeds to S1355.

Next, with reference to Figure 104(a), details of the rear image system command processing (S2115) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described. Figure 104(a) is a flowchart showing the rear image system command processing (S2115) in the fifth embodiment. The difference between the rear image system command processing (S2115) in the fifth embodiment and the rear image system command processing (S2115) in the fifth embodiment is that an update process for the ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m has been added.

In the background image command processing (S2113), first, it is determined whether there is a background image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2201). If there is a background image change command (S2201: Yes), the background image change flag is set to ON (S2202), which notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (see Figure 86) described below of the change in the background image resulting from receiving the background image change command in the ON state, and processing proceeds to S2205.

If it is determined in the processing of S2201 that there is no background image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2201: No), it is then determined whether there is a command suggested during the ambiguous notification period among the unprocessed commands (S2203), and if there is a command suggested during the ambiguous notification period (S2203: Yes), the suggestion flag 233m during the ambiguous notification period is set to on (S2204), and the processing proceeds to S2205.

Next, referring to Figure 105, we will explain the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. Figure 105 is a diagram showing the progression of effects on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won during the ambiguous notification period in "normal game state A."

More specifically, Figure 105(a) shows the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "551" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period); Figure 105(b) shows the state in which, from the state in Figure 105(a), the variable display of the special symbol that was being executed has won the special symbol 1 small win, the variable effect has ended, and the third symbol has stopped; and Figure 105(c) shows the state in which, from the state in Figure 105(b), the opening of the small win game is being executed.

Figure 105(a) shows a state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal gaming state A" is at "551" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period) and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed.

In Figure 105 (a), the upper right part of the main display area Dm in the third pattern display device 81, the special pattern 1 variable area 87b, is flashing, indicating that the variable display of the first special pattern is currently being executed. In addition, the central part of the main display area Dm shows that the third pattern is currently being varied.

In addition, a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm. The value of the rescue counter 203r is "551," which indicates that the effect is a variable effect during the ambiguous notification period, as shown in the break-even count table 222f in Figure 91.

In addition, a text message 81k is displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm, with the words "During the ambiguous period" scrolling from right to left. This text message 81k is configured to be constantly displayed while the variable effect is being executed during the ambiguous notification period (see Figure 91). By checking this text message 81k, the player can recognize that the currently executing variable display of the special pattern is being executed during the ambiguous notification period, and can consider in advance whether or not to execute a right-hand hit to trigger a jackpot state during a small jackpot game when the variable display of the special pattern wins a special 1 small jackpot.

Next, Figure 105(b) shows the state from Figure 105(a) where the special symbol variable display that was in progress has won the special symbol 1 small win, the variable display has ended, and the third symbol has stopped.

The third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that a special symbol 1 small win has been won. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the ambiguous notification period, when comparing the expected number of balls that a player can win when playing with a right-hand hit when a small win is won and when playing with a left-hand hit when a small win is won, the difference is so slight that it is difficult to say that either playing method will clearly result in a higher average number of balls won.

In the situation shown in Figure 105(b), to suggest that there will be no significant difference in the expected value of balls that can be won in the small jackpot game that will be played subsequently, regardless of whether or not right-hand play is played, the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row on the left and right of the third symbol 81b, and the main symbol with the words "challenge symbol" written on it is stopped in the central symbol row. Furthermore, the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the variable area 87b for special symbol 1, is stopped in blue, and the variable display of the first special symbol indicates that a small jackpot has been won.

Next, Figure 105(c) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed, following the state in Figure 105(b).

In addition, a text message 81g reading "Right hit?" is displayed in the middle right portion of the main display area Dm, a text message that gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. Furthermore, a text message 81h reading "Get a V and you'll win the jackpot" is displayed in the bottom left portion of the main display area Dm, a text message that also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, in the middle left portion of the main display area Dm, character design 81e is displayed, depicting a boy facing to the right and raising his hand, and further, in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, character design 81i is displayed, depicting a boy looking down. These two character designs 81e and 81i are the character designs displayed in the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect (see 81e in Figure 97(b) and 81i in Figure 97(d)).

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the ambiguous notification period, which is the period between the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a message indicating that the ambiguous notification period is in progress while the special pattern variable presentation is being performed.

By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the number of times the special symbol variable effect has been executed is within the ambiguous notification period by checking the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81.

As a result, if a player wins a special chart 1 small win during the ambiguous notification period, they will be able to determine in advance whether or not to trigger a big win during that small win game, allowing them to play smoothly and without confusion during that small win game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment has the same configuration as the first and second embodiments and achieves the same effects.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figures 106 and 107. The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the same components and processes as those in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that transition to a predetermined game state advantageous to the player after a predetermined period of time has passed, thereby awarding the player a profit. In this advantageous game state, if a predetermined condition is met through the player's play, the player can obtain prize balls.

In such gaming machines, the suggestions given to players regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period are not sufficiently satisfactory, and further improvements in the content of the suggestions are required.

Specifically, for example, if the hints regarding the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state remain the same over a given period of time, the player will not be able to understand the magnitude of the profit that the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming state occurs. Furthermore, the player will not be able to experience the excitement that would arise from changing the hints depending on the magnitude of the profit.

The present invention was invented in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide optimal suggestions regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit they will obtain if an advantageous gaming condition occurs, and increase their interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win that can result in a big win (i.e., a small win that can pass through the specific area 65d) is won in "normal gaming state A," the player is given the option of whether or not to allow the small win to result in a big win. This aims to provide a gaming machine that enriches the variety of games and can notify the player of how to play in a way that will increase the expected value of the balls that can be won.

To achieve this objective, the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification based on a gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area. and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is met based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means. The notification control means, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifies the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a specific timing before a specific period before the specific information reaches the specified updated state, and includes switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specific timing, and the gaming machine is configured so that after switching to the second notification mode at the specific timing, it will not switch back to the first notification mode at least until the specific profit is reached.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine comprises an "ejection device" as "launching means," a "start detection area" as "starting ball entry area," a "result notification device" as "display means," a "movable device" as "variable ball entry means," "game conditions" as "update conditions," "game information" as "specific information," an "update process" as "update means," an "update state" as "specific game state," an "update end state" as "predetermined update state," an "awarded benefit" as "predetermined benefit state," a "notification mode" as "alert mode," a "display control" as "alert control means," a "discrimination control" as "determination means," a "control judgment result" as "specific judgment result," an "benefit awarding condition" as "predetermined game condition," an "award value" as "specific benefit," a "benefit awarding control" as "benefit generating means," a "predetermined time" as "predetermined timing," and a "specific time" as "specific timing."

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that it can land in the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

Furthermore, the specified benefit state may be anything that can confer some kind of benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state", the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, the light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update status of the specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable entry device (large entry port), small entry port, regular electric entry port, non-electric entry port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specified gaming condition, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state" as a specific gaming state, the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, the light emission control of a specific emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the specific information is information that is updated to new content when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and is capable of identifying a predetermined period based on the update status, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be the value of a counter stored in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern began, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern stopped, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, etc. These include the remaining number of times the display will be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening, the time after which the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening stops, the number of wins when one of the openings such as the big prize opening opens, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern on the display means, the time from the start of the startup process of the gaming machine, the setting values of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall staff that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the updating means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or may be a hardware circuit update.

The determination means may be any means that performs a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area, such as starting winning processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state that indicates that the result of updating specific information by the update means has resulted in a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time period passing, a specified period passing, the use of all of a predetermined series of data, the detection of a ball entering a specified area, or the detection of a frame button input by the player.

The starting ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to change and be displayed when a gaming ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 starting area, a special ball 2 starting area, or a regular ball starting area.

Furthermore, the display means may be any device capable of announcing the lottery results for a specified symbol, such as a third symbol display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying information on each display device.

Furthermore, a specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means and becomes a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, or game states in which the update means does not operate. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated through so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state," a "time-shortened state," the state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined jackpot occurs, the state from when the power is turned on until the predetermined jackpot ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, the state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that results in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, the state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of a special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry slot which will start the jackpot game, a state where the dynamic display of a special symbol is not being executed and the ball is waiting to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to press a frame button while the dynamic display of a special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a losing prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, a dynamic display of a special pattern corresponding to a drop lottery, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern is executed reaches a specific number of times, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a prize, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a losing prize, a transition to a specific game state, etc.

Furthermore, the predetermined game conditions may be conditions that are met when a player performs a predetermined game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a predetermined area, a predetermined number of fired game balls entering a predetermined area, a fired game ball not entering a predetermined area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a predetermined area and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, a player operating an effect button, a lottery being held when a player operates an effect button and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being less than a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the dynamic display of the next special pattern can be started to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes passing, an instruction to execute various processes being issued, and a command to execute various processes being issued.

Furthermore, the "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update status of specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value exceeds a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events; for example, by varying the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their color, their display area, their display density, their display time, and the number of times they are displayed, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the firing mode, indications of whether firing is possible, indications of whether play is possible, indications of the timing of operation execution on the operating means, indications of the game status, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, distinctions between probability variable and normal patterns, distinctions between time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and distinctions between probability variable and time-saving patterns.

Now, with reference to Figures 106 and 107, we will explain the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. Figures 106 and 107 are diagrams showing the progression of effects on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A."

In more detail, Figure 106(a) shows the state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period), the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops. Figure 106(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state in Figure 106(a).

Furthermore, Figure 106(c) shows a state in which, from the state in Figure 106(b), the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win state ends without transitioning to the big win state, and the game returns to "normal game state A", and when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "550" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), a special symbol 1 small win is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops. Figure 106(d) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state in Figure 106(c).

Furthermore, Figure 107(a) shows a state in which, from the state of Figure 106(d), the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win state ends without transitioning to the big win state, and the game returns to "normal game state A", and when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), a special symbol 1 small win is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops. Figure 107(b) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Figure 107(a).

Figure 106(a) shows a state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), a small win on special symbol 1 is won, the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops.

In Figure 106 (a), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. The value of the rescue counter 203r is "58", indicating that the variable effect is occurring during the jackpot priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in Figure 28.

Furthermore, the third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special symbol 1 small jackpot has been won. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is configured so that, during the jackpot priority notification period, the right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won gives the player a higher expected number of balls to win than the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 106(a), the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row of the third symbol 81b to suggest that the player will play a right-hand hit in the small jackpot game that will be executed subsequently, thereby generating a jackpot game.

Next, Figure 106(b) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is currently being performed, following the state shown in Figure 106(a). A main display right-hit instruction 89 is displayed in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm, suggesting that the player perform a right-hit game during the small win game.

In addition, the middle right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81c that reads "Hit right," and the bottom right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81d that reads "Aim for V," both of which are messages that suggest right-hand play. Furthermore, on the left side of the main display area Dm, a character design 81e of a boy facing to the right and raising his hand is displayed, which also suggests right-hand play.

Next, Figure 106(c) shows a state in which, from the state in Figure 106(b), the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win state ends without transitioning to the big win state, and the game returns to "normal gaming state A." When the rescue counter 203r in "normal gaming state A" is "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), a special symbol 1 small win is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops.

In Figure 106(c), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. The value of the rescue counter 203r is "550", indicating that the state has returned to "normal gaming state A" from the state shown in Figures 106(a) and 106(b) without transitioning to a jackpot state, and that the variable display of the first special pattern has been executed multiple times in "normal gaming state A". Furthermore, the variable presentation in Figure 106(c) indicates that the variable presentation is a variable presentation during the rescue priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in Figure 28.

Furthermore, the third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special symbol 1 small jackpot has been won. As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is configured so that, during the rescue priority notification period, the expected value of balls that a player can win is higher when playing left-handed when a small jackpot is won than when playing right-handed when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 106(c), to suggest that the expected value of balls that can be won will be higher if the right-hand play is not performed and a big win play is not generated in the small win play that is executed afterwards, the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row on the left and right of the third symbol 81b, and the main symbol with the words "challenge symbol" written on it is stopped in the central symbol row.

Next, Figure 106(d) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed, following the state in Figure 106(c).

A text message 81f is displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm saying "The number of times the rescue condition will be met will soon be reached," which literally suggests that by rotating the dynamic display of the special symbol several times, the number of times the rescue condition will be met will be reached and the game will transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state."

In addition, a text message 81g asking "Right hit?" is displayed in the middle right part of the main display area Dm, which, compared to the text message 81c in Figure 106(b), gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

Furthermore, in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, a text message 81h is displayed that reads "Get a V and you'll win the jackpot." Compared to the text message 81d in Figure 106(b), this text message also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, a character design 81i of a boy looking down is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and compared to the character design 81e in Figure 106(b), this display also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. Furthermore, a main display right-hand play instruction 89 is displayed in the upper right side of the main display area Dm, suggesting that right-hand play will be used in the small win game.

In this way, the right-hit notification effect shown in Figure 106 (d) indicates that the effect has switched from the right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won during the jackpot priority notification period (i.e., the jackpot priority notification effect) shown in Figure 106 (b) to the right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period (i.e., the rescue priority notification effect).

Next, Figure 107(a) shows a state in which, from the state in Figure 106(d), the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win state ends without transitioning to the big win state, and the game returns to "normal gaming state A." When the rescue counter 203r in "normal gaming state A" is "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), a special symbol 1 small win is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops.

In Figure 107(a), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. The value of the rescue counter 203r is "637", indicating that the state has returned to "normal gaming state A" from the state shown in Figures 106(c) and 106(d) without transitioning to a jackpot state, and that the variable display of the first special pattern has been executed multiple times in "normal gaming state A". Furthermore, the variable presentation in Figure 107(a) indicates that the variable presentation is a variable presentation during the rescue priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in Figure 28.

Furthermore, the third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special symbol 1 small jackpot has been won. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is configured so that, during the rescue priority notification period, the expected value of balls that a player can win is higher when playing left-handed when a small jackpot is won than when playing right-handed when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 107(a), to suggest that the expected value of balls that can be won will be higher if the right-hand play is not performed and a big win play is not generated in the small win play that is executed subsequently, the same pattern (here, the number "2") is stopped in each pattern row on the left and right of the third pattern 81b, and the main pattern with the words "challenge pattern" written on it is stopped in the central pattern row.

Next, Figure 107(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed, following the state shown in Figure 107(a).

A text message 81f is displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm saying "The number of times the rescue condition will be met will soon be reached," which literally suggests that by rotating the dynamic display of the special symbol several times, the number of times the rescue condition will be met will be reached and the game will transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state."

In addition, a text message 81g asking "Right hit?" is displayed in the middle right part of the main display area Dm, which, compared to the text message 81c in Figure 106(b), gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

Furthermore, in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, a text message 81h is displayed that reads "Get a V and you'll win the jackpot." Compared to the text message 81d in Figure 106(b), this text message also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, a character design 81i of a boy looking down is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and compared to the character design 81e in Figure 106(b), this display also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. Furthermore, a main display right-hand play instruction 89 is displayed in the upper right side of the main display area Dm, suggesting that right-hand play will be used in the small win game.

In this way, the right-hit notification effect shown in Figure 107 (b) is executed in the same manner as the right-hit notification effect (i.e., the rescue priority notification effect) when a small win on Special Chart 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period, as shown in Figure 106 (d), which indicates that the content of the right-hit notification effect has not changed since a small win on Special Chart 1 was won during the rescue priority notification period.

By configuring it in this way, if a small win on Special Chart 1 is won in "Normal Game State A" and a rescue priority notification effect is executed during the right-hit notification effect for that small win, the right-hit notification effect for the small win on Special Chart 1 will be a rescue priority notification effect and will not switch to a jackpot priority notification effect until a jackpot is generated.

As a result, even if a player wins a small special 1 jackpot during the rescue priority notification period and then wins a small special 1 jackpot again while playing using the left-hand play method used when a small jackpot was won, the rescue priority notification effect will be executed just like the previous time, allowing the player to feel at ease and continue aiming for the "shortened normal 1 jackpot time state."

On the other hand, if the system is configured so that a jackpot priority notification effect can be executed in the right-hand notification effect when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period, there is a possibility that, while trying to fulfill the rescue conditions by executing the left-hand playing method when a small jackpot is won during the rescue priority idle period, a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 will be won and the jackpot priority notification effect will be executed.

When this situation occurs, the player avoids the occurrence of a jackpot based on the small win by playing left-handed when a small win is won, in accordance with the rescue priority notification effect when a small win is won on Special Chart 1, and even though the player uses up their balls to play left-handed in order to fulfill the rescue conditions, the jackpot priority notification effect is executed on the next small win on Special Chart 1, suggesting a transition to a jackpot state, which confuses the player and leaves them unsure of which method to play, which could lead to them ceasing play with Pachinko machine 10.

To avoid this situation, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, if the right-hit notification effect when a small win on special chart 1 is won in "normal gaming state A" switches from a jackpot priority notification effect to a rescue priority notification effect, the right-hit notification effect when a small win on special chart 1 is won will remain a rescue priority notification effect and will not switch back to a jackpot priority notification effect until a jackpot occurs.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the jackpot priority notification effect is executed in the right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot on special chart 1 is won during the jackpot priority notification period, and the rescue priority notification effect is executed in the right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot on special chart 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period.

By configuring it in this way, if the right-hit notification effect when a small win on Special Chart 1 is won in "Normal Game State A" switches from a jackpot priority notification effect to a rescue priority notification effect, the right-hit notification effect when a small win on Special Chart 1 is won will remain a rescue priority notification effect and will not switch back to a jackpot priority notification effect until a jackpot is generated.

As a result, even if a player wins a small special 1 jackpot during the rescue priority notification period, and then wins a small special 1 jackpot again while playing using the left-hand play method used when the small jackpot was won, the right-hand play notification effect for the rescue priority notification period will be executed just as it was the previous time, allowing the player to feel at ease and continue aiming for the "shortened normal 1 jackpot time state."

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and achieves the same effects.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figures 108 to 123. The following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will focus on the differences between the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the same components and processes as those in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments will be assigned the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of times the rescue condition is met is set to a value of 1 (i.e., "800 times"), and the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period are set based on the number of times the rescue condition is met (see Figure 91). Each period is compared with the number of times the special symbol is executed when a small jackpot is won, and the content of the right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot is won is changed.

However, if the number of times a rescue condition is met is set to 1, depending on the operational status of the pachinko machine 10 at the actual gaming hall, play on the pachinko machine 10 may be stopped early after the gaming hall opens, which could result in a decline in the operation of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, further improvements are required regarding the setting of rescue conditions.

Specifically, for example, if a pachinko machine 10 is played from the time the amusement hall opens, and a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A," depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, it may be possible to determine that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the state immediately after RAM clearing when the amusement hall opens, and it may be determined that the settings of the pachinko machine 10 have not been changed since the previous operating day, which could result in play on the pachinko machine 10 being suspended.

The seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 was invented in consideration of the above-mentioned problems, and aims to optimally control the establishment of rescue conditions and prevent a decline in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

To achieve this objective, the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area where gaming balls can flow down, a display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area and performing multiple variable operations, and also includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a display means for displaying a gaming ball in the starting ball entry area. The gaming machine comprises a determination means that makes a predetermined determination based on the ball entering the game, and a benefit generating means that generates a specific benefit when a specific determination result is reached by the determination means and a predetermined game condition is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player, and the notification control means, when a specific determination result is reached by the determination means, notifies the player of the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and comprises a switching means that switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, and the number of updates until the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state is determined by lottery, with one update number being selected from a plurality of update numbers.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine comprises an "ejection device" as "launching means," a "start detection area" as "starting ball entry area," a "result notification device" as "display means," a "movable device" as "variable ball entry means," "game conditions" as "update conditions," "game information" as "specific information," an "update process" as "update means," an "update state" as "specific game state," an "update end state" as "predetermined update state," an "awarded benefit" as "predetermined benefit state," a "notification mode" as "alert mode," a "display control" as "alert control means," a "discrimination control" as "determination means," a "control judgment result" as "specific judgment result," an "benefit awarding condition" as "predetermined game condition," an "award value" as "specific benefit," a "benefit awarding control" as "benefit generating means," a "predetermined time" as "predetermined timing," and a "specific time" as "specific timing."

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that it can land in the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

Furthermore, the specified benefit state may be anything that can confer some kind of benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state", the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, the light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update status of the specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable entry device (large entry port), small entry port, regular electric entry port, non-electric entry port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specified gaming condition, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state" as a specific gaming state, the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, the light emission control of a specific emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the specific information is information that is updated to new content when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and is capable of identifying a predetermined period based on the update status, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be the value of a counter stored in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern began, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern stopped, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, etc. These include the remaining number of times the display will be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening, the time after which the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening stops, the number of wins when one of the openings such as the big prize opening opens, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern on the display means, the time from the start of the startup process of the gaming machine, the setting values of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall staff that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the updating means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or may be a hardware circuit update.

The determination means may be any means that performs a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area, such as starting winning processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state that indicates that the result of updating specific information by the update means has resulted in a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time period passing, a specified period passing, the use of all of a predetermined series of data, the detection of a ball entering a specified area, or the detection of a frame button input by the player.

The starting ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to change and be displayed when a gaming ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 starting area, a special ball 2 starting area, or a regular ball starting area.

Furthermore, the display means may be any device capable of announcing the lottery results for a specified symbol, such as a third symbol display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying information on each display device.

Furthermore, a specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means and becomes a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, or game states in which the update means does not operate. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated through so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state," a "time-shortened state," the state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined jackpot occurs, the state from when the power is turned on until the predetermined jackpot ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, the state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that results in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, the state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of a special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry slot which will start the jackpot game, a state where the dynamic display of a special symbol is not being executed and the ball is waiting to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to press a frame button while the dynamic display of a special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a losing prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, a dynamic display of a special pattern corresponding to a drop lottery, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern is executed reaches a specific number of times, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a prize, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a losing prize, a transition to a specific game state, etc.

Furthermore, the predetermined game conditions may be conditions that are met when a player performs a predetermined game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a predetermined area, a predetermined number of fired game balls entering a predetermined area, a fired game ball not entering a predetermined area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a predetermined area and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, a player operating an effect button, a lottery being held when a player operates an effect button and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being less than a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the dynamic display of the next special pattern can be started to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes passing, an instruction to execute various processes being issued, and a command to execute various processes being issued.

Furthermore, the "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update status of specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value exceeds a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events; for example, by varying the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their color, their display area, their display density, their display time, and the number of times they are displayed, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the firing mode, indications of whether firing is possible, indications of whether play is possible, indications of the timing of operation execution on the operating means, indications of the game status, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, distinctions between probability variable and normal patterns, distinctions between time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and distinctions between probability variable and time-saving patterns.

First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 108. Figure 108 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. The differences between the block diagram of the second embodiment and the block diagram of the seventh embodiment are that a rescue condition fulfillment count table 202n has been added to the ROM 202, and that a rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 203q has been added to the RAM 203.

Now, with reference to Figure 109, the rescue condition satisfaction count table 202n of the seventh embodiment will be described. Figure 109 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the rescue condition satisfaction count table 202n stored in the ROM 202 of the seventh embodiment.

The rescue condition fulfillment count table 202n is referenced during RAM 203 initialization processing when the power is turned on and at the end of a jackpot game, and one rescue condition fulfillment count is randomly selected from three rescue condition fulfillment counts (i.e., "700 times," "800 times," or "900 times") regardless of the game state or other circumstances. Then, in the special symbol low probability state, if the number of times the special symbol is dynamically displayed reaches the rescue condition fulfillment count selected by the lottery, the system is configured to transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state."

Thus, as will be described in detail later, the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that different values are set for the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and relief priority notification period depending on the number of times the selected relief condition is met (see Figure 113).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the third symbol display device 81, which executes the dynamic display of special symbols, is configured not to display the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met. As a result, the player is unable to know which rescue condition has been met in the current game state, and is unable to know the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of times the rescue condition is met is set to a value of only 1 (i.e., "800 times"). Therefore, if the pachinko machine 10 is played from the time the gaming hall opens, it is easy to determine whether the setting has changed, which could result in a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Explaining in more detail, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of times the rescue condition is met is set to a value of 1 (i.e., "800 times"), and the break-even number is set to "543 spins" (see Figure 91). Therefore, when the RAM of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared or the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed after the end of a jackpot is between "0 spins and 523 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won, a jackpot priority notification effect is executed as a right-hit notification effect.

Therefore, let's assume that a pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is played from the time the gaming hall opens, and that a small special symbol 1 win occurs after 430 spins of dynamic special symbol display from the start of play, and an ambiguous notification effect is executed as the right-hit notification effect. In this case, because an ambiguous notification effect is executed, it can be determined that the number of times the dynamic special symbol display has been executed is between 524 and 563 spins when the RAM of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared during play or after the end of a jackpot (see Figure 91).

However, because the player only performed 430 spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol, it can be inferred that the pachinko machine 10 in play was not in a state immediately after the RAM had been cleared or a jackpot had ended when the gaming hall opened.

Furthermore, if the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 were changed before the gaming hall opened, the pachinko machine 10 would enter a RAM clear state (see S118 and S117 in Figure 37), making it possible to determine that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 had not been changed before the gaming hall opened.

In such a situation, if the operation data for the pachinko machine 10 from the previous operating day shows that not many balls were won and is not attractive data, players may assume that the settings for the pachinko machine 10 are set low. Furthermore, since the settings for the pachinko machine 10 have not been changed based on the state of the operation data, players may conclude that the current settings for the pachinko machine 10 also make it difficult to win balls and may stop playing, which may lead to a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, consider a case where the number of times the rescue condition is met is configured to be randomly selected from three values (700 times, 800 times, or 900 times), as in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. If the pachinko machine 10 is played from the time the amusement hall opens, and a small jackpot is won after 430 spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol have been executed since the start of play, and an ambiguous notification effect is executed as the right-hit notification effect, if the number of times the rescue condition is met on the current pachinko machine 10 is set to 700 times, the ambiguous notification period will be 424 to 463 spins (see FIG. 113). It is possible that the pachinko machine 10 at the time the amusement hall opens may have had its RAM cleared or a jackpot ended, and the settings on the pachinko machine 10 may have been changed from the previous operating day. It is also possible that the settings have been changed to make it easier to win balls. This at least reduces the reasons for stopping play and increases the likelihood of continuing play.

In this way, by configuring the number of times the rescue condition is met to be randomly selected from multiple values, it becomes difficult to determine whether the setting value has been changed when playing on the pachinko machine 10 from the time the gaming hall opens, thereby reducing the decline in operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a small jackpot on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A," a right-hand hit is performed during the small jackpot game of the first round, causing the ball to pass through specific area 65d and triggering a jackpot game, and transitioning to "normal symbol high probability time shortened state A" is compared with a case in which the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed in "normal gaming state A" reaches the number of times the rescue condition is met and transitioning to "normal symbol low probability time shortened state." In this case, the latter transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" is configured so that the expected value of the balls that the player can win is higher.

Therefore, when the number of times the rescue condition is met is set to 1 (i.e., 800 times), as in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period are each set to 1 (see Figure 91), so the player may be able to determine which hitting method to use by checking the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed on a data display or the like installed in the hall, without having to check the right-hit notification effect that is executed when a small jackpot is won on special symbol 1.

However, as in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the number of times a rescue condition has been met is randomly selected from the three values set in the rescue condition met number table 202n, and the number of times a rescue condition has been met that is set at that time is not known to the player. This allows the player to check the right-hit notification effect that is executed during the OP time when a small jackpot is won, and to decide which way to hit, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Next, we will explain the rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 203q stored in RAM 203 in the main control device 110 of the seventh embodiment. The rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 203q is a memory that stores the rescue condition fulfillment count used to determine whether to transition to the "normal low probability time shortened state" based on the number of times the special symbol is dynamically displayed.

When the RAM 203 is initialized after power-on and when a jackpot is reached, the MPU 201 performs a lottery process for determining the number of times a rescue condition has been met (see S161 in FIG. 114 and S161 in FIG. 117), and stores the value of the number of times a rescue condition has been met, determined in the lottery process for determining the number of times a rescue condition has been met, in the number of times a rescue condition has been met storage area 203q (see S142 in FIG. 115). This value is also cleared as part of the initialization process upon a jackpot (see S604 in FIG. 116). The value stored in the number of times a rescue condition has been met storage area 203q is referenced in the rescue achievement counting process to determine whether the number of times a rescue condition has been met (see S5403 in FIG. 47).

Next, with reference to Figure 110, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. Figure 110 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. The differences between the block diagram of the second embodiment and the block diagram of the seventh embodiment are that a sub-relief condition satisfaction count storage area 223h and a sub-base value storage area 223o have been added to the RAM 223, and that an RTC 245 has been added.

The sub-rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 223h is a memory that stores the number of times the rescue condition for the current pachinko machine 10 has been fulfilled.

When the voice and lamp control device 113 receives a rescue condition fulfillment count command sent from the main control device 110 upon power-on or the end of a jackpot, it stores the corresponding information in the sub-rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 223h (see S1274 in FIG. 120). This sub-rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 223h is cleared when a jackpot is won (see S1422 in FIG. 122).

The sub-base value storage area 223n is an area in which values similar to the real-time base values displayed on the base display device 401 by the main control device 110 are stored.

This sub-base value storage area 223n is cleared during the RAM initial value setting process during the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1010 in Figure 119). Then, when a base value command sent from the main control device 110 is received, the received real-time base value is stored (see S1272 in Figure 120).

In the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the current break-even count for the pachinko machine 10 is calculated based on the real-time base value stored in the sub-base value storage area 223o and the number of times the rescue condition is met stored in the sub-rescue condition met count storage area 223h. Furthermore, the number of jackpot priority notifications (the number of spins that marks the boundary between the jackpot priority notification period and the ambiguous notification period) and the number of ambiguous notifications (the number of spins that marks the boundary between the ambiguous notification period and the rescue priority notification period) are calculated from the break-even count (see S1275 and S1276 in FIG. 120), and the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period are set (details will be described later in FIGS. 111 to 113).

Next, the RTC 245 has the function of keeping track of the current date and time, and is composed of an RTC control unit 246, a register 247, and an RTC power supply 248. The RTC control unit 246 uses (controls) the register 247 to perform various controls, such as keeping track of the current date and time. The register 247 has a register table, which includes a timing register 247a.

The clock register 247a is a register for measuring the current date and time, and the register value as current date and time information is updated every second. In this embodiment, the current date and time information in the clock register 247a includes information that can identify the current year, month, day, hour, minute, and second.

The RTC power supply 248 is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 245, separate from the power supply for the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC control unit 246 and register 247 even when the power supply for the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Therefore, the timekeeping register 247a can update the current date and time information even when the power supply is cut off. In this embodiment, a button-type battery is used for the RTC power supply 248.

In the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A," the current time is referenced by the RTC 245, and if the current time is after 8:00 PM, a big win priority notification is made regardless of the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won (details will be described later in Figure 113).

Next, referring to Figures 111 and 112, the expected number of balls acquired in each state will be explained for the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment when a jackpot is achieved during a special symbol 1 small jackpot selection in "normal gaming state A," and when the jackpot is not achieved during the small jackpot play and the game returns to "normal gaming state A" and the special symbol is dynamically displayed until the number of times the rescue condition is met. Figures 111 and 112 are tables summarizing the difference in the average number of balls acquired for each gaming state when a special symbol 1 small jackpot is won in "normal gaming state A" of the seventh embodiment and a jackpot is achieved by playing right when the small jackpot is won, and the average number of balls acquired when a right play is not played when the small jackpot is won, the game returns to "normal gaming state A" and the special symbol is dynamically displayed again, the rescue condition is met, and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state."

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the break-even number table 222f (see Figure 113) is set based on the break-even number calculated from the tables of Figures 111 and 112. Furthermore, the audio and lamp control device 113 references the break-even number table 222f when it receives a rescue condition fulfillment number command sent from the main control device 110 when the power is turned on or when a jackpot ends, and sets values in the jackpot priority notification number storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification number storage area 223n based on the real-time base value and the number of times the rescue condition is fulfilled at that time, thereby setting the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period.

Then, when a special chart 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A," the set big win priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period are compared with the number of spins at the time of the small win, and the content of the right-hit notification effect to be performed during the OP time at the time of the small win is determined.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a break-even count value of 1 is set, and a jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period of 1 are set based on that break-even count (see Figure 91). When a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A," the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed is compared with the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period, and the content of the right-hit notification effect when the small win is won is determined.

However, there may be slight individual differences between the pachinko machines 10 installed in a hall due to the condition of the game nails, ball launching unit 112a, etc., and since players' playing methods are not the same, there is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the break-even number set for the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the break-even number for the pachinko machine 10 that is actually being played.

More specifically, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the break-even number is set to 1, assuming that the base value in the "normal gaming state" is "30." On the other hand, for example, it is conceivable that the state of the game nails, ball launch unit 112a, etc. may change over a long period of operation of the pachinko machine 10, and the winning rate for the first starting slot 64 and general winning slot 63 during left-handed play may change.

If the base value in the "normal gaming state" changes (for example, to "36"), the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine for a specific number of balls fired during left-handed play in the "normal gaming state" will change, and the number of balls used (decreased) until the number of times the rescue condition is met will also change.

In such a case, for example, even if a jackpot priority notification effect is executed as a right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot is won on special chart 1 in "normal gaming state A" (i.e., the expected number of balls that can be won by hitting the right when a small jackpot is won is higher than that by hitting the left when a small jackpot is won), it is also possible that the expected number of balls that can be won by hitting the left when a small jackpot is won is actually higher than that by hitting the right when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the break-even number is set based on the real-time base value and the number of times the rescue condition is met, which are sent as commands from the main control unit 110 to the audio and lamp control unit 113, and the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period are calculated.

By configuring it in this way, when a small win on Special Chart 1 is won in "Normal Game State A," a more accurate right-hit notification effect can be executed.

As shown in Case No. 1 in Figure 111, when the real-time base value (the value stored in the sub-base value storage area 223n, and the "Base Value" column in Figure 111) is "30" and the number of times a rescue condition is met (the value stored in the sub-rescue condition met number storage area) is "700 spins," if a special chart 1 small jackpot is won and the number of spins at the time of winning the small jackpot (the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i) is "400 spins," if a right-handed play is performed in the small jackpot game and the ball passes through the specific area 65d to win the jackpot, the average number of balls that the player can win by the end of the winning streak will be approximately 4,000 balls (the average number of balls won in this case will be "α").

The end of a winning streak here refers to the event where, when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won in "Normal Game State A," right-hand play is initiated to transition to the jackpot state, then the player goes through the "Normal Game State High Probability Time-Reduced State (Normal Game State High Probability Time-Reduced State A and Normal Game State High Probability Time-Reduced State B)" and "Normal Game State B," before returning to "Normal Game State A" again (see Figure 11).

On the other hand, if the right-hand play is not performed when the small jackpot is won and the big jackpot is not generated, the number of spins required to achieve the rescue condition is 700, and the number of spins required to achieve the small jackpot is 400, so the remaining number of spins until the rescue condition is achieved is 300.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is configured so that approximately six balls fired during left-handed play enter the first starting hole 64 per minute (so-called S1 = 6). Therefore, if left-handed play is continued, the time required until the number of times that the rescue condition is met is reached (i.e., until the remaining "300 spins" are executed) will be approximately 50 minutes (see the "Time (minutes) until the number of times that the rescue condition is met" column in Figure 111). Therefore, the number of balls fired during approximately 50 minutes of left-handed play is approximately 5,000, and since the real-time base value is "30," the number of balls paid out as prize balls during this period is approximately 1,500. In other words, the number of balls consumed during approximately 50 minutes of left-handed play (when approximately 5,000 balls are fired) is approximately 3,500 (see the "Number of balls used until the number of times that the rescue condition is met" column in Figure 111).

In addition, when the rescue condition is met enough times and the game transitions to the "normal low probability time shortened state," the average number of balls that a player can win by the end of the winning streak will be approximately 7,000 (the "Average number of balls won when rescue condition is met" column in Figure 111).

Here, the number of balls consumed from when a special 1 small jackpot is won in "normal game state A" until the number of times the rescue condition is met without generating a jackpot on that small jackpot is reached is approximately 3,500. Therefore, the average number of balls acquired from when the special 1 small jackpot is won, when the number of times the rescue condition is met and the game transitions to the "normal game low probability time shortened state," is approximately 3,500 (the average number of balls acquired in this case is "β"), calculated as "average number of balls acquired when the rescue condition is met (7,000) - number of balls used until the number of times the rescue condition is met (3,500)" (the "Average number of balls acquired (β) from when a small jackpot A is won until the game ends" column in Figure 111). Furthermore, the time from when the special 1 small jackpot is won until the number of times the rescue condition is met, the game transitions to the "normal game low probability time shortened state," and the game ends is approximately 70 minutes (the "Average time consumed (minutes) from when a small jackpot A is won until the game ends" column in Figure 111).

Therefore, in case No. 1, the average number of balls won when playing with the right hand when a small jackpot is won is approximately 4,000 (α), and the average number of balls won when playing with the left hand when a small jackpot is won is approximately 3,500 (β), so the difference in the average number of balls won in case 2 (α - β) is approximately 500 (see the "Difference (α - β)" column in Figure 111).

In other words, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the real-time base value is "30," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "400 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 500 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Similarly, in case No. 2, when the real-time base value is "30," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "442 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 10 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 3, when the real-time base value is "30," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "443 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in the player winning an average of approximately two fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 4, when the real-time base value is "30," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and a small win on special symbol 1 is won at "500 spins" in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to result in an average number of balls that the player can win being approximately 667 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

In this way, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, if a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A" when the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol at the time of the small win is within 442 spins, then the right-hand play method at the time of the small win is configured to result in a greater average number of balls won by the player than the left-hand play method at the time of the small win.

On the other hand, if a small win on Special Symbol 1 is won in "Normal Game State A" when the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and the number of spins in the dynamic display of the special symbol at the time of the small win is 443 or more, the left-handed play method at the time of the small win is configured to result in a greater average number of balls won by the player than the right-handed play method at the time of the small win.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, if the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," "443 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see Figure 113).

Next, in case No. 5, when the real-time base value is "30," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "500 spins," if a small jackpot on special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 500 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 6, when the real-time base value is "30," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "542 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 10 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 7, when the real-time base value is "30," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "543 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in the player winning an average of approximately two fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 8, when the real-time base value is "30," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "600 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in an average number of balls that the player can win being approximately 667 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, if a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A" when the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol at the time of the small win is within 542 spins, then the right-hand play method at the time of the small win is configured to result in a greater average number of balls won by the player than the left-hand play method at the time of the small win.

On the other hand, if a small win on Special Symbol 1 is won in "Normal Game State A" when the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the dynamic display of the special symbol at the time of the small win is 543 or more, the left-handed play method at the time of the small win is configured to result in a greater average number of balls won by the player than the right-handed play method at the time of the small win.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, if the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," "543 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see Figure 113).

Next, in case No. 9, when the real-time base value is "30," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "600 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 500 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 10, when the real-time base value is "30," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "642 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 10 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 11, when the real-time base value is "30," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "643 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in the player winning an average of approximately two fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 12, when the real-time base value is "30," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "700 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in an average number of balls that the player can win being approximately 667 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 642 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 643 or more, the left-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the right-hand play method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, if the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," "643 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see Figure 113).

Next, in case No. 13, when the real-time base value is "32," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "400 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 400 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 14, when the real-time base value is "32," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "435 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately three more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 15, when the real-time base value is "32," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "436 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in the player winning an average of approximately 8 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 16, when the real-time base value is "32," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "500 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in an average number of balls that the player can win being approximately 733 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 435 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 436 or more spins, the left-handed playing method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the right-handed playing method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," "436 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see Figure 113).

Next, in case No. 17, when the real-time base value is "32," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "500 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 400 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 18, when the real-time base value is "32," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "535 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately three more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 19, when the real-time base value is "32," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "536 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in the player winning an average of approximately 8 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 20, when the real-time base value is "32," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "600 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the average number of balls that the player can win is approximately 733 fewer when playing with the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won than when playing with the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 535 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 536 or more, the left-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the right-hand play method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," "536 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see Figure 113).

Next, in case No. 21, when the real-time base value is "32," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "600 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 400 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 22, when the real-time base value is "32," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "635 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately three more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 23, when the real-time base value is "32," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "636 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in the player winning an average of approximately 8 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 24, when the real-time base value is "32," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "700 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in an average number of balls that the player can win being approximately 733 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 635 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 636 or more spins, the left-handed playing method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls that the player can win than the right-handed playing method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," "636 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see Figure 113).

Next, as shown in Figure 112, in case No. 1, when the real-time base value is "34," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and a small win on special symbol 1 is won at "400 spins" in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately 300 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 2, when the real-time base value is "34," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "427 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately three more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 3, when the real-time base value is "34," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "428 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in the player winning an average of approximately 8 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 4, when the real-time base value is 34, the number of times the rescue condition is met is 700 spins, and a small win on special symbol 1 is won at 500 spins in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to result in an average number of balls that the player can win being approximately 800 less than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 427 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 428 or more spins, the left-handed playing method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the right-handed playing method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," "428 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see Figure 113).

Next, in case No. 5, when the real-time base value is 34, the number of times the rescue condition has been met is 800 spins, and a small win on special symbol 1 is won at 500 spins in the low probability state for the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately 300 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 6, when the real-time base value is "34," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "527 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately three more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 7, when the real-time base value is "34," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "528 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in the player winning an average of approximately 8 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 8, when the real-time base value is "34," the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "600 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in an average number of balls that the player can win being approximately 800 less than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 527 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 528 or more spins, the left-handed playing method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the right-handed playing method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," "528 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see Figure 113).

Next, in case No. 9, when the real-time base value is 34, the number of times the rescue condition has been met is 900 spins, and a small win on special symbol 1 is won at 600 spins in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately 300 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 10, when the real-time base value is "34," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "627 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately three more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 11, when the real-time base value is "34," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "628 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in the player winning an average of approximately 8 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 12, when the real-time base value is "34," the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "700 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in an average number of balls that the player can win being approximately 800 less than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 627 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls that the player can win than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 628 or more spins, the left-handed playing method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls that the player can win than the right-handed playing method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," "628 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see Figure 113).

Next, in case No. 13, when the real-time base value is "36," the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "400 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 200 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 14, when the real-time base value is "36," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "418 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 8 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 15, when the real-time base value is "36," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "419 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in the player winning an average of approximately three fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 16, when the real-time base value is "36," the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "500 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in an average number of balls that the player can win being approximately 867 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 418 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 419 or more, the left-handed playing method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the right-handed playing method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," "419 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see Figure 113).

Next, in case No. 17, when the real-time base value is "36," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "500 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 200 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 18, when the real-time base value is "36," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "518 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 8 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 19, when the real-time base value is "36," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "519 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in the player winning an average of approximately three fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 20, when the real-time base value is "36," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "800 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "600 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in an average number of balls that the player can win being approximately 867 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 518 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 519 or more, the left-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the right-hand play method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," "519 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see Figure 113).

Next, in case No. 21, when the real-time base value is "36," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "600 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 200 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 22, when the real-time base value is "36," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "618 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 8 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 23, when the real-time base value is "36," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "619 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in the player winning an average of approximately three fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in case No. 24, when the real-time base value is "36," the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "900 spins," and the number of spins in the low probability state for the special symbol is "700 spins," if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to result in an average number of balls that the player can win being approximately 867 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 618 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 619 or more, the left-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls being won by the player than the right-hand play method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," "619 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see Figure 113).

In this way, by referencing the number of times the rescue condition is met and the real-time base value, the break-even number can be calculated more accurately, and the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period can be determined more accurately.As a result, more accurate suggestion effects can be executed in the right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1.

Next, the break-even count table 222f of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 113. Figure 113 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the break-even count table 222f stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. As described above, the break-even count table 222f is set based on the expected number of balls won table for each state in Figures 111 and 112. In addition, the break-even count table 222f defines the break-even count, jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period based on the real-time base value and the number of times the rescue condition is met. When a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A," the sound and lamp control device 113 compares the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won with the big win priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period specified in the break-even count table 222f, and determines the content of the right-hit notification effect to be executed during the OP time of the small win game.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 113, if the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," the break-even number is set to "443 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 423 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "424 to 463 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "464 to 700 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," the break-even number is set to "543 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 523 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "524 to 563 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "564 to 800 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," the break-even number is set to "643 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 623 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "624 to 663 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "664 to 900 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," the break-even number is set to "436 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 416 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "417 to 456 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "457 to 700 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," the break-even number is set to "536 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 516 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "517 to 556 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "557 to 800 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," the break-even number is set to "636 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 616 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "617 to 656 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "657 to 900 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," the break-even number is set to "428 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 408 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "409 to 448 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "449 to 700 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," the break-even number is set to "528 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 508 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "509 to 548 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "549 to 800 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," the break-even number is set to "628 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 608 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "609 to 648 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "649 to 900 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," the break-even number is set to "419 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 399 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "400 to 439 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "440 to 700 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," the break-even number is set to "519 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 499 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "500 to 539 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "540 to 800 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," the break-even number is set to "619 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 599 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "600 to 639 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "640 to 900 spins."

Note that if the real-time base value is less than "30", it will refer to "30", if it is "31", it will refer to "32", if it is "33", it will refer to "34", if it is "35", it will refer to "36", and if it is greater than "37", it will refer to "36".

Also, as mentioned above, if the left-hand play method is executed when a small jackpot is won and the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when a small jackpot is won is greater than the break-even number, the average time consumed from the time the small jackpot is won to the end of the winning streak due to the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" will be approximately 60 minutes (see Figures 111 and 112).

For example, if a pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is being played at a pachinko hall and a small jackpot on special number 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period 30 minutes before the hall closes, the player would normally win a larger average number of balls if they played with the left hand when they won a small jackpot. However, if they continue playing with the left hand in this situation without hitting a jackpot, the hall may close before the rescue condition is met, or while the rescue condition is met and the state transitions to the "normal number low probability time shortened state" and a winning streak is continuing, which could result in the player winning fewer balls than they would have otherwise won.

For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment takes into account the closing time of a normal pachinko hall, and is configured to refer to the current time using the RTC 245 (see Figure 110) when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A," and if the current time is after 8:00 p.m., to issue a jackpot priority notification regardless of the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol was executed when the small win was won.

This configuration allows players to play the pachinko machine 10 with peace of mind, even when the pachinko hall is nearing closing time.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 114 to 118, the control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. The main differences between the control processes in the second embodiment and the seventh embodiment are the addition of a lottery process for determining the number of times a rescue condition is met, and the addition of a process for sending commands related to the number of times the rescue condition is met and the base value to the voice lamp control unit 113.

First, Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment. The difference between the startup process in the first embodiment and the startup process in the seventh embodiment is that a lottery process for determining the number of times a rescue condition is met has been added.

In the startup process of the seventh embodiment, once processing in S117 is completed, a lottery process for determining the number of times the rescue condition is met is executed (S161) to set the number of times the rescue condition is met, and processing proceeds to S113.

Now, with reference to Figure 115, the rescue condition fulfillment count lottery process (S161) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. Figure 115 is a flowchart showing the rescue condition fulfillment count lottery process (S161) in the seventh embodiment.

This rescue condition fulfillment count lottery process (S161) is executed when the RAM 203 is initialized when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and when a jackpot ends, i.e., when the rescue condition fulfillment count is initialized, and is a process for newly setting the rescue condition fulfillment count.

In this rescue condition fulfillment count lottery process (S161), first, the number of times the rescue condition has been fulfilled is determined by lottery (S141). In this lottery process, a value of 1 is randomly selected from the three values (either "700 times," "800 times," or "900 times") set in the rescue condition fulfillment count table 202n (see FIG. 109).

Next, the lottery result from the processing of S141 is stored in the rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 203q (S142), this rescue condition fulfillment count lottery processing (S161) ends, and the process returns to the startup processing (see Figure 114).

Returning to the startup process in Figure 114, the explanation will continue. After the processing of S113 is completed, a rescue condition satisfaction count command is generated and set in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203 (S162), and the processing proceeds to S163.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the sound and lamp control device 113 does not have a power backup function, and the RAM 223 within the sound and lamp control device 113 is initialized by the start-up process (see S1010 in Figure 119). Therefore, each time the pachinko machine 10 is started up, a setting value command and a rescue condition fulfillment count command are set and sent from the main control device 110 to the sound and lamp control device 113.

The rescue condition fulfillment count command set here is sent to the voice and lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in Figure 40). When the voice and lamp control device 113 receives the rescue condition fulfillment count command, it calculates the number of jackpot priority notifications and the number of ambiguous notifications from the number of rescue condition fulfillment times, and stores each piece of information in each area provided in RAM 223 (described below in Figure 120).

Next, referring to Figure 116, we will explain the winning process (S203), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 in the seventh embodiment. Figure 116 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S203) in the seventh embodiment. The difference between the winning process (S203) in the second embodiment and the winning process (S203) in the seventh embodiment is that a process for clearing the rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 203q has been added when a jackpot occurs.

In the winning process (S203) of the seventh embodiment, once the process of S603 is completed, the rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 203q is cleared (S604), and the process proceeds to S605.

Next, referring to Figure 117, we will explain the jackpot termination process (S622), which is one process of the win process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. Figure 117 is a flowchart showing the jackpot termination process (S610) of the seventh embodiment. The difference between the jackpot termination process (S610) of the second embodiment and the jackpot termination process (S610) of the seventh embodiment is that processing related to the number of times a rescue condition is met has been added.

In the jackpot end processing (S610) of the seventh embodiment, once processing of S6611 is completed, a rescue condition fulfillment count lottery process is executed (S161) to set the number of rescue condition fulfillment times, a rescue condition fulfillment count command is generated based on the set number of rescue condition fulfillment times, and set in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203 (S162), and processing proceeds to S6613.

Next, with reference to Figure 118, the base value processing (S251) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. Figure 118 is a flowchart showing the base value processing (S251) in the seventh embodiment. The difference between the base value processing (S251) in the second embodiment and the base value processing (S251) in the seventh embodiment is that a command setting process for sending to the audio lamp control device 113 based on the calculated base value has been added.

In the base value processing (S251) of the seventh embodiment, after completing the processing of S853, a base value command is set (S854) and this base value processing (S251) is terminated. The base value command set in the processing of S854 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next (see S201 in Figure 40).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a base value command, it stores the received real-time base value in the sub-base value storage area 223n. Then, when the power is turned on and when a jackpot ends, it calculates the number of jackpot priority notifications and the number of ambiguous notifications based on the real-time base value stored in the sub-base value storage area 223n and the number of times the rescue condition is met stored in the sub-rescue condition met count storage area 223h (described below in Figure 120).

Next, with reference to Figures 119 to 123, the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. The main difference between the control processes in the second embodiment and those in the seventh embodiment is that processes related to the base value command and the number of times the relief condition is met command have been added.

First, referring to Figure 119, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio and lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. Figure 119 is a flowchart showing the startup process of the seventh embodiment. The startup process of the second embodiment differs from the startup process of the seventh embodiment in that the process of storing values in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n has been eliminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period are each set to a value of 1, and therefore, during the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113, values are stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n (see Figure 92).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and relief priority notification period are determined based on the current number of times the relief condition is met and the base value, so values are not stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n during the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113; instead, they are stored during the relief-related command reception process (described below in FIG. 120).

Next, referring to Figure 120, the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. Figure 120 is a flowchart showing the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) in the seventh embodiment. The difference between the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) in the second embodiment and the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) in the seventh embodiment is that processing related to the base value command and the rescue condition satisfaction count command has been added.

In the seventh embodiment's rescue-related command reception process (S1214), first, it is determined whether a base value command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1271). If the determination results in a base value command being received (S1271: Yes), the received real-time base value is stored in the sub-base value storage area 223n (S1272), and the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) is terminated, returning to the command determination process (see FIG. 62).

If it is determined in the processing of S1271 that a base value command has not been received (S1271: No), it is then determined whether a rescue condition fulfillment count command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1273). If the determination result shows that a rescue condition fulfillment count command has been received (S1273: Yes), the received rescue condition fulfillment count is stored in the sub-rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 223h (S1274). Then, based on the rescue condition fulfillment count and the real-time base value stored in the sub-base value storage area 223n, the break-even count table 222f (see FIG. 113) is used to calculate the number of jackpot priority notifications and the number of ambiguous notifications. These are stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n, respectively (S1275 and S1276). This rescue-related command reception processing (S1214) is then terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 62).

As mentioned above, the processes of S1275 and S1276 are calculated by referring to the break-even count table 222f (see Figure 113). For example, if the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 times," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 423 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "424 to 463 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "464 to 700 spins," so "424 spins" is stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m, and "464 spins" is stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1273 that the rescue condition satisfaction count command has not been received (S1273: No), the processing proceeds to S1277.

Next, referring to FIG. 121, the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) in the seventh embodiment. The difference between the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) in the second embodiment and the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) in the seventh embodiment is that a current time determination process has been added.

In the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) of the seventh embodiment, if the result of the determination in S1374 is that the sub-rescue set flag 223j is not on, i.e., if the sub-rescue set flag 223j is off (S1374: No), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has never been reached since the previous jackpot (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power was turned on), so the current time is then read from the timing register 247a of the RTC 245, and it is determined whether the current time is after 8:00 p.m. (S1375).

If it is determined in the processing of S1375 that the current time is not after 8:00 PM (S1375: No), the current time is before 8:00 PM, and the dynamic display of special symbols is executed until the number of times the rescue condition is met, and it is determined that there is time to transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" and end the consecutive win state, and processing proceeds to S1381.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1375 that the current time is after 8:00 PM (S1375: Yes), the special symbols are dynamically displayed until the number of times the rescue condition is met, and it is determined that there is no time to end the consecutive win state by transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state," and processing proceeds to S1377.

Next, referring to Figure 122, the winning effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio and lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. Figure 122 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing (S1105) in the seventh embodiment. The winning effect processing (S1105) in the second embodiment differs from the winning effect processing (S1105) in the seventh embodiment in that a process for clearing the sub-rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 223h has been added.

In the winning effect processing (S1105) of the seventh embodiment, if the result of the determination in S1401 is that a jackpot has been won (S1401: Yes), as an initialization process, the sub-rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 223h, the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m, and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n are cleared (S1422), and processing proceeds to S1403.

Next, referring to Figure 123, the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won, executed by the MPU 221 in the audio and lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. Figure 123 is a flowchart showing the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won in the seventh embodiment. The difference between the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won in the second embodiment and the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won in the seventh embodiment is the addition of a process for determining the current time.

In the seventh embodiment, in the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won, if the result of the determination in S1503 is that the sub-rescue set flag 223j is not on, i.e., if the sub-rescue set flag 223j is off (S1503: No), since the number of times the rescue condition has never been met since the previous big win (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power was turned on), the current time is then read from the timing register 247a of the RTC 245, and it is determined whether the current time is after 8:00 p.m. (S1504).

If it is determined in the processing of S1504 that the current time is not after 8:00 PM (S1504: No), the current time is before 8:00 PM, and the dynamic display of special symbols is executed until the number of times the rescue condition is met, and it is determined that there is time to transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" and end the consecutive win state, and processing proceeds to S1515.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1504 that the current time is after 8:00 PM (S1504: Yes), the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed until the number of times the rescue condition is met, and it is determined that there is no time to end the consecutive win state by transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state", and processing proceeds to S1506.

As explained above, the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to refer to the rescue condition fulfillment count table 202n when initializing the RAM 203 upon power-on and at the end of a jackpot game, and randomly select one rescue condition fulfillment count from multiple rescue condition fulfillment counts (i.e., "700 times," "800 times," or "900 times") regardless of the game status or other circumstances.

By configuring it in this way, the values for the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and relief priority notification period will no longer be unique, and multiple types of periods can be set.

As a result, it becomes difficult to determine whether the setting values have been changed when playing on the pachinko machine 10 from the time the gaming hall opens, thereby reducing the decline in operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the real-time base value and the number of times the rescue condition is met calculated by the main control device 110 are sent as a command to the voice and lamp control device 113, and the voice and lamp control device 113 is configured to calculate the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period from the real-time base value and the number of times the rescue condition is met.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to grasp the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period more accurately. As a result, it is possible to execute more accurate suggestion effects in the right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the first and second embodiments and achieves the same effects.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eighth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figure 124. The following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will focus on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first and second embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments will be assigned the same reference numerals as those of the first and second embodiments, and description thereof will be omitted.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that transition to a predetermined game state advantageous to the player after a predetermined period of time has passed, thereby awarding the player a profit. In this advantageous game state, if a predetermined condition is met through the player's play, the player can obtain prize balls.

In such gaming machines, the suggestions given to players regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period are not sufficiently satisfactory, and further improvements in the content of the suggestions are required.

Specifically, for example, if the hints regarding the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state remain the same over a given period of time, the player will not be able to understand the magnitude of the profit that the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming state occurs. Furthermore, the player will not be able to experience the excitement that would arise from changing the hints depending on the magnitude of the profit.

The present invention was invented in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide optimal suggestions regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit they will obtain if an advantageous gaming condition occurs, and increase their interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win that can result in a big win (i.e., a small win that can pass through the specific area 65d) is won in "normal gaming state A," the player is given the option of whether or not to allow the small win to result in a big win. This aims to provide a gaming machine that enriches the variety of games and can notify the player of how to play in a way that will increase the expected value of the balls that can be won.

To achieve this objective, the eighth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a variable pattern when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations, and includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area. and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is met based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, wherein the notification control means, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifies the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and includes switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, wherein the profit generating means, in the specific game state, generates the specific profit only when the specific game condition is met based on the predetermined game operation by the player when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine comprises an "ejection device" as "launching means," a "start detection area" as "starting ball entry area," a "result notification device" as "display means," a "movable device" as "variable ball entry means," "game conditions" as "update conditions," "game information" as "specific information," an "update process" as "update means," an "update state" as "specific game state," an "update end state" as "predetermined update state," an "awarded benefit" as "predetermined benefit state," a "notification mode" as "alert mode," a "display control" as "alert control means," a "discrimination control" as "determination means," a "control judgment result" as "specific judgment result," an "benefit awarding condition" as "predetermined game condition," an "award value" as "specific benefit," a "benefit awarding control" as "benefit generating means," a "predetermined time" as "predetermined timing," and a "specific time" as "specific timing."

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that it can land in the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

Furthermore, the specified benefit state may be anything that can confer some kind of benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state", the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, the light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update status of the specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable entry device (large entry port), small entry port, regular electric entry port, non-electric entry port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specified gaming condition, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state" as a specific gaming state, the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, the light emission control of a specific emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the specific information is information that is updated to new content when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and is capable of identifying a predetermined period based on the update status, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be the value of a counter stored in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern began, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern stopped, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, etc. These include the remaining number of times the display will be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening, the time after which the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening stops, the number of wins when one of the openings such as the big prize opening opens, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern on the display means, the time from the start of the startup process of the gaming machine, the setting values of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall staff that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the updating means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or may be a hardware circuit update.

The determination means may be any means that performs a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area, such as starting winning processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state that indicates that the result of updating specific information by the update means has resulted in a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time period passing, a specified period passing, the use of all of a predetermined series of data, the detection of a ball entering a specified area, or the detection of a frame button input by the player.

The starting ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to change and be displayed when a gaming ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 starting area, a special ball 2 starting area, or a regular ball starting area.

Furthermore, the display means may be any device capable of announcing the lottery results for a specified symbol, such as a third symbol display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying information on each display device.

Furthermore, a specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means and becomes a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, or game states in which the update means does not operate. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated through so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state," a "time-shortened state," the state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined jackpot occurs, the state from when the power is turned on until the predetermined jackpot ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, the state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that results in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, the state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of a special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry slot which will start the jackpot game, a state where the dynamic display of a special symbol is not being executed and the ball is waiting to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to press a frame button while the dynamic display of a special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a losing prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, a dynamic display of a special pattern corresponding to a drop lottery, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern is executed reaches a specific number of times, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a prize, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a losing prize, a transition to a specific game state, etc.

Furthermore, the predetermined game conditions may be conditions that are met when a player performs a predetermined game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a predetermined area, a predetermined number of fired game balls entering a predetermined area, a fired game ball not entering a predetermined area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a predetermined area and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, a player operating an effect button, a lottery being held when a player operates an effect button and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being less than a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the dynamic display of the next special pattern can be started to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes passing, an instruction to execute various processes being issued, and a command to execute various processes being issued.

Furthermore, the "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update status of specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value exceeds a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events; for example, by varying the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their color, their display area, their display density, their display time, and the number of times they are displayed, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the firing mode, indications of whether firing is possible, indications of whether play is possible, indications of the timing of operation execution on the operating means, indications of the game status, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, distinctions between probability variable and normal patterns, distinctions between time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and distinctions between probability variable and time-saving patterns.

Here, referring to Figure 124, we will explain the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Figure 124 is a diagram showing the progression of effects on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A."

In more detail, Figure 124(a) shows the state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "550" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period), the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops. Figure 124(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state in Figure 124(a).

Figure 124(c) shows a state in which the player is notified that the ball has passed through specific area 65d due to a right-hand hit from the state in Figure 124(b), and Figure 124(d) shows a transition from the state in Figure 124(c) to a jackpot state.

Figure 124 (a) shows a state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal gaming state A" is at "58" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), a small win on special symbol 1 is won, the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops.

In Figure 124 (a), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "550", indicating that the break-even count table 222f shown in Figure 91 is showing a variable effect during the ambiguous notification period.

Furthermore, the third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that a special chart 1 small jackpot has been won. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, when comparing the expected number of balls that a player can win when playing with the right-hand hitting method when a small jackpot is won and when playing with the left-hand hitting method when a small jackpot is won during the ambiguous notification period, the difference is so slight that it is difficult to say that either hitting method will clearly result in a higher average number of balls won.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 124(a), to suggest that there will be no significant difference in the expected value of balls that can be won in the small win game that will be played subsequently, regardless of whether or not right-hand play is played, the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row on the left and right of the third symbol 81b, and the main symbol with the words "challenge symbol" written on it is stopped in the central symbol row.

Next, Figure 124(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed, following the state shown in Figure 124(a).

In addition, a text message 81g asking "Right hit?" is displayed in the middle right part of the main display area Dm, giving the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

Furthermore, in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, a text message 81h is displayed saying "Get a V and you'll win the jackpot," which also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

Also, a character image 81j of a woman tilting her head is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm, which also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. Furthermore, a main display right-hand play instruction 89 is displayed on the top right side of the main display area Dm, suggesting that right-hand play will be used in the small win game.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the right-hit notification effect when a small special 1 win is won during the ambiguous period is configured to execute a completely different notification effect from the right-hit notification effect when a small special 1 win is won during the jackpot priority period and the rescue priority period (see Figures 97(b) and 97(d)).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to indicate to the player that this is a different period from the jackpot priority period and the rescue priority period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, Figure 124(c) shows a state in which, from the state in Figure 124(b), a notification is displayed that the ball has passed through the specific area 65d due to the player's right-hand hit. In the center of the main display area Dm, a text message 81o reading "V acquired" is displayed, indicating that the ball has passed through the specific area 65d due to the player's right-hand hit, and that the state will transition to a jackpot.

Next, Figure 124(d) shows that the state has transitioned from Figure 124(c) to a jackpot state. In the upper left part of the main display area Dm, a jackpot round display 81o for "2R" is displayed, indicating that the state has transitioned to a jackpot state based on the ball passing through the specific area 65d during a small jackpot game, and that the second round has begun. In addition, a character image 81j of a dancing woman is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is configured so that when a small win on special chart 1 is won in "normal game state A," the machine transitions to the big win state only if the ball passes through the specific area 65d as a result of the player's right-hand play.

By configuring it in this way, even if a player wins a small prize on Special Chart 1 in "Normal Game State A," the game will not transition to a big prize state unless the player plays with the right hand and the ball passes through the specific area 65d.

As a result, the player can confirm the right-hit notification effect that is executed when a small win on Special Chart 1 is won in "Normal Game State A," and can decide whether or not to trigger a big win by playing right and passing through specific area 65d, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment has the same configuration as the first and second embodiments and achieves the same effects.

Ninth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a ninth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Fig. 125. The pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the same components and processes as those in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that transition to a predetermined game state advantageous to the player after a predetermined period of time has passed, thereby awarding the player a profit. In this advantageous game state, if a predetermined condition is met through the player's play, the player can obtain prize balls.

In such gaming machines, the suggestions given to players regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period are not sufficiently satisfactory, and further improvements in the content of the suggestions are required.

Specifically, for example, if the hints regarding the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state remain the same over a given period of time, the player will not be able to understand the magnitude of the profit that the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming state occurs. Furthermore, the player will not be able to experience the excitement that would arise from changing the hints depending on the magnitude of the profit.

The present invention was invented in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide optimal suggestions regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit they will obtain if an advantageous gaming condition occurs, and increase their interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win that can result in a big win (i.e., a small win that can pass through the specific area 65d) is won in "normal gaming state A," the player is given the option of whether or not to allow the small win to result in a big win. This aims to provide a gaming machine that enriches the variety of games and can notify the player of how to play in a way that will increase the expected value of the balls that can be won.

To achieve this objective, the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area. and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is met based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, wherein the notification control means, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifies the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and includes switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, wherein the profit generating means, in the specific game state, generates the specific profit only when the specific game condition is met based on the predetermined game operation by the player when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine comprises an "ejection device" as "launching means," a "start detection area" as "starting ball entry area," a "result notification device" as "display means," a "movable device" as "variable ball entry means," "game conditions" as "update conditions," "game information" as "specific information," an "update process" as "update means," an "update state" as "specific game state," an "update end state" as "predetermined update state," an "awarded benefit" as "predetermined benefit state," a "notification mode" as "alert mode," a "display control" as "alert control means," a "discrimination control" as "determination means," a "control judgment result" as "specific judgment result," an "benefit awarding condition" as "predetermined game condition," an "award value" as "specific benefit," a "benefit awarding control" as "benefit generating means," a "predetermined time" as "predetermined timing," and a "specific time" as "specific timing."

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that it can land in the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

Furthermore, the specified benefit state may be anything that can confer some kind of benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state", the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, the light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update status of the specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable entry device (large entry port), small entry port, regular electric entry port, non-electric entry port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specified gaming condition, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state" as a specific gaming state, the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, the light emission control of a specific emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the specific information is information that is updated to new content when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and is capable of identifying a predetermined period based on the update status, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be the value of a counter stored in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern began, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern stopped, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, etc. These include the remaining number of times the display will be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening, the time after which the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening stops, the number of wins when one of the openings such as the big prize opening opens, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern on the display means, the time from the start of the startup process of the gaming machine, the setting values of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall staff that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the updating means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or may be a hardware circuit update.

The determination means may be any means that performs a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area, such as starting winning processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state that indicates that the result of updating specific information by the update means has resulted in a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time period passing, a specified period passing, the use of all of a predetermined series of data, the detection of a ball entering a specified area, or the detection of a frame button input by the player.

The starting ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to change and be displayed when a gaming ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 starting area, a special ball 2 starting area, or a regular ball starting area.

Furthermore, the display means may be any device capable of announcing the lottery results for a specified symbol, such as a third symbol display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying information on each display device.

Furthermore, a specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means and becomes a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, or game states in which the update means does not operate. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated through so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state," a "time-shortened state," the state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined jackpot occurs, the state from when the power is turned on until the predetermined jackpot ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, the state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that results in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, the state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of a special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry slot which will start the jackpot game, a state where the dynamic display of a special symbol is not being executed and the ball is waiting to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to press a frame button while the dynamic display of a special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a losing prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, a dynamic display of a special pattern corresponding to a drop lottery, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern is executed reaches a specific number of times, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a prize, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a losing prize, a transition to a specific game state, etc.

Furthermore, the predetermined game conditions may be conditions that are met when a player performs a predetermined game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a predetermined area, a predetermined number of fired game balls entering a predetermined area, a fired game ball not entering a predetermined area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a predetermined area and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, a player operating an effect button, a lottery being held when a player operates an effect button and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being less than a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the dynamic display of the next special pattern can be started to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes passing, an instruction to execute various processes being issued, and a command to execute various processes being issued.

Furthermore, the "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update status of specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value exceeds a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events; for example, by varying the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their color, their display area, their display density, their display time, and the number of times they are displayed, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the firing mode, indications of whether firing is possible, indications of whether play is possible, indications of the timing of operation execution on the operating means, indications of the game status, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, distinctions between probability variable and normal patterns, distinctions between time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and distinctions between probability variable and time-saving patterns.

Now, with reference to Figure 125, we will explain the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. Figure 125 is a diagram showing the progression of effects on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal gaming state A."

In more detail, Figure 125(a) shows the state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period), the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops. Figure 125(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state in Figure 125(a).

Furthermore, Figure 125(c) shows the state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops. Figure 125(d) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Figure 125(c).

Figure 125(a) shows a state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), a small win on special symbol 1 is won, the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops.

In Figure 125 (a), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. The value of the rescue counter 203r is "58", indicating that the variable effect is occurring during the jackpot priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in Figure 28.

Furthermore, the third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special symbol 1 small jackpot has been won. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is configured so that, during the jackpot priority notification period, the right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won gives the player a higher expected number of balls to win than the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 125(a), the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row of the third symbol 81b to suggest that the player will play a right-hand hit in the small jackpot game that will be executed subsequently, thereby generating a jackpot game.

Next, Figure 125(b) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is currently being performed, following the state in Figure 125(a). A main display right-hit instruction 89 is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, suggesting that the player perform a right-hit game during the small win game.

In addition, the upper right portion of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81c that reads "Hit right," and the upper left portion of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81d that reads "Aim for V," both of which are messages suggesting right-hand play. Furthermore, a V-acquired suggestion display 81q is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. This V-acquired suggestion display 81q is made up of a V-acquired payout suggestion message 81q1 and a V-acquired payout suggestion symbol 81q2, displayed on the left side, and a post-jackpot payout suggestion message 81q3 and a post-jackpot payout suggestion symbol 81q4, displayed on the right side.

The upper left portion of the V-winning suggestion display 81q displays a V-winning ball output suggestion message 81q1 that reads "Win a V to win a ball output," and the lower left portion of the V-winning suggestion display 81q displays a symbol of a winning ball in a money box and a V-winning ball output suggestion symbol 81q2 with a "circle" in front of the symbol. Both the V-winning ball output suggestion message 81q1 and the V-winning ball output suggestion symbol 81q2 indicate the number of balls that can be won if a right-hand hit is performed during the currently active small win game, causing the ball to pass through the specific area 65d and triggering a jackpot.

In addition, the upper right portion of the V-winning suggestion display 81q displays a post-jackpot ball payout suggestion message 81q3 that reads, "Will a rush start after a jackpot?", and the lower right portion of the V-winning suggestion display 81q displays a symbol suggesting a larger number of balls than the V-winning ball payout suggestion symbol 81q2, as well as a post-jackpot ball payout suggestion symbol 81q4 with a "?" mark in front of the symbol. Both the post-jackpot ball payout suggestion message 81q3 and the post-jackpot ball payout suggestion symbol 81q4 suggest the number of balls that can be won in the game state after a jackpot has occurred in the currently ongoing small jackpot game (i.e., "Normal High Probability Time Reduced State A" (see Figure 11)), but the presence of a "?" mark on the post-jackpot ball payout suggestion symbol 81q4 suggests that the possibility of winning a large number of balls in the game state after a jackpot is unclear.

Thus, Figure 125(b) suggests that a jackpot will be generated in the currently running small jackpot game, making it possible to win a certain amount of balls, but it is unclear how many balls will be won in the game state that will be transitioned to after the jackpot, suggesting that it is unclear whether a large amount of balls will be won overall.

Next, Figure 125(c) shows a state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal gaming state A" is at "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), the variable effect ends, and the third symbol stops.

In Figure 125 (c), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "637", indicating that this is a variable effect during the rescue priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in Figure 28.

Furthermore, the third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special symbol 1 small jackpot has been won. Note that, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, during the rescue priority notification period, the expected value of balls that a player can win is higher when playing left-handed when a small jackpot is won than when playing right-handed when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 125(c), to suggest that the expected value of balls that can be won will be higher if the right-hand play is not performed and a big win play is not generated in the small win play that will be executed subsequently, the same pattern (here, the number "2") is stopped in each pattern row on the left and right of the third pattern 81b, and the main pattern with the words "challenge pattern" written on it is stopped in the central pattern row.

Next, Figure 125(d) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is currently being performed, following the state in Figure 125(c). A main display right-hit instruction 89 is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, suggesting that the player perform a right-hit game during the small win game.

In addition, the upper right portion of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81c that reads "Right hit?", and the upper left portion of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81d that reads "Win V for jackpot," giving the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. Furthermore, the center portion of the main display area Dm displays a suggestion display 81r for when a V is not obtained. This suggestion display 81r for when a V is not obtained is composed of a message 81r1 suggesting ball payout when a V is not obtained and a symbol 81r2 suggesting ball payout when a V is not obtained, displayed on the left side, and a message 81r3 suggesting ball payout when a rescue condition is met and a symbol 81r4 suggesting ball payout when a rescue condition is met, displayed on the right side.

The upper left portion of the V-winning suggestion display 81q displays a message 81r1 suggesting a payout when no V is won, reading "No payout if no V passes," while the lower left portion of the V-winning suggestion display 81q displays a symbol of a winning ball in a money box and a symbol 81r2 suggesting a payout when no V is won, with an "X" in front of the symbol. Both the message 81r1 suggesting a payout when no V is won and the symbol 81r2 suggest the payout that can be won if a right-hand hit is not performed in the currently active small win game, and the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 65d, thereby not generating a jackpot. The "X" in front of the symbol 81r2 suggesting a payout when no V is won suggests that it will be impossible or difficult to win a payout by not allowing the ball to pass through the specific area 65d.

In addition, the upper right portion of the V-acquired indication display 81q displays a message 81r3 suggesting the payout when the rescue condition is met, reading "Enter rush mode when rescue condition is met." The lower right portion of the V-acquired indication display 81q displays a symbol suggesting the payout of a larger number of balls than the V-acquired ball payout symbol 81q2, as well as a symbol 81r4 suggesting the payout when the rescue condition is met, with a "circle" in front of the symbol. Both the message 81r3 suggesting the payout when the rescue condition is met and the symbol 81r4 suggest the payout that can be obtained in the game state (i.e., the "normal low-probability time shortened state" (see Figure 11)) to which the player will transition if the rescue condition is met by continuing left-handed play without generating a jackpot in the currently ongoing small jackpot game. The symbol 81r4 suggesting the payout when the rescue condition is met indicates that it will be easy or possible to obtain a large number of balls in the game state after the rescue condition is met.

Thus, Figure 125(d) suggests that no jackpot will be generated in the currently running small jackpot game, and that a certain amount of balls will not be won, but that if the rescue conditions are met by continuing left-handed play, it will be easy or possible to win a large amount of balls in the game state to which it will transition, and that this may ultimately lead to the winning of more balls than the game state shown in Figure 125(b) (i.e., "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A" (see Figure 11)).

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, in the right-hit notification effect (i.e., the jackpot priority notification effect) when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the jackpot priority notification period, although a certain number of balls can be won by using the right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won, the number of balls won in the game state to which the player transitions after a jackpot based on a small jackpot win is unclear, and the possibility of a large number of balls being won overall is unclear.

In addition, in the right-hit notification effect (i.e., the rescue priority notification effect) when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the rescue priority notification period, by not generating a jackpot state based on a small jackpot win, it is possible to easily win a large number of balls in the game state transitioned to by using the left-hit play method when a small jackpot is won, even though a certain amount of balls cannot be won, and as a result, it is possible to win more balls than with the right-hit play method when a small jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this way, when a small win on Special Chart 1 is won in "Normal Game State A," the player can choose between two play methods: a right-hand play method when a small win is won, or a left-hand play method when a small win is won.

As a result, if a player wins a small prize on Special Chart 1 in "Normal Game State A," by checking the content of the right-hit notification effect that is executed during the OP time of the small prize game, the player can determine whether choosing the right-hit play method when a small prize is won or the left-hit play method when a small prize is won will result in a higher average number of balls won, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and achieves the same effects.

Tenth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a tenth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figures 126 to 129. The pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the same components and processes as those in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, during dynamic display of special symbols in "normal gaming state A," the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r (see Figure 89 (a)).

However, the display format of the relief counter 203r in the first embodiment is uniform, and further improvement in the suggested content is required.

Specifically, for example, if the display mode of the rescue counter 203r is uniform, it will be difficult for the player to understand the intent of the text message 81a. Furthermore, the player will not be able to enjoy the excitement that comes from the changes indicated by the value of the rescue counter 203r.

The tenth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 was invented in consideration of the above-mentioned problems, and aims to optimally change the display mode of specific information over a predetermined period of time, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit they can obtain when an advantageous gaming state occurs, and increase their interest in the display mode of specific information.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the display mode of the rescue counter 203r is changed depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed in "normal game state A" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period or rescue priority notification period), thereby aiming to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to guess and consider the game method to be used if they win a small jackpot on special symbol 1 in the current game state.

To achieve this objective, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a notification control means for issuing a notification when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area. and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is met based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means. The notification control means, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifies the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a specific timing before a specific period before the specific information reaches the specified updated state, and includes switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specific timing. The display means includes specific display means for displaying based on the specific information, and the specific display means changes the display mode depending on the number of times the variable display is executed in the specific game state.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine comprises an "ejection device" as "launching means," a "start detection area" as "starting ball entry area," a "result notification device" as "display means," a "movable device" as "variable ball entry means," "game conditions" as "update conditions," "game information" as "specific information," an "update process" as "update means," an "update state" as "specific game state," an "update end state" as "predetermined update state," an "awarded benefit" as "predetermined benefit state," a "notification mode" as "alert mode," a "display control" as "alert control means," a "discrimination control" as "determination means," a "control judgment result" as "specific judgment result," an "benefit awarding condition" as "predetermined game condition," an "award value" as "specific benefit," a "benefit awarding control" as "benefit generating means," a "predetermined time" as "predetermined timing," a "specific time" as "specific timing," and an "alert function" as "specific display means."

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that it can land in the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

Furthermore, the specified benefit state may be anything that can confer some kind of benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state", the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, the light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update status of the specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable entry device (large entry port), small entry port, regular electric entry port, non-electric entry port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specified gaming condition, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state" as a specific gaming state, the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, the light emission control of a specific emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the specific information is information that is updated to new content when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and is capable of identifying a predetermined period based on the update status, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be the value of a counter stored in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern began, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern stopped, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, etc. These include the remaining number of times the display will be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening, the time after which the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening stops, the number of wins when one of the openings such as the big prize opening opens, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern on the display means, the time from the start of the startup process of the gaming machine, the setting values of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall staff that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the updating means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or may be a hardware circuit update.

The determination means may be any means that performs a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area, such as starting winning processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state that indicates that the result of updating specific information by the update means has resulted in a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time period passing, a specified period passing, the use of all of a predetermined series of data, the detection of a ball entering a specified area, or the detection of a frame button input by the player.

The starting ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to change and be displayed when a gaming ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 starting area, a special ball 2 starting area, or a regular ball starting area.

Furthermore, the display means may be any device capable of announcing the lottery results for a specified symbol, such as a third symbol display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying information on each display device.

Furthermore, a specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means and becomes a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, or game states in which the update means does not operate. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated through so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state," a "time-shortened state," the state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined jackpot occurs, the state from when the power is turned on until the predetermined jackpot ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, the state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that results in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, the state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of a special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry slot which will start the jackpot game, a state where the dynamic display of a special symbol is not being executed and the ball is waiting to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to press a frame button while the dynamic display of a special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a losing prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, a dynamic display of a special pattern corresponding to a drop lottery, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern is executed reaches a specific number of times, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a prize, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a losing prize, a transition to a specific game state, etc.

Furthermore, the predetermined game conditions may be conditions that are met when a player performs a predetermined game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a predetermined area, a predetermined number of fired game balls entering a predetermined area, a fired game ball not entering a predetermined area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a predetermined area and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, a player operating an effect button, a lottery being held when a player operates an effect button and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being less than a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the dynamic display of the next special pattern can be started to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes passing, an instruction to execute various processes being issued, and a command to execute various processes being issued.

Furthermore, the "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update status of specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value exceeds a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events; for example, by varying the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their color, their display area, their display density, their display time, and the number of times they are displayed, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the firing mode, indications of whether firing is possible, indications of whether play is possible, indications of the timing of operation execution on the operating means, indications of the game status, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, distinctions between probability variable and normal patterns, distinctions between time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and distinctions between probability variable and time-saving patterns.

Furthermore, the "specific display means" may be anything that has a display function based on specific information, such as a display based on the values of various counters that count specific parameters, a display based on the contents of various storage memories that store specific calculation results, a display based on the updated contents of a list that is updated constantly or when specific conditions are met, or a display based on various flags that determine specific states.

Now, with reference to Figure 126, the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. Figure 126 is a flowchart showing the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the tenth embodiment. The difference between the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the first embodiment and the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the tenth embodiment is that a sub-rescue counter display process has been added.

In the tenth embodiment, in the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307), once the processing of S1358 or S1359 is completed, a sub-rescue counter display process is executed (S1361) to perform display processing of the sub-rescue counter 223i, and this display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation performance process (see FIG. 66).

Now, with reference to Figure 127, we will explain the sub-rescue counter display process (S1361) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment. Figure 127 is a flowchart showing this sub-rescue counter display process (S1361).

This sub rescue counter display process (S1361) sets a command to set the display mode of the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i that is displayed during the variable display of special symbols in the "normal game state."

In this sub-rescue counter display process (S1361), it is first determined whether the sub-rescue set flag 223j is on (S1362). If the sub-rescue set flag 223j is on (S1362: Yes), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has been reached once since the previous jackpot (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power was turned on), the game state is such that it is not possible to transition to the "normal chart low probability time shortened state", and there is no need to display the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i. Therefore, S1363 to S1367 are skipped, this sub-rescue counter display process (S1361) is terminated, and the process returns to the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (see FIG. 126).

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1362 is that the sub-rescue set flag 223j is not on, i.e., if the sub-rescue set flag 223j is off (S1362: No), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has never been reached since the previous jackpot (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power was turned on), then it is determined whether the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i from the number of times the rescue condition has been met (i.e., "800") is less than 10 (S1363). If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i from the number of times the rescue condition has been met (i.e., "800") is not less than 10, i.e., if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i from the number of times the rescue condition has been met (i.e., "800") is 10 or greater (S1363: No), the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met is 10 or greater, and processing proceeds to S1365.

In the S1365 process, it is determined whether the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (i.e., "543 spins" (see FIG. 28)) (S1365). If the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1365: Yes), the variable display of the special symbol during the jackpot priority notification period is being executed, so a normal display command for display is set (S1366) (see 81a in FIG. 128(a)), this sub rescue counter display process (S1361) is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol 1 variable pattern command setting process for display (see FIG. 126).

On the other hand, in S1365, if the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is not smaller than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k, i.e., if the value of the sub-rescue counter 223i is greater than or equal to the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1365: No), the variable display of the special symbol during the rescue priority notification period is in progress, so a rescue in progress display command for display is set (S1367) (see 81a in Figure 128 (d)), this sub-rescue counter display process (S1361) is terminated, and the process returns to the display special symbol 1 variable pattern command setting process (see Figure 126).

Furthermore, in the processing of S1363, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i from the number of times the rescue condition is met (i.e., "800") is less than 10 (S1363: Yes), the number of rotations remaining until the rescue condition is met is less than 10 rotations, so a display countdown command is set (S1364) (see 81a and 81n in Figure 129 (b)), this sub-rescue counter display processing (S1361) is terminated, and the processing returns to the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting processing (see Figure 126).

By configuring it in this way, the display mode of the sub rescue counter 223i can be changed depending on the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met. As a result, the player can check the display mode of the sub rescue counter 223i that is displayed while the special symbol variable display is in progress, and infer which period (jackpot priority notification period or rescue priority notification period) the current game state is in. If the variable display in progress wins a special symbol 1 small win, the player can consider in advance which game method to execute, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Next, with reference to Figures 128 and 129, we will explain the effects performed by the third pattern display device 81, which serves as an alert function, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. Figures 128 and 129 are diagrams showing the progression of effects on the third pattern display device 81 when a variable display of a special pattern is executed in "normal gaming state A."

More specifically, Figure 128(a) shows the state in which the display of the first special symbol has ended and the third symbol has stopped when the rescue counter 203r in "normal gaming state A" is at "541" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), and Figure 128(b) shows the state in which the display of the next first special symbol has begun to change from the state in Figure 128(a).

Furthermore, Figure 128(c) shows the state from Figure 128(b) where the variable display of the first special symbol has ended and the third symbol has stopped, and Figure 128(d) shows the state from Figure 128(c) where the variable display of the next first special symbol has begun.

Furthermore, Figure 129(a) shows the state from Figure 128(d) where the variable display of the first special symbol has ended and the third symbol has stopped, and Figure 129(b) shows the state where the variable display of the first special symbol has begun when the relief counter 203r is at "791" (i.e., the relief priority notification period).

Figure 128(a) shows the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol has ended and the third symbol has stopped when the rescue counter 203r in "normal gaming state A" is at "541" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period).

In Figure 128 (a), a text message 81a is displayed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 as a notification function indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "541" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), indicating that the variable effect is occurring during the jackpot priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in Figure 28.

In addition, the third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, suggesting that the variable display of the first special symbol was a miss. Also, the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the variable area for special symbol 1 87b, is stopped in white, indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol was a miss.

Next, Figure 128(b) shows the state after Figure 128(a) when the variable display of the next first special symbol has begun. A text message 81a is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm as a notification function, indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r. The value of the rescue counter 203r is "542" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), which is an increase of 1 from the state of Figure 128(a). Additionally, the upper right portion of the main display area Dm shows the special symbol 1 variable area 87b flashing, indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is currently being executed.

Next, Figure 128(c) shows the state from Figure 128(b) where the variable display of the first special symbol has ended and the third symbol has stopped. The third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, suggesting that the variable display of the first special symbol has resulted in a miss. Additionally, the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the variable area for special symbol 1 87b, is stopped in white, indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol has resulted in a miss.

Next, Figure 128(d) shows the state after Figure 128(c) when the next variable display of the first special symbol has begun. A text message 81a is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm as a notification function, indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r. The value of the rescue counter 203r is "543" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), which is an increase of 1 from the state shown in Figure 128(c). Furthermore, the text size of the text message 81a is larger than that of the text message 81a in Figure 128(c), suggesting that there has been a change in the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period or rescue priority notification period). Furthermore, the special symbol 1 variable area 87b in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm is flashing, indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is currently being executed.

Next, Figure 129(a) shows the state from Figure 128(d) where the variable display of the first special symbol has ended and the third symbol has stopped. The third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, suggesting that the variable display of the first special symbol has resulted in a miss. Additionally, the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the variable area for special symbol 1 87b, is stopped in white, indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol has resulted in a miss.

Next, Figure 129(b) shows the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol has begun when the rescue counter 203r is at "791" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period). A text message 81a is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm as a notification function, indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r, which is "791" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period). Additionally, in the center of the main display area Dm, the rescue counter remaining spin count 81n is displayed as "10 remaining," indicating that there are "10 spins" remaining until the rescue condition is met. Additionally, in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, the variable area 87b for special symbol 1 is flashing, indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is currently being executed.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is configured to change the display mode of the rescue counter 203r depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed in "normal gaming state A" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period or rescue priority notification period).

By configuring it in this way, the display mode of the sub rescue counter 223i can be changed depending on the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met. As a result, the player can check the display mode of the sub rescue counter 223i that is displayed while the special symbol variable display is in progress, and infer which period (jackpot priority notification period or rescue priority notification period) the current game state is in. If the variable display in progress wins a special symbol 1 small win, the player can consider in advance which game method to execute, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and achieves the same effects.

Eleventh Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eleventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figure 130. The following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will focus on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the same components and processes as those in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that when a right-hand hit is performed during a small win, it becomes easy or possible to win in the variable winning device 65, and the ball passes through the specific area 65d, making it easy to trigger a big win (see Figure 3).

In addition, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period, the right-hit notification effect has different notification formats, but both display a message suggesting right-hit play (see right-hit instruction 89 for main display in Figure 89(b) and right-hit instruction 89 for main display in Figure 89(d)).

For this reason, when some players see a right-hit notification effect during the rescue priority notification period (i.e., a rescue priority notification effect (see Figure 89 (d))), they may not fully understand the intent of the right-hit notification effect and may perform a right-hit play, causing the ball to pass through specific area 65d and triggering a jackpot, which calls for further improvements to the configuration of the gaming board 13.

Specifically, for example, on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the ball's flow path when playing from the right is roughly uniform. Therefore, during a small win game, if the ball is shot so that it flows down the right side of the game board 13, it will be possible for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65 regardless of the shooting method.

The eleventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 was invented in consideration of the above-mentioned problems, and aims to achieve a gaming board 13 configuration that branches the ball's flow path in the right area of the gaming board 13 into multiple paths, and corresponds to the right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1 during the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the entry paths to the right area of the game board 13 are branched, and balls that enter one of the entry paths flow down toward the variable winning device 65, while balls that enter the other entry path do not flow down toward the variable winning device 65 but instead flow down toward the first starting port 64, thereby aiming to provide a gaming machine that supports right-hit notification effects when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period.

To achieve this objective, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for variably displaying a predetermined symbol when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations, and further comprising: an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display; a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state; a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode; a determination means for executing a predetermined determination based on a gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area; and and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is met based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, wherein the notification control means, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifies the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and includes switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, wherein, when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, the specific game condition can be met if a game operation is performed based on the suggestion of the first notification mode, and it becomes impossible or difficult to meet the specific game condition if a game operation is performed based on the suggestion of the second notification mode.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine comprises an "ejection device" as "launching means," a "start detection area" as "starting ball entry area," a "result notification device" as "display means," a "movable device" as "variable ball entry means," "game conditions" as "update conditions," "game information" as "specific information," an "update process" as "update means," an "update state" as "specific game state," an "update end state" as "predetermined update state," an "awarded benefit" as "predetermined benefit state," a "notification mode" as "alert mode," a "display control" as "alert control means," a "discrimination control" as "determination means," a "control judgment result" as "specific judgment result," an "benefit awarding condition" as "predetermined game condition," an "award value" as "specific benefit," a "benefit awarding control" as "benefit generating means," a "predetermined time" as "predetermined timing," and a "specific time" as "specific timing."

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that it can land in the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

Furthermore, the specified benefit state may be anything that can confer some kind of benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state", the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, the light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update status of the specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable entry device (large entry port), small entry port, regular electric entry port, non-electric entry port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specified gaming condition, such as a "probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuation state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortened state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other gaming states that are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state" as a specific gaming state, the jackpot gaming state itself, the small jackpot gaming state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, the light emission control of a specific emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the specific information is information that is updated to new content when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and is capable of identifying a predetermined period based on the update status, as long as it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be the value of a counter stored in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern began, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern stopped, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, etc. These include the remaining number of times the display will be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening, the time after which the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the big prize opening stops, the number of wins when one of the openings such as the big prize opening opens, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern on the display means, the time from the start of the startup process of the gaming machine, the setting values of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall staff that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the updating means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or may be a hardware circuit update.

The determination means may be any means that performs a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area, such as starting winning processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state that indicates that the result of updating specific information by the update means has resulted in a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time period passing, a specified period passing, the use of all of a predetermined series of data, the detection of a ball entering a specified area, or the detection of a frame button input by the player.

The starting ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to change and be displayed when a gaming ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 starting area, a special ball 2 starting area, or a regular ball starting area.

Furthermore, the display means may be any device capable of announcing the lottery results for a specified symbol, such as a third symbol display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying information on each display device.

Furthermore, a specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means and becomes a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, or game states in which the update means does not operate. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated through so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state," a "time-shortened state," the state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined jackpot occurs, the state from when the power is turned on until the predetermined jackpot ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, the state from when the dynamic display of a predetermined special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, the state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that results in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, the state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of a special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry slot which will start the jackpot game, a state where the dynamic display of a special symbol is not being executed and the ball is waiting to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to press a frame button while the dynamic display of a special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a losing prize, a dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, a dynamic display of a special pattern corresponding to a drop lottery, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern is executed reaches a specific number of times, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a prize, a variable display of a normal pattern winning a losing prize, a transition to a specific game state, etc.

Furthermore, the predetermined game conditions may be conditions that are met when a player performs a predetermined game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a predetermined area, a predetermined number of fired game balls entering a predetermined area, a fired game ball not entering a predetermined area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a predetermined area and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, a player operating an effect button, a lottery being held when a player operates an effect button and resulting in a predetermined lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being less than a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the dynamic display of the next special pattern can be started to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes passing, an instruction to execute various processes being issued, and a command to execute various processes being issued.

Furthermore, the "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update status of specific information, and examples include the timing when the gaming machine is powered on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is confirmed, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value exceeds a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached, a timing when a predetermined data item from a predetermined series of data groups is reached until all of the data groups have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined series of data groups have been used.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events; for example, by varying the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their color, their display area, their display density, their display time, and the number of times they are displayed, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the firing mode, indications of whether firing is possible, indications of whether play is possible, indications of the timing of operation execution on the operating means, indications of the game status, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, distinctions between probability variable and normal patterns, distinctions between time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and distinctions between probability variable and time-saving patterns.

Now, with reference to Figure 130, the specific configuration of the gaming board 13 of the 11th embodiment will be described. The main difference between the gaming board 13 of the first embodiment and the gaming board 13 of the 11th embodiment is that the access path in the right-hand area of the gaming board 13 is branched.

As shown in FIG. 130, the right-hand area of the gaming board 13 in the 11th embodiment has two branching access paths. One access path is a weak right-hand hit path 74, which is the path that is taken when a right-hand hit is performed with enough strength that the ball does not hit the return rubber 69 (hereinafter, the path that is taken when a right-hand hit is performed with enough strength that the ball does not hit the return rubber 69 may be referred to as the "weak right-hand hit path"). The other access path is a strong right-hand hit path 75, which is the path that is taken when a right-hand hit is performed with enough strength that the ball hits the return rubber 69 (hereinafter, the path that is taken when a right-hand hit is performed with enough strength that the ball hits the return rubber 69 may be referred to as the "strong right-hand hit path").

When a ball enters the weak right-hand hit path 74, the ball cannot flow down the flow path where the through gate 67, normal electric role 72, and variable winning device 65 are located, but instead flows down toward the first starting port 64.

As a result, a ball that enters the weak right-hand hit path 74 will be unable or will have difficulty entering the through gate 67, the regular electric feature 72, and the variable winning device 65, but will be able to enter the first starting gate 64 and the general winning gate 63.

Furthermore, if a ball enters the strong right-hand hit path 75, the ball will flow down the flow path where the through gate 67, normal electric feature 72, and variable winning device 65 are located. Therefore, a ball that enters the strong right-hand hit path 75 can enter the through gate 67, normal electric feature 72, and variable winning device 65, but will be unable or difficult to enter the first starting hole 64 or the general winning hole 63.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the right-hit notification effect when a small win occurs on special chart 1 during the jackpot priority notification period (see FIG. 28) is an effect that suggests a right-hit play corresponding to the strong right-hit path 75, and is configured to suggest that by performing a hit that enters the strong right-hit path 75, the ball will enter the variable winning device 65, pass through the specific area 65d, and generate a jackpot.

In addition, the right-hit notification effect when a small win occurs on special chart 1 during the rescue priority notification period (see Figure 28) is an effect that suggests a right-hit play corresponding to the weak right-hit path 74, and by performing a hit that enters the weak right-hit path 74, it is made impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65, and the ball will not pass through the specific area 65d, suggesting that a jackpot will not be generated.

By configuring it in this way, whether a right-hit notification is a jackpot priority notification or a rescue priority notification, it is possible to execute a right-hit game in accordance with the instructions of the main display right-hit instruction 89 (see Figure 89), and to realize a game in which the jackpot priority notification and rescue priority notification are displayed during the right-hit game, allowing the player to determine the game mode (launch mode). As a result, there is no discrepancy between the notification effects and the actual gameplay method, allowing the player to play without feeling uncomfortable.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the access path in the right area of the game board 13 is branched into two, one of which makes it impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65, and the other of which makes it possible for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65.

By configuring it in this way, even if right-hand play is performed when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1, if the ball enters one of the entry paths, it will be impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the variable entry device 65, preventing it from passing through the specific area 65d and making it impossible or difficult for a jackpot to occur; but if the ball enters the other entry path, it will be possible for the ball to enter 65, allowing it to pass through the specific area 65d and causing a jackpot.

As a result, the right-hit notification effect during the jackpot priority notification period can be made to correspond to a game method in which the ball can enter the other entry path, and the right-hit notification effect during the rescue priority notification period can be made to correspond to a game method in which the ball can enter one entry path.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the 11th embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and achieves the same effects.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, but it is readily apparent that the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, each embodiment may be modified by adding or replacing part or parts of the configuration of another embodiment with that embodiment. Furthermore, the numerical values given in the above embodiments are merely examples, and other numerical values can of course be used.

<Modification 1>
In the above embodiment, only the normal symbols are provided with a probability variation function, and the special symbols are not. Alternatively, the special and normal symbols may each be provided with a probability variation function, or the special symbols may be provided with a probability variation function but the normal symbols may not, or neither the special nor the normal symbols may be provided with a probability variation function. Furthermore, when the probability variation function is provided for the special symbols, the probability variation function may be enabled until the next jackpot or small jackpot occurs (a so-called loop type), or until the special symbols are executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) after the jackpot (a so-called ST type), or a pachinko machine may be used in which the "probability variation state" ends (a so-called "falling down function") when a predetermined lottery result other than a jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of the special symbols (a so-called falling down type). This configuration can enrich the variety of games and increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, the condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to end by the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed or by winning the next jackpot. On the other hand, each time the number of consecutive wins of the special symbol jackpot (including jackpots based on the small win type) reaches a predetermined number, the game state after the jackpot at the time of reaching the predetermined number of wins is always transitioned to a game state (i.e., a "normal game state") in which the "time-saving function" is not applied, and transition to the high probability state of the normal symbol may be prohibited (time-saving limiter). Furthermore, there may be multiple types of consecutive wins of the jackpot that prohibit transition to the high probability state of the normal symbol.

<Modification 3>
In the above embodiment, the normal electric role 72 and the variable winning device 65 are configured to be opened based on the winning of a normal symbol or a special symbol. Alternatively, a pachinko machine may be used that is equipped with a passage opening that opens a movable role (a so-called non-electric role) that blocks other winning openings when a ball passes through it.

<Modification 4>
In the above embodiment, when any jackpot (including a jackpot based on a small jackpot type) is won, a game state in which a "time-saving function" is granted is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when a predetermined pattern (for example, a time-saving pattern) other than a jackpot (small jackpot) is derived in the dynamic display of special patterns, the game may be configured to transition to a state in which the "time-saving function" is granted without going through a jackpot. By configuring it in this way, the variety of cases in which the "time-saving function" is granted can be increased, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

<Modification 5>
In the above embodiment, when the total number of times that the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in the low probability state of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (700, 800, or 900 times) without transitioning to a jackpot state, a "time-saving function" is granted without going through a jackpot (so-called ceiling function). Alternatively, the predetermined number of times may be counted separately for the cumulative number of times that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed and the cumulative number of times that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed. Furthermore, the predetermined number of times may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

<Modification 6>
In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol (so-called special symbol 2 priority variation). In contrast to this, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol may be configured to be executable simultaneously in parallel (so-called special symbol 12 simultaneous variation), and each dynamic display may be controlled, or the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the second special symbol (so-called special symbol 1 priority variation), and each dynamic display may be controlled, or the dynamic display may be executed in the order of winning (so-called winning order variation), and each dynamic display may be controlled.

<Modification 7>
In the above embodiment, the "time-saving function" is terminated based on a predetermined number of executions of the dynamic display of the special symbol or winning a jackpot. Alternatively, the "time-saving function" may be terminated based on winning a small jackpot or the derivation of a time-saving termination symbol different from the jackpot. This configuration diversifies the conditions for terminating the prize-winning support state, enriching the gameplay and increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when the "time-saving function" is active, the "time-saving function" may be terminated when a predetermined number of reserved balls of the special symbol are stored (e.g., a full reserve (i.e., four balls) or a certain number of reserved balls relative to the full reserve (e.g., two balls)). Alternatively, the "time-saving function" may be terminated when the number of activations of the normal electric role reaches a certain number, or when the number of executions of the variable display of the normal symbol reaches a certain number.

<Modification 8>
In the above embodiment, the game is configured so that a win occurs at a 70/100 probability when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, and the normal electric role 72 can be activated. Alternatively, the game may be configured so that a win does not occur when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, and a win occurs only when the normal symbol is in a high probability state (e.g., a 100% win). This configuration reliably prevents the normal electric role 72 from being activated when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, and a ball from entering the second starting hole 71. As a result, it is possible to reliably achieve the gameplay characteristics according to the game specifications.

<Modification 9>
In the above embodiment, one variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened in a jackpot game. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of winning holes that can be opened in a jackpot game are provided, and the plurality of winning holes are opened according to the type of jackpot or the type of small jackpot.

<Modification 10>
In the above embodiment, one variable display time for the normal symbol is provided for each game state. Alternatively, the variable display time for the normal symbol may be selected by lottery from among multiple variable display times depending on the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state," the variable display time for the normal symbol is determined by lottery from among "1 second,""3seconds,""5seconds,""10seconds," or "30 seconds." This configuration allows a player to play right in the "normal game state," in which right-hand play is not encouraged, passing a ball through the through gate 67 to display a variable normal symbol. Even if the ball is then fired toward the normal electric symbol 72, which may be opened depending on the timing of the ball's release, multiple opening timings for the second start gate 71 can prevent the second start gate 71 from winning.

<Modification 11>
In the above embodiment, a winning role is selected from a jackpot or a miss in the drawing for the first special symbol, and a winning role is also selected from a jackpot or a miss in the drawing for the second special symbol. In contrast, a small win may be provided only in the drawing for the first special symbol, and a winning role may be selected from a jackpot, a small win, or a miss, or a small win may be provided only in the drawing for the second special symbol, and a winning role may be selected from a jackpot, a small win, or a miss, or a small win may not be provided in the drawing for any special symbol, and a winning role may be selected from a jackpot or a miss, or a small win may be provided in the drawing for any special symbol, and a winning role may be selected from a jackpot, a small win, or a miss.

<Modification 12>
In the above embodiment, the game state is changed (for example, transition from "normal high probability time shortening state" to "normal game state") depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. In contrast, the game state may be changed depending on the number of times a predetermined effect other than the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed (for example, "reach display" or a specific effect based on a win of a specific role, etc.).

<Modification 13>
In the above embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are counted, and the variation time and the reach probability of each special symbol are changed for each reserved number of balls. Alternatively, the variation time and the reach probability of each special symbol may be changed according to the total number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

<Modification 14>
In the above embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A," the content of the right-hit notification effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be different depending on the number of times the special symbol is executed remaining until the rescue condition is met at the time of the small win. In contrast, only the audio content by the audio output device 226 when the right-hit notification effect is executed may be different, or only the presentation content by the lamp may be different, or only two of the presentation content, audio content, and lamp content by the third symbol display device 81 may be different, or all may be configured to be different.

<Modification 15>
In the above embodiment, the right-hit notification effect when the jackpot type "time-saving A" or "time-saving B" is won in the "normal gaming state A" is configured to be different from the right-hit notification effect when the special chart 1 small win is won in the "normal gaming state A". In contrast to this, the right-hit notification effect when the special chart 1 small win is won during the jackpot priority notification period in the "normal gaming state A" may be configured to be the same as the right-hit notification effect when the jackpot type "time-saving A" or "time-saving B" is won in the "normal gaming state A". By configuring it in this way, it becomes clear that if a special chart 1 small win is won during the jackpot priority notification period in "normal game state A", or if a jackpot type "time-saving A" or "time-saving B" is won during "normal game state A", both are jackpots or small wins that require right-hit play.As a result, the difference between the right-hit notification effects executed during the rescue priority notification period and ambiguous notification period and the jackpot priority notification period becomes clear, making it possible to further differentiate the suggestions for right-hit play.

In the above embodiment, there is only one type of small win type for small win games in which the first special symbol is dynamically displayed, and one type of small win type for small win games in which the second special symbol is dynamically displayed. Alternatively, there may be multiple types of small win types for small win games in which the first special symbol is dynamically displayed and/or multiple types of small win types for small win games in which the second special symbol is dynamically displayed. Furthermore, it may be configured so that whether or not the "time-saving function" is terminated varies depending on the type of small win. This configuration increases the variety of games and increases the enjoyment of the games.

In the above embodiment, the variable presentation of the encouraged special symbols for each game state is executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, while the variable presentation of the non-encouraged special symbols is not executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Alternatively, the variable presentation of the non-encouraged special symbols may be executed in a predetermined manner in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Specifically, for example, the variable presentation of the encouraged special symbols is executed so as to stand out in the main display area Dm (center, most of the area, a larger area than the variable presentation of the non-encouraged special symbols, a darker pattern display, etc.), while the variable presentation of the non-encouraged special symbols is executed so as to stand out less than the variable presentation of the encouraged special symbols in the main display area Dm (corner, small area, a smaller area than the variable presentation of the encouraged special symbols, a lighter pattern display, etc.). This configuration makes it possible to grasp the execution modes of the variable presentation of multiple special symbols using the third pattern display device 81.

In the above embodiment, the time period during which the dynamic display of the first special pattern changes depending on the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the first special pattern, and the time period during which the dynamic display of the second special pattern changes depending on the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special pattern. In other words, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the first special pattern only affects the dynamic display of the first special pattern, and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special pattern only affects the dynamic display of the second special pattern. Alternatively, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of one special pattern may be configured to affect the time period during which the dynamic display of the other special pattern changes. Specifically, the time period during which the dynamic display of the first special pattern changes depending on the total number of reserved balls: the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the first special pattern and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to select a unique fluctuation time when the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the first special pattern and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special pattern are mixed, thereby increasing the variety of the game and making it more enjoyable.

In the above embodiment, the probability setting value can be changed in three stages from "1" to "3," allowing the probability of a jackpot and/or the probability of a hit for the second symbol to be changed. However, the number of stages in which the probability setting value can be changed is not limited to three, and it may be changed to any stage.

In the above embodiment, we have described a case where the probability of winning a jackpot is changed by changing the probability setting value, but it is also possible to change the probability of winning a normal symbol or the probability of winning a small jackpot.

Also, if it is determined during the startup process that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") from the range of "1" to "3" may be forcibly set as the probability setting value. However, if it is determined during play (for example, during timer interrupt processing) that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent players from suffering any disadvantages due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability during play.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which the probability setting value was included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum), but the probability setting value may also be excluded from the calculation of the RAM judgment value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM judgment value is normal, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, a setting change process may be forcibly executed to have hall personnel change the probability setting value, or hall personnel may be prompted to restart the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode, or a specific probability setting value within the normal range may be forcibly set as the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which the probability setting value was not included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum), but the probability setting value may also be included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in "setting change mode," the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch. However, this can also be done using the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 is configured to be rotatable from the on state to a setting change position located in the opposite direction from the off side, and is configured so that when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, it automatically returns to the on state. Then, the probability setting value is updated each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the on state to the setting change position. This also makes it easy to change the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in "setting change mode," the probability setting value is confirmed by turning the setting key 501 off or by turning the RAM erase switch 503 on. However, this can also be done by operating a separate switch, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is a switch that is operated, for example, during "setting change mode," to confirm the probability setting value, and may be provided so that it protrudes from the main board through a hole in the board box 100, allowing it to be operated by hall personnel, etc., without having to open the board box 100. This also makes it easy to confirm the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and started up in "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode," the startup mode is set depending on the detection state of the RAM clear switch 503 and the setting key 501. In contrast, the startup mode may be set depending on the detection state of the RAM clear switch 503 and the setting key 501, with at least the opening of the inner frame 12 being a required condition. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the hall can select whether or not opening the inner frame 12 is a condition for changing settings or confirming settings.

In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 was installed in the main control device 110. However, the RAM erase switch 503 may also be configured to be installed in the power supply device 115 or the dispensing control device 111.

In each of the above embodiments, the setting key 501 was configured to allow the probability of a jackpot to be changed. However, the setting key 501 may also be configured to allow multiple settings related to the degree of advantage to the player to be changed, such as the number of prize balls paid out when one prize slot is won (e.g., changing from 3 to 5), the drive time (e.g., changing from 3 seconds to 5 seconds) or drive width (e.g., changing from 20 mm to 30 mm) of the movable device that assists in winning the prize slot, the tilt angle (e.g., changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees) of a component that affects the way the ball flows down (e.g., the stage or crane on which the ball rolls), or the tilt angle of the pachinko machine 10 itself (e.g., changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees).

In each of the above embodiments, the keyhole of the setting key 501 was configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10. However, the keyhole of the setting key 501 may also be configured to face laterally (left or right) of the pachinko machine 10, diagonally from the pachinko machine 10, or toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number values, the small win random number values, and the losing random number values are all continuous, allowing for range determination of whether a jackpot or small win has occurred (for example, whether it is between "0" and "49"), thereby reducing the control burden on the main control unit 110. In contrast, the random number values that award game value (i.e., the jackpot random number values and small win random number values) may be arranged in a dispersed (scattered) manner rather than in a continuous arrangement. Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot random number counter C1 that is updated between "0 and 999," the jackpot random number values may be "7,341,555,777,831," and the small win random number values may be "77,175,223,315,415,526,634,717,845."

Here, if there are consecutive values that become jackpot random numbers regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a value between 0 and 50 in both low and high probability states is a jackpot), there is a possibility that the value could be predicted externally, increasing the possibility of fraudulently winning a jackpot. Therefore, by configuring it as in the above modified example, it is possible to make each random number value that confers gaming value more difficult to predict externally, thereby increasing the deterrent effect against fraud and improving the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state may be set separately so that they do not overlap. By configuring in this way, the value of the random number that results in a jackpot can be changed depending on the situation (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), making the value of the random number that results in a jackpot more difficult to predict, thereby improving the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, etc. were updated by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (so-called soft random numbers). In contrast, the jackpot random number counter C1, etc. may be updated by a random number generation IC with a faster update cycle than the above software random numbers (so-called hard random numbers). This configuration makes it difficult to externally ascertain the random number values being updated, thereby improving security performance.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value was configured to increase evenly with each increase in the setting value. However, it may also be configured to increase the jackpot random number value (or small jackpot random number value) unevenly or at a predetermined rate with each increase in the setting value. Specifically, for example, from setting value "1" to "2," the jackpot random number value increases by "2," while from setting value "2" to "3," the jackpot random number value increases by "5." By configuring in this way, the game value that can be awarded changes significantly depending on the setting difference, making it possible to provide a game with a sense of rhythm (variation) due to the setting difference, and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above embodiment, the role corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 was configured to change for each setting value. In contrast, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the small jackpot type counter (not shown), which determines the content of the small jackpot, may be changed for each setting value, resulting in setting differences due to changes in the selection ratio of the jackpot type or small jackpot type.

In the above embodiment, the random number value that awards game value (i.e., jackpot random number value) is changed in response to a setting change, and the change is compensated for from random number values that do not award game value (i.e., losing random number values). In contrast, when a random number value that awards game value (e.g., jackpot random number value) is changed in response to a setting change, the change may be compensated for from random number values that award other game value (e.g., small win random number value). By configuring in this way, differences can be created in the game value that can be awarded for each setting, providing a game with a variety of settings and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number table 202a specified (set) each random number in the following order: "jackpot random number range," "missing random number range," and "small jackpot random number range." Alternatively, the jackpot random number table 202a may be configured to specify (set) each random number in the following order: "jackpot random number range," "small jackpot random number range," "jackpot random number range (hereinafter referred to as the "repeated jackpot random number range")," and "missing random number range." Here, the "repeated jackpot random number range" is configured to correspond to the increase in the jackpot random number resulting from a setting change. This configuration allows the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (i.e., the increase in the jackpot random number value) to be adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (i.e., the missing random number value), thereby fixing the range of random numbers that do not change due to a setting change (i.e., the jackpot random number value and small jackpot random number value that do not change due to a setting change). This allows, for example, in a control program for determining whether a game has been won or lost, to standardize the basic win/loss determination of a fixed random number value across all settings, while additionally determining the increase in the jackpot random number value resulting from a setting change according to the setting value, making it easier to design the control program and reducing development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, the random number values were specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a in the order of "jackpot random number range," "miss random number range," and "small jackpot random number range." However, the random number values may also be specified (set) in descending order of the number of random number values.

In the above embodiment, the random numbers in the jackpot random number table 202a were specified (set) in the order of "jackpot random number range," "missing random number range," and "small jackpot random number range." In contrast, the jackpot random number table 202a may be configured to specify (set) the "jackpot random number range" that increases with a setting change so that it is adjacent to the random number values that decrease with a setting change (i.e., the "missing random number range"). Specifically, the random numbers in the jackpot random number table 202a are specified (set) in the order of "small jackpot random number range," "jackpot random number range," and "missing random number range." This configuration allows the random number values that increase due to the setting difference (i.e., the increase in the jackpot random number value) to be adjacent to the random number values that decrease due to the setting difference (i.e., the missing random number value), thereby fixing the range of random number values that do not change with a setting change (i.e., the small jackpot random number value). This allows, for example, in a control program for determining whether a small win has occurred, the determination of the small win random number value can be standardized across all setting values, while additionally determining the increase in the large win random number value due to a setting change according to the setting value, making it easier to design the control program and reducing development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, the winning probability of a small win game with the second special pattern was configured to be higher than the winning probability of a small win game with the first special pattern. In contrast, the winning probability of a small win game with the first special pattern and the winning probability of a small win game with the second special pattern may be configured to be equal, or the winning probability of a small win game with the second special pattern may be configured to be lower than the winning probability of a small win game with the first special pattern.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value was increased for each setting value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value was compensated for from the loss random number value. Alternatively, the jackpot random number value may be increased for each setting value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value may be compensated for from the small win random number value and the loss random number value. This configuration makes it possible to compensate for changes in the number of jackpot random number values based on setting changes from the small win random number value and the loss random number value, eliminating the need to compensate for changes in the jackpot random number value from a fixed, predetermined random number value of 1. This eliminates the need to secure the number of predetermined random number values from the change in the jackpot random number value and the predetermined random number value of 1, eliminating constraints when designing game specifications, increasing the design freedom of game specifications and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the above embodiment, the gameplay of the present invention is realized by using a normal electric device 72 that transitions between a protruding state and a retracted state, and by changing the retraction timing and duration of the normal electric device 72 in each game state. Alternatively, the gameplay of the present invention may be realized by using a rotating blade member and changing the activation timing and duration of the blade member in each game state. Specifically, for example, blade members are arranged on both the left and right sides of the second starting hole 71, and when the blade members are in an inactive state (e.g., upright), the ball collides with the outside (non-rolling side) of the blade member and flows downstream. On the other hand, when the blade members are rotated and in an active state (tilted 120 degrees to the right from the upright state), the ball collides with the inside (rolling side) of the blade member and rolls along the inside of the blade member toward the second starting hole 71. By configuring it in this way, it is easier to determine whether the blade members have been driven over a larger area than the rotational pattern caused by the appearance and disappearance of the normal electric symbol 72, making it easier for players to determine whether they have won with the variable display of the normal symbol.

The display mode and display position of the fourth symbol display area 87 for special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol display area 88 for special symbol 2 may be configured to change depending on the first or second special symbol being displayed in the variable effect in the main display area Dm. Specifically, for example, depending on the special symbol being displayed in the main display area Dm, the fourth symbol display area 87, 88 for the currently displayed symbol may be positioned at the top, displayed in Arabic numerals, or displayed in red, while the fourth symbol display area 88, 87 for the non-displayed symbol may be positioned at the bottom, displayed in a different notation than the Arabic numerals (e.g., Chinese numerals or Roman numerals), or displayed in a different color than red (e.g., blue). This configuration allows the currently displayed variable effect to be identified while making it difficult for the player to recognize which special symbol is being displayed, and makes it difficult for the player to recognize the current game state, thereby creating a gameplay feature that allows the player to guess the game state and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Regarding the alarm sound, rather than being output whenever a ball passes through the through gate 67 in a game state where left-handed play is recommended, the alarm sound may be configured to be output when specific conditions are met. Specifically, for example, by configuring it in this way, the alarm sound is output only in response to malicious players who intentionally try to obtain more balls than the game specifications allow, and the alarm sound is not output in response to inexperienced players or well-intentioned right-handed play due to operating errors. This prevents fraudulent play while also preventing a decline in players' motivation to play, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The probability of winning a normal symbol may be configured to be approximately the same in all game states. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" or "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," where the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is low, the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to 50/100, and in the "probability variable state" or "latent probability variable state," where the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is high, the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to 50/100, 51/100, or the like, the same as or approximately the same as the probability of winning a normal symbol in the "normal game state." This configuration makes it possible to calculate the payout rate, etc., without considering the probability of winning a normal symbol, by taking into account the variable display time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the normal electric symbol 72 when the normal symbol is opened, thereby facilitating the design of game specifications for each game state.

The set of special symbol fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) selected after a jackpot may be configured to differ for each winning jackpot symbol. Specifically, for example, among the jackpot symbols that can trigger a "probability fluctuation state," a winning symbol of 1, 3, 5, or 7 may be configured to transition to a "both long fluctuation probability fluctuation state" in which a relatively long fluctuation time is likely to be selected for both the first and second special symbols in the "probability fluctuation state." Furthermore, a winning symbol of 3 may transition to a "special 1 long/special 2 short fluctuation probability fluctuation state" in which a relatively long fluctuation time is likely to be selected for the first special symbol and a relatively short fluctuation time is likely to be selected for the second special symbol in the "probability fluctuation state." Furthermore, a winning symbol of 5 may transition to a "both short fluctuation probability fluctuation state" in which a relatively short fluctuation time is likely to be selected for both the first and second special symbols in the "probability fluctuation state." Additionally, if the 7 symbol is selected as the winning symbol, the game transitions to a "Special 1 Short/Special 2 Long Variable Probability Variable State," in which a relatively short variable time is likely selected for the first special symbol in the "Probability Variable State," while a relatively long variable time is likely selected for the second special symbol. This configuration allows the special symbol that can be derived first in the game state after the jackpot to differ depending on the type of symbol that resulted in the jackpot. For example, the probability of a jackpot appearing first can be varied for each game state depending on which special symbol stops first. This increases the variety of games and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

The set of special symbol fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) may be configured to differ based on the number of times the special symbol fluctuates. Specifically, for example, in the "latent probability fluctuating state," a relatively long fluctuation time may be selected for the first through tenth special symbol fluctuations after a jackpot, and a relatively short fluctuation time may be selected for the eleventh and subsequent special symbol fluctuations. This configuration can add variety to the game, increase the game's variety, and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Multiple types of normal symbol wins may be provided. Specifically, for example, there may be a single-open win in which the normal electric symbol 72 is released once, a triple-open win in which the reappearing board 72a is released three times, and a triple-long win in which the normal electric symbol 72 is released three times for a long period of time. This configuration increases the variety of gameplay in the "variable probability state" and "normal symbol high probability time shortened state," thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above embodiment, the game states that are most favorable to the player are "normal game state" → "normal high probability time shortened state" → "normal low probability time shortened state" → "probability variable state." In contrast, game specifications may be configured so that the "normal high probability time shortened state," "latent probability variable state," and "probability variable state" are positioned as game states that are less favorable to the player than the "normal game state." Specifically, for example, the start slot for the first special symbol is located upstream of the start slot for the second special symbol with the normal electric symbol 72 attached. In the "normal game state," the normal electric symbol 72 is less likely to activate, making it easier to receive a lottery trigger for the first special symbol, which is more favorable to the player than the second special symbol. Meanwhile, in the "normal high probability time shortened state," the normal electric symbol 72 is more likely to activate, making it easier to receive a lottery trigger for the second special symbol, which is less favorable to the player than the first special symbol. This configuration increases the variety of games available and increases the enjoyment of the game.

The display position of the fourth symbol display areas 87, 88 may be changed when a right-hit suggestion display that suggests right-hit play appears. Specifically, in a "normal play state" where left-hit play is encouraged, the fourth symbol display areas 87, 88 are displayed in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, while in a "probability-changing state" where right-hit play is encouraged, the right-hit suggestion display is displayed in the right small area Ds3, while the fourth symbol display areas 87, 88 are displayed in the left small area Ds1. This configuration makes it easier for players to recognize the game specifications according to the game state.

In the above embodiment, with regard to the dynamic display of multiple special symbols that can be executed simultaneously, the variable presentation of encouraged special symbols according to the game status is performed in the main display area Dm, while the variable presentation of non-encouraged special symbols is not performed in the main display area Dm. In contrast, with regard to the presentation of multiple symbols that can be executed simultaneously (e.g., special symbols and normal symbols), a priority order for the presentation to be executed can be set in advance based on the game status, game specifications, the game value awarded, or the frequency of execution, etc., and the presentation according to this priority can be executed preferentially. For presentations with lower priority, the scale of the presentation can be reduced or the presentation itself can be omitted, making them less noticeable to the player than presentations with higher priority. Specifically, when the variable effect of the first special symbol is being executed in the main display area Dm, the effect relating to the variable display of an ordinary symbol, which has a lower potential gaming value than the first special symbol, may not be executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the audio output device 226, or the effect may be displayed on a smaller scale; and when the variable effect of the second special symbol is being executed in the main display area Dm, the effect relating to the variable display of an ordinary symbol, which has a lower potential gaming value than the second special symbol, may not be executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the audio output device 226, or the effect may be displayed on a smaller scale. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prioritize the execution of effects that the player should be aware of when playing the game, while reducing (eliminating) the scale of effects with lower priority, thereby executing effects that the player does not find bothersome.

In the above embodiment, each command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the voice and lamp control unit 113, which then instructs the display control unit 114 to display. However, commands may also be sent directly from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114. Alternatively, the voice and lamp control unit may be connected to the display control unit, and commands instructing the display control unit to output each sound and turn on the lamps may be sent to the voice and lamp control unit. Furthermore, the voice and lamp control unit and display control unit may be configured as a single control unit. By combining these into a single control unit, the number of parts can be reduced, and increases in the cost of the pachinko machine can be prevented.

In the above embodiment, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 always sets the corresponding fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b to ON when any stop type command is received. However, if each fluctuation pattern command is received and then the corresponding stop type command is received, each fluctuation start flag 223a and 223b may be set to ON. This prevents strange fluctuation effects from being executed when any stop type command is received without receiving each fluctuation pattern command.

Furthermore, when each fluctuation pattern command is received, each fluctuation start flag 223a, 223b may be set to ON. In this case, in the fluctuation performance processing (S1110) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, based on the fact that each fluctuation start flag 223a, 223b is turned ON, each display fluctuation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern extracted by each fluctuation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to cause the display control device 114 to execute each fluctuation performance based on each display fluctuation pattern command, without waiting for each stop type command to be received. Note that in this case, when each stop type command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 may generate a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command, and transmit this to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 may then determine the stop symbols for the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on this display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, the demo effect may include a frozen display of a third pattern consisting of a main pattern without a number from "0" to "9." Alternatively, a third pattern consisting of a numbered main pattern or a main pattern without a number may be frozen and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may change without displaying the third pattern. Alternatively, a character or back image that is completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the continuous preview performance may be executed on the third pattern display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, or a fourth pattern display device separate from the third pattern display device 81 may be provided, and the continuous preview performance may be executed by displaying the fourth pattern on the fourth pattern display device in conjunction with the variable performance executed by the third pattern display device 81. In this case, the fourth pattern display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the sound lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the continuous preview performance may be executed by providing a role device that operates in accordance with various performances in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the role device in a predetermined manner in conjunction with the variable performance. Furthermore, the continuous preview performance may be executed by outputting sound for the continuous preview performance from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the sound lamp control device 113, or by lighting or flashing the illumination units 29-33 of the pachinko machine 10 in conjunction with the variable performance.

As a result, each time a variable effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and special symbol display device 37), symbols are successively displayed on the fourth symbol display device, the role device operates in a predetermined manner, a sound is output from the audio output device 226, or the illumination elements 29-33 light up or flash, giving the player a sense of anticipation of a big win. Furthermore, players normally continue playing by gazing intently at the third symbol display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the continuous preview effect is performed by the display of symbols on the fourth symbol display device (separate from the third symbol display device 81), the activation of the role device, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting or flashing of the illumination elements 29-33, making it easy for players to recognize that a different effect than normal has occurred. Furthermore, the continuous preview effect can be easily performed with simple control, such as the display of symbols on the fourth symbol display device, the activation of the role device, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting or flashing of the illumination elements 29-33.

Furthermore, if the continuous preview performance is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or by lighting or flashing the illumination units 29-33, the control of the continuous preview performance is performed by the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, by having the main control device 110 perform the win/lose judgment at the time of the initial winning and the lottery processing at the start of the fluctuation, having the audio lamp control device 113 perform the continuous preview performance, and having the display control device 114 perform the fluctuation performance, when the continuous preview performance is performed by the pachinko machine 10, each control device can be assigned to each processing. This prevents the load from concentrating on one control device, and allows the performance required of the MPU of each control device to be kept low.

The continuous preview performance may be executed by combining and controlling at least two of the following: the display of symbols for the continuous preview performance on the third symbol display device 81, the display of symbols for the continuous preview performance on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the reel in a predetermined manner, the audio output from the audio output device 226, and the lighting or flashing of the illumination units 29-33. This allows for a wider variety of continuous preview performances to be executed. Furthermore, by changing the execution method of the continuous preview performance (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the reel, audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting or flashing of the illumination units 29-33, or a combination thereof), multiple continuous preview performance modes may be prepared that are selected depending on the game state after the continuous preview performance ends.

In addition, when a continuous preview effect is performed, an image for the continuous preview effect separate from the variable effect may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or the continuous preview effect may be performed by displaying a predetermined combination of symbols, known as a "chance eye," as the stopping symbol to be displayed when the variable effect ends. In this case, when the command determination process executed by the MPU of the display control device 114 determines that a continuous preview command has been received, the stopping symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the chance eye may be turned on, and other stopping symbol discrimination flags may be set to off. In the command determination process, processing corresponding to the continuous preview command is executed within other command processing after the stop identification command processing, so the chance eye is set as the stopping symbol instead of the stopping symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command. Therefore, the chance eye can be displayed as a confirmed stopping symbol when the variable effect stops. Furthermore, if the third pattern display device 81 displays chance eyes consecutively as the stopping symbols for each variable effect, the player can feel a sense of anticipation of eventually winning a jackpot.

In the above embodiment, when a ball is won at the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 (start winning), the main control unit 110 sends to the voice lamp control unit 113 the reserved ball count command that notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the number of reserved balls increased by "1," including the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in response to the start winning. However, the types of counters included in the reserved ball count command may be some of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Furthermore, when the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the values of each counter obtained in response to the start winning, rather than including information indicating the values of each counter in the reserved ball count command, information indicating the values of each counter may be included in a command separate from the reserved ball count command, and these values may be notified to the voice lamp control unit 113. The separate command may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in response to a start winning, or the values of each counter acquired in response to a start winning may be added to a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of other information, such as a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. When notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in response to a start winning as a separate command, the command may include information indicating which of the pending number of times the notified counter values relate to the variable effect. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 can store the values of each counter included in the command in one of the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information corresponding to that pending number, based on the information about the pending number included in the command.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball count command, it may store the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated in the reserved ball count command in RAM 223. Alternatively, when it receives a reserved ball count command (or a command indicating the values of each counter), it may determine whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot, the type of miss if there is a miss, etc. based on the values of each counter indicated in the command, and store these determination results in RAM 223 in place of the values of each counter indicated in the command, or together with some or all of the values of the counters.

In the above embodiment, winning entries into the first starting gate 64 or the second starting gate 71 and passing through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four and may be set to three or fewer, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). Furthermore, the maximum number of reserved balls for winning entries into the first starting gate 64 or the second starting gate 71 may be set separately for each starting gate, and the maximum number of reserved balls for each starting gate may be any number other than "4." Furthermore, the maximum number of reserved balls for each starting gate does not necessarily have to be the same value; they may be different values. Furthermore, the number of reserved balls displayed as a variable display based on winning entries into the first starting gate 64 or the second starting gate 71 may be displayed as numbers in part of the third pattern display device 81, or by dividing the four areas into four areas and displaying different patterns (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls. Alternatively, a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the special pattern display device 37 to indicate the number of reserved balls.

Furthermore, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern serving as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may also be performed by moving the pattern horizontally or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern, or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

In the above embodiments, when a variation effect is executed, a high-speed variation is displayed in which all symbols Z1 to Z3 scroll so quickly that they cannot be seen by the player. However, instead of displaying this high-speed variation, all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size that is too small to be seen by the player, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which numerous white dots are displayed randomly.

The present invention may be implemented in pachinko machines and the like of a different type from the above-described embodiment. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which, once a jackpot is hit, the expected jackpot value increases until multiple jackpot states (e.g., two or three times) occur, including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player after a jackpot symbol is displayed, provided that the ball lands in a predetermined area. It may also be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a prize-winning device with a special area such as a V-zone, and in which the special game state is entered provided that the ball lands in that special area. Furthermore, the present invention may also be implemented in various gaming machines other than pachinko machines, such as arepachi, mahjong ball machines, slot machines, and gaming machines that combine pachinko and slot machines.

Slot machines are well-known devices in which, for example, a coin is inserted to determine a winning symbol line, and then a control lever is operated to change the symbols, and the symbols are stopped and finalized by operating a stop button. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine equipped with a display device that displays a variable sequence of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then finalizes the display of the identification information; the variable display of the identification information begins upon operation of a start operation means (e.g., a control lever); the variable display of the identification information stops and finalizes upon operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed; and, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is specific, the slot machine generates a special game that awards the player a predetermined game value." In this case, typical examples of gaming media include coins, medals, etc.

In slot machines, the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out as a result of a bonus (a role) to the total number of gaming media (coins, medals) paid out during a specified period is the role ratio. Therefore, the number of gaming media paid out when each role is achieved may be stored in the ROM of the main control device instead of in a prize ball count table, and a role ratio management chip or a control device that performs the same function as a role ratio management chip may be used to count the number of roles (patterns aligned on an active line) achieved during non-bonus game periods (normal periods), the number of roles achieved during bonus game periods, and the number of roles achieved during AT periods, to manage the role ratio and consecutive role ratio.

Another example of a gaming machine that combines pachinko and slot machines is one that has a display device that displays a fluctuating sequence of multiple symbols and then confirms the symbols, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a predetermined number of balls are inserted based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbols begin to change, for example, due to operation of a control lever. The symbol change is stopped, for example, due to operation of a stop button or after a predetermined period of time has passed. If the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, a special game is triggered, awarding the player a predetermined gaming value, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine were used in place of a slot machine, the amusement hall would be able to treat only balls as gaming value, thereby eliminating problems seen in current amusement halls where pachinko and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities and restrictions on the location of gaming machines, which are caused by the separate handling of medals and balls, which represent gaming value.

Below, various inventive concepts included in the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the above-mentioned embodiments are presented. Note that each of the various inventive concepts presented below may be modified by adding or replacing part or multiple parts of the configuration of another inventive concept with that inventive concept.

<Group A: Switching the right-hand hit notification method at break-even point>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is configured to be able to generate at least a predetermined first gaming state (e.g., a low probability state with a special symbol) and a second gaming state (e.g., a high probability state with a special symbol) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and some are configured to be able to win a winning game in the second gaming state and then continuously generate the second gaming state again (e.g., Patent Document 1 (JP 2017-148264 A)).

It is necessary to improve the entertainment value of gaming machines such as those listed above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group A were made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (for example, a first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) that displays a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that is provided in the gaming area and performs a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (for example, a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (for example, the number of times a rescue condition is met) in a specific game state (for example, a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (for example, a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification effect during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification effect during a relief priority notification period);
A determination means (for example, MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and profit generating means (for example, winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (for example, a big win game) when a specific game condition (for example, the game ball passing through the specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (for example, right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (for example, winning the small win type "time-shortened B (small win A)" or the small win type "time-shortened C (small win A)") is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, the specific judgment result is notified in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined update state, and the notification mode is switched to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing.

According to gaming machine A1, the gaming machine is equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a variable pattern when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations. The gaming machine also includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, and a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode. The game system includes a notification control means for making a notification control operation based on a specific determination result, a determination means for making a predetermined determination based on a game ball entering the start entry area, and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit if a specific game condition is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player when the determination means reaches a specific determination result. The notification control means includes a switching means for, when the determination means reaches a specific determination result, notifying the player of the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the specified update state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. This allows the notification content of the notification control means to vary depending on the timing of the specific determination result when a specific determination result is reached in a specific game state. This creates a gameplay experience where the player can choose whether to generate a specific profit by performing a predetermined game operation or to generate a specific profit by not performing a predetermined game operation and entering a specified update state, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

<Group B: Multiple notifications between each timing>
a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (for example, a first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) that displays a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that is provided in the gaming area and performs a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (for example, a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (for example, the number of times a rescue condition is met) in a specific game state (for example, a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (for example, a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification effect during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification effect during a relief priority notification period),
A determination means (for example, MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and profit generating means (for example, winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (for example, a big win game) when a specific game condition (for example, the game ball passing through the specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (for example, right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (for example, winning the small win type "time-shortened B (small win A)" or the small win type "time-shortened C (small win A)") is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for, when the determination means has reached a specific determination result, notifying the fact that the specific determination result has been reached in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The gaming machine includes:
The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having a third display execution means (e.g., an ambiguous notification command for display) that displays a third display mode that displays the first notification mode and the second notification mode between the specified timing and the specific timing.

According to gaming machine B1, the gaming machine is equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations. The gaming machine also includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a predetermined judgment means for making a predetermined decision based on the gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area. and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, wherein the notification control means, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifies the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, wherein the gaming machine also comprises third display executing means for displaying a third display mode that displays the first notification mode and the second notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. Thus, when the specific judgment result is reached between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, the player can be notified of the specific judgment result in the third notification mode that is different from the first notification mode and the second notification mode. As a result, if the timing of the specific judgment result falls between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a period can be set in which there is not much difference in the expected value of the profit that can be obtained, regardless of whether the game method is to perform a predetermined gaming operation to generate a specific profit, or to not perform a predetermined gaming operation and generate a predetermined profit state by entering a predetermined update state, thereby creating new gameplay features and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<Group C: Notification mode is switched multiple times>
a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (for example, a first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) that displays a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that is provided in the gaming area and performs a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (for example, a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (for example, the number of times a rescue condition is met) in a specific game state (for example, a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (for example, a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification effect during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification effect during a relief priority notification period);
A determination means (for example, MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and profit generating means (for example, winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (for example, a big win game) when a specific game condition (for example, the game ball passing through the specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (for example, right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (for example, winning the small win type "time-shortened B (small win A)" or the small win type "time-shortened C (small win A)") is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for, when the determination means has reached a specific determination result, notifying the fact that the specific determination result has been reached in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The gaming machine includes:
a third display execution means for displaying a third display mode in which the first notification mode and the second notification mode are displayed between the predetermined timing and the specific timing,
The third display mode is
A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the first notification mode and the second notification mode are displayed by switching between them multiple times.

According to gaming machine C1, the gaming machine is equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a variable pattern when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations. The gaming machine also includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, a determination means for executing a predetermined determination based on a gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area, and a specific determination by the determination means. and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a predetermined game condition is fulfilled based on a predetermined game operation by a player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, wherein the notification control means, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifies the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, wherein the gaming machine comprises third display executing means for displaying a third display mode that displays the first notification mode and the second notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, wherein the third display mode has a predetermined mode that switches between the first notification mode and the second notification mode multiple times. Thus, when the timing of the specific judgment result is between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, the first notification mode and the second notification mode are displayed in a switching manner, and the player can be notified of the specific judgment result in the third notification mode. As a result, if the timing of the specific judgment result falls between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a period can be set in which there is not much difference in the expected value of the profit that can be obtained, regardless of whether the game method is to perform a predetermined gaming operation to generate a specific profit, or to not perform a predetermined gaming operation and generate a predetermined profit state by entering a predetermined update state, thereby creating new gameplay features and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<Group D: Displaying fluctuations without generating specific profits>
a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (for example, a first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) that displays a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that is provided in the gaming area and performs a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (for example, a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (for example, the number of times a rescue condition is met) in a specific game state (for example, a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (for example, a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a relief priority notification period),
A determination means (for example, MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and profit generating means (for example, winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (for example, a big win game) when a specific game condition (for example, the game ball passing through the specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (for example, right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (for example, winning the small win type "time-shortened B (small win A)" or the small win type "time-shortened C (small win A)") is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for, when the determination means has reached a specific determination result, notifying the fact that the specific determination result has been reached in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The gaming machine includes:
Gaming machine D1 is characterized in that, in the specific gaming state, when the judgment means reaches the specific judgment result and displays the first notification mode, it is configured to be able to execute a new variable display without generating the specific benefit.

According to gaming machine D1, the gaming machine is equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations. The gaming machine also includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a judgment means for executing a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area. and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, wherein the notification control means, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifies the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and comprises switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a new variable display without generating the specific profit when, in the specific game state, the judgment means determines the specific judgment result and displays the first notification mode. Thus, even when a specific judgment result is reached and the first notification mode is displayed, by not performing the predetermined game operation, a new variable display can be executed without generating the specific profit. As a result, even if a specific judgment result is reached and the first notification mode is displayed, by not performing the specified game operation, the specified update state can be reached by repeatedly executing the variable display without generating a specific benefit, and a specified benefit state can be generated, creating new gameplay and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<Group E: Execute specific effects between each timing>
a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (for example, a first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) that displays a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that is provided in the gaming area and performs a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (for example, a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (for example, the number of times a rescue condition is met) in a specific game state (for example, a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (for example, a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a relief priority notification period),
A determination means (for example, MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and profit generating means (for example, winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (for example, a big win game) when a specific game condition (for example, the game ball passing through the specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (for example, right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (for example, winning the small win type "time-shortened B (small win A)" or the small win type "time-shortened C (small win A)") is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for, when the determination means has reached a specific determination result, notifying the fact that the specific determination result has been reached in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine E1 is characterized by being equipped with a special effect execution means (e.g., a display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307)) that executes a special effect (e.g., a suggestion command during an ambiguous notification period) during the variable display between the predetermined timing and the specific timing.

According to gaming machine E1, the gaming machine is equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations. The gaming machine also includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area. The gaming machine includes a determination means for making a predetermined determination based on the specific information, and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a predetermined game condition is met based on a predetermined game operation by a player when the determination means results in a specific determination result. The notification control means, when the determination means results in a specific determination result, notifies the player of the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined update state, and includes a switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. The gaming machine also includes a special effect executing means for executing a special effect during the variable display between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. This allows the special effect to be executed during the variable display between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. As a result, by checking the special effect, the player can recognize that the variable effect currently being executed is a variable effect between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. When the variable effect currently being executed results in a specific determination result, the player can consider, before the specific determination result is derived, whether to perform a predetermined game operation to generate a specific profit, or to not perform a predetermined game operation and enter a predetermined update state to generate a predetermined profit state.

<Group F: Restriction on switching of first notification mode after switching>
A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (for example, a first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) that displays a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that is provided in the gaming area and performs a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (for example, a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (for example, the number of times a rescue condition is met) in a specific game state (for example, a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (for example, a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a relief priority notification period),
A determination means (for example, MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and profit generating means (for example, winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (for example, a big win game) when a specific game condition (for example, the game ball passing through the specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (for example, right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (for example, winning the small win type "time-shortened B (small win A)" or the small win type "time-shortened C (small win A)") is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for, when the determination means has reached a specific determination result, notifying the fact that the specific determination result has been reached in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The gaming machine includes:
The gaming machine F1 is configured so that after switching to the second notification mode at the specific timing, it will not switch to the first notification mode at least until the specific benefit is generated.

According to gaming machine F1, the gaming machine is equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area where gaming balls can flow down, a display means that variably displays a predetermined symbol when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area that performs multiple variable operations. The gaming machine also includes an update means that updates specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means that generates a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means that issues a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a control means that performs a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area. and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, wherein the notification control means, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifies the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and includes switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, wherein the gaming machine is configured so that after switching to the second notification mode at the specific timing, it will not switch back to the first notification mode at least until the specific profit is generated. As a result, after switching to the second notification mode at the specific timing, it is possible to continue the second notification mode without switching back to the first notification mode until the specific profit is generated. As a result, after switching to the second notification mode at a specific timing, it will not switch back to the first notification mode until a specific benefit is generated. Therefore, when the variable presentation results in a specific judgment result, the player can rest assured that they will not perform the specified game operation, but will instead enter a specified update state, thereby generating a specified benefit state.

<Group G: Lottery for renewals>
A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (for example, a first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) that displays a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that is provided in the gaming area and performs a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (for example, a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (for example, the number of times a rescue condition is met) in a specific game state (for example, a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (for example, a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a relief priority notification period),
A determination means (for example, MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and profit generating means (for example, winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (for example, a big win game) when a specific game condition (for example, the game ball passing through the specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (for example, right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (for example, winning the small win type "time-shortened B (small win A)" or the small win type "time-shortened C (small win A)") is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for, when the determination means has reached a specific determination result, notifying the fact that the specific determination result has been reached in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The gaming machine includes:
The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the number of updates until the specific information reaches the predetermined update state is determined by lottery from among a plurality of update numbers.

According to gaming machine G1, the gaming machine is equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area where gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a variable pattern when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations. The gaming machine also includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a notification control means for issuing a notification when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area. and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is met based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means. The notification control means, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifies the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and includes switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. The gaming machine randomly selects one update count from among multiple update counts until the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state. This allows the specific information to be selected by lottery as one update count from among multiple update counts. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to determine the number of updates until the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Group H: Specific profits are generated only when specific game conditions are met under specific judgment results>
a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (for example, a first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) that displays a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that is provided in the gaming area and performs a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (for example, a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (for example, the number of times a rescue condition is met) in a specific game state (for example, a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (for example, a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a relief priority notification period),
A determination means (for example, MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and profit generating means (for example, winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (for example, a big win game) when a specific game condition (for example, the game ball passing through the specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (for example, right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (for example, winning the small win type "time-shortened B (small win A)" or the small win type "time-shortened C (small win A)") is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for, when the determination means has reached a specific determination result, notifying the fact that the specific determination result has been reached in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The profit generating means is
In the specific gaming state, when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, the gaming machine H1 generates the specific profit only when the specified gaming condition is met based on the specified gaming operation by the player.

According to the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine is equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a variable pattern when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations. The gaming machine also includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a judgment means for executing a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area. and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player when the determination means reaches a specific judgment result. The notification control means, when the determination means reaches a specific judgment result, notifies the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing before the specific information reaches the predetermined update state, and includes switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. The profit generating means, in the specific game state, generates the specific profit only if the specific game condition is met based on the predetermined game operation by the player when the determination means reaches the specific judgment result. This makes it possible to generate the specific profit only if the specific game condition is met based on the predetermined game operation by the player when the specific judgment result is reached. As a result, even when a specific judgment result is reached, the predetermined game condition will not be met unless the player performs the predetermined game operation, thereby avoiding the generation of a specific profit in the specific game state and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine H1,
A gaming machine H2 characterized in that when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, the execution of a specific gaming operation is notified by a third notification mode different from the first notification mode and the second notification mode.

Gaming machine H2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine H1. That is, when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, a third notification mode different from the first and second notification modes is used to notify the player that a specific gaming operation will be performed. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game when a specific judgment result is reached, by which the third notification mode can notify the player that a specific gaming operation different from a predetermined gaming operation will be performed.

Group I: The second notification is more valuable than the first notification.
a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (for example, a first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) that displays a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that is provided in the gaming area and performs a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (for example, a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (for example, the number of times a rescue condition is met) in a specific game state (for example, a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (for example, a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a relief priority notification period),
A determination means (for example, MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and profit generating means (for example, winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (for example, a big win game) when a specific game condition (for example, the game ball passing through the specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (for example, right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (for example, winning the small win type "time-shortened B (small win A)" or the small win type "time-shortened C (small win A)") is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for, when the determination means has reached a specific determination result, notifying the fact that the specific determination result has been reached in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The second notification mode is
A gaming machine I1 characterized in that the notification corresponds to a gaming state in which a higher value can be obtained than in the first notification mode.

According to gaming machine I1, the gaming machine is equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations. The gaming machine also includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area. The game includes a determination means that makes a predetermined determination based on the ball entering the ball, and a profit generating means that generates a specific profit if a predetermined game condition is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player when a specific determination result is reached by the determination means. The notification control means, when a specific determination result is reached by the determination means, notifies the player of the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing before the specific information reaches the predetermined update state, and includes a switching means that switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. The second notification mode is a notification corresponding to a game state that offers higher value than the first notification mode. This results in a higher average number of balls won in a game state that can be entered by playing according to the suggestions of the second notification mode than in a game state that can be entered by playing according to the suggestions of the first notification mode. As a result, even if a specific determination result is reached, if the second notification mode is reached, not performing the predetermined game operation and not generating the specific profit can increase the average number of balls won, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<Group J: Specific information display changes depending on the number of times it is executed>
A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (for example, a first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) that displays a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that is provided in the gaming area and performs a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (for example, a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (for example, the number of times a rescue condition is met) in a specific game state (for example, a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (for example, a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a relief priority notification period),
A determination means (for example, MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and profit generating means (for example, winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (for example, a big win game) when a specific game condition (for example, the game ball passing through the specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (for example, right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (for example, winning the small win type "time-shortened B (small win A)" or the small win type "time-shortened C (small win A)") is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for, when the determination means has reached a specific determination result, notifying the fact that the specific determination result has been reached in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The display means
A specific display means (for example, a main display right-hit instruction 89) is provided to display based on the specific information,
The specific display means is
A gaming machine J1 characterized in that the display mode is changed depending on the number of times the variable display is executed at the start of the specific gaming state.

According to gaming machine J1, the gaming machine is equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for variably displaying a predetermined symbol when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations. The gaming machine also includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a predetermined judgment based on the gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area. The game system includes a determination means for determining whether a specific determination result is reached by the determination means, and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a predetermined game condition is met based on a predetermined game operation by the player when the determination means reaches a specific determination result. The notification control means, when the determination means reaches a specific determination result, notifies the player of the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and includes a switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. The display means includes a specific display means for displaying based on the specific information, which changes the display mode depending on the number of times the variable display is executed at the start of the specific game state. This allows the display mode of the specific information displayed by the specific display means to be changed depending on the number of times the variable display is executed in the specific game state. As a result, when the determination means reaches a specific determination result, the display mode of the specific information displayed by the specific display means allows the player to guess whether the game operation should be executed in accordance with the suggested content of the first notification mode or the second notification mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

<Group K: Both the first and second alerts suggest firing to one side of the play area>
a launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (for example, a first starting port 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) that displays a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that is provided in the gaming area and performs a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (for example, a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined update state (for example, the number of times a rescue condition is met) in a specific game state (for example, a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (for example, a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) that performs a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, a right-hit notification process during a relief priority notification period),
A determination means (for example, MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and profit generating means (for example, winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (for example, a big win game) when a specific game condition (for example, the game ball passing through the specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (for example, right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (for example, winning the small win type "time-shortened B (small win A)" or the small win type "time-shortened C (small win A)") is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for, when the determination means has reached a specific determination result, notifying the fact that the specific determination result has been reached in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that, in either the situation where the first notification mode appears or the situation where the second notification mode appears, the gaming machine K1 suggests to the player that the launching means will launch a gaming ball to one side of the gaming area.

According to gaming machine K1, the gaming machine is equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a variable pattern when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing multiple variable operations. The gaming machine also includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generation means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a predetermined judgment means for making a predetermined decision based on the gaming ball entering the starting ball entry area. and profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, wherein the notification control means, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifies the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and includes switching means for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, wherein the notification control means suggests to the player that a game ball be launched by the launching means to one side of the game area in either the situation where the first notification mode appears or the situation where the second notification mode appears. Thus, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, even if a predetermined game operation is performed based on both the first notification mode and the second notification mode, the predetermined game condition can be established only when the predetermined game operation is performed based on the first notification mode. As a result, while the first and second notification modes suggest a specific gaming operation, a specific benefit can only be generated when the specific gaming operation based on the first notification mode is performed, which has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine A1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1-H2, I1, J1, and K1.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine B1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1-H2, I1, J1, and K1.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine C1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1-H2, I1, J1, and K1.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine D1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, E1, F1, G1, H1-H2, I1, J1, and K1.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine E1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, F1, G1, H1-H2, I1, J1, and K1.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine F1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, G1, H1-H2, I1, J1, and K1.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine G1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, H1-H2, I1, J1, and K1.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, I1, J1, or K1 may be applied to any of the configurations of the gaming machines H1 to H2.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine I1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1-H2, J1, and K1.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine J1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1-H2, I1, and K1.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine K1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1-H2, I1, and J1.

In these cases, applying each configuration can produce even greater benefits.

Gaming machine X1 is any one of gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1-H2, I1, J1, and K1, characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "equipped with variable display means that dynamically displays a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and includes special game state generating means that starts the dynamic display of the identification information upon operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), stops the dynamic display of the identification information upon operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of gaming media include coins, medals, etc.

Gaming machine X2 is any one of gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1-H2, I1, J1, and K1, characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, pachinko gaming machines have a basic configuration equipped with an operating handle, and balls are launched into a predetermined gaming area in response to operation of the operating handle. The necessary condition for the ball to enter (or pass through) an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area is that identification information dynamically displayed on a display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time. Furthermore, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable prize device (big prize port) located at a predetermined position within the gaming area opens in a predetermined manner, allowing balls to enter, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) is awarded according to the number of prizes won.

Gaming machine X3 is any one of gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1-H2, I1, J1, and K1, characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The basic configuration of this combined gaming machine is as follows: "It includes variable display means that dynamically displays a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then definitively displays the identification information; it starts varying the identification information when a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever) is operated; the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped when a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; and it includes special gaming state generating means that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information; it uses balls as gaming media; it requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information; and it is configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
37 Special pattern display device (part of the display means)
64 First starting gate (part of the starting goal area)
65 Variable winning device (part of variable ball entry means)
65g Specific area switch (part of the specified game conditions)
89 Right-hit instruction for main display (part of specific display means)
112a Ball launch unit (part of the launch means)
201 MPU (part of the determination means)
203r Relief counter (part of specific information)
S203 Winning process (part of profit generating means)
S1307 Display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (part of special performance execution means)
S1409 Right-hit notification process when a small win occurs (part of notification control means)

Claims (1)

a launching means capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A determination means for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
a display means for variably displaying a predetermined symbol when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area;
a variable ball entry means provided in the game area, which can switch between a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the game area and a first state in which it is possible for the game ball to enter the game area from the second state when a specific determination result is made by the determination means;
An update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display,
This gaming machine is
In a specific game state in which the specific information can be updated by the update means, when the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state, a specific display is displayed;
When a condition for generating a profit state is met after the specific display, a predetermined profit state is generated.
a notification control means for executing a predetermined notification mode display in a first notification mode display or a second notification mode display different from the first notification mode display,
This gaming machine is
The game ball launched by the launching means enters the variable ball entry means in the first state, and a specific benefit is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined game condition;
In a predetermined gaming state before the occurrence of the predetermined advantageous state, when the specific judgment result is obtained by the judgment means, the execution of a first predetermined gaming operation thereafter may be more disadvantageous to the player than the execution of a second predetermined gaming operation,
The notification control means
When the determination means reaches the specific determination result, notification switching can be executed to switch the notification mode display so that the first notification mode display is executed at a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state, and the second notification mode display is executed at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing and before the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state,
The notification switching is configured to be executable when the game state becomes the predetermined game state,
This gaming machine is
When the specific determination result is obtained in the specific game state, the specific notification mode display is executed in the second notification mode display for the specific determination result, thereby urging the player to execute the second specific game operation,
This gaming machine is
At least, between the predetermined timing and the specific timing when the notification switching is executed, a predetermined game operation notification display that is different from the first notification mode display and the second notification mode display and that notifies the player that a predetermined game operation can be executed based on the player's judgment, rather than a game operation instruction display from the gaming machine to the player, can be executed;
It is configured to be able to set predetermined numerical information in a predetermined memory area based on at least the game ball entering the starting ball entry area,
The period from the initial state of the specific information until the specific timing is reached can be changed based on the predetermined numerical information,
A gaming machine characterized in that the period from the initial state until the specific information reaches the specific timing is longer than the period from the specific timing until the specific information reaches the specified update state.